ADR

ADR

ECE/TRANS/326 (Vol.II)
Economic Commission for Europe
Inland Transport Committee
applicable as from 1 January 2023
Agreement Concerning the International
Carriage of Dangerous Goods by Road
Volume II
UNITED NATIONS
New York and Geneva, 2022Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
© 2022 United Nations
All rights reserved worldwide
Requests to reproduce excerpts or to photocopy should be addressed to the Copyright Clearance
Center at copyright.com.
All other queries on rights and licenses, including subsidiary rights, should be addressed to:
United Nations Publications
405 East 42nd Street, S-09FW001
New York, NY 10017
United States of America
Email: permissions@un.org
website: https://shop.un.org
The designations employed and the presentation of the material in this publication do not imply the
expression of any opinion whatsoever on the part of the Secretariat of the United Nations concerning
the legal status of any country, territory, city or area, or of its authorities, or concerning the
delimitation of its frontiers or boundaries.
United Nations publication issued by the United Nations Economic Commission for Europe.
ECE/TRANS/326
ISBN: 978‐92‐1‐139211-1
eISBN: 978‐92‐1‐001432-8
ISSN: 2411‐8605
eISSN: 2411-8613
Sales No. E.22.VIII.2
Complete set of two volumes
Volumes I and II not to be sold separatelyCopyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
iii
TABLE OF CONTENTS (VOLUME II)
Annex A GENERAL PROVISIONS AND PROVISIONS CONCERNING
DANGEROUS SUBSTANCES AND ARTICLES (cont’d) ………………………………………………. 1
Part 4 Packing and tank provisions ………………………………………………………………………………………….. 3
Chapter 4.1 Use of packagings, including intermediate bulk
containers (IBCs) and large packagings ……………………………………………. 5
4.1.1 General provisions for the packing of dangerous goods
in packagings, including IBCs and large packagings ……………………………… 5
4.1.2 Additional general provisions for the use of IBCs …………………………………. 34
4.1.3 General provisions concerning packing instructions ………………………………. 34
4.1.4 List of packing instructions ………………………………………………………………… 37
4.1.5 Special packing provisions for goods of Class 1 ……………………………………. 150
4.1.6 Special packing provisions for goods of Class 2 and goods
of other classes assigned to packing instruction P200 …………………………….. 151
4.1.7 Special packing provisions for organic peroxides (Class 5.2)
and self-reactive substances of Class 4.1 ………………………………………………. 155
4.1.8 Special packing provisions for infectious substances (Class 6.2) …………….. 156
4.1.9 Special packing provisions for radioactive material ……………………………….. 157
4.1.10 Special provisions for mixed packing ………………………………………………….. 160
Chapter 4.2 Use of portable tanks and
UN multiple-element gas containers (MEGCs) ………………………………….. 167
4.2.1 General provisions for the use of portable tanks for
the carriage of substances of Class 1 and Classes 3 to 9 …………………………. 167
4.2.2 General provisions for the use of portable tanks for
the carriage of non refrigerated liquefied gases and chemicals
under pressure ………………………………………………………………………………….. 171
4.2.3 General provisions for the use of portable tanks for
the carriage of refrigerated liquefied gases ……………………………………………. 172
4.2.4 General provisions for the use of
UN multiple-element gas containers (MEGCs) ……………………………………… 173
4.2.5 Portable tank instructions and special provisions …………………………………… 174
Chapter 4.3 Use of fixed tanks (tank-vehicles), demountable tanks,
tank-containers and tank swap bodies with shells made
of metallic materials, and battery-vehicles and
multiple-element gas containers (MEGCs) ……………………………………….. 189
4.3.1 Scope ………………………………………………………………………………………………. 189
4.3.2 Provisions applicable to all classes ………………………………………………………. 189
4.3.3 Special provisions applicable to Class 2 ………………………………………………. 193
4.3.4 Special provisions applicable to Classes 1 and 3 to 9 …………………………….. 202
4.3.5 Special provisions …………………………………………………………………………….. 209
Chapter 4.4 Use of fibre-reinforced plastics (FRP) tanks,
fixed tanks (tank-vehicles), demountable tanks, tank containers
and tank swap bodies ………………………………………………………………………. 213
4.4.1 General ……………………………………………………………………………………………. 213
4.4.2 Operation …………………………………………………………………………………………. 213
Chapter 4.5 Use of vacuum operated waste tanks ………………………………………………… 215
4.5.1 Use …………………………………………………………………………………………………. 215
4.5.2 Operation …………………………………………………………………………………………. 215
Chapter 4.6 (Reserved) ……………………………………………………………………………………….. 217
– iii -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
iv
Chapter 4.7 Use of mobile explosives manufacturing units (MEMUs) …………………… 219
4.7.1 Use …………………………………………………………………………………………………. 219
4.7.2 Operation …………………………………………………………………………………………. 219
Part 5 Consignment procedures ……………………………………………………………………………………………….. 221
Chapter 5.1 General provisions …………………………………………………………………………… 223
5.1.1 Application and general provisions ……………………………………………………… 223
5.1.2 Use of overpacks ………………………………………………………………………………. 223
5.1.3 Empty uncleaned packagings (including IBCs and large packagings),
tanks, MEMUs, vehicles and containers for carriage in bulk …………………… 223
5.1.4 Mixed packing ………………………………………………………………………………….. 223
5.1.5 General provisions for Class 7 ……………………………………………………………. 224
Chapter 5.2 Marking and labelling ……………………………………………………………………… 231
5.2.1 Marking of packages …………………………………………………………………………. 231
5.2.2 Labelling of packages ………………………………………………………………………… 236
Chapter 5.3 Placarding and marking of containers, bulk containers, MEGCs,
MEMUs, tank-containers, portable tanks and vehicles ……………………… 247
5.3.1 Placarding ………………………………………………………………………………………… 247
5.3.2 Orange-coloured plate marking …………………………………………………………… 250
5.3.3 Elevated temperature substance mark ………………………………………………….. 255
5.3.4 (Reserved) ……………………………………………………………………………………….. 256
5.3.5 (Reserved) ……………………………………………………………………………………….. 256
5.3.6 Environmentally hazardous substance mark …………………………………………. 256
Chapter 5.4 Documentation ………………………………………………………………………………… 257
5.4.0 General ……………………………………………………………………………………………. 257
5.4.1 Dangerous goods transport document and related information ………………… 257
5.4.2 Container/vehicle packing certificate …………………………………………………… 267
5.4.3 Instructions in writing ……………………………………………………………………….. 268
5.4.4 Retention of dangerous goods transport information ……………………………… 273
5.4.5 Example of a multimodal dangerous goods form …………………………………… 273
Chapter 5.5 Special provisions ……………………………………………………………………………. 277
5.5.1 (Deleted) ………………………………………………………………………………………….. 277
5.5.2 Special provisions applicable to fumigated cargo transport units
(UN 3359) ……………………………………………………………………………………….. 277
5.5.3 Special provisions applicable the carriage of dry ice (UN 1845) and to
to packages and vehicles and containers containing substances presenting
a risk of asphyxiation when used for cooling or conditioning purposes
(such as dry ice (UN 1845) or nitrogen, refrigerated liquid (UN 1977)
or argon, refrigerated liquid (UN 1951) or nitrogen) ……………………………… 278
5.5.4 Dangerous goods contained in equipment in use or intended for
use during carriage, attached to or placed in packages, overpacks,
containers or load compartments ………………………………………………………….. 281
– iv -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
v
Part 6 Requirements for the construction and testing of packagings, intermediate
bulk container (IBCs), large packagings, tanks and bulk containers ………………………………… 283
Chapter 6.1 Requirements for the construction and testing of packagings ……………. 285
6.1.1 General ……………………………………………………………………………………………. 285
6.1.2 Code for designating types of packagings …………………………………………….. 286
6.1.3 Marking …………………………………………………………………………………………… 288
6.1.4 Requirements for packagings ……………………………………………………………… 292
6.1.5 Test requirements for packagings ………………………………………………………… 302
6.1.6 Standard liquids for verifying the chemical compatibility
testing of polyethylene packagings, including IBCs,
in accordance with 6.1.5.2.6 and 6.5.6.3.5, respectively …………………………. 310
Chapter 6.2 Requirements for the construction and testing of pressure
receptacles, aerosol dispensers, small receptacles containing
gas (gas cartridges) and fuel cell cartridges containing liquefied
flammable gas …………………………………………………………………………………. 313
6.2.1 General requirements ………………………………………………………………………… 313
6.2.2 Requirements for UN pressure receptacles …………………………………………… 319
6.2.3 General requirements for non-UN pressure receptacles ………………………….. 341
6.2.4 Requirements for non-UN pressure receptacles designed,
constructed and tested according to referenced standards ……………………….. 346
6.2.5 Requirements for non-UN pressure receptacles not designed,
constructed and tested according to referenced standards ……………………….. 355
6.2.6 General requirements for aerosol dispensers, small
receptacles containing gas (gas cartridges) and fuel cell
cartridges containing liquefied flammable gas ………………………………………. 359
Chapter 6.3 Requirements for the construction and testing of
packagings for Class 6.2 infectious substances of
Category A (UN Nos. 2814 and 2900) ……………………………………………….. 363
6.3.1 General ……………………………………………………………………………………………. 363
6.3.2 Requirements for packagings ……………………………………………………………… 363
6.3.3 Code for designating types of packagings …………………………………………….. 363
6.3.4 Marking …………………………………………………………………………………………… 363
6.3.5 Test requirements for packagings ………………………………………………………… 364
Chapter 6.4 Requirements for the construction, testing and
approval of packages for radioactive material and
for the approval of such material ……………………………………………………… 369
6.4.1 (Reserved) ……………………………………………………………………………………….. 369
6.4.2 General requirements ………………………………………………………………………… 369
6.4.3 (Reserved) ……………………………………………………………………………………….. 370
6.4.4 Requirements for excepted packages …………………………………………………… 370
6.4.5 Requirements for Industrial packages ………………………………………………….. 370
6.4.6 Requirements for packages containing uranium hexafluoride …………………. 371
6.4.7 Requirements for Type A packages …………………………………………………….. 372
6.4.8 Requirements for Type B(U) packages ………………………………………………… 373
6.4.9 Requirements for Type B(M) packages ……………………………………………….. 374
6.4.10 Requirements for Type C packages ……………………………………………………… 375
6.4.11 Requirements for packages containing fissile material …………………………… 375
6.4.12 Test procedures and demonstration of compliance ………………………………… 379
6.4.13 Testing the integrity of the containment system and shielding
and evaluating criticality safety …………………………………………………………… 379
6.4.14 Target for drop tests ………………………………………………………………………….. 380
6.4.15 Tests for demonstrating ability to withstand normal
conditions of carriage ………………………………………………………………………… 380
6.4.16 Additional tests for Type A packages
designed for liquids and gases …………………………………………………………….. 381
– v -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
vi
6.4.17 Tests for demonstrating ability to withstand accident
conditions in carriage ………………………………………………………………………… 381
6.4.18 Enhanced water immersion test for Type B(U) and
Type B(M) packages containing more than 105 A2
and Type C packages …………………………………………………………………………. 382
6.4.19 Water leakage test for packages containing fissile material …………………….. 382
6.4.20 Tests for Type C packages …………………………………………………………………. 382
6.4.21 Inspections for packagings designed to contain 0.1 kg or more
of uranium hexafluoride …………………………………………………………………….. 383
6.4.22 Approvals of package designs and materials …………………………………………. 384
6.4.23 Applications and approvals for radioactive material carriage ………………….. 384
Chapter 6.5 Requirements for the construction and testing
of intermediate bulk containers (IBCs) …………………………………………….. 395
6.5.1 General requirements ………………………………………………………………………… 395
6.5.2 Marking …………………………………………………………………………………………… 397
6.5.3 Construction requirements …………………………………………………………………. 400
6.5.4 Testing, certification and inspection …………………………………………………….. 401
6.5.5 Specific requirements for IBCs …………………………………………………………… 402
6.5.6 Test requirements for IBCs ………………………………………………………………… 409
Chapter 6.6 Requirements for the construction and testing of large packagings ……. 419
6.6.1 General ……………………………………………………………………………………………. 419
6.6.2 Code for designating types of large packagings …………………………………….. 419
6.6.3 Marking …………………………………………………………………………………………… 420
6.6.4 Specific requirements for large packagings …………………………………………… 421
6.6.5 Test requirements for large packagings ………………………………………………… 424
Chapter 6.7 Requirements for the design, construction, inspection and testing
of portable tanks and UN multiple-element gas containers (MEGCs) … 429
6.7.1 Application and general requirements ………………………………………………….. 429
6.7.2 Requirements for the design, construction, inspection
and testing of portable tanks intended for the carriage
of substances of Class 1 and Classes 3 to 9 …………………………………………… 429
6.7.3 Requirements for the design, construction, inspection
and testing of portable tanks intended for the carriage
of non-refrigerated liquefied gases ………………………………………………………. 447
6.7.4 Requirements for the design, construction, inspection
and testing of portable tanks intended for the carriage
of refrigerated liquefied gases …………………………………………………………….. 461
6.7.5 Requirements for the design, construction, inspection and
testing of UN multiple-element gas containers (MEGCs)
intended for the carriage of non–refrigerated gases ……………………………….. 473
Chapter 6.8 Requirements for the construction, equipment, type approval,
inspections and tests, and marking of fixed tanks (tank-vehicles),
demountable tanks and tank-containers and tank swap bodies,
with shells made of metallic materials, and battery-vehicles and
multiple element gas containers (MEGCs) ………………………………………… 481
6.8.1 Scope and general provisions ………………………………………………………………. 481
6.8.2 Requirements applicable to all classes …………………………………………………. 483
6.8.3 Special requirements applicable to Class 2 …………………………………………… 506
6.8.4 Special provisions …………………………………………………………………………….. 519
6.8.5 Requirements concerning the materials and construction of
fixed welded tanks, demountable welded tanks, and welded
shells of tank-containers for which a test pressure of not less
than 1 MPa (10 bar) is required, and of fixed welded tanks,
demountable welded tanks and welded shells of
tank-containers intended for the carriage of refrigerated
liquefied gases of Class 2 …………………………………………………………………… 526
– vi -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
vii
Chapter 6.9 Requirements for the design, construction, inspection
and testing of portable tanks with shells made of
fibre-reinforced plastics (FRP) materials …………………………………………… 531
6.9.1 Application and general requirements ………………………………………………….. 531
6.9.2 Requirements for the design, construction, inspection and
testing of FRP portable tanks ………………………………………………………………. 531
Chapter 6.10 Requirements for the construction, equipment, type
approval, inspection and marking of vacuum-operated
waste tanks ……………………………………………………………………………………… 543
6.10.1 General ……………………………………………………………………………………………. 543
6.10.2 Construction …………………………………………………………………………………….. 543
6.10.3 Items of equipment ……………………………………………………………………………. 543
6.10.4 Inspection ………………………………………………………………………………………… 545
Chapter 6.11 Requirements for the design, construction, inspection
and testing of bulk containers ………………………………………………………….. 547
6.11.1 (Reserved) ……………………………………………………………………………………….. 547
6.11.2 Application and general requirements ………………………………………………….. 547
6.11.3 Requirements for the design, construction, inspection
and testing of containers conforming to the CSC used
as BK1 or BK2 bulk containers …………………………………………………………… 547
6.11.4 Requirements for the design, construction and approval of
BK1 or BK2 bulk containers other than containers conforming
to the CSC ……………………………………………………………………………………….. 548
6.11.5 Requirements for the design, construction, inspection
and testing of BK3 flexible bulk containers ………………………………………….. 549
Chapter 6.12 Requirements for the construction, equipment, type approval,
inspections and tests, and marking of tanks, bulk containers
and special compartments for explosives of mobile explosives
manufacturing units (MEMUs) ………………………………………………………… 555
6.12.1 Scope ………………………………………………………………………………………………. 555
6.12.2 General provisions …………………………………………………………………………….. 555
6.12.3 Tanks ………………………………………………………………………………………………. 555
6.12.4 Items of equipment ……………………………………………………………………………. 556
6.12.5 Special compartments for explosives …………………………………………………… 557
Chapter 6.13 Requirements for the design, construction, equipment,
type approval, testing and marking of fibre-reinforced plastics (FRP)
fixed tanks (tank-vehicles) and demountable tanks …………………………… 559
6.13.1 General ……………………………………………………………………………………………. 559
6.13.2 Construction …………………………………………………………………………………….. 559
6.13.3 Items of equipment ……………………………………………………………………………. 562
6.13.4 Type testing and approval ………………………………………………………………….. 562
6.13.5 Inspections ……………………………………………………………………………………….. 564
6.13.6 Marking …………………………………………………………………………………………… 565
– vii -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
viii
Part 7 Provisions concerning the conditions of carriage, loading, unloading and handling ………….. 567
Chapter 7.1 General provisions …………………………………………………………………………… 569
7.1.7 Special provisions applicable to the carriage of self-reactive
substances of Class 4.1, organic peroxides of Class 5.2 and
substances stabilized by temperature control (other than
self-reactive substances and organic peroxides) ……………………………………… 570
Chapter 7.2 Provisions concerning carriage in packages ……………………………………… 573
Chapter 7.3 Provisions concerning carriage in bulk …………………………………………….. 575
7.3.1 General provisions …………………………………………………………………………….. 575
7.3.2 Additional provisions for the carriage in bulk when the provisions
of 7.3.1.1 (a) are applied …………………………………………………………………….. 576
7.3.3 Provisions for the carriage in bulk when the
provisions of 7.3.1.1 (b) are applied …………………………………………………….. 578
Chapter 7.4 Provisions concerning carriage in tanks ……………………………………………. 581
Chapter 7.5 Provisions concerning loading, unloading and handling ……………………. 583
7.5.1 General provisions concerning loading, unloading and handling ……………… 583
7.5.2 Mixed loading prohibition ………………………………………………………………….. 584
7.5.3 (Reserved) ……………………………………………………………………………………….. 586
7.5.4 Precautions with respect to foodstuffs, other articles of
consumption and animal feeds ……………………………………………………………. 586
7.5.5 Limitation of the quantities carried ……………………………………………………… 586
7.5.6 (Reserved) ……………………………………………………………………………………….. 587
7.5.7 Handling and stowage ……………………………………………………………………….. 587
7.5.8 Cleaning after unloading ……………………………………………………………………. 588
7.5.9 Prohibition of smoking ………………………………………………………………………. 588
7.5.10 Precautions against electrostatic charges ………………………………………………. 589
7.5.11 Additional provisions applicable to certain classes or specific goods ……….. 589
Annex B PROVISIONS CONCERNING TRANSPORT EQUIPMENT
AND TRANSPORT OPERATIONS ………………………………………………………………………………. 597
Part 8 Requirements for vehicle crews, equipment, operation and documentation ……………………… 599
Chapter 8.1 General requirements concerning transport units
and equipment on board ………………………………………………………………….. 601
8.1.1 Transport units …………………………………………………………………………………. 601
8.1.2 Documents to be carried on the transport unit ……………………………………….. 601
8.1.3 Placarding and marking ……………………………………………………………………… 601
8.1.4 Fire fighting equipment ……………………………………………………………………… 602
8.1.5 Miscellaneous equipment and equipment for personal protection ……………. 602
Chapter 8.2 Requirements concerning the training of the vehicle crew …………………. 605
8.2.1 Scope and general requirements concerning the training of drivers ………….. 605
8.2.2 Special requirements concerning the training of drivers …………………………. 605
8.2.3 Training of persons, other than the drivers holding a
certificate in accordance with 8.2.1, involved in the
carriage of dangerous goods by road ……………………………………………………. 610
– viii -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
ix
Chapter 8.3 Miscellaneous requirements to be complied with by the vehicle crew …. 611
8.3.1 Passengers ……………………………………………………………………………………….. 611
8.3.2 Use of fire-fighting appliances ……………………………………………………………. 611
8.3.3 Prohibition on opening packages …………………………………………………………. 611
8.3.4 Portable lighting apparatus …………………………………………………………………. 611
8.3.5 Prohibition on smoking ……………………………………………………………………… 611
8.3.6 Running the engine during loading or unloading …………………………………… 611
8.3.7 Use of the parking brakes and wheel chocks …………………………………………. 611
8.3.8 Use of cables ……………………………………………………………………………………. 611
Chapter 8.4 Requirements concerning the supervision of vehicles ………………………… 613
Chapter 8.5 Additional requirements relating to particular classes or substances …. 615
Chapter 8.6 Road tunnel restrictions for the passage of vehicles carrying
Dangerous goods ……………………………………………………………………………… 619
8.6.1 General provisions …………………………………………………………………………….. 619
8.6.2 Road signs or signals governing the passage of vehicles carrying
dangerous goods ……………………………………………………………………………….. 619
8.6.3 Tunnel restriction codes …………………………………………………………………….. 619
8.6.4 Restrictions for the passage of transport units carrying dangerous
goods through tunnels ……………………………………………………………………….. 619
Part 9 Requirements concerning the construction and approval of vehicles ……………………………….. 621
Chapter 9.1 Scope, definitions and requirements for the approval of vehicles ……….. 623
9.1.1 Scope and definitions ………………………………………………………………………… 623
9.1.2 Approval of EX/II, EX/III, FL and AT vehicles and MEMUs …………………. 624
9.1.3 Certificate of approval ……………………………………………………………………….. 625
Chapter 9.2 Requirements concerning the construction of vehicles ………………………. 629
9.2.1 Compliance with the requirements of this Chapter ………………………………… 629
9.2.2 Electrical equipment ………………………………………………………………………….. 633
9.2.3 Braking equipment ……………………………………………………………………………. 636
9.2.4 Prevention of fire risks ………………………………………………………………………. 637
9.2.5 Speed limitation device ……………………………………………………………………… 638
9.2.6 Coupling devices of motor vehicles and trailers ……………………………………. 638
9.2.7 Prevention of other risks caused by fuels ……………………………………………… 638
Chapter 9.3 Additional requirements concerning complete or completed
EX/II or EX/III vehicles intended for the carriage of
explosive substances and articles (Class 1) in packages ……………………… 641
9.3.1 Materials to be used in the construction of vehicle bodies ………………………. 641
9.3.2 Combustion heaters …………………………………………………………………………… 641
9.3.3 EX/II vehicles …………………………………………………………………………………… 641
9.3.4 EX/III vehicles …………………………………………………………………………………. 641
9.3.5 Engine and load compartment …………………………………………………………….. 642
9.3.6 External heat sources and load compartment ………………………………………… 642
9.3.7 Electrical equipment ………………………………………………………………………….. 642
Chapter 9.4 Additional requirements concerning the construction
of the bodies of complete or completed vehicles intended
for the carriage of dangerous goods in packages
(other than EX/II and EX/III vehicles) ……………………………………………… 643
Chapter 9.5 Additional requirements concerning the construction
of the bodies of complete or completed vehicles intended
for the carriage of dangerous solids in bulk ………………………………………. 645
– ix -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
x
Chapter 9.6 Additional requirements concerning complete or completed vehicles
intended for the carriage of temperature controlled substances …………. 647
Chapter 9.7 Additional requirements concerning fixed tanks (tank-vehicles),
battery-vehicles and complete or completed vehicles used for the
carriage of dangerous goods in demountable tanks with a capacity
greater than 1 m³ or in tank-containers, portable tanks or MEGCs
of a capacity greater than 3 m³ (EX/III, FL and AT vehicles) …………….. 649
9.7.1 General provisions …………………………………………………………………………….. 649
9.7.2 Requirements concerning tanks …………………………………………………………… 649
9.7.3 Fastenings ………………………………………………………………………………………… 649
9.7.4 Electrical bonding of FL vehicles ………………………………………………………… 650
9.7.5 Stability of tank-vehicles ……………………………………………………………………. 650
9.7.6 Rear protection of vehicles …………………………………………………………………. 650
9.7.7 Combustion heaters …………………………………………………………………………… 650
9.7.8 Electrical equipment ………………………………………………………………………….. 651
9.7.9 Additional safety requirements concerning FL and EX/III vehicles …………. 651
Chapter 9.8 Additional requirements concerning complete and
Completed MEMUs …………………………………………………………………………. 653
9.8.1 General provisions …………………………………………………………………………….. 653
9.8.2 Requirements concerning tanks and bulk containers ………………………………. 653
9.8.3 Electric bonding of MEMUs ………………………………………………………………. 653
9.8.4 Stability of MEMUs ………………………………………………………………………….. 653
9.8.5 Rear protection of MEMUs ………………………………………………………………… 653
9.8.6 Combustion heaters …………………………………………………………………………… 653
9.8.7 Additional safety requirements …………………………………………………………… 654
9.8.8 Additional security requirements ………………………………………………………… 654
– x -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
ANNEX A
GENERAL PROVISIONS AND
PROVISIONS CONCERNING DANGEROUS
SUBSTANCES AND ARTICLES
(cont’d)Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
PART 4
Packing and tank provisionsCopyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 5 –
CHAPTER 4.1
USE OF PACKAGINGS, INCLUDING INTERMEDIATE
BULK CONTAINERS (IBCs) AND LARGE PACKAGINGS
NOTE: Packagings, including IBCs and large packagings, marked in accordance with 6.1.3, 6.2.2.7, 6.2.2.8, 6.2.2.9,
6.2.2.10, 6.3.4, 6.5.2 or 6.6.3 but which were approved in a country which is not Contracting Party to ADR may
nevertheless be used for carriage under ADR.
4.1.1 General provisions for the packing of dangerous goods in packagings, including IBCs and large
packagings
NOTE: For the packing of goods of Classes 2, 6.2 and 7, the general provisions of this section only
apply as indicated in 4.1.8.2 (Class 6.2, UN Nos. 2814 and 2900), 4.1.9.1.5 (Class 7) and in the
applicable packing instructions of 4.1.4 (P201, P207 and LP200 for Class 2 and P620, P621, P622,
IBC620, LP621 and LP622 for Class 6.2).
4.1.1.1 Dangerous goods shall be packed in good quality packagings, including IBCs and large packagings,
which shall be strong enough to withstand the shocks and loadings normally encountered during
carriage, including trans-shipment between cargo transport units and between cargo transport units and
warehouses as well as any removal from a pallet or overpack for subsequent manual or mechanical
handling. Packagings, including IBCs and large packagings, shall be constructed and closed so as to
prevent any loss of contents when prepared for transport which might be caused under normal
conditions of transport, by vibration, or by changes in temperature, humidity or pressure (resulting from
altitude, for example). Packagings, including IBCs and large packagings, shall be closed in accordance
with the information provided by the manufacturer. No dangerous residue shall adhere to the outside of
packagings, IBCs and large packagings during carriage. These provisions apply, as appropriate, to new,
reused, reconditioned or remanufactured packagings and to new, reused, repaired or remanufactured
IBCs, and to new, reused or remanufactured large packagings.
4.1.1.2 Parts of packagings, including IBCs and large packagings, which are in direct contact with dangerous
goods:
(a) shall not be affected or significantly weakened by those dangerous goods;
(b) shall not cause a dangerous effect e.g. catalysing a reaction or reacting with the dangerous goods;
and
(c) shall not allow permeation of the dangerous goods that could constitute a danger under normal
conditions of carriage.
Where necessary, they shall be provided with a suitable inner coating or treatment.
NOTE: For chemical compatibility of plastics packagings, including IBCs, made from polyethylene
see 4.1.1.21.
4.1.1.3 Design type
4.1.1.3.1 Unless otherwise provided elsewhere in ADR, each packaging, including IBCs and large packagings,
except inner packagings, shall conform to a design type successfully tested in accordance with the
requirements of 6.1.5, 6.3.5, 6.5.6 or 6.6.5, as applicable.
4.1.1.3.2 Packagings, including IBCs and large packagings, may conform to one or more than one successfully
tested design type and may bear more than one mark.
4.1.1.4 When filling packagings, including IBCs and large packagings, with liquids, sufficient ullage (outage)
shall be left to ensure that neither leakage nor permanent distortion of the packaging occurs as a result
of an expansion of the liquid caused by temperatures likely to occur during transport. Unless specific
requirements are prescribed, liquids shall not completely fill a packaging at a temperature of 55 °C.
However, sufficient ullage shall be left in an IBC to ensure that at the mean bulk temperature of 50 °C
it is not filled to more than 98 % of its water capacity. For a filling temperature of 15 °C, the maximum
degree of filling shall be determined as follows, unless otherwise provided, either:
– 5 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 6 –
(a) Boiling point (initial boiling point) of
the substance in °C
< 60  60
< 100
 100
< 200
 200
< 300
 300
Degree of filling as a percentage of the
capacity of the packaging
90 92 94 96 98
or
packaging.theofcapacitytheof%
)t-(501
98
fillingofdegree(b)
f


In this formula  represents the mean coefficient of cubic expansion of the liquid substance
between 15 °C and 50 °C; that is to say, for a maximum rise in temperature of 35 °C,
50
5015
d35
d
:formulathetoaccordingcalculatedis 

 d


d 15 and d50 being the relative densities1 of the liquid at 15 °C and 50 °C and t f the mean
temperature of the liquid at the time of filling.
4.1.1.5 Inner packagings shall be packed in an outer packaging in such a way that, under normal conditions of
carriage, they cannot break, be punctured or leak their contents into the outer packaging. Inner
packagings containing liquids shall be packed with their closures upward and placed within outer
packagings consistent with the orientation marks prescribed in 5.2.1.10. Inner packagings that are liable
to break or be punctured easily, such as those made of glass, porcelain or stoneware or of certain plastics
materials, etc., shall be secured in outer packagings with suitable cushioning material. Any leakage of
the contents shall not substantially impair the protective properties of the cushioning material or of the
outer packaging.
4.1.1.5.1 Where an outer packaging of a combination packaging or a large packaging has been successfully tested
with different types of inner packagings, a variety of such different inner packagings may also be
assembled in this outer packaging or large packaging. In addition, provided an equivalent level of
performance is maintained, the following variations in inner packagings are allowed without further
testing of the package:
(a) Inner packagings of equivalent or smaller size may be used provided:
(i) the inner packagings are of similar design to the tested inner packagings
(e.g. shape – round, rectangular, etc.);
(ii) the material of construction of the inner packagings (glass, plastics, metal, etc.) offers
resistance to impact and stacking forces equal to or greater than that of the originally
tested inner packaging;
(iii) the inner packagings have the same or smaller openings and the closure is of similar
design (e.g. screw cap, friction lid, etc.);
(iv) sufficient additional cushioning material is used to take up void spaces and to prevent
significant movement of the inner packagings; and
(v) inner packagings are oriented within the outer packaging in the same manner as in the
tested package.
(b) A lesser number of the tested inner packagings, or of the alternative types of inner packagings
identified in (a) above, may be used provided sufficient cushioning is added to fill the void
space(s) and to prevent significant movement of the inner packagings.
4.1.1.5.2 Use of supplementary packagings within an outer packaging (e.g. an intermediate packaging or a
receptacle inside a required inner packaging) additional to what is required by the packing instructions
is authorized provided all relevant requirements are met, including those of 4.1.1.3, and, if appropriate,
suitable cushioning is used to prevent movement within the packaging.
1 Relative density (d) is considered to be synonymous with specific gravity (SG) and will be used throughout this
Chapter.
– 6 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 7 –
4.1.1.6 Dangerous goods shall not be packed together in the same outer packaging or in large packagings, with
dangerous or other goods if they react dangerously with each other and cause:
(a) combustion or evolution of considerable heat;
(b) evolution of flammable, asphyxiant, oxidizing or toxic gases;
(c) the formation of corrosive substances; or
(d) the formation of unstable substances.
NOTE: For mixed packing special provisions, see 4.1.10.
4.1.1.7 The closures of packagings containing wetted or diluted substances shall be such that the percentage of
liquid (water, solvent or phlegmatizer) does not fall below the prescribed limits during transport.
4.1.1.7.1 Where two or more closure systems are fitted in series on an IBC, that nearest to the substance being
carried shall be closed first.
4.1.1.8 Where pressure may develop in a package by the emission of gas from the contents (as a result of
temperature increase or other causes), the packaging or IBC may be fitted with a vent provided that the
gas emitted will not cause danger on account of its toxicity, its flammability or the quantity released,
for example.
A venting device shall be fitted if dangerous overpressure may develop due to normal decomposition
of substances. The vent shall be so designed that, when the packaging or IBC is in the attitude in which
it is intended to be carried, leakages of liquid and the penetration of foreign substances are prevented
under normal conditions of carriage.
NOTE: Venting of the package is not permitted for air carriage.
4.1.1.8.1 Liquids may only be filled into inner packagings which have an appropriate resistance to internal
pressure that may be developed under normal conditions of carriage.
4.1.1.9 New, remanufactured or reused packagings, including IBCs and large packagings, or reconditioned
packagings and repaired or routinely maintained IBCs shall be capable of passing the tests prescribed
in 6.1.5, 6.3.5, 6.5.6 or 6.6.5, as applicable. Before being filled and handed over for carriage, every
packaging, including IBCs and large packagings, shall be inspected to ensure that it is free from
corrosion, contamination or other damage and every IBC shall be inspected with regard to the proper
functioning of any service equipment. Any packaging which shows signs of reduced strength as
compared with the approved design type shall no longer be used or shall be so reconditioned, that it is
able to withstand the design type tests. Any IBC which shows signs of reduced strength as compared
with the tested design type shall no longer be used or shall be so repaired or routinely maintained that
it is able to withstand the design type tests.
4.1.1.10 Liquids shall be filled only into packagings, including IBCs, which have an appropriate resistance to
the internal pressure that may develop under normal conditions of carriage. Packagings and IBCs
marked with the hydraulic test pressure prescribed in 6.1.3.1 (d) and 6.5.2.2.1, respectively shall be
filled only with a liquid having a vapour pressure:
(a) such that the total gauge pressure in the packaging or IBC (i.e. the vapour pressure of the filling
substance plus the partial pressure of air or other inert gases, less 100 kPa) at 55 °C, determined
on the basis of a maximum degree of filling in accordance with 4.1.1.4 and a filling temperature
of 15 °C, will not exceed two-thirds of the marked test pressure; or
(b) at 50 °C less than four-sevenths of the sum of the marked test pressure plus 100 kPa; or
(c) at 55 °C less than two-thirds of the sum of the marked test pressure plus 100 kPa.
IBCs intended for the carriage of liquids shall not be used to carry liquids having a vapour pressure of
more than 110 kPa (1.1 bar) at 50 °C or 130 kPa (1.3 bar) at 55 °C.
– 7 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 8 –
Examples of required marked test pressures for packagings, including IBCs,
calculated as in 4.1.1.10 (c)
UN
No
Name Class Packing
group
Vp55
(kPa)
Vp55 × 1.5
(kPa)
(Vp55 × 1.5)
minus 100
(kPa)
Required minimum
test pressure gauge
under 6.1.5.5.4(c)
(kPa)
Minimum test pressure
(gauge) to be marked
on the packaging (kPa)
2056
2247
1593
1155
Tetrahydrofuran
n-Decane
Dichloromethane
Diethyl ether
3
3
6.1
3
II
III
III
I
70
1.4
164
199
105
2.1
246
299
5
-97.9
146
199
100
100
146
199
100
100
150
250
NOTE 1: For pure liquids the vapour pressure at 55 °C (V p55) can often be obtained from scientific
tables.
NOTE 2: The table refers to the use of 4.1.1.10 (c) only, which means that the marked test pressure
shall exceed 1.5 times the vapour pressure at 55 °C less 100 kPa. When, for example, the test pressure
for n-decane is determined according to 6.1.5.5.4 (a), the minimum marked test pressure may be lower.
NOTE 3: For diethyl ether the required minimum test pressure under 6.1.5.5.5 is 250 kPa.
4.1.1.11 Empty packagings, including IBCs and large packagings, that have contained a dangerous substance
are subject to the same requirements as those for a filled packaging, unless adequate measures have
been taken to nullify any hazard.
NOTE: When such packagings are carried for disposal, recycling or recovery of their material, they
may also be carried under UN 3509 provided the conditions of special provision 663 of Chapter 3.3
are met.
4.1.1.12 Every packaging as specified in Chapter 6.1 intended to contain liquids shall successfully undergo a
suitable leakproofness test. This test is part of a quality assurance programme as stipulated in 6.1.1.4
which shows the capability of meeting the appropriate test level indicated in 6.1.5.4.3:
(a) before it is first used for carriage;
(b) after remanufacturing or reconditioning of any packaging, before it is re-used for carriage.
For this test the packaging need not have its closures fitted. The inner receptacle of a composite
packaging may be tested without the outer packaging, provided the test results are not affected. This
test is not required for:
– inner packagings of combination packagings or large packagings;
– inner receptacles of composite packagings (glass, porcelain or stoneware) marked with the
symbol “RID/ADR” in accordance with 6.1.3.1 (a) (ii);
– light gauge metal packagings marked with the symbol “RID/ADR” in accordance
with 6.1.3.1 (a) (ii).
4.1.1.13 Packagings, including IBCs, used for solids which may become liquid at temperatures likely to be
encountered during carriage shall also be capable of containing the substance in the liquid state.
4.1.1.14 Packagings, including IBCs, used for powdery or granular substances shall be sift-proof or shall be
provided with a liner.
4.1.1.15 For plastics drums and jerricans, rigid plastics IBCs and composite IBCs with plastics inner receptacles,
unless otherwise approved by the competent authority, the period of use permitted for the carriage of
dangerous substances shall be five years from the date of manufacture of the receptacles, except where
a shorter period of use is prescribed because of the nature of the substance to be carried.
NOTE: For composite IBCs the period of use refers to the date of manufacture of the inner receptacle.
4.1.1.16 Where ice is used as a coolant it shall not affect the integrity of the packaging.
– 8 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 9 –
4.1.1.17 (Deleted)
4.1.1.18 Explosives, self-reactive substances and organic peroxides
Unless specific provision to the contrary is made in ADR, the packagings, including IBCs and large
packagings, used for goods of Class 1, self-reactive substances of Class 4.1 and organic peroxides of
Class 5.2 shall comply with the provisions for the medium danger group (packing group II).
4.1.1.19 Use of salvage packagings and large salvage packagings
4.1.1.19.1 Damaged, defective, leaking or non-conforming packages, or dangerous goods that have spilled or
leaked may be carried in salvage packagings mentioned in 6.1.5.1.11 and in large salvage packagings
mentioned in 6.6.5.1.9. This does not prevent the use of a larger size packaging, an IBC of type 11A or
a large packaging of appropriate type and performance level and under the conditions of 4.1.1.19.2 and
4.1.1.19.3.
4.1.1.19.2 Appropriate measures shall be taken to prevent excessive movement of the damaged or leaking
packages within a salvage packaging or large salvage packaging. When the salvage packaging or large
salvage packaging contains liquids, sufficient inert absorbent material shall be added to eliminate the
presence of free liquid.
4.1.1.19.3 Appropriate measures shall be taken to ensure that there is no dangerous build-up of pressure.
4.1.1.20 Use of salvage pressure receptacles
4.1.1.20.1 In the case of damaged, defective, leaking or non-conforming pressure receptacles, salvage pressure
receptacles according to 6.2.3.11 may be used.
NOTE: A salvage pressure receptacle may be used as an overpack in accordance with 5.1.2. When
used as an overpack, marks shall be in accordance with 5.1.2.1 instead of 5.2.1.3.
4.1.1.20.2 Pressure receptacles shall be placed in salvage pressure receptacles of suitable size. More than one
pressure receptacle may be placed in the same salvage pressure receptacle only if the contents are known
and do not react dangerously with each other (see 4.1.1.6). In this case the total sum of water capacities
of the placed pressure receptacles shall not exceed 3 000 litres. Appropriate measures shall be taken to
prevent movement of the pressure receptacles within the salvage pressure receptacle e.g. by partitioning,
securing or cushioning.
4.1.1.20.3 A pressure receptacle may only be placed in a salvage pressure receptacle if:
(a) The salvage pressure receptacle is in accordance with 6.2.3.11 and a copy of the approval
certificate is available;
(b) Parts of the salvage pressure receptacle which are, or are likely to be in direct contact with the
dangerous goods will not be affected or weakened by those dangerous goods and will not cause
a dangerous effect (e.g. catalyzing reaction or reacting with the dangerous goods); and
(c) The contents of the contained pressure receptacle(s) are limited in pressure and volume so that
if totally discharged into the salvage pressure receptacle, the pressure in the salvage pressure
receptacle at 65 °C will not exceed the test pressure of the salvage pressure receptacle (for gases,
see packing instruction in P200 (3) in 4.1.4.1). The reduction of the useable water capacity of
the salvage pressure receptacle, e.g. by any contained equipment and cushioning, shall be taken
into account.
4.1.1.20.4 The proper shipping name, the UN number preceded by the letters “UN” and label(s) as required for
packages in Chapter 5.2 applicable to the dangerous goods inside the contained pressure receptacle(s)
shall be applied to the salvage pressure receptacle for carriage.
4.1.1.20.5 Salvage pressure receptacles shall be cleaned, purged and visually inspected internally and externally
after each use. They shall be periodically inspected and tested in accordance with 6.2.3.5 at least once
every five years.
– 9 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 10 –
4.1.1.21 Verification of the chemical compatibility of plastics packagings, including IBCs, by assimilation of
filling substances to standard liquids
4.1.1.21.1 Scope
For polyethylene packagings as specified in 6.1.5.2.6, and for polyethylene IBCs as specified in
6.5.6.3.5, the chemical compatibility with filling substances may be verified by assimilation to standard
liquids following the procedures, as set out in 4.1.1.21.3 to 4.1.1.21.5 and using the list in table
4.1.1.21.6, provided that the particular design types have been tested with these standard liquids in
accordance with 6.1.5 or 6.5.6, taking into account 6.1.6 and that the conditions in 4.1.1.21.2 are met.
When assimilation in accordance with this sub-section is not possible, the chemical compatibility needs
to be verified by design type testing in accordance with 6.1.5.2.5 or by laboratory tests in accordance
with 6.1.5.2.7 for packagings, and in accordance with 6.5.6.3.3 or 6.5.6.3.6 for IBCs, respectively.
NOTE: Irrespective of the provisions of this sub-section, the use of packagings, including IBCs, for a
specific filling substance is subject to the limitations of Table A of Chapter 3.2, and the packing
instructions in Chapter 4.1.
4.1.1.21.2 Conditions
The relative densities of the filling substances shall not exceed that used to determine the height for the
drop test performed successfully according to 6.1.5.3.5 or 6.5.6.9.4 and the mass for the stacking test
performed successfully according to 6.1.5.6 or where necessary according to 6.5.6.6 with the
assimilated standard liquid(s). The vapour pressures of the filling substances at 50 °C or 55 °C shall not
exceed that used to determine the pressure for the internal pressure (hydraulic) test performed
successfully according to 6.1.5.5.4 or 6.5.6.8.4.2 with the assimilated standard liquid(s). In case that
filling substances are assimilated to a combination of standard liquids, the corresponding values of the
filling substances shall not exceed the minimum values derived from the applied drop heights, stacking
masses and internal test pressures.
Example: UN 1736 Benzoyl chloride is assimilated to the combination of standard liquids “Mixture of
hydrocarbons and wetting solution”. It has a vapour pressure of 0.34 kPa at 50 °C and a relative density
of approximately 1.2. Design type tests for plastics drums and jerricans were frequently performed at
minimum required test levels. In practice this means that the stacking test is commonly performed with
stacking loads considering only a relative density of 1.0 for the “Mixture of hydrocarbons” and a
relative density of 1.2 for the “Wetting solution” (see definition of standard liquids in 6.1.6). As a
consequence chemical compatibility of such tested design types would not be verified for benzoyl
chloride by reason of the inadequate test level of the design type with the standard liquid “mixture of
hydrocarbons”. (Due to the fact that in the majority of cases the applied internal hydraulic test pressure
is not less than 100 kPa, the vapour pressure of benzoyl chloride would be covered by such test level
according to 4.1.1.10).
All components of a filling substance, which may be a solution, mixture or preparation, such as wetting
agents in detergents and disinfectants, irrespective whether dangerous or non-dangerous, shall be
included in the assimilation procedure.
4.1.1.21.3 Assimilation procedure
The following steps shall be taken to assign filling substances to listed substances or groups of
substances in table 4.1.1.21.6 (see also scheme in Figure 4.1.1.21.1):
(a) Classify the filling substance in accordance with the procedures and criteria of Part 2
(determination of the UN number and packing group);
(b) If it is included there, go to the UN number in column (1) of table 4.1.1.21.6;
(c) Select the line that corresponds in terms of packing group, concentration, flashpoint, the presence
of non-dangerous components etc. by means of the information given in columns (2a), (2b) and
(4), if there is more than one entry for this UN number.
If this is not possible, the chemical compatibility shall be verified in accordance with 6.1.5.2.5
or 6.1.5.2.7 for packagings, and in accordance with 6.5.6.3.3 or 6.5.6.3.6 for IBCs (however, in
the case of aqueous solutions, see 4.1.1.21.4);
– 10 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 11 –
(d) If the UN number and packing group of the filling substance determined in accordance with (a)
is not included in the assimilation list, the chemical compatibility shall be proved in accordance
with 6.1.5.2.5 or 6.1.5.2.7 for packagings, and in accordance with 6.5.6.3.3 or 6.5.6.3.6 for IBCs;
(e) Apply the “Rule for collective entries”, as described in 4.1.1.21.5, if this is indicated in column
(5) of the selected line;
(f) The chemical compatibility of the filling substance may be regarded as verified taking into
account 4.1.1.21.1 and 4.1.1.21.2, if a standard liquid or a combination of standard liquids is
assimilated in column (5) and the design type is approved for that/those standard liquid(s).
Figure 4.1.1.21.1: Scheme for the assimilation of filling substances to standard liquids
Classification of the substance
according to Part 2 to determine
UN number and packing group
Is
the substance
or group of substances
mentioned by name in
the assimilation list?
Are
the UN number and
packing group
included in the
assimilation list?
Further tests required
(see 4.1.1.21.1)
No
Yes
No
Does
the assimilation list
indicate standard
liquid or combination
of standard liquids?
No
to be continued with “Rule for collective entries”
Chemical
compatibility may be
regarded as verified,
if packaging/IBC
design type has been
tested with indicated
standard liquid(s);
may be also valid for
aqueous solutions
Yes
Yes
– 11 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 12 –
4.1.1.21.4 Aqueous solutions
Aqueous solutions of substances and groups of substances assimilated to specific standard liquid(s) in
accordance with 4.1.1.21.3 may also be assimilated to that (those) standard liquid(s) provided the
following conditions are met:
(a) the aqueous solution can be assigned to the same UN number as the listed substance in
accordance with the criteria of 2.1.3.3, and
(b) the aqueous solution is not specifically mentioned by name otherwise in the assimilation list in
4.1.1.21.6, and
(c) no chemical reaction is taking place between the dangerous substance and the solvent water.
Example: Aqueous solutions of UN 1120 tert-Butanol:
– Pure tert-Butanol itself is assigned to the standard liquid “acetic acid” in the assimilation list.
– Aqueous solutions of tert-Butanol can be classified under the entry UN 1120 BUTANOLS in
accordance with 2.1.3.3, because the aqueous solution of tert-Butanol does not differ from the
entries of the pure substances relating to the class, the packing group(s) and the physical state.
Furthermore, the entry “1120 BUTANOLS” is not explicitly limited to the pure substances, and
aqueous solutions of these substances are not specifically mentioned by name otherwise in Table
A of chapter 3.2 as well as in the assimilation list.
– UN 1120 BUTANOLS do not react with water under normal conditions of carriage.
As a consequence, aqueous solutions of UN 1120 tert-Butanol may be assigned to the standard liquid
“acetic acid”.
4.1.1.21.5 Rule for collective entries
For the assimilation of filling substances for which “Rule for collective entries” is indicated in column
(5), the following steps shall be taken and conditions be met (see also scheme in Figure 4.1.1.21.2):
(a) Perform the assimilation procedure for each dangerous component of the solution, mixture or
preparation in accordance with 4.1.1.21.3 taking into account the conditions in 4.1.1.21.2. In
the case of generic entries, components may be neglected, that are known to have no damaging
effect on high density polyethylene (e.g. solid pigments in UN 1263 PAINT or PAINT
RELATED MATERIAL);
(b) A solution, mixture or preparation cannot be assimilated to a standard liquid, if:
(i) the UN number and packing group of one or more of the dangerous components does
not appear in the assimilation list; or
(ii) “Rule for collective entries” is indicated in column (5) of the assimilation list for one or
more of the components; or
(iii) (with the exception of UN 2059 NITROCELLULOSE SOLUTION, FLAMMABLE)
the classification code of one or more of its dangerous components differs from that of
the solution, mixture or preparation.
(c) If all dangerous components are listed in the assimilation list, and its classification codes are
in accordance with the classification code of the solution, mixture or preparation itself, and all
dangerous components are assimilated to the same standard liquid or combination of standard
liquids in column (5), the chemical compatibility of the solution, mixture or preparation may
be regarded as verified taking into account 4.1.1.21.1 and 4.1.1.21.2;
(d) If all dangerous components are listed in the assimilation list and its classification codes are
in accordance with the classification code of the solution, mixture or preparation itself, but
different standard liquids are indicated in column (5), the chemical compatibility may only be
– 12 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 13 –
regarded as verified for the following combinations of standard liquids taking into account
4.1.1.21.1 and 4.1.1.21.2:
(i) water/nitric acid 55 %; with the exception of inorganic acids with the classification code
C1, which are assigned to standard liquid “water”;
(ii) water/wetting solution;
(iii) water/acetic acid;
(iv) water/mixture of hydrocarbons;
(v) water/n-butyl acetate – n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution;
(e) In the scope of this rule, chemical compatibility is not regarded as verified for other
combinations of standard liquids than those specified in (d) and for all cases specified in (b).
In such cases the chemical compatibility shall be verified by other means (see 4.1.1.21.3 (d)).
Example 1: Mixture of UN 1940 THIOGLYCOLIC ACID (50 %) and UN 2531 METHACRYLIC ACID,
STABILIZED (50 %); classification of the mixture: UN 3265 CORROSIVE LIQUID, ACIDIC,
ORGANIC, N.O.S.
– Both the UN numbers of the components and the UN number of the mixture are included in the
assimilation list;
– Both the components and the mixture have the same classification code: C3;
– UN 1940 THIOGLYCOLIC ACID is assimilated to standard liquid “acetic acid”, and UN 2531
METHACRYLIC ACID, STABILIZED is assimilated to standard liquid “n-butyl acetate/n-butyl
acetate-saturated wetting solution”. According to paragraph (d) this is not an acceptable
combination of standard liquids. The chemical compatibility of the mixture has to be verified by
other means.
Example 2: Mixture of UN 1793 ISOPROPYL ACID PHOSPHATE (50 %) and UN 1803
PHENOLSULPHONIC ACID, LIQUID (50 %); classification of the mixture: UN 3265 CORROSIVE
LIQUID, ACIDIC, ORGANIC, N.O.S.
– Both the UN numbers of the components and the UN number of the mixture are included in the
assimilation list;
– Both the components and the mixture have the same classification code: C3;
– UN 1793 ISOPROPYL ACID PHOSPHATE is assimilated to standard liquid “wetting solution”,
and UN 1803 PHENOLSULPHONIC ACID, LIQUID is assimilated to standard liquid “water”.
According to paragraph (d) this is one of the acceptable combinations of standard liquids. As a
consequence the chemical compatibility may be regarded as verified for this mixture, provided
the packaging design type is approved for the standard liquids “wetting solution” and “water”.
– 13 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 14 –
Figure 4.1.1.21.2: Scheme “Rules for collective entries”
Acceptable combinations of standard liquids:
– water/nitric acid (55 %), with the exception of inorganic acids of classification code C1 which are assigned to
standard liquid “water”;
– water/wetting solution;
– water/acetic acid;
– water/mixture of hydrocarbons;
– water/n-butyl acetate – n-butyl acetate saturated wetting solution
Single entries, collective entries, solutions, mixtures,
preparations with indication
“Rule for collective entries” in assimilation list
Are
entries included in the
assimilation list for all
components of
solution, mixture or
preparation?
Have
all components the same
classification code as the
solution, mixture or
preparation?
Are
all components
assimilated to the same
standard liquid or
combination of
standard liquids?
Further
testing
required
Chemical compatibility may be regarded as proven, if packaging/ IBC design type
has been tested with indicated standard liquid(s)
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes Yes
No No
Are
all components
separately or together,
assimilated to one of
the combinations of
standard liquids
below?
– 14 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 15 –
4.1.1.21.6 Assimilation list
In the following table (assimilation list) dangerous substances are listed in the numerical order of their
UN numbers. As a rule, each line deals with a dangerous substance, single entry or collective entry
covered by a specific UN number. However, several consecutive lines may be used for the same UN
number, if substances belonging to the same UN number have different names (e.g. individual isomers
of a group of substances), different chemical properties, different physical properties and/or different
transport conditions. In such cases the single entry or collective entry within the particular packing
group is the last one of such consecutive lines.
Columns (1) to (4) of table 4.1.1.21.6, following a structure similar to that of Table A of Chapter 3.2,
are used to identify the substance for the purpose of this sub-section. The last column indicates the
standard liquid(s) to which the substance can be assimilated.
Explanatory notes for each column:
Column (1) UN No.
Contains the UN number:
– of the dangerous substance, if the substance has been assigned its own specific UN number, or
– of the collective entry to which dangerous substances not listed by name have been assigned in
accordance with the criteria (“decision trees”) of Part 2.
Column (2a) Proper shipping name or technical name
Contains the name of the substance, the name of the single entry, which may cover various isomers, or
the name of the collective entry itself.
The indicated name can deviate from the applicable proper shipping name.
Column (2b) Description
Contains a descriptive text to clarify the scope of the entry in those cases when the classification, the
transport conditions and/or the chemical compatibility of the substance may be variable.
Column (3a) Class
Contains the number of the class, whose heading covers the dangerous substance. This class number is
assigned in accordance with the procedures and criteria of Part 2.
Column (3b) Classification code
Contains the classification code of the dangerous substance in accordance with the procedures and
criteria of Part 2.
Column (4) Packing group
Contains the packing group number(s) (I, II or III) assigned to the dangerous substance in accordance
with the procedures and criteria of Part 2. Certain substances are not assigned to packing groups.
Column (5) Standard liquid
This column indicates, as definite information, either a standard liquid or a combination of standard
liquids to which the substance can be assimilated, or a reference to the rule for collective entries in
4.1.1.21.5.
– 15 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 16 –
Table 4.1.1.21.6: Assimilation list
UN
No.
Proper shipping name
or
technical name
Description Class Classifi-
cation
Code
Packing
group
Standard liquid
3.1.2 3.1.2 2.2 2.2 2.1.1.3
(1) (2a) (2b) (3a) (3b) (4) (5)
1090 Acetone 3 F1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons
Remark: applicable only, if
it is proved that the
permeability of the substance
out of the package intended
for carriage has an acceptable
level
1093 Acrylonitrile, stabilized 3 FT1 I n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
1104 Amyl acetates pure isomers and isomeric
mixture
3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
1105 Pentanols pure isomers and isomeric
mixture
3 F1 II/III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
1106 Amylamines pure isomers and isomeric
mixture
3 FC II/III Mixture of hydrocarbons
and
wetting solution
1109 Amyl formates pure isomers and isomeric
mixture
3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
1120 Butanols pure isomers and isomeric
mixture
3 F1 II/III Acetic acid
1123 Butyl acetates pure isomers and isomeric
mixture
3 F1 II/III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
1125 n-Butylamine 3 FC II Mixture of hydrocarbons
and
wetting solution
1128 n-Butyl formate 3 F1 II n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
1129 Butyraldehyde 3 F1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons
1133 Adhesives containing flammable liquid 3 F1 I/II/III Rule for collective entries
1139 Coating solution includes surface treatments
or coatings used for
industrial or other purposes
such as vehicle under
coating, drum or barrel
lining
3 F1 I/II/III Rule for collective entries
1145 Cyclohexane 3 F1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons
1146 Cyclopentane 3 F1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons
1153 Ethylene glycol diethyl
ether
3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
and
mixture of hydrocarbons
1154 Diethylamine 3 FC II Mixture of hydrocarbons
and
wetting solution
1158 Diisopropylamine 3 FC II Mixture of hydrocarbons
and
wetting solution
– 16 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 17 –
UN
No.
Proper shipping name
or
technical name
Description Class Classifi-
cation
Code
Packing
group
Standard liquid
3.1.2 3.1.2 2.2 2.2 2.1.1.3
(1) (2a) (2b) (3a) (3b) (4) (5)
1160 Dimethylamine aqueous
solution
3 FC II Mixture of hydrocarbons
and
wetting solution
1165 Dioxane 3 F1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons
1170 Ethanol or Ethanol
solution
aqueous solution 3 F1 II/III Acetic acid
1171 Ethylene glycol monoethyl
ether
3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
and
mixture of hydrocarbons
1172 Ethylene glycol monoethyl
ether acetate
3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
and
mixture of hydrocarbons
1173 Ethyl acetate 3 F1 II n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
1177 2-Ethylbutyl acetate 3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
1178 2-Ethylbutyraldehyde 3 F1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons
1180 Ethyl butyrate 3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
1188 Ethylene glycol
monomethyl ether
3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
and
mixture of hydrocarbons
1189 Ethylene glycol
monomethyl ether acetate
3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
and
mixture of hydrocarbons
1190 Ethyl formate 3 F1 II n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
1191 Octyl aldehydes pure isomers and isomeric
mixture
3 F1 III Mixture of hydrocarbons
1192 Ethyl lactate 3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
1195 Ethyl propionate 3 F1 II n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
1197 Extracts, liquid, for
flavour or aroma
3 F1 II/III Rule for collective entries
1198 Formaldehyde solution,
flammable
aqueous solution, flashpoint
between 23 °C and 60 °C
3 FC III Acetic acid
1202 Diesel fuel complying with
EN 590:2013 + A1:2017 or
with a flashpoint not more
than 100 °C
3 F1 III Mixture of hydrocarbons
– 17 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 18 –
UN
No.
Proper shipping name
or
technical name
Description Class Classifi-
cation
Code
Packing
group
Standard liquid
3.1.2 3.1.2 2.2 2.2 2.1.1.3
(1) (2a) (2b) (3a) (3b) (4) (5)
1202 Gas oil flashpoint not more than
100 °C
3 F1 III Mixture of hydrocarbons
1202 Heating oil, light extra light 3 F1 III Mixture of hydrocarbons
1202 Heating oil, light complying with
EN 590:2013 + AC:2014 or
with a flashpoint not more
than 100 °C
3 F1 III Mixture of hydrocarbons
1203 Motor spirit, or gasoline,
or petrol
3 F1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons
1206 Heptanes pure isomers and isomeric
mixture
3 F1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons
1207 Hexaldehyde n-Hexaldehyde 3 F1 III Mixture of hydrocarbons
1208 Hexanes pure isomers and isomeric
mixture
3 F1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons
1210 Printing ink
or
Printing ink related
material
flammable, including
printing ink thinning or
reducing compound
3 F1 I/II/III Rule for collective entries
1212 Isobutanol 3 F1 III Acetic acid
1213 Isobutyl acetate 3 F1 II n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
1214 Isobutylamine 3 FC II Mixture of hydrocarbons
and
wetting solution
1216 Isooctenes pure isomers and isomeric
mixture
3 F1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons
1219 Isopropanol 3 F1 II Acetic acid
1220 Isopropyl acetate 3 F1 II n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
1221 Isopropylamine 3 FC I Mixture of hydrocarbons
and
wetting solution
1223 Kerosene 3 F1 III Mixture of hydrocarbons
1224 3,3-Dimethyl-2-butanone 3 F1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons
1224 Ketones, liquid, n.o.s. 3 F1 II/III Rule for collective entries
1230 Methanol 3 FT1 II Acetic acid
1231 Methyl acetate 3 F1 II n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
1233 Methylamyl acetate 3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
1235 Methylamine, aqueous
solution
3 FC II Mixture of hydrocarbons
and
wetting solution
1237 Methyl butyrate 3 F1 II n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
1247 Methyl methacrylate
monomer, stabilized
3 F1 II n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
– 18 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 19 –
UN
No.
Proper shipping name
or
technical name
Description Class Classifi-
cation
Code
Packing
group
Standard liquid
3.1.2 3.1.2 2.2 2.2 2.1.1.3
(1) (2a) (2b) (3a) (3b) (4) (5)
1248 Methyl propionate 3 F1 II n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
1262 Octanes pure isomers and isomeric
mixture
3 F1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons
1263 Paint
or
Paint related material
including paint, lacquer,
enamel, stain, shellac,
varnish, polish, liquid filler
and liquid lacquer base
or
including paint thinning and
reducing compound
3 F1 I/II/III Rule for collective entries
1265 Pentanes n-Pentane 3 F1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons
1266 Perfumery products with flammable solvents 3 F1 II/III Rule for collective entries
1268 Coal tar naphtha vapour pressure at 50 °C not
more than 110 kPa
3 F1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons
1268 Petroleum distillates,
n.o.s.
or
Petroleum products, n.o.s.
3 F1 I/II/III Rule for collective entries
1274 n-Propanol 3 F1 II/III Acetic acid
1275 Propionaldehyde 3 F1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons
1276 n-Propyl acetate 3 F1 II n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
1277 Propylamine n-Propylamine 3 FC II Mixture of hydrocarbons
and
wetting solution
1281 Propyl formates pure isomers and isomeric
mixture
3 F1 II n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
1282 Pyridine 3 F1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons
1286 Rosin oil 3 F1 II/III Rule for collective entries
1287 Rubber solution 3 F1 II/III Rule for collective entries
1296 Triethylamine 3 FC II Mixture of hydrocarbons
and
wetting solution
1297 Trimethylamine, aqueous
solution
not more than 50 %
trimethylamine, by mass
3 FC I/II/III Mixture of hydrocarbons
and
wetting solution
1301 Vinyl acetate, stabilized 3 F1 II n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
1306 Wood preservatives,
liquid
3 F1 II/III Rule for collective entries
1547 Aniline 6.1 T1 II Acetic acid
1590 Dichloroanilines, liquid pure isomers and isomeric
mixture
6.1 T1 II Acetic acid
1602 Dye, liquid, toxic, n.o.s.
or
Dye intermediate, liquid,
toxic, n.o.s.
6.1 T1 I/II/III Rule for collective entries
1604 Ethylenediamine 8 CF1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons
and
wetting solution
– 19 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 20 –
UN
No.
Proper shipping name
or
technical name
Description Class Classifi-
cation
Code
Packing
group
Standard liquid
3.1.2 3.1.2 2.2 2.2 2.1.1.3
(1) (2a) (2b) (3a) (3b) (4) (5)
1715 Acetic anhydride 8 CF1 II Acetic acid
1717 Acetyl chloride 3 FC II n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
1718 Butyl acid phosphate 8 C3 III Wetting solution
1719 Hydrogen sulphide aqueous solution 8 C5 III Acetic acid
1719 Caustic alkali liquid, n.o.s. inorganic 8 C5 II/III Rule for collective entries
1730 Antimony pentachloride,
liquid
pure 8 C1 II Water
1736 Benzoyl chloride 8 C3 II Mixture of hydrocarbons
and
wetting solution
1750 Chloroacetic acid solution aqueous solution 6.1 TC1 II Acetic acid
1750 Chloroacetic acid solution mixtures of mono- and
dichloroacetic acid
6.1 TC1 II Acetic acid
1752 Chloroacetyl chloride 6.1 TC1 I n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
1755 Chromic acid solution aqueous solution with not
more than 30 % chromic acid
8 C1 II/III Nitric acid
1760 Cyanamide aqueous solution with not
more than 50 % cyanamide
8 C9 II Water
1760 O,O-Diethyl-
dithiophosphoric acid
8 C9 II n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
1760 O,O-Diisopropyl-
dithiophosphoric acid
8 C9 II n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
1760 O,O-Di-n-propyl-
dithiophosphoric acid
8 C9 II n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
1760 Corrosive liquid, n.o.s. flashpoint more than 60 °C 8 C9 I/II/III Rule for collective entries
1761 Cupriethylenediamine
solution
aqueous solution 8 CT1 II/III Mixture of hydrocarbons
and
wetting solution
1764 Dichloroacetic acid 8 C3 II Acetic acid
1775 Fluoroboric acid aqueous solution with not
more than 50 % fluoroboric
acid
8 C1 II Water
1778 Fluorosilicic acid 8 C1 II Water
1779 Formic acid with more than 85 % acid by
mass
8 C3 II Acetic acid
1783 Hexamethylenediamine
solution
aqueous solution 8 C7 II/III Mixture of hydrocarbons
and
wetting solution
1787 Hydriodic acid aqueous solution 8 C1 II/III Water
1788 Hydrobromic acid aqueous solution 8 C1 II/III Water
1789 Hydrochloric acid not more than 38 % aqueous
solution
8 C1 II/III Water
1790 Hydrofluoric acid with not more than 60 %
hydrogen fluoride
8 CT1 II Water
the permissible period of use:
not more than 2 years
1791 Hypochlorite solution aqueous solution, containing
wetting agents as customary
in trade
8 C9 II/III Nitric acid
and
wetting solution *
– 20 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 21 –
UN
No.
Proper shipping name
or
technical name
Description Class Classifi-
cation
Code
Packing
group
Standard liquid
3.1.2 3.1.2 2.2 2.2 2.1.1.3
(1) (2a) (2b) (3a) (3b) (4) (5)
1791 Hypochlorite solution aqueous solution 8 C9 II/III Nitric acid *
* For UN 1791: Test to be carried out only with vent. If the test is carried out with nitric acid as the standard liquid, an acid-
resistant vent and gasket shall be used. If the test is carried out with hypochlorite solutions themselves, vents and gaskets of the
same design type, resistant to hypochlorite (e.g. of silicone rubber) but not resistant to nitric acid, are also permitted.
1793 Isopropyl acid phosphate 8 C3 III Wetting solution
1802 Perchloric acid aqueous solution with not
more than 50 % acid, by
mass
8 CO1 II Water
1803 Phenolsulphonic acid,
liquid
isomeric mixture 8 C3 II Water
1805 Phosphoric acid, solution 8 C1 III Water
1814 Potassium hydroxide
solution
aqueous solution 8 C5 II/III Water
1824 Sodium hydroxide
solution
aqueous solution 8 C5 II/III Water
1830 Sulphuric acid with more than 51 % pure
acid
8 C1 II Water
1832 Sulphuric acid, spent chemical stable 8 C1 II Water
1833 Sulphurous acid 8 C1 II Water
1835 Tetramethylammonium
hydroxide, solution
aqueous solution, flashpoint
more than 60 °C
8 C7 II Water
1840 Zinc chloride solution aqueous solution 8 C1 III Water
1848 Propionic acid with not less than 10 % and
less than 90 % acid by mass
8 C3 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
1862 Ethyl crotonate 3 F1 II n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
1863 Fuel, aviation, turbine
engine
3 F1 I/II/III Mixture of hydrocarbons
1866 Resin solution flammable 3 F1 I/II/III Rule for collective entries
1902 Diisooctyl acid phosphate 8 C3 III Wetting solution
1906 Sludge acid 8 C1 II Nitric acid
1908 Chlorite solution aqueous solution 8 C9 II/III Acetic acid
1914 Butyl propionates 3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
1915 Cyclohexanone 3 F1 III Mixture of hydrocarbons
1917 Ethyl acrylate, stabilized 3 F1 II n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
1919 Methyl acrylate, stabilized 3 F1 II n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
1920 Nonanes pure isomers and isomeric
mixture, flashpoint between
23 °C and 60 °C
3 F1 III Mixture of hydrocarbons
1935 Cyanide solution, n.o.s. inorganic 6.1 T4 I/II/III Water
1940 Thioglycolic acid 8 C3 II Acetic acid
1986 Alcohols, flammable,
toxic, n.o.s.
3 FT1 I/II/III Rule for collective entries
1987 Cyclohexanol technical pure 3 F1 III Acetic acid
1987 Alcohols, n.o.s. 3 F1 II/III Rule for collective entries
– 21 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 22 –
UN
No.
Proper shipping name
or
technical name
Description Class Classifi-
cation
Code
Packing
group
Standard liquid
3.1.2 3.1.2 2.2 2.2 2.1.1.3
(1) (2a) (2b) (3a) (3b) (4) (5)
1988 Aldehydes, flammable,
toxic, n.o.s.
3 FT1 I/II/III Rule for collective entries
1989 Aldehydes, n.o.s. 3 F1 I/II/III Rule for collective entries
1992 2,6-cis-Dimethyl-
morpholine
3 FT1 III Mixture of hydrocarbons
1992 Flammable liquid, toxic,
n.o.s.
3 FT1 I/II/III Rule for collective entries
1993 Propionic acid vinyl ester 3 F1 II n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
1993 (1-Methoxy-2-propyl)
acetate
3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
1993 Flammable liquid, n.o.s. 3 F1 I/II/III Rule for collective entries
2014 Hydrogen peroxide,
aqueous solution
with not less than 20 % but
not more than 60 %
hydrogen peroxide,
stabilized as necessary
5.1 OC1 II Nitric acid
2022 Cresylic acid liquid mixture containing
cresols, xylenols and methyl
phenols
6.1 TC1 II Acetic acid
2030 Hydrazine aqueous
solution
with not less than 37 % but
not more than 64 %
hydrazine, by mass
8 CT1 II Water
2030 Hydrazine hydrate aqueous solution with 64 %
hydrazine
8 CT1 II Water
2031 Nitric acid other than red fuming, with
not more than 55 % pure acid
8 CO1 II Nitric acid
2045 Isobutyraldehyde 3 F1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons
2050 Diisobutylene isomeric
compounds
3 F1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons
2053 Methyl isobutyl carbinol 3 F1 III Acetic acid
2054 Morpholine 8 CF1 I Mixture of hydrocarbons
2057 Tripropylene 3 F1 II/III Mixture of hydrocarbons
2058 Valeraldehyde pure isomers and isomeric
mixture
3 F1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons
2059 Nitrocellulose solution,
flammable
3 D I/II/III Rule for collective entries:
Deviating from the general
procedure this rule may be
applied to solvents of
classification code F1
2075 Chloral, anhydrous,
stabilized
6.1 T1 II Wetting solution
2076 Cresols, liquid pure isomers and isomeric
mixture
6.1 TC1 II Acetic acid
2078 Toluene diisocyanate liquid 6.1 T1 II n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
2079 Diethylenetriamine 8 C7 II Mixture of hydrocarbons
2209 Formaldehyde solution aqueous solution with 37 %
Form-aldehyde, methanol
content: 8-10 %
8 C9 III Acetic acid
2209 Formaldehyde solution aqueous solution, with not
less than 25 % formaldehyde
8 C9 III Water
– 22 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 23 –
UN
No.
Proper shipping name
or
technical name
Description Class Classifi-
cation
Code
Packing
group
Standard liquid
3.1.2 3.1.2 2.2 2.2 2.1.1.3
(1) (2a) (2b) (3a) (3b) (4) (5)
2218 Acrylic acid, stabilized 8 CF1 II n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
2227 n-Butyl methacrylate,
stabilized
3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
2235 Chlorobenzyl chlorides,
liquid
para-Chlorobenzyl chloride 6.1 T2 III Mixture of hydrocarbons
2241 Cycloheptane 3 F1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons
2242 Cycloheptene 3 F1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons
2243 Cyclohexyl acetate 3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
2244 Cyclopentanol 3 F1 III Acetic acid
2245 Cyclopentanone 3 F1 III Mixture of hydrocarbons
2247 n-Decane 3 F1 III Mixture of hydrocarbons
2248 Di-n-butylamine 8 CF1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons
2258 1,2-Propylenediamine 8 CF1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons
and
wetting solution
2259 Triethylenetetramine 8 C7 II Water
2260 Tripropylamine 3 FC III Mixture of hydrocarbons
and
wetting solution
2263 Dimethylcyclohexanes pure isomers and isomeric
mixture
3 F1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons
2264 N,N-Dimethyl-
cyclohexylamine
8 CF1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons
and
wetting solution
2265 N,N-Dimethyl-formamide 3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
2266 Dimethyl-N-propylamine 3 FC II Mixture of hydrocarbons
and
wetting solution
2269 3,3′-Imino-dipropylamine 8 C7 III Mixture of hydrocarbons
and
wetting solution
2270 Ethylamine, aqueous
solution
with not less than 50 % but
not more than 70 %
ethylamine, flashpoint below
23 °C, corrosive or slightly
corrosive
3 FC II Mixture of hydrocarbons
and
wetting solution
2275 2-Ethylbutanol 3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
2276 2-Ethylhexylamine 3 FC III Mixture of hydrocarbons
and
wetting solution
2277 Ethyl methacrylate,
stabilized
3 F1 II n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
2278 n-Heptene 3 F1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons
– 23 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 24 –
UN
No.
Proper shipping name
or
technical name
Description Class Classifi-
cation
Code
Packing
group
Standard liquid
3.1.2 3.1.2 2.2 2.2 2.1.1.3
(1) (2a) (2b) (3a) (3b) (4) (5)
2282 Hexanols pure isomers and isomeric
mixture
3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
2283 Isobutyl methacrylate,
stabilized
3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
2286 Pentamethylheptane 3 F1 III Mixture of hydrocarbons
2287 Isoheptenes 3 F1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons
2288 Isohexenes 3 F1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons
2289 Isophoronediamine 8 C7 III Mixture of hydrocarbons
and
wetting solution
2293 4-Methoxy-4-methyl-
pentan-2-one
3 F1 III Mixture of hydrocarbons
2296 Methylcyclohexane 3 F1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons
2297 Methylcyclohexanone pure isomers and isomeric
mixture
3 F1 III Mixture of hydrocarbons
2298 Methylcyclopentane 3 F1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons
2302 5-Methylhexan-2-one 3 F1 III Mixture of hydrocarbons
2308 Nitrosylsulphuric acid,
liquid
8 C1 II Water
2309 Octadienes 3 F1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons
2313 Picolines pure isomers and isomeric
mixture
3 F1 III Mixture of hydrocarbons
2317 Sodium cuprocyanide
solution
aqueous solution 6.1 T4 I Water
2320 Tetraethylenepentamine 8 C7 III Mixture of hydrocarbons
and
wetting solution
2324 Triisobutylene mixture of C12-mono-
olefines, flashpoint between
23 °C and 60 °C
3 F1 III Mixture of hydrocarbons
2326 Trimethyl-
cyclohexylamine
8 C7 III Mixture of hydrocarbons
and
wetting solution
2327 Trimethylhexamethylene-
diamines
pure isomers and isomeric
mixture
8 C7 III Mixture of hydrocarbons
and
wetting solution
2330 Undecane 3 F1 III Mixture of hydrocarbons
2336 Allyl formate 3 FT1 I n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
2348 Butyl acrylates, stabilized pure isomers and isomeric
mixture
3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
2357 Cyclohexylamine flashpoint between 23 °C
and 60 °C
8 CF1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons
and
wetting solution
2361 Diisobutylamine 3 FC III Mixture of hydrocarbons
and
wetting solution
2366 Diethyl carbonate 3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
– 24 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 25 –
UN
No.
Proper shipping name
or
technical name
Description Class Classifi-
cation
Code
Packing
group
Standard liquid
3.1.2 3.1.2 2.2 2.2 2.1.1.3
(1) (2a) (2b) (3a) (3b) (4) (5)
2367 alpha-Methyl-
valeraldehyde
3 F1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons
2370 1-Hexene 3 F1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons
2372 1,2-Di-(dimethylamino)-
ethane
3 F1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons
and
wetting solution
2379 1,3-Dimethylbutylamine 3 FC II Mixture of hydrocarbons
and
wetting solution
2383 Dipropylamine 3 FC II Mixture of hydrocarbons
and
wetting solution
2385 Ethyl isobutyrate 3 F1 II n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
2393 Isobutyl formate 3 F1 II n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
2394 Isobutyl propionate flashpoint between 23 °C
and 60 °C
3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
2396 Methacrylaldehyde,
stabilized
3 FT1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons
2400 Methyl isovalerate 3 F1 II n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
2401 Piperidine 8 CF1 I Mixture of hydrocarbons
and
wetting solution
2403 Isopropenyl acetate 3 F1 II n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
2405 Isopropyl butyrate 3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
2406 Isopropyl isobutyrate 3 F1 II n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
2409 Isopropyl propionate 3 F1 II n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
2410 1,2,3,6-Tetrahydro-
pyridine
3 F1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons
2427 Potassium chlorate,
aqueous solution
5.1 O1 II/III Water
2428 Sodium chlorate, aqueous
solution
5.1 O1 II/III Water
2429 Calcium chlorate, aqueous
solution
5.1 O1 II/III Water
2436 Thioacetic acid 3 F1 II Acetic acid
2457 2,3-Dimethylbutane 3 F1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons
2491 Ethanolamine 8 C7 III Wetting solution
2491 Ethanolamine solution aqueous solution 8 C7 III Wetting solution
– 25 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 26 –
UN
No.
Proper shipping name
or
technical name
Description Class Classifi-
cation
Code
Packing
group
Standard liquid
3.1.2 3.1.2 2.2 2.2 2.1.1.3
(1) (2a) (2b) (3a) (3b) (4) (5)
2496 Propionic anhydride 8 C3 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
2524 Ethyl orthoformate 3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
2526 Furfurylamine 3 FC III Mixture of hydrocarbons
and
wetting solution
2527 Isobutyl acrylate,
stabilized
3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
2528 Isobutyl isobutyrate 3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
2529 Isobutyric acid 3 FC III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
2531 Methacrylic acid,
stabilized
8 C3 II n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
2542 Tributylamine 6.1 T1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons
2560 2-Methylpentan-2-ol 3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
2564 Trichloroacetic acid
solution
aqueous solution 8 C3 II/III Acetic acid
2565 Dicyclohexylamine 8 C7 III Mixture of hydrocarbons
and
wetting solution
2571 Ethylsulphuric acid 8 C3 II n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
2571 Alkylsulphuric acids 8 C3 II Rule for collective entries
2580 Aluminium bromide
solution
aqueous solution 8 C1 III Water
2581 Aluminium chloride
solution
aqueous solution 8 C1 III Water
2582 Ferric chloride solution aqueous solution 8 C1 III Water
2584 Methane sulphonic acid with more than 5 % free
sulphuric acid
8 C1 II Water
2584 Alkylsulphonic acids,
liquid
with more than 5 % free
sulphuric acid
8 C1 II n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
2584 Benzene sulphonic acid with more than 5 % free
sulphuric acid
8 C1 II Water
2584 Toluene sulphonic acids with more than 5 % free
sulphuric acid
8 C1 II Water
2584 Arylsulphonic acids,
liquid
with more than 5 % free
sulphuric acid
8 C1 II n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
2586 Methane sulfonic acid with not more than 5 % free
sulphuric acid
8 C1 III Water
2586 Alkylsulphonic acids,
liquid
with not more than 5 % free
sulphuric acid
8 C1 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
– 26 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 27 –
UN
No.
Proper shipping name
or
technical name
Description Class Classifi-
cation
Code
Packing
group
Standard liquid
3.1.2 3.1.2 2.2 2.2 2.1.1.3
(1) (2a) (2b) (3a) (3b) (4) (5)
2586 Benzene sulphonic acid with not more than 5 % free
sulphuric acid
8 C1 III Water
2586 Toluene sulphonic acids with not more than 5 % free
sulphuric acid
8 C1 III Water
2586 Arylsulphonic acids,
liquid
with not more than 5 % free
sulphuric acid
8 C1 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
2610 Triallylamine 3 FC III Mixture of hydrocarbons
and
wetting solution
2614 Methallyl alcohol 3 F1 III Acetic acid
2617 Methylcyclohexanols pure isomers and isomeric
mixture, flashpoint between
23 °C and 60 °C
3 F1 III Acetic acid
2619 Benzyldimethylamine 8 CF1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons
and
wetting solution
2620 Amyl butyrates pure isomers and isomeric
mixture, flashpoint between
23 °C and 60 °C
3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
2622 Glycidaldehyde flashpoint below 23 °C 3 FT1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons
2626 Chloric acid, aqueous
solution
with not more than 10 %
chloric acid
5.1 O1 II Nitric acid
2656 Quinoline flashpoint more than 60 °C 6.1 T1 III Water
2672 Ammonia solution relative density between
0.880 and 0.957 at 15 °C in
water, with more than 10 %
but not more than 35 %
ammonia
8 C5 III Water
2683 Ammonium sulphide
solution
aqueous solution, flashpoint
between 23 °C and 60 °C
8 CFT II Acetic acid
2684 3-Diethylamino-
propylamine
3 FC III Mixture of hydrocarbons
and
wetting solution
2685 N,N-Diethylethylene-
diamine
8 CF1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons
and
wetting solution
2693 Bisulphites, aqueous
solution, n.o.s.
inorganic 8 C1 III Water
2707 Dimethyldioxanes pure isomers and isomeric
mixture
3 F1 II/III Mixture of hydrocarbons
2733 Amines, flammable,
corrosive , n.o.s.
or
Polyamines, flammable,
corrosive, n.o.s.
3 FC I/II/III Mixture of hydrocarbons
and
wetting solution
2734 Di-sec-butylamine 8 CF1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons
2734 Amines, liquid, corrosive,
flammable, n.o.s.
or
Polyamines, liquid,
corrosive, flammable,
n.o.s.
8 CF1 I/II Mixture of hydrocarbons
and
wetting solution
– 27 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 28 –
UN
No.
Proper shipping name
or
technical name
Description Class Classifi-
cation
Code
Packing
group
Standard liquid
3.1.2 3.1.2 2.2 2.2 2.1.1.3
(1) (2a) (2b) (3a) (3b) (4) (5)
2735 Amines, liquid, corrosive,
n.o.s.
or
Polyamines, liquid,
corrosive, n.o.s.
8 C7 I/II/III Mixture of hydrocarbons
and
wetting solution
2739 Butyric anhydride 8 C3 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
2789 Acetic acid, glacial
or
Acetic acid solution
aqueous solution, more than
80 % acid, by mass
8 CF1 II Acetic acid
2790 Acetic acid solution aqueous solution, more than
10 % but not more than 80 %
acid, by mass
8 C3 II/III Acetic acid
2796 Sulphuric acid with not more than 51 %
pure acid
8 C1 II Water
2797 Battery fluid, alkali Potassium/Sodium
hydroxide, aqueous solution
8 C5 II Water
2810 2-Chloro-6-fluorobenzyl
chloride
stabilized 6.1 T1 III Mixture of hydrocarbons
2810 2-Phenylethanol 6.1 T1 III Acetic acid
2810 Ethylene glycol monohexyl
ether
6.1 T1 III Acetic acid
2810 Toxic liquid, organic,
n.o.s.
6.1 T1 I/II/III Rule for collective entries
2815 N-Aminoethylpiperazine 8 CT1 III Mixture of hydrocarbons
and
wetting solution
2818 Ammonium polysulphide
solution
aqueous solution 8 CT1 II/III Acetic acid
2819 Amyl acid phosphate 8 C3 III Wetting solution
2820 Butyric acid n-Butyric acid 8 C3 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
2821 Phenol solution aqueous solution, toxic, non-
alkaline
6.1 T1 II/III Acetic acid
2829 Caproic acid n-Caproic acid 8 C3 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
2837 Bisulphates, aqueous
solution
8 C1 II/III Water
2838 Vinyl butyrate, stabilized 3 F1 II n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
2841 Di-n-amylamine 3 FT1 III Mixture of hydrocarbons
and
wetting solution
2850 Propylene tetramer mixture of C12-
monoolefines, flashpoint
between 23 °C and 60 °C
3 F1 III Mixture of hydrocarbons
2873 Dibutylaminoethanol N,N-Di-n-
butylaminoethanol
6.1 T1 III Acetic acid
2874 Furfuryl alcohol 6.1 T1 III Acetic acid
2920 O,O-Diethyl-
dithiophosphoric acid
flashpoint between 23 °C
and 60 °C
8 CF1 II n-Butylacetate/
n-Butylacetate-saturated
wetting solution
– 28 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 29 –
UN
No.
Proper shipping name
or
technical name
Description Class Classifi-
cation
Code
Packing
group
Standard liquid
3.1.2 3.1.2 2.2 2.2 2.1.1.3
(1) (2a) (2b) (3a) (3b) (4) (5)
2920 O,O-Dimethyl-
dithiophosphoric acid
flashpoint between 23 °C
and 60 °C
8 CF1 II Wetting solution
2920 Hydrogen bromide 33 % solution in glacial
acetic acid
8 CF1 II Wetting solution
2920 Tetramethylammonium
hydroxide
aqueous solution, flashpoint
between 23 °C and 60 °C
8 CF1 II Water
2920 Corrosive liquid,
flammable, n.o.s.
8 CF1 I/II Rule for collective entries
2922 Ammonium sulphide aqueous solution, flashpoint
more than 60 °C
8 CT1 II Water
2922 Cresols aqueous alkaline solution,
mixture of sodium and
potassium cresolate,
8 CT1 II Acetic acid
2922 Phenol aqueous alkaline solution,
mixture of sodium and
potassium phenolate
8 CT1 II Acetic acid
2922 Sodium hydrogen difluoride aqueous solution 8 CT1 III Water
2922 Corrosive liquid, toxic,
n.o.s.
8 CT1 I/II/III Rule for collective entries
2924 Flammable liquid,
corrosive, n.o.s.
slightly corrosive 3 FC I/II/III Rule for collective entries
2927 Toxic liquid, corrosive,
organic, n.o.s.
6.1 TC1 I/II Rule for collective entries
2933 Methyl 2-chloro-
propionate
3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
2934 Isopropyl 2-chloro-
propionate
3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
2935 Ethyl 2-chloropropionate 3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
2936 Thiolactic acid 6.1 T1 II Acetic acid
2941 Fluoroanilines pure isomers and isomeric
mixture
6.1 T1 III Acetic acid
2943 Tetrahydrofurfurylamine 3 F1 III Mixture of hydrocarbons
2945 N-Methylbutylamine 3 FC II Mixture of hydrocarbons
and
wetting solution
2946 2-Amino-5-diethyl-
aminopentane
6.1 T1 III Mixture of hydrocarbons
and
wetting solution
2947 Isopropyl chloroacetate 3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
2984 Hydrogen peroxide,
aqueous solution
with not less than 8 % but
less than 20 % hydrogen
peroxide, stabilized as
necessary
5.1 O1 III Nitric acid
3056 n-Heptaldehyde 3 F1 III Mixture of hydrocarbons
3065 Alcoholic beverages with more than 24 % alcohol
by volume
3 F1 II/III Acetic acid
– 29 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 30 –
UN
No.
Proper shipping name
or
technical name
Description Class Classifi-
cation
Code
Packing
group
Standard liquid
3.1.2 3.1.2 2.2 2.2 2.1.1.3
(1) (2a) (2b) (3a) (3b) (4) (5)
3066 Paint
or
Paint related material
including paint, lacquer,
enamel, stain, shellac,
varnish, polish, liquid filler
and liquid lacquer base
or
including paint thinning and
reducing compound
8 C9 II/III Rule for collective entries
3079 Methacrylonitrile,
stabilized
6.1 TF1 I n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
3082 sec-Alcohol C 6-C17 poly
(3-6) ethoxylate
9 M6 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
and
mixture of hydrocarbons
3082 Alcohol C12-C15 poly (1-3)
ethoxylate
9 M6 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
and
mixture of hydrocarbons
3082 Alcohol C13-C15 poly (1-6)
ethoxylate
9 M6 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
and
mixture of hydrocarbons
3082 Aviation turbine fuel JP-5 flashpoint more than 60 °C 9 M6 III Mixture of hydrocarbons
3082 Aviation turbine fuel JP-7 flashpoint more than 60 °C 9 M6 III Mixture of hydrocarbons
3082 Coal tar flashpoint more than 60 °C 9 M6 III Mixture of hydrocarbons
3082 Coal tar naphtha flashpoint more than 60 °C 9 M6 III Mixture of hydrocarbons
3082 Creosote produced of coal
tar
flashpoint more than 60 °C 9 M6 III Mixture of hydrocarbons
3082 Creosote produced of wood
tar
flashpoint more than 60 °C 9 M6 III Mixture of hydrocarbons
3082 Cresyl diphenyl phosphate 9 M6 III Wetting solution
3082 Decyl acrylate 9 M6 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
and
mixture of hydrocarbons
3082 Diisobutyl phthalate 9 M6 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
and
mixture of hydrocarbons
3082 Di-n-butyl phthalate 9 M6 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
and
mixture of hydrocarbons
3082 Hydrocarbons liquid, flashpoint more than
60 °C, environmentally
hazardous
9 M6 III Rule for collective entries
3082 Isodecyl diphenyl
phosphate
9 M6 III Wetting solution
3082 Methylnaphthalenes isomeric mixture, liquid 9 M6 III Mixture of hydrocarbons
3082 Triaryl phosphates n.o.s. 9 M6 III Wetting solution
– 30 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 31 –
UN
No.
Proper shipping name
or
technical name
Description Class Classifi-
cation
Code
Packing
group
Standard liquid
3.1.2 3.1.2 2.2 2.2 2.1.1.3
(1) (2a) (2b) (3a) (3b) (4) (5)
3082 Tricresyl phosphate with not more than 3 %
ortho-isomer
9 M6 III Wetting solution
3082 Trixylenyl phosphate 9 M6 III Wetting solution
3082 Zinc alkyl dithiophosphate C3-C14 9 M6 III Wetting solution
3082 Zinc aryl dithiophosphate C7-C16 9 M6 III Wetting solution
3082 Environmentally
hazardous substance,
liquid, n.o.s.
9 M6 III Rule for collective entries
3099 Oxidizing liquid, toxic,
n.o.s.
5.1 OT1 I/II/III Rule for collective entries
3101
3103
3105
3107
3109
3111
3113
3115
3117
3119
Organic Peroxide, Type B,
C, D, E or F, liquid
or
Organic Peroxide, Type B,
C, D, E or F, liquid,
temperature controlled
5.2 P1 n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
and
mixture of hydrocarbons
and
nitric acid**
** For UN Nos. 3101, 3103, 3105, 3107, 3109, 3111, 3113, 3115, 3117, 3119 (tert-butyl hydroperoxide with more than 40 %
peroxide content and peroxyacetic acids are excluded): All organic peroxides in a technically pure form or in solution in
solvents which, as far as their compatibility is concerned, are covered by the standard liquid “mixture of hydrocarbons” in this
list. Compatibility of vents and gaskets with organic peroxides may be verified, also independently of the design type test, by
laboratory tests with nitric acid.
3145 Butylphenols liquid, n.o.s. 8 C3 I/II/III Acetic acid
3145 Alkylphenols, liquid, n.o.s. including C2 to C12
homologues
8 C3 I/II/III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
3149 Hydrogen peroxide and
peroxyacetic acid mixture,
stabilized
with UN 2790 acetic acid,
UN 2796 sulphuric acid
and/or UN 1805 phosphoric
acid, water and not more
than 5 % peroxyacetic acid
5.1 OC1 II Wetting solution
and
nitric acid
3210 Chlorates, inorganic,
aqueous solution, n.o.s.
5.1 O1 II/III Water
3211 Perchlorates, inorganic,
aqueous solution, n.o.s.
5.1 O1 II/III Water
3213 Bromates, inorganic,
aqueous solution, n.o.s.
5.1 O1 II/III Water
3214 Permanganates,
inorganic, aqueous
solution, n.o.s.
5.1 O1 II Water
3216 Persulphates, inorganic,
aqueous solution, n.o.s.
5.1 O1 III Wetting solution
3218 Nitrates, inorganic,
aqueous solution, n.o.s.
5.1 O1 II/III Water
3219 Nitrites, inorganic,
aqueous solution, n.o.s.
5.1 O1 II/III Water
3264 Cupric chloride aqueous solution, slightly
corrosive
8 C1 III Water
3264 Hydroxylamine sulphate 25 % aqueous solution 8 C1 III Water
3264 Phosphorous acid aqueous solution 8 C1 III Water
– 31 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 32 –
UN
No.
Proper shipping name
or
technical name
Description Class Classifi-
cation
Code
Packing
group
Standard liquid
3.1.2 3.1.2 2.2 2.2 2.1.1.3
(1) (2a) (2b) (3a) (3b) (4) (5)
3264 Corrosive liquid, acidic,
inorganic, n.o.s.
flashpoint more than 60 °C 8 C1 I/II/III Rule for collective entries;
not applicable to mixtures
having components of UN
Nos.: 1830, 1832, 1906 and
2308
3265 Methoxyacetic acid 8 C3 I n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
3265 Allyl succinic acid
anhydride
8 C3 II n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
3265 Dithioglycolic acid 8 C3 II n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
3265 Butyl phosphate mixture of mono- and di-
butyl phosphate
8 C3 III Wetting solution
3265 Caprylic acid 8 C3 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
3265 Isovaleric acid 8 C3 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
3265 Pelargonic acid 8 C3 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
3265 Pyruvic acid 8 C3 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
3265 Valeric acid 8 C3 III Acetic acid
3265 Corrosive liquid, acidic,
organic, n.o.s.
flashpoint more than 60 °C 8 C3 I/II/III Rule for collective entries
3266 Sodium hydrosulphide aqueous solution 8 C5 II Acetic acid
3266 Sodium sulphide aqueous solution, slightly
corrosive
8 C5 III Acetic acid
3266 Corrosive liquid, basic,
inorganic, n.o.s.
flashpoint more than 60 °C 8 C5 I/II/III Rule for collective entries
3267 2,2′-(Butylimino)-
bisethanol
8 C7 II Mixture of hydrocarbons
and
wetting solution
3267 Corrosive liquid, basic,
organic, n.o.s.
flashpoint more than 60 °C 8 C7 I/II/III Rule for collective entries
3271 Ethylene glycol monobutyl
ether
flashpoint 60 °C 3 F1 III Acetic acid
3271 Ether, n.o.s. 3 F1 II/III Rule for collective entries
3272 Acrylic acid tert-butyl ester 3 F1 II n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
3272 Isobutyl propionate flashpoint below 23 °C 3 F1 II n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
3272 Methyl valerate 3 F1 II n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
3272 Trimethyl ortho-formate 3 F1 II n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
– 32 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 33 –
UN
No.
Proper shipping name
or
technical name
Description Class Classifi-
cation
Code
Packing
group
Standard liquid
3.1.2 3.1.2 2.2 2.2 2.1.1.3
(1) (2a) (2b) (3a) (3b) (4) (5)
3272 Ethyl valerate 3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
3272 Isobutyl isovalerate 3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
3272 n-Amyl propionate 3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
3272 n-Butylbutyrate 3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
3272 Methyl lactate 3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
3272 Ester, n.o.s. 3 F1 II/III Rule for collective entries
3287 Sodium nitrite 40 % aqueous solution 6.1 T4 III Water
3287 Toxic liquid, inorganic,
n.o.s.
6.1 T4 I/II/III Rule for collective entries
3291 Clinical waste,
unspecified, n.o.s.
liquid 6.2 I3 Water
3293 Hydrazine, aqueous
solution
with not more than 37 %
hydrazine, by mass
6.1 T4 III Water
3295 Heptenes n.o.s 3 F1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons
3295 Nonanes flashpoint below 23 °C 3 F1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons
3295 Decanes n.o.s 3 F1 III Mixture of hydrocarbons
3295 1,2,3-Trimethylbenzene 3 F1 III Mixture of hydrocarbons
3295 Hydrocarbons, liquid,
n.o.s.
3 F1 I/II/III Rule for collective entries
3405 Barium chlorate, solution aqueous solution 5.1 OT1 II/III Water
3406 Barium perchlorate,
solution
aqueous solution 5.1 OT1 II/III Water
3408 Lead perchlorate, solution aqueous solution 5.1 OT1 II/III Water
3413 Potassium cyanide,
solution
aqueous solution 6.1 T4 I/II/III Water
3414 Sodium cyanide, solution aqueous solution 6.1 T4 I/II/III Water
3415 Sodium fluoride, solution aqueous solution 6.1 T4 III Water
3422 Potassium fluoride,
solution
aqueous solution 6.1 T4 III Water
– 33 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 34 –
4.1.2 Additional general provisions for the use of IBCs
4.1.2.1 When IBCs are used for the carriage of liquids with a flash-point of 60 °C (closed cup) or lower, or of
powders liable to dust explosion, measures shall be taken to prevent a dangerous electrostatic discharge.
4.1.2.2 Every metal, rigid plastics and composite IBC, shall be inspected and tested, as relevant, in accordance
with 6.5.4.4 or 6.5.4.5:
– before it is put into service;
– thereafter at intervals not exceeding two and a half and five years, as appropriate;
– after the repair or remanufacture, before it is re-used for carriage.
An IBC shall not be filled and offered for carriage after the date of expiry of the last periodic test or
inspection. However, an IBC filled prior to the date of expiry of the last periodic test or inspection may
be carried for a period not to exceed three months beyond the date of expiry of the last periodic test or
inspection. In addition, an IBC may be carried after the date of expiry of the last periodic test or
inspection:
(a) after emptying but before cleaning, for purposes of performing the required test or inspection
prior to refilling; and
(b) unless otherwise approved by the competent authority, for a period not to exceed six months
beyond the date of expiry of the last periodic test or inspection in order to allow the return of
dangerous goods or residues for proper disposal or recycling.
NOTE: For the particulars in the transport document, see 5.4.1.1.11.
4.1.2.3 IBCs of type 31HZ2 shall be filled to at least 80 % of the volume of the outer casing.
4.1.2.4 Except for routine maintenance of metal, rigid plastics, composite and flexible IBCs performed by the
owner of the IBC, whose State and name or authorized symbol is durably marked on the IBC, the party
performing routine maintenance shall durably mark the IBC near the manufacturer’s UN design type
mark to show:
(a) The State in which the routine maintenance was carried out; and
(b) The name or authorized symbol of the party performing the routine maintenance.
4.1.3 General provisions concerning packing instructions
4.1.3.1 Packing instructions applicable to dangerous goods of Classes 1 to 9 are specified in Section 4.1.4. They
are subdivided in three sub-sections depending on the type of packagings to which they apply:
Sub-section 4.1.4.1 for packagings other than IBCs and large packagings; these packing
instructions are designated by an alphanumeric code starting with the letter
“P” or “R” for packagings specific to RID and ADR;
Sub-section 4.1.4.2 for IBCs; these are designated by an alphanumeric code starting with the
letters “IBCs”;
Sub-section 4.1.4.3 for large packagings; these are designated by an alphanumeric code starting
with the letters “LP”.
Generally, packing instructions specify that the general provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.2 or 4.1.3, as
appropriate, are applicable. They may also require compliance with the special provisions of Sections
4.1.5, 4.1.6, 4.1.7, 4.1.8 or 4.1.9 when appropriate. Special packing provisions may also be specified in
the packing instruction for individual substances or articles. They are also designated by an
alphanumeric code comprising the letters:
“PP” for packagings other than IBCs and large packagings, or “RR” for special provisions specific to
RID and ADR;
“B” for IBCs or “BB” for special packing provisions specific to RID and ADR;
– 34 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 35 –
“L” for large packagings or “LL” for special packing provisions specific to RID and ADR.
Unless otherwise specified, each packaging shall conform to the applicable requirements of Part 6.
Generally packing instructions do not provide guidance on compatibility and the user shall not select a
packaging without checking that the substance is compatible with the packaging material selected (e.g.
glass receptacles are unsuitable for most fluorides). Where glass receptacles are permitted in the packing
instructions porcelain, earthenware and stoneware packagings are also allowed.
4.1.3.2 Column (8) of Table A of Chapter 3.2 shows for each article or substance the packing instruction(s)
that shall be used. Columns (9a) and (9b) indicate the special packing provisions and the mixed packing
provisions (see 4.1.10) applicable to specific substances or articles.
4.1.3.3 Each packing instruction shows, where applicable, the acceptable single and combination packagings.
For combination packagings, the acceptable outer packagings, inner packagings and when applicable
the maximum quantity permitted in each inner or outer packaging, are shown. Maximum net mass and
maximum capacity are as defined in 1.2.1. Where packagings which need not meet the requirements of
4.1.1.3 (e.g. crates, pallets) are authorized in a packing instruction or the special provisions listed in
Table A in Chapter 3.2, these packagings are not subject to the mass or volume limits generally
applicable to packagings conforming to the requirements of Chapter 6.1, unless otherwise indicated in
the relevant packing instruction or special provision.
4.1.3.4 The following packagings shall not be used when the substances being carried are liable to become
liquid during carriage:
Packagings
Drums: 1D and 1G
Boxes: 4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1 and 4H2
Bags: 5L1, 5L2, 5L3, 5H1, 5H2, 5H3, 5H4, 5M1 and 5M2
Composite packagings: 6HC, 6HD2, 6HG1, 6HG2, 6HD1, 6PC, 6PD1, 6PD2, 6PG1, 6PG2 and
6PH1
Large packagings
Flexible plastics: 51H (outer packaging)
IBCs
For substances of packing group I: All types of IBC
For substances of packing groups II and III:
Wooden: 11C, 11D and 11F
Fibreboard: 11G
Flexible: 13H1, 13H2, 13H3, 13H4, 13H5, 13L1, 13L2, 13L3, 13L4,
13M1 and 13M2
Composite: 11HZ2 and 21HZ2
For the purposes of this paragraph, substances and mixtures of substances having a melting point equal
to or less than 45 °C shall be treated as solids liable to become liquid during carriage.
4.1.3.5 Where the packing instructions in this Chapter authorize the use of a particular type of packaging (e.g.
4G; 1A2), packagings bearing the same packaging identification code followed by the letters “V”, “U”
or “W” marked in accordance with the requirements of Part 6 (e.g. 4GV, 4GU or 4GW; 1A2V, 1A2U
or 1A2W) may also be used under the same conditions and limitations applicable to the use of that type
of packaging according to the relevant packing instructions. For example, a combination packaging
marked with the packaging code “4GV” may be used whenever a combination packaging marked “4G”
is authorized, provided the requirements in the relevant packing instruction regarding types of inner
packagings and quantity limitations are respected.
– 35 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 36 –
4.1.3.6 Pressure receptacles for liquids and solids
4.1.3.6.1 Unless otherwise indicated in ADR, pressure receptacles conforming to:
(a) the applicable requirements of Chapter 6.2; or
(b) the national or international standards on the design, construction, testing, manufacturing and
inspection, as applied by the country in which the pressure receptacles are manufactured,
provided that the provisions of 4.1.3.6 are met, and that, for metallic cylinders, tubes, pressure
drums, bundles of cylinders and salvage pressure receptacles, the construction is such that the
minimum burst ratio (burst pressure divided by test pressure) is:
(i) 1.50 for refillable pressure receptacles;
(ii) 2.00 for non-refillable pressure receptacles,
are authorized for the carriage of any liquid or solid substance other than explosives, thermally unstable
substances, organic peroxides, self-reactive substances, substances where significant pressure may
develop by evolution of chemical reaction and radioactive material (unless permitted in 4.1.9).
This sub-section is not applicable to the substances mentioned in 4.1.4.1, packing instruction P200,
table 3.
4.1.3.6.2 Every design type of pressure receptacle shall be approved by the competent authority of the country
of manufacture or as indicated in Chapter 6.2.
4.1.3.6.3 Unless otherwise indicated, pressure receptacles having a minimum test pressure of 0.6 MPa shall be
used.
4.1.3.6.4 Unless otherwise indicated, pressure receptacles may be provided with an emergency pressure relief
device designed to avoid bursting in case of overfill or fire accidents.
Pressure receptacle valves shall be designed and constructed in such a way that they are inherently able
to withstand damage without release of the contents or shall be protected from damage which could
cause inadvertent release of the contents of the pressure receptacle, by one of the methods as given in
4.1.6.8 (a) to (e).
4.1.3.6.5 The level of filling shall not exceed 95 % of the capacity of the pressure receptacle at 50 °C. Sufficient
ullage (outage) shall be left to ensure that the pressure receptacle will not be liquid full at a temperature
of 55 °C.
4.1.3.6.6 Unless otherwise indicated pressure receptacles shall be subjected to a periodic inspection and test every
5 years. The periodic inspection shall include an external examination, an internal examination or
alternative method as approved by the competent authority, a pressure test or equivalent effective non-
destructive testing with the agreement of the competent authority including an inspection of all
accessories (e.g. tightness of valves, emergency relief valves or fusible elements). Pressure receptacles
shall not be filled after they become due for periodic inspection and test but may be carried after the
expiry of the time limit. Pressure receptacle repairs shall meet the requirements of 4.1.6.11.
4.1.3.6.7 Prior to filling, the packer shall perform an inspection of the pressure receptacle and ensure that the
pressure receptacle is authorized for the substances to be carried and that the requirements of ADR have
been met. Shut-off valves shall be closed after filling and remain closed during carriage. The consignor
shall verify that the closures and equipment are not leaking.
4.1.3.6.8 Refillable pressure receptacles shall not be filled with a substance different from that previously
contained unless the necessary operations for change of service have been performed.
4.1.3.6.9 Marking of pressure receptacles for liquids and solids according to 4.1.3.6 (not conforming to the
requirements of Chapter 6.2) shall be in accordance with the requirements of the competent authority
of the country of manufacturing.
4.1.3.7 Packagings or IBCs not specifically authorized in the applicable packing instruction shall not be used
for the carriage of a substance or article unless specifically allowed under a temporary derogation agreed
between Contracting Parties in accordance with 1.5.1.
– 36 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 37 –
4.1.3.8 Unpackaged articles other than Class 1 articles
4.1.3.8.1 Where large and robust articles cannot be packaged in accordance with the requirements of Chapters
6.1 or 6.6 and they have to be carried empty, uncleaned and unpackaged, the competent authority of the
country of origin2 may approve such carriage. In doing so the competent authority shall take into
account that:
(a) Large and robust articles shall be strong enough to withstand the shocks and loadings normally
encountered during carriage including trans-shipment between cargo transport units and between
cargo transport units and warehouses, as well as any removal from a pallet for subsequent manual
or mechanical handling;
(b) All closures and openings shall be sealed so that there can be no loss of contents which might be
caused under normal conditions of carriage, by vibration, or by changes in temperature, humidity
or pressure (resulting from altitude, for example). No dangerous residue shall adhere to the
outside of the large and robust articles;
(c) Parts of large and robust articles, which are in direct contact with dangerous goods:
(i) shall not be affected or significantly weakened by those dangerous goods; and
(ii) shall not cause a dangerous effect e.g. catalysing a reaction or reacting with the dangerous
goods;
(d) Large and robust articles containing liquids shall be stowed and secured to ensure that neither
leakage nor permanent distortion of the article occurs during carriage;
(e) They shall be fixed in cradles or crates or other handling devices or to the cargo transport unit in
such a way that they will not become loose during normal conditions of carriage.
4.1.3.8.2 Unpackaged articles approved by the competent authority in accordance with the provisions of 4.1.3.8.1
shall be subject to the consignment procedures of Part 5. In addition the consignor of such articles shall
ensure that a copy of any such approval is attached to the transport document.
NOTE: A large and robust article may include flexible fuel containment systems, military equipment,
machinery or equipment containing dangerous goods above the limited quantities according to 3.4.1.
4.1.4 List of packing instructions
NOTE: Although the following packing instructions use the same numbering system as used in the
IMDG Code and the UN Model Regulations, readers should be aware that some of the details may be
different in the case of ADR.
2 If the country of origin is not a contracting party to ADR, the competent authority of the first country contracting
party to the ADR reached by the consignment.
– 37 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 38 –
4.1.4.1 Packing instructions concerning the use of packagings (except IBCs and large packagings)
P001 PACKING INSTRUCTION (LIQUIDS) P001
The following packagings are authorized provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
Combination packagings: Maximum capacity/Net mass (see 4.1.3.3)
Inner packagings Outer packagings Packing group I Packing group II Packing group III
Drums
Glass 10 l steel (1A1, 1A2) 250 kg 400 kg 400 kg
Plastics 30 l aluminium (1B1, 1B2) 250 kg 400 kg 400 kg
Metal 40 l other metal (1N1, 1N2) 250 kg 400 kg 400 kg
plastics (1H1, 1H2) 250 kg 400 kg 400 kg
plywood (1D) 150 kg 400 kg 400 kg
fibre (1G) 75 kg 400 kg 400 kg
Boxes
steel (4A) 250 kg 400 kg 400 kg
aluminium (4B) 250 kg 400 kg 400 kg
other metal (4N) 250 kg 400 kg 400 kg
natural wood (4C1, 4C2) 150 kg 400 kg 400 kg
plywood (4D) 150 kg 400 kg 400 kg
reconstituted wood (4F) 75 kg 400 kg 400 kg
fibreboard (4G) 75 kg 400 kg 400 kg
expanded plastics (4H1) 60 kg 60 kg 60 kg
solid plastics (4H2) 150 kg 400 kg 400 kg
Jerricans
steel (3A1, 3A2) 120 kg 120 kg 120 kg
aluminium (3B1, 3B2) 120 kg 120 kg 120 kg
plastics (3H1, 3H2) 120 kg 120 kg 120 kg
Single packagings:
Drums
steel, non-removable head (1A1) 250 l 450 l 450 l
steel, removable head (1A2) 250 l a 450 l 450 l
aluminium, non-removable head (1B1) 250 l 450 l 450 l
aluminium, removable head (1B2) 250 l a 450 l 450 l
metal other than steel or aluminium, non-
removable head (1N1)
250 l 450 l 450 l
metal other than steel or aluminium, removable
head (1N2)
250 l a 450 l 450 l
plastics, non-removable head (1H1) 250 l 450 l 450 l
plastics, removable head (1H2) 250 l a 450 l 450 l
Jerricans
steel, non-removable head (3A1) 60 l 60 l 60 l
steel, removable head (3A2) 60 l a 60 l 60 l
aluminium, non-removable head (3B1) 60 l 60 l 60 l
aluminium, removable head (3B2) 60 l a 60 l 60 l
plastics, non-removable head (3H1) 60 l 60 l 60 l
plastics, removable head (3H2) 60 l a 60 l 60 l
a Only substances with a viscosity of more than 2 680 mm²/s are authorized.
(Cont’d on next page)
– 38 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 39 –
P001 PACKING INSTRUCTION (LIQUIDS) (cont’d) P001
Single packagings (cont’d) Maximum capacity/Net mass (see 4.1.3.3)
Composite packagings Packing group I Packing group II Packing group III
plastics receptacle with outer steel, aluminium or
plastics drum (6HA1, 6HB1, 6HH1)
250 l 250 l 250 l
plastics receptacle with outer fibre or plywood
drum (6HG1, 6HD1)
120 l 250 l 250 l
plastics receptacle with outer steel or aluminium
crate or box or plastics receptacle with outer
wooden, plywood, fibreboard or solid plastics
box (6HA2, 6HB2, 6HC, 6HD2, 6HG2 or 6HH2)
60 l 60 l 60 l
glass receptacle with outer steel, aluminium,
fibreboard, plywood, expanded plastics or solid
plastics drum (6PA1, 6PB1, 6PG1, 6PD1, 6PH1
or 6PH2) or with outer steel or aluminium crate
or box or with outer wooden or fibreboard box or
with outer wickerwork hamper (6PA2, 6PB2,
6PC, 6PG2 or 6PD2)
60 l 60 l 60 l
Pressure receptacles, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.3.6 are met.
Additional requirement:
For substances of Class 3, packing group III, which give off small quantities of carbon dioxide or nitrogen, the
packagings shall be vented.
Special packing provisions:
PP1 For UN Nos. 1133, 1210, 1263 and 1866 and for adhesives, printing inks, printing ink related materials, paints,
paint related materials and resin solutions which are assigned to UN 3082, metal or plastics packagings for
substances of packing groups II and III in quantities of 5 litres or less per packaging are not required to meet the
performance tests in Chapter 6.1 when carried:
(a) in palletized loads, a pallet box or unit load device, e.g. individual packagings placed or stacked and
secured by strapping, shrink or stretch-wrapping or other suitable means to a pallet; or
(b) as inner packagings of combination packagings with a maximum net mass of 40 kg.
PP2 For UN 3065, wooden barrels with a maximum capacity of 250 litres and which do not meet the provisions of
Chapter 6.1 may be used.
PP4 For UN No. 1774, packagings shall meet the packing group II performance level.
PP5 For UN No. 1204, packagings shall be so constructed that explosion is not possible by reason of increased internal
pressure. Cylinders, tubes and pressure drums shall not be used for these substances.
PP6 (Deleted)
PP10 For UN No. 1791, packing group II, the packaging shall be vented.
PP31 For UN No. 1131, packagings shall be hermetically sealed.
PP33 For UN No. 1308, packing groups I and II, only combination packagings with a maximum gross mass of 75 kg
allowed.
PP81 For UN No. 1790 with more than 60 % but not more than 85 % hydrogen fluoride and UN No. 2031 with more
than 55 % nitric acid, the permitted use of plastics drums and jerricans as single packagings shall be two years
from their date of manufacture.
PP93 For UN Nos. 3532 and 3534, packagings shall be designed and constructed to permit the release of gas or vapour
to prevent a build-up of pressure that could rupture the packagings in the event of loss of stabilization.
Special packing provisions specific to RID and ADR:
RR2 For UN No. 1261, removable head packagings are not permitted.
– 39 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 40 –
P002 PACKING INSTRUCTION (SOLIDS) P002
The following packagings are authorized provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
Combination packagings: Maximum net mass (see 4.1.3.3)
Inner packagings Outer packagings Packing group I Packing group II Packing group III
Glass 10 kg
Plastics a 50 kg
Metal 50 kg
Paper a, b, c 50 kg
Fibre a, b, c 50 kg
Drums
steel (1A1, 1A2) 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg
aluminium (1B1, 1B2) 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg
other metal (1N1, 1N2) 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg
plastics (1H1, 1H2) 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg
plywood (1D) 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg
fibre (1G) 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg
Boxes
steel (4A) 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg
aluminium (4B) 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg
other metal (4N) 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg
natural wood (4C1) 250 kg 400 kg 400 kg
natural wood with sift
proof walls (4C2)
250 kg 400 kg 400 kg
plywood (4D) 250 kg 400 kg 400 kg
reconstituted wood (4F) 125 kg 400 kg 400 kg
fibreboard (4G) 125 kg 400 kg 400 kg
expanded plastics (4H1) 60 kg 60 kg 60 kg
solid plastics (4H2) 250 kg 400 kg 400 kg
Jerricans
steel (3A1, 3A2) 120 kg 120 kg 120 kg
aluminium (3B1, 3B2) 120 kg 120 kg 120 kg
plastics (3H1, 3H2) 120 kg 120 kg 120 kg
Single packagings:
Drums
steel (1A1 or 1A2 d) 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg
aluminium (1B1 or 1B2 d) 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg
metal, other than steel or aluminium (1N1 or 1N2 d) 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg
plastics (1H1 or 1H2 d) 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg
fibre (1G) e 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg
plywood (1D) e 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg
Jerricans
steel (3A1 or 3A2 d) 120 kg 120 kg 120 kg
aluminium (3B1 or 3B2 d ) 120 kg 120 kg 120 kg
plastics (3H1 or 3H2 d) 120 kg 120 kg 120 kg
a These inner packagings shall be sift-proof.
b These inner packagings shall not be used when the substances being carried may become liquid during carriage
(see 4.1.3.4).
c These inner packagings shall not be used for substances of packing group I.
d These packagings shall not be used for substances of packing group I that may become liquid during carriage
(see 4.1.3.4).
e These packagings shall not be used when substances being carried may become liquid during carriage (see
4.1.3.4).
(Cont’d on next page)
– 40 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 41 –
P002 PACKING INSTRUCTION (SOLIDS) (cont’d) P002
Maximum net mass (see 4.1.3.3)
Single packagings (cont’d): Packing group I Packing group II Packing group III
Boxes
steel (4A) e Not allowed 400 kg 400 kg
aluminium (4B) e Not allowed 400 kg 400 kg
other metal (4N) e Not allowed 400 kg 400 kg
natural wood (4C1) e Not allowed 400 kg 400 kg
plywood (4D) e Not allowed 400 kg 400 kg
reconstituted wood (4F) e Not allowed 400 kg 400 kg
natural wood with sift-proof walls (4C2) e Not allowed 400 kg 400 kg
fibreboard (4G) e Not allowed 400 kg 400 kg
solid plastics (4H2) e Not allowed 400 kg 400 kg
Bags
bags (5H3, 5H4, 5L3, 5M2) e Not allowed 50 kg 50 kg
Composite packagings
plastics receptacle with outer steel, aluminium,
plywood, fibre or plastics drum (6HA1, 6HB1,
6HG1 e , 6HD1 e, or 6HH1)
400 kg 400 kg 400 kg
plastics receptacle with outer steel or aluminium
crate or box, wooden box, plywood box,
fibreboard box or solid plastics box (6HA2,
6HB2, 6HC, 6HD2 e, 6HG2 e or 6HH2)
75 kg 75 kg 75 kg
glass receptacle with outer steel, aluminium
plywood or fibre drum (6PA1, 6PB1, 6PD1 e or
6PG1 e ) or with outer steel or aluminium crate or
box or with outer wooden, or fibreboard box or
with outer wickerwork hamper (6PA2, 6PB2,
6PC, 6PD2 e, or 6PG2e) or with outer expanded
plastics or solid plastics packaging (6PH1 or
6PH2 e)
75 kg 75 kg 75 kg
Pressure receptacles, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.3.6 are met.
e These packagings shall not be used when the substances being carried may become liquid during carriage
(see 4.1.3.4).
(Cont’d on next page)
– 41 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 42 –
P002 PACKING INSTRUCTION (SOLIDS) (cont’d) P002
Special packing provisions:
PP6 (Deleted)
PP7 For UN No. 2000, celluloid may also be transported unpacked on pallets, wrapped in plastic film and secured
by appropriate means, such as steel bands as a full load in closed vehicles or containers. Each pallet shall not
exceed 1 000 kg.
PP8 For UN No. 2002, packagings shall be so constructed that explosion is not possible by reason of increased
internal pressure. Cylinders, tubes and pressure drums shall not be used for these substances.
PP9 For UN Nos. 3175, 3243 and 3244, packagings shall conform to a design type that has passed a leakproofness
test at the packing group II performance level. For UN No. 3175, the leakproofness test is not required when
the liquids are fully absorbed in solid material contained in sealed bags.
PP11 For UN No. 1309, packing group III, and UN No. 1362, 5H1, 5L1 and 5M1 bags are allowed if they are
overpacked in plastic bags and are wrapped in shrink or stretch wrap on pallets.
PP12 For UN Nos. 1361, 2213 and UN No. 3077, 5H1, 5L1 and 5M1 bags are allowed when carried in closed vehicles
or containers.
PP13 For articles classified under UN No. 2870, only combination packagings meeting the packing group I
performance level are authorized.
PP14 For UN Nos. 2211, 2698 and 3314, packagings are not required to meet the performance tests in Chapter 6.1.
PP15 For UN Nos. 1324 and 2623, packagings shall meet the packing group III performance level.
PP20 For UN No. 2217, any sift-proof, tearproof receptacle may be used.
PP30 For UN No. 2471, paper or fibre inner packagings are not permitted.
PP34 For UN No. 2969 (as whole beans), 5H1, 5L1 and 5M1 bags are permitted.
PP37 For UN Nos. 2590 and 2212, 5M1 bags are permitted. All bags of any type shall be carried in closed vehicles
or containers or be placed in closed rigid overpacks.
PP38 For UN No. 1309, packing group II, bags are permitted only in closed vehicles or containers.
PP84 For UN No. 1057, rigid outer packagings meeting the packing group II performance level shall be used. The
packagings shall be designed and constructed and arranged to prevent movement, inadvertent ignition of the
devices or inadvertent release of flammable gas or liquid.
NOTE: For waste lighters collected separately see Chapter 3.3, special provision 654.
PP92 For UN Nos. 3531 and 3533, packagings shall be designed and constructed to permit the release of gas or vapour
to prevent a build-up of pressure that could rupture the packagings in the event of loss of stabilization.
Special packing provision specific to RID and ADR:
RR5 Notwithstanding special packing provision PP84, only the general provisions of 4.1.1.1, 4.1.1.2 and 4.1.1.5 to
4.1.1.7 need be complied with if the gross mass of the package is not more than 10 kg.
NOTE: For waste lighters collected separately see Chapter 3.3, special provision 654.
– 42 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 43 –
P003 PACKING INSTRUCTION P003
Dangerous goods shall be placed in suitable outer packagings. The packagings shall meet the provisions of 4.1.1.1,
4.1.1.2, 4.1.1.4, 4.1.1.8 and 4.1.3 and be so designed that they meet the construction requirements of 6.1.4. Outer
packagings constructed of suitable material, and of adequate strength and design in relation to the packaging capacity
and its intended use, shall be used. Where this packing instruction is used for the transport of articles or inner packagings
of combination packagings, the packaging shall be designed and constructed to prevent inadvertent discharge of articles
during normal conditions of carriage.
Special packing provisions:
PP16 For UN No. 2800, batteries shall be protected from short circuits and shall be securely packed in strong outer
packagings.
NOTE 1: Non-spillable batteries which are an integral part of, and necessary for, the operation of mechanical
or electronic equipment shall be securely fastened in the battery holder on the equipment and protected in such
a manner as to prevent damage and short circuits.
NOTE 2: For used batteries (UN 2800), see P801.
PP17 For UN No. 2037, packages shall not exceed 55 kg net mass for fibreboard packagings or 125 kg net mass for
other packagings.
PP19 For UN Nos. 1364 and 1365, carriage as bales is authorized.
PP20 For UN Nos. 1363, 1386, 1408 and 2793 any sift-proof, tearproof receptacle may be used.
PP32 UN Nos. 2857 and 3358 and robust articles consigned under UN No. 3164 may be carried unpackaged, in crates
or in appropriate overpacks.
NOTE: The packagings authorized may exceed a net mass of 400 kg (see 4.1.3.3).
PP87 (Deleted)
PP88 (Deleted)
PP90 For UN No. 3506, sealed inner liners or bags of strong leakproof and puncture resistant material impervious to
mercury which will prevent escape of the substance from the package irrespective of the position or the
orientation of the package shall be used.
PP91 For UN 1044, large fire extinguishers may also be carried unpackaged provided that the requirements of 4.1.3.8.1
(a) to (e) are met, the valves are protected by one of the methods in accordance with 4.1.6.8 (a) to (d) and other
equipment mounted on the fire extinguisher is protected to prevent accidental activation. For the purpose of this
special packing provision, “large fire extinguishers” means fire extinguishers as described in indents (c) to (e)
of special provision 225 of Chapter 3.3.
PP96 For UN No. 2037 waste gas cartridges carried in accordance with special provision 327 of Chapter 3.3, the
packagings shall be adequately ventilated to prevent the creation of dangerous atmospheres and the build-up of
pressure.
Special packing provisions specific to RID and ADR:
RR6 For UN No. 2037 in the case of carriage by full load, metal articles may also be packed as follows: the articles
shall be grouped together in units on trays and held in position with an appropriate plastics cover; these units
shall be stacked and suitably secured on pallets.
RR9 For UN 3509, packagings are not required to meet the requirements of 4.1.1.3.
Packagings meeting the requirements of 6.1.4, made leak tight or fitted with a leak tight and puncture resistant
sealed liner or bag, shall be used.
When the only residues contained are solids which are not liable to become liquid at temperatures likely to be
encountered during carriage, flexible packagings may be used.
When liquid residues are present, rigid packagings that provide a means of retention (e.g. absorbent material)
shall be used.
Before being filled and handed over for carriage, every packaging shall be inspected to ensure that it is free from
corrosion, contamination or other damage. Any packaging showing signs of reduced strength shall no longer be
used (minor dents and scratches are not considered as reducing the strength of the packaging).
Packagings intended for the carriage of packagings, discarded, empty, uncleaned with residues of Class 5.1 shall
be so constructed or adapted that the goods cannot come into contact with wood or any other combustible
material.
– 43 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 44 –
P004 PACKING INSTRUCTION P004
This instruction applies to UN Nos. 3473, 3476, 3477, 3478 and 3479.
The following packagings are authorized:
(1) For fuel cell cartridges, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1.1, 4.1.1.2, 4.1.1.3, 4.1.1.6 and 4.1.3 are met:
Drums (1A2, 1B2, 1N2, 1H2, 1D, 1G);
Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2);
Jerricans (3A2, 3B2, 3H2).
Packagings shall conform to the packing group II performance level.
(2) For fuel cell cartridges packed with equipment: strong outer packagings which meet the general provisions of
4.1.1.1, 4.1.1.2, 4.1.1.6 and 4.1.3.
When fuel cell cartridges are packed with equipment, they shall be packed in inner packagings or placed in the
outer packaging with cushioning material or divider(s) so that the fuel cell cartridges are protected against
damage that may be caused by the movement or placement of the contents within the outer packaging.
The equipment shall be secured against movement within the outer packaging.
For the purpose of this packing instruction, “equipment” means apparatus requiring the fuel cell cartridges with
which it is packed for its operation.
(3) For fuel cell cartridges contained in equipment: strong outer packagings which meet the general provisions of
4.1.1.1, 4.1.1.2, 4.1.1.6 and 4.1.3.
Large robust equipment (see 4.1.3.8) containing fuel cell cartridges may be carried unpackaged. For fuel cell
cartridges contained in equipment, the entire system shall be protected against short circuit and inadvertent
operation.
NOTE: The packagings authorized in (2) and (3) may exceed a net mass of 400 kg (see 4.1.3.3).
P005 PACKING INSTRUCTION P005
This instruction applies to UN Nos. 3528, 3529 and 3530.
If the engine or machinery is constructed and designed so that the means of containment containing the dangerous
goods affords adequate protection, an outer packaging is not required.
Dangerous goods in engines or machinery shall otherwise be packed in outer packagings constructed of suitable
material, and of adequate strength and design in relation to the packaging capacity and its intended use, and meeting
the applicable requirements of 4.1.1.1, or they shall be fixed in such a way that they will not become loose during
normal conditions of carriage, e.g. in cradles or crates or other handling devices.
NOTE: The packagings authorized may exceed a net mass of 400 kg (see 4.1.3.3).
In addition, the manner in which means of containment are contained within the engine or machinery, shall be such
that under normal conditions of carriage, damage to the means of containment containing the dangerous goods is
prevented; and in the event of damage to the means of containment containing liquid dangerous goods, no leakage of
the dangerous goods from the engine or machinery is possible (a leakproof liner may be used to satisfy this
requirement).
Means of containment containing dangerous goods shall be so installed, secured or cushioned as to prevent their
breakage or leakage and so as to control their movement within the engine or machinery during normal conditions of
carriage. Cushioning material shall not react dangerously with the content of the means of containment. Any leakage
of the contents shall not substantially impair the protective properties of the cushioning material.
Additional requirement:
Other dangerous goods (e.g. batteries, fire extinguishers, compressed gas accumulators or safety devices) required for
the functioning or safe operation of the engine or machinery shall be securely mounted in the engine or machine.
– 44 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 45 –
P006 PACKING INSTRUCTION P006
This instruction applies to UN Nos. 3537 to 3548.
(1) The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
Drums (1A2, 1B2, 1N2, 1H2, 1D, 1G);
Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2);
Jerricans (3A2, 3B2, 3H2)
Packagings shall conform to the packing group II performance level.
(2) In addition, for robust articles the following packagings are authorized:
Strong outer packagings constructed of suitable material and of adequate strength and design in relation to the
packaging capacity and its intended use. The packagings shall meet the provisions of 4.1.1.1, 4.1.1.2, 4.1.1.8 and
4.1.3 in order to achieve a level of protection that is at least equivalent to that provided by Chapter 6.1. Articles
may be carried unpackaged or on pallets when the dangerous goods are afforded equivalent protection by the
article in which they are contained.
NOTE: The packagings authorized may exceed a net mass of 400 kg (see 4.1.3.3).
(3) Additionally, the following conditions shall be met:
(a) Receptacles within articles containing liquids or solids shall be constructed of suitable materials and secured
in the article in such a way that, under normal conditions of carriage, they cannot break, be punctured or
leak their contents into the article itself or the outer packaging;
(b) Receptacles containing liquids with closures shall be packed with their closures correctly oriented. The
receptacles shall in addition conform to the internal pressure test provisions of 6.1.5.5;
(c) Receptacles that are liable to break or be punctured easily, such as those made of glass, porcelain or
stoneware or of certain plastics materials shall be properly secured. Any leakage of the contents shall not
substantially impair the protective properties of the article or of the outer packaging;
(d) Receptacles within articles containing gases shall meet the requirements of Section 4.1.6 and Chapter 6.2
as appropriate or be capable of providing an equivalent level of protection as packing instructions P200 or
P208;
(e) Where there is no receptacle within the article, the article shall fully enclose the dangerous substances and
prevent their release under normal conditions of carriage.
(4) Articles shall be packed to prevent movement and inadvertent operation during normal conditions of carriage.
– 45 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 46 –
P010 PACKING INSTRUCTION P010
The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
Combination packagings
Inner packagings Outer packagings Maximum net mass (see 4.1.3.3)
Glass 1 l
Steel 40 l
Drums
steel (1A1, 1A2) 400 kg
plastics (1H1, 1H2) 400 kg
plywood (1D) 400 kg
fibre (1G) 400 kg
Boxes
steel (4A) 400 kg
natural wood (4C1, 4C2) 400 kg
plywood (4D) 400 kg
reconstituted wood (4F) 400 kg
fibreboard (4G) 400 kg
expanded plastics (4H1) 60 kg
solid plastics (4H2) 400 kg
Single packagings Maximum capacity (see 4.1.3.3)
Drums
steel, non-removable head (1A1) 450 l
Jerricans
steel, non-removable head (3A1) 60 l
Composite packagings
plastics receptacle in steel drums (6HA1) 250 l
Steel pressure receptacles, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.3.6 are met.
P099 PACKING INSTRUCTION P099
Only packagings which are approved for these goods by the competent authority may be used. A copy of the competent
authority approval shall accompany each consignment or the transport document shall include an indication that the
packaging was approved by the competent authority.
P101 PACKING INSTRUCTION P101
Only packagings which are approved by the competent authority of the country of origin may be used. If the country
of origin is not a Contracting Party to the ADR, the packaging shall be approved by the competent authority of the first
country Contracting Party to ADR reached by the consignment. The distinguishing sign used on vehicles in international
road traffica of the country for which the authority acts, shall be marked on the transport documents as follows:
“Packaging approved by the competent authority of…” (see 5.4.1.2.1 (e))
a Distinguishing sign of the State of registration used on motor vehicles and trailers in international road traffic,
e.g. in accordance with the Geneva Convention on Road Traffic of 1949 or the Vienna Convention on Road Traffic of
1968.
P110(a) PACKING INSTRUCTION P110(a)
(Reserved)
NOTE: This packing instruction in the UN Model Regulations is not admitted for carriage under ADR.
– 46 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 47 –
P110(b) PACKING INSTRUCTION P110(b)
The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing
provisions of 4.1.5 are met:
Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings
Receptacles
metal
wood
rubber, conductive
plastics, conductive
Bags
rubber, conductive
plastics, conductive
Dividing partitions
metal
wood
plastics
fibreboard
Boxes
natural wood, sift-proof wall (4C2)
plywood (4D)
reconstituted wood (4F)
Special packing provision:
PP42 For UN Nos. 0074, 0113, 0114, 0129, 0130, 0135 and 0224, the following conditions shall be met:
(a) Inner packagings shall not contain more than 50 g of explosive substance (quantity corresponding to
dry substance);
(b) Compartments between dividing partitions shall not contain more than one inner packaging, firmly
fitted; and
(c) The outer packaging may be partitioned into up to 25 compartments.
P111 PACKING INSTRUCTION P111
The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing
provisions of 4.1.5 are met:
Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings
Bags
paper, waterproofed
plastics
textile, rubberized
Receptacles
wood
Sheets
plastics
textile, rubberized
Not necessary Boxes
steel (4A)
aluminium (4B)
other metal (4N)
natural wood, ordinary (4C1)
natural wood, sift-proof (4C2)
plywood (4D)
reconstituted wood (4F)
fibreboard (4G)
plastics, expanded (4H1)
plastics, solid (4H2)
Drums
steel (1A1, 1A2)
aluminium (1B1, 1B2)
other metal (1N1, 1N2)
plywood (1D)
fibre (1G)
plastics (1H1, 1H2)
Special packing provision:
PP43 For UN 0159, inner packagings are not required when metal (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1 or 1N2) or plastics
(1H1 or 1H2) drums are used as outer packagings.
– 47 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 48 –
P112(a) PACKING INSTRUCTION
(Solid wetted, 1.1D)
P112(a)
The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing
provisions of 4.1.5 are met:
Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings
Bags
paper, multiwall, water resistant
plastics
textile
textile, rubberized
woven plastics
Receptacles
metal
plastics
wood
Bags
plastics
textile, plastic coated
or lined
Receptacles
metal
plastics
wood
Boxes
steel (4A)
aluminium (4B)
other metal (4N)
natural wood, ordinary (4C1)
natural wood, sift-proof (4C2)
plywood (4D)
reconstituted wood (4F)
fibreboard (4G)
plastics, expanded (4H1)
plastics, solid (4H2)
Drums
steel (1A1, 1A2)
aluminium (1B1, 1B2)
other metal (1N1, 1N2)
plywood (1D)
fibre (1G)
plastics (1H1, 1H2)
Additional requirement:
Intermediate packagings are not required if leakproof removable head drums are used as the outer packaging.
Special packing provisions:
PP26 For UN Nos. 0004, 0076, 0078, 0154, 0219 and 0394, packagings shall be lead free.
PP45 For UN Nos. 0072 and 0226, intermediate packagings are not required.
– 48 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 49 –
P112(b) PACKING INSTRUCTION
(Solid dry, other than powder 1.1D)
P112(b)
The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing
provisions of 4.1.5 are met:
Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings
Bags
paper, kraft
paper, multiwall, water resistant
plastics
textile
textile, rubberized
woven plastics
Bags (for UN No. 0150 only)
plastics
textile, plastic coated
or lined
Bags
woven plastics, sift-proof (5H2)
woven plastics, water-resistant (5H3)
plastics, film (5H4)
textile, sift-proof (5L2)
textile, water resistant (5L3)
paper, multiwall, water
resistant (5M2)
Boxes
steel (4A)
aluminium (4B)
other metal (4N)
natural wood, ordinary (4C1)
natural wood, sift-proof (4C2)
plywood (4D)
reconstituted wood (4F)
fibreboard (4G)
plastics, expanded (4H1)
plastics, solid (4H2)
Drums
steel (1A1, 1A2)
aluminium (1B1, 1B2)
other metal (1N1, 1N2)
plywood (1D)
fibre (1G)
plastics (1H1, 1H2)
Special packing provisions:
PP26 For UN Nos. 0004, 0076, 0078, 0154, 0216, 0219 and 0386, packagings shall be lead free.
PP46 For UN Nos. 0209, bags, sift-proof (5H2) are recommended for flake or prilled TNT in the dry state and a
maximum net mass of 30 kg.
PP47 For UN No. 0222, inner packagings are not required when the outer packaging is a bag.
– 49 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 50 –
P112(c) PACKING INSTRUCTION
(Solid dry powder 1.1D)
P112(c)
The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing
provisions of 4.1.5 are met:
Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings
Bags
paper, multiwall, water resistant
plastics
woven plastics
Receptacles
fibreboard
metal
plastics
wood
Bags
paper, multiwall, water
resistant with inner
lining
plastics
Receptacles
metal
plastics
wood
Boxes
steel (4A)
aluminium (4B)
other metal (4N)
natural wood, ordinary (4C1)
natural wood, sift-proof (4C2)
plywood (4D)
reconstituted wood (4F)
fibreboard (4G)
plastics, solid (4H2)
Drums
steel (1A1, 1A2)
aluminium (1B1, 1B2)
other metal (1N1, 1N2)
plywood (1D)
fibre (1G)
plastics (1H1, 1H2)
Additional requirements:
1. Inner packagings are not required if drums are used as the outer packaging.
2. The packaging shall be sift-proof.
Special packing provisions:
PP26 For UN Nos. 0004, 0076, 0078, 0154, 0216, 0219 and 0386, packagings shall be lead free.
PP46 For UN No. 0209, bags, sift-proof (5H2) are recommended for flake or prilled TNT in the dry state and a
maximum net mass of 30 kg.
PP48 For UN No. 0504, metal packagings shall not be used. Packagings of other material with a small amount of
metal, for example metal closures or other metal fittings such as those mentioned in 6.1.4, are not considered
metal packagings.
– 50 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 51 –
P113 PACKING INSTRUCTION P113
The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing
provisions of 4.1.5 are met:
Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings
Bags
paper
plastics
textile, rubberized
Receptacles
fibreboard
metal
plastics
wood
Not necessary Boxes
steel (4A)
aluminium (4B)
other metal (4N)
natural wood, ordinary (4C1)
natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2)
plywood (4D)
reconstituted wood (4F)
fibreboard (4G)
plastics, solid (4H2)
Drums
steel (1A1, 1A2)
aluminium (1B1, 1B2)
other metal (1N1, 1N2)
plywood (1D)
fibre (1G)
plastics (1H1, 1H2)
Additional requirement:
The packaging shall be sift-proof.
Special packing provisions:
PP49 For UN Nos. 0094 and 0305, no more than 50 g of substance shall be packed in an inner packaging.
PP50 For UN No. 0027, inner packagings are not necessary when drums are used as outer packagings.
PP51 For UN No. 0028, paper kraft or waxed paper sheets may be used as inner packagings.
– 51 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 52 –
P114(a) PACKING INSTRUCTION
(Solid wetted)
P114(a)
The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing
provisions of 4.1.5 are met:
Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings
Bags
plastics
textile
woven plastics
Receptacles
metal
plastics
wood
Bags
plastics
textile, plastic coated
or lined
Receptacles
metal
plastics
Dividing partitions
wood
Boxes
steel (4A)
metal, other than steel or aluminium (4N)
natural wood, ordinary (4C1)
natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2)
plywood (4D)
reconstituted wood (4F)
fibreboard (4G)
plastics, solid (4H2)
Drums
steel (1A1, 1A2)
aluminium (1B1, 1B2)
other metal (1N1, 1N2)
Plywood (1D)
fibre (1G)
plastics (1H1, 1H2)
Additional requirement:
Intermediate packagings are not required if leakproof removable head drums are used as outer packagings.
Special packing provisions:
PP26 For UN Nos. 0077, 0132, 0234, 0235 and 0236, packagings shall be lead free.
PP43 For UN 0342, inner packagings are not required when metal (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1 or 1N2) or plastics
(1H1 or 1H2) drums are used as outer packagings.
– 52 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 53 –
P114(b) PACKING INSTRUCTION
(Solid dry)
P114(b)
The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing
provisions of 4.1.5 are met:
Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings
Bags
paper, kraft
plastics
textile, sift-proof
woven plastics, sift-proof
Receptacles
fibreboard
metal
paper
plastics
woven plastics, sift-proof
wood
Not necessary Boxes
natural wood, ordinary (4C1)
natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2)
plywood (4D)
reconstituted wood (4F)
fibreboard (4G)
Drums
steel (1A1, 1A2)
aluminium (1B1, 1B2)
other metal (1N1, 1N2)
plywood (1D)
fibre (1G)
plastics (1H1, 1H2)
Special packing provisions:
PP26 For UN Nos. 0077, 0132, 0234, 0235 and 0236, packagings shall be lead free.
PP48 For UN Nos. 0508 and 0509, metal packagings shall not be used. Packagings of other material with a small
amount of metal, for example metal closures or other metal fittings such as those mentioned in 6.1.4, are not
considered metal packagings.
PP50 For UN Nos. 0160, 0161 and 0508, inner packagings are not necessary if drums are used as outer packagings.
PP52 For UN Nos. 0160 and 0161, when metal drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1 or 1N2) are used as outer
packagings, metal packagings shall be so constructed that the risk of explosion, by reason of increased internal
pressure from internal or external causes is prevented.
– 53 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 54 –
P115 PACKING INSTRUCTION P115
The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing
provisions of 4.1.5 are met:
Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings
Receptacles
plastics
wood
Bags
plastics in metal
receptacles
Drums
metal
Receptacles
wood
Boxes
natural wood, ordinary (4C1)
natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2)
plywood (4D)
reconstituted wood (4F)
Drums
steel (1A1, 1A2)
aluminium (1B1, 1B2)
other metal (1N1, 1N2)
plywood (1D)
fibre (1G)
plastics (1H1, 1H2)
Special packing provisions:
PP45 For UN No. 0144, intermediate packagings are not required.
PP53 For UN Nos. 0075, 0143, 0495 and 0497, when boxes are used as outer packagings, inner packagings shall
have taped screw cap closures and be not more than 5 litres capacity each. Inner packagings shall be
surrounded with non-combustible absorbent cushioning materials. The amount of absorbent cushioning
material shall be sufficient to absorb the liquid contents. Metal receptacles shall be cushioned from each other.
Net mass of propellant is limited to 30 kg for each package when outer packagings are boxes.
PP54 For UN Nos. 0075, 0143, 0495 and 0497, when drums are used as outer packagings and when intermediate
packagings are drums, they shall be surrounded with non-combustible cushioning material in a quantity
sufficient to absorb the liquid contents. A composite packaging consisting of a plastics receptacle in a metal
drum may be used instead of the inner and intermediate packagings. The net volume of propellant in each
package shall not exceed 120 litres.
PP55 For UN No. 0144, absorbent cushioning material shall be inserted.
PP56 For UN No. 0144, metal receptacles may be used as inner packagings.
PP57 For UN Nos. 0075, 0143, 0495 and 0497, bags shall be used as intermediate packagings when boxes are used
as outer packagings.
PP58 For UN Nos. 0075, 0143, 0495 and 0497, drums shall be used as intermediate packagings when drums are
used as outer packagings.
PP59 For UN No. 0144, fibreboard boxes (4G) may be used as outer packagings.
PP60 For UN No. 0144, aluminium drums (1B1 and 1B2) and metal, other than steel or aluminium, drums (1N1
and 1N2) shall not be used.
– 54 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 55 –
P116 PACKING INSTRUCTION P116
The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing
provisions of 4.1.5 are met:
Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings
Bags
paper, water and oil
resistant
plastics
textile, plastic coated or lined
woven plastics, sift-proof
Receptacles
fibreboard, water resistant
metal
plastics
wood, sift-proof
Sheets
paper, water resistant
paper, waxed
plastics
Not necessary Bags
woven plastics (5H1, 5H2, 5H3)
paper, multiwall, water
resistant (5M2)
plastics, film (5H4)
textile, sift-proof (5L2)
textile, water resistant (5L3)
Boxes
steel (4A)
aluminium (4B)
other metal (4N)
natural wood, ordinary (4C1)
natural wood, sift-proof walls
(4C2)
plywood (4D)
reconstituted wood (4F)
fibreboard (4G)
plastics, solid (4H2)
Drums
steel (1A1, 1A2)
aluminium (1B1, 1B2)
other metal (1N1, 1N2)
plywood (1D)
fibre (1G)
plastics (1H1, 1H2)
Jerricans
steel (3A1, 3A2)
plastics (3H1, 3H2)
Special packing provisions:
PP61 For UN Nos. 0082, 0241, 0331 and 0332, inner packagings are not required if leakproof removable head drums
are used as outer packagings.
PP62 For UN Nos. 0082, 0241, 0331 and 0332, inner packagings are not required when the explosive is contained in
a material impervious to liquid.
PP63 For UN No. 0081, inner packagings are not required when contained in rigid plastic which is impervious to nitric
esters.
PP64 For UN No. 0331, inner packagings are not required when bags (5H2), (5H3) or (5H4) are used as outer
packagings.
PP65 (Deleted)
PP66 For UN No. 0081, bags shall not be used as outer packagings.
– 55 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 56 –
P130 PACKING INSTRUCTION P130
The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing
provisions of 4.1.5 are met:
Inner packagings
Not necessary
Intermediate packagings
Not necessary
Outer packagings
Boxes
steel (4A)
aluminium (4B)
other metal (4N)
natural wood, ordinary (4C1)
natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2)
plywood (4D)
reconstituted wood (4F)
fibreboard (4G)
plastics, expanded (4H1)
plastics, solid (4H2)
Drums
steel (1A1, 1A2)
aluminium (1B1, 1B2)
other metal (1N1, 1N2)
plywood (1D)
fibre (1G)
plastics (1H1, 1H2)
Special packing provision:
PP67 The following applies to UN Nos. 0006, 0009, 0010, 0015, 0016, 0018, 0019, 0034, 0035, 0038, 0039, 0048,
0056, 0137, 0138, 0168, 0169, 0171, 0181, 0182, 0183, 0186, 0221, 0243, 0244, 0245, 0246, 0254, 0280,
0281, 0286, 0287, 0297, 0299, 0300, 0301, 0303, 0321, 0328, 0329, 0344, 0345, 0346, 0347, 0362, 0363,
0370, 0412, 0424, 0425, 0434, 0435, 0436, 0437, 0438, 0451, 0488, 0502 and 0510:
Large and robust explosives articles, normally intended for military use, without their means of initiation or
with their means of initiation containing at least two effective protective features, may be carried unpackaged.
When such articles have propelling charges or are self-propelled, their ignition systems shall be protected
against stimuli encountered during normal conditions of carriage. A negative result in Test Series 4 on an
unpackaged article indicates that the article can be considered for carriage unpackaged. Such unpackaged
articles may be fixed to cradles or contained in crates or other suitable handling devices.
NOTE: The packagings authorized may exceed a net mass of 400 kg (see 4.1.3.3).
– 56 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 57 –
P131 PACKING INSTRUCTION P131
The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing
provisions of 4.1.5 are met:
Inner packagings
Bags
paper
plastics
Receptacles
fibreboard
metal
plastics
wood
Reels
Intermediate packagings
Not necessary
Outer packagings
Boxes
steel (4A)
aluminium (4B)
other metal (4N)
natural wood, ordinary (4C1)
natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2)
plywood (4D)
reconstituted wood (4F)
fibreboard (4G)
plastics, solid (4H2)
Drums
steel (1A1, 1A2)
aluminium (1B1, 1B2)
other metal (1N1, 1N2)
plywood (1D)
fibre (1G)
plastics (1H1, 1H2)
Special packing provision:
PP68 For UN Nos. 0029, 0267 and 0455, bags and reels shall not be used as inner packagings.
P132(a) PACKING INSTRUCTION
(Articles consisting of closed metal, plastics or fibreboard casings that contain a
detonating explosive, or consisting of plastics-bonded detonating explosives)
P132(a)
The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing
provisions of 4.1.5 are met:
Inner packagings
Not necessary
Intermediate packagings
Not necessary
Outer packagings
Boxes
steel (4A)
aluminium (4B)
other metal (4N)
wood, natural, ordinary (4C1)
wood, natural, sift-proof walls (4C2)
plywood (4D)
reconstituted wood (4F)
fibreboard (4G)
plastics, solid (4H2)
– 57 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 58 –
P132(b) PACKING INSTRUCTION
(Articles without closed casings)
P132(b)
The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing
provisions of 4.1.5 are met:
Inner packagings
Receptacles
fibreboard
metal
plastics
wood
Sheets
paper
plastics
Intermediate packagings
Not necessary
Outer packagings
Boxes
steel (4A)
aluminium (4B)
other metal (4N)
natural wood, ordinary (4C1)
natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2)
plywood (4D)
reconstituted wood (4F)
fibreboard (4G)
plastics, solid (4H2)
P133 PACKING INSTRUCTION P133
The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing
provisions of 4.1.5 are met:
Inner packagings
Receptacles
fibreboard
metal
plastics
wood
Trays, fitted with dividing
partitions
fibreboard
plastics
wood
Intermediate packagings
Receptacles
fibreboard
metal
plastics
wood
Outer packagings
Boxes
steel (4A)
aluminium (4B)
other metal (4N)
natural wood, ordinary (4C1)
natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2)
plywood (4D)
reconstituted wood (4F)
fibreboard (4G)
plastics, solid (4H2)
Additional requirement:
Receptacles are only required as intermediate packagings when the inner packagings are trays.
Special packing provision:
PP69 For UN Nos. 0043, 0212, 0225, 0268 and 0306, trays shall not be used as inner packagings.
– 58 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 59 –
P134 PACKING INSTRUCTION P134
The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing
provisions of 4.1.5 are met:
Inner packagings
Bags
water resistant
Receptacles
fibreboard
metal
plastics
wood
Sheets
fibreboard, corrugated
Tubes
fibreboard
Intermediate packagings
Not necessary
Outer packagings
Boxes
steel (4A)
aluminium (4B)
other metal (4N)
natural wood, ordinary (4C1)
natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2)
plywood (4D)
reconstituted wood (4F)
fibreboard (4G)
plastics, expanded (4H1)
plastics, solid (4H2)
Drums
steel (1A1, 1A2)
aluminium (1B1, 1B2)
other metal (1N1, 1N2)
plywood (1D)
fibre (1G)
plastics (1H1, 1H2)
P135 PACKING INSTRUCTION P135
The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing
provisions of 4.1.5 are met:
Inner packagings
Bags
paper
plastics
Receptacles
fibreboard
metal
plastics
wood
Sheets
paper
plastics
Intermediate packagings
Not necessary
Outer packagings
Boxes
steel (4A)
aluminium (4B)
other metal (4N)
natural wood, ordinary (4C1)
natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2)
plywood (4D)
reconstituted wood (4F)
fibreboard (4G)
plastics, expanded (4H1)
plastics, solid (4H2)
Drums
steel (1A1, 1A2)
aluminium (1B1, 1B2)
other metal (1N1, 1N2)
plywood (1D)
fibre (1G)
plastics (1H1, 1H2)
– 59 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 60 –
P136 PACKING INSTRUCTION P136
The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing
provisions of 4.1.5 are met:
Inner packagings
Bags
plastics
textile
Boxes
fibreboard
plastics
wood
Dividing partitions in the outer
packagings
Intermediate packagings
Not necessary
Outer packagings
Boxes
steel (4A)
aluminium (4B)
other metal (4N)
natural wood, ordinary (4C1)
natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2)
plywood (4D)
reconstituted wood (4F)
fibreboard (4G)
plastics, solid (4H2)
Drums
steel (1A1, 1A2)
aluminium (1B1, 1B2)
other metal (1N1, 1N2)
plywood (1D)
fibre (1G)
plastics (1H1, 1H2)
P137 PACKING INSTRUCTION P137
The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing
provisions of 4.1.5 are met:
Inner packagings
Bags
plastics
Boxes
Fibreboard
wood
Tubes
fibreboard
metal
plastics
Dividing partitions in the outer
packagings
Intermediate packagings
Not necessary
Outer packagings
Boxes
steel (4A)
aluminium (4B)
other metal (4N)
natural wood, ordinary (4C1)
natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2)
plywood (4D)
reconstituted wood (4F)
fibreboard (4G)
plastics, solid (4H2)
Drums
steel (1A1, 1A2)
aluminium (1B1, 1B2)
other metal (1N1, 1N2)
plywood (1D)
fibre (1G)
plastics (1H1, 1H2)
Special packing provision:
PP70 For UN Nos. 0059, 0439, 0440 and 0441, when the shaped charges are packed singly, the conical cavity shall
face downwards and the package shall be marked as illustrated in figures 5.2.1.10.1.1 or 5.2.1.10.1.2. When the
shaped charges are packed in pairs, the conical cavities shall face inwards to minimize the jetting effect in the
event of accidental initiation.
– 60 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 61 –
P138 PACKING INSTRUCTION P138
The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing
provisions of 4.1.5 are met:
Inner packagings
Bags
plastics
Intermediate packagings
Not necessary
Outer packagings
Boxes
steel (4A)
aluminium (4B)
other metal (4N)
natural wood, ordinary (4C1)
natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2)
plywood (4D)
reconstituted wood (4F)
fibreboard (4G)
plastics, solid (4H2)
Drums
steel (1A1, 1A2)
aluminium (1B1, 1B2)
other metal (1N1, 1N2)
plywood (1D)
fibre (1G)
plastics (1H1, 1H2)
Additional requirement:
If the ends of the articles are sealed, inner packagings are not necessary.
P139 PACKING INSTRUCTION P139
The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing
provisions of 4.1.5 are met:
Inner packagings
Bags
plastics
Receptacles
fibreboard
metal
plastics
wood
Reels
Sheets
paper
plastics
Intermediate packagings
Not necessary
Outer packagings
Boxes
steel (4A)
aluminium (4B)
other metal (4N)
natural wood, ordinary (4C1)
natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2)
plywood (4D)
reconstituted wood (4F)
fibreboard (4G)
plastics, solid (4H2)
Drums
steel (1A1, 1A2)
aluminium (1B1, 1B2)
other metal (1N1, 1N2)
plywood (1D)
fibre (1G)
plastics (1H1, 1H2)
Special packing provisions:
PP71 For UN Nos. 0065, 0102, 0104, 0289 and 0290, the ends of the detonating cord shall be sealed, for example,
by a plug firmly fixed so that the explosive cannot escape. The ends of flexible detonating cord shall be fastened
securely.
PP72 For UN Nos. 0065 and 0289, inner packagings are not required when they are in coils.
– 61 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 62 –
P140 PACKING INSTRUCTION P140
The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing
provisions of 4.1.5 are met:
Inner packagings
Bags
Plastics
Receptacles
wood
Reels
Sheets
paper, kraft
plastics
Intermediate packagings
Not necessary
Outer packagings
Boxes
steel (4A)
aluminium (4B)
other metal (4N)
natural wood, ordinary (4C1)
natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2)
plywood (4D)
reconstituted wood (4F)
fibreboard (4G)
plastics, solid (4H2)
Drums
steel (1A1, 1A2)
aluminium (1B1, 1B2)
other metal (1N1, 1N2)
plywood (1D)
fibre (1G)
plastics (1H1, 1H2)
Special packing provisions:
PP73 For UN No. 0105, no inner packagings are required if the ends are sealed.
PP74 For UN No. 0101, the packaging shall be sift-proof except when the fuse is covered by a paper tube and both
ends of the tube are covered with removable caps.
PP75 For UN No. 0101, steel, aluminium or other metal boxes or drums shall not be used.
P141 PACKING INSTRUCTION P141
The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing
provisions of 4.1.5 are met:
Inner packagings
Receptacles
fibreboard
metal
plastics
wood
Trays, fitted with dividing
partitions
plastics
wood
Dividing partitions in the outer
packagings
Intermediate packagings
Not necessary
Outer packagings
Boxes
steel (4A)
aluminium (4B)
other metal (4N)
natural wood, ordinary (4C1)
natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2)
plywood (4D)
reconstituted wood (4F)
fibreboard (4G)
plastics, solid (4H2)
Drums
steel (1A1, 1A2)
aluminium (1B1, 1B2)
other metal (1N1, 1N2)
plywood (1D)
fibre (1G)
plastics (1H1, 1H2)
– 62 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 63 –
P142 PACKING INSTRUCTION P142
The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing
provisions of 4.1.5 are met:
Inner packagings
Bags
paper
plastics
Receptacles
fibreboard
metal
plastics
wood
Sheets
paper
Trays, fitted with dividing
partitions
plastics
Intermediate packagings
Not necessary
Outer packagings
Boxes
steel (4A)
aluminium (4B)
other metal (4N)
natural wood, ordinary (4C1)
natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2)
plywood (4D)
reconstituted wood (4F)
fibreboard (4G)
plastics, solid (4H2)
Drums
steel (1A1, 1A2)
aluminium (1B1, 1B2)
other metal (1N1, 1N2)
plywood (1D)
fibre (1G)
plastics (1H1, 1H2)
P143 PACKING INSTRUCTION P143
The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing
provisions of 4.1.5 are met:
Inner packagings
Bags
paper, kraft
plastics
textile
textile, rubberized
Receptacles
fibreboard
metal
Plastics
wood
Trays, fitted with dividing
partitions
plastics
wood
Intermediate packagings
Not necessary
Outer packagings
Boxes
steel (4A)
aluminium (4B)
other metal (4N)
natural wood, ordinary (4C1)
natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2)
plywood (4D)
reconstituted wood (4F)
fibreboard (4G)
plastics, solid (4H2)
Drums
steel (1A1, 1A2)
aluminium (1B1, 1B2)
other metal (1N1, 1N2)
plywood (1D)
fibre (1G)
plastics (1H1, 1H2)
Additional requirement:
Instead of the above inner and outer packagings, composite packagings (6HH2) (plastics receptacle with outer solid
plastics box) may be used.
Special packing provision:
PP76 For UN Nos. 0271, 0272, 0415 and 0491, when metal packagings are used, metal packagings shall be so
constructed that the risk of explosion, by reason of increase in internal pressure from internal or external causes
is prevented.
– 63 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 64 –
P144 PACKING INSTRUCTION P144
The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing
provisions of 4.1.5 are met:
Inner packagings
Receptacles
fibreboard
metal
Plastics
wood
Dividing partitions in the outer
packagings
Intermediate packagings
Not necessary
Outer packagings
Boxes
steel (4A)
aluminium (4B)
other metal (4N)
natural wood, ordinary with metal liner
(4C1)
plywood (4D) with metal liner
reconstituted wood (4F) with metal liner
plastics, expanded (4H1)
plastics, solid (4H2)
Drums
steel (1A1, 1A2)
aluminium (1B1, 1B2)
other metal (1N1, 1N2)
plastics (1H1, 1H2)
Special packing provision:
PP77 For UN Nos. 0248 and 0249, packagings shall be protected against the ingress of water. When water-activated
contrivances are transported unpackaged, they shall be provided with at least two independent protective
features which prevent the ingress of water.
NOTE: The packagings authorized may exceed a net mass of 400 kg (see 4.1.3.3).
– 64 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 65 –
P200 PACKING INSTRUCTION P200
Type of packagings: Cylinders, tubes, pressure drums and bundles of cylinders
Cylinders, tubes, pressure drums and bundles of cylinders are authorised provided the special packing provisions of
4.1.6, the provisions listed below under (1) to (9) and, when referred to in the column “Special packing provisions” of
tables 1, 2 or 3, the relevant special packing provisions listed below under (10), are met.
General
(1) Pressure receptacles shall be so closed and leakproof as to prevent escape of the gases.
(2) Pressure receptacles containing toxic substances with an LC₅₀ less than or equal to 200 ml/m³ (ppm) as specified
in the table shall not be equipped with any pressure relief device. Pressure relief devices shall be fitted on UN
pressure receptacles used for the carriage of UN No. 1013 carbon dioxide and UN No. 1070 nitrous oxide.
(3) The following three tables cover compressed gases (Table 1), liquefied and dissolved gases (Table 2) and
substances not in Class 2 (Table 3). They provide:
(a) the UN number, name and description, and the classification code of the substance;
(b) the LC₅₀ for toxic substances;
(c) the types of pressure receptacles authorised for the substance, shown by the letter “X”;
(d) the maximum test period for periodic inspection of the pressure receptacles;
NOTE: For pressure receptacles which make use of composite materials, the maximum test period
shall be 5 years. The test period may be extended to that specified in Tables 1 and 2 (i.e. up to 10 years),
if approved by the competent authority or body designated by this authority which issued the type
approval.
(e) the minimum test pressure of the pressure receptacles;
(f) the maximum working pressure of the pressure receptacles for compressed gases (where no value is
given, the working pressure shall not exceed two thirds of the test pressure) or the maximum filling
ratio(s) dependent on the test pressure(s) for liquefied and dissolved gases;
(g) special packing provisions that are specific to a substance.
Test pressure, filling ratios and filling requirements
(4) The minimum test pressure required for is 1 MPa (10 bar).
(5) In no case shall pressure receptacles be filled in excess of the limit permitted in the following requirements:
(a) For compressed gases, the working pressure shall be not more than two thirds of the test pressure of the
pressure receptacles. Restrictions to this upper limit on working pressure are imposed by (10), special
packing provision “o”. In no case shall the internal pressure at 65 °C exceed the test pressure.
(b) For high pressure liquefied gases, the filling ratio shall be such that the settled pressure at 65 °C does
not exceed the test pressure of the pressure receptacles.
The use of test pressures and filling ratios other than those in the table is permitted, except where (10),
special packing provision “o” applies, provided that:
(i) the criterion of (10), special packing provision “r” is met when applicable; or
(ii) the above criterion is met in all other cases.
For high pressure liquefied gases and gas mixtures for which relevant data are not available, the
maximum filling ratio (FR) shall be determined as follows:
FR = 8.5 10 -4  d g  P h
where FR = maximum filling ratio
d g = gas density (at 15 °C, 1 bar)(in kg/m³)
P h = minimum test pressure (in bar).
(Cont’d on next page)
– 65 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 66 –
P200 PACKING INSTRUCTION (cont’d) P200
If the density of the gas is unknown, the maximum filling ratio shall be determined as follows:
338
10 3




R
MMP
FR h
where FR = maximum filling ratio
P h = minimum test pressure (in bar)
MM = molecular mass (in g/mol)
R = 8.31451  10 -2 bar.l.mol-1 .K -1 (gas constant).
For gas mixtures, the average molecular mass is to be taken, taking into account the volumetric
concentrations of the various components.
(c) For low pressure liquefied gases, the maximum mass of contents per litre of water capacity shall
equal 0.95 times the density of the liquid phase at 50 °C; in addition, the liquid phase shall not fill
the pressure receptacle at any temperature up to 60 °C. The test pressure of the pressure receptacle
shall be at least equal to the vapour pressure (absolute) of the liquid at 65 °C, minus 100 kPa (1 bar).
For low pressure liquefied gases and gas mixtures for which relevant data are not available, the
maximum filling ratio shall be determined as follows:
FR = (0.0032  BP – 0.24)  d 1
where FR = maximum filling ratio
BP = boiling point (in Kelvin)
d 1 = density of the liquid at boiling point (in kg/l).
(d) For UN No. 1001 acetylene, dissolved, and UN No. 3374 acetylene, solvent free, see (10), special
packing provision “p”.
(e) For liquefied gases charged with compressed gases, both components – the liquefied gas and the
compressed gas – have to be taken into consideration in the calculation of the internal pressure in the
pressure receptacle.
The maximum mass of contents per litre of water capacity shall not exceed 0.95 times the density of
the liquid phase at 50 °C; in addition, the liquid phase shall not completely fill the pressure receptacle
at any temperature up to 60 °C.
When filled, the internal pressure at 65 °C shall not exceed the test pressure of the pressure
receptacles. The vapour pressures and volumetric expansions of all substances in the pressure
receptacles shall be considered. When experimental data is not available, the following steps shall be
carried out:
(i) Calculation of the vapour pressure of the liquefied gas and of the partial pressure of the
compressed gas at 15 °C (filling temperature);
(ii) Calculation of the volumetric expansion of the liquid phase resulting from the heating from
15 °C to 65 °C and calculation of the remaining volume for the gaseous phase;
(iii) Calculation of the partial pressure of the compressed gas at 65 °C considering the volumetric
expansion of the liquid phase;
NOTE: The compressibility factor of the compressed gas at 15 °C and 65 °C shall be
considered.
(iv) Calculation of the vapour pressure of the liquefied gas at 65 °C;
(v) The total pressure is the sum of the vapour pressure of the liquefied gas and the partial
pressure of the compressed gas at 65 °C;
(vi) Consideration of the solubility of the compressed gas at 65 °C in the liquid phase;
The test pressure of the pressure receptacle shall not be less than the calculated total pressure minus
100 kPa (1bar).
If the solubility of the compressed gas in the liquid phase is not known for the calculation, the test
pressure can be calculated without taking the gas solubility (sub-paragraph (vi)) into account.
(Cont’d on next page)
– 66 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 67 –
P200 PACKING INSTRUCTION (cont’d) P200
(6) Other test pressure and filling ratio may be used provided they satisfy the general requirements outlined in
paragraphs (4) and (5) above.
(7) (a) The filling of pressure receptacles may only be carried out by specially-equipped centres, with qualified
staff using appropriate procedures.
The procedures should include checks:
– of the conformity of receptacles and accessories with ADR;
– of their compatibility with the product to be carried;
– of the absence of damage which might affect safety;
– of compliance with the degree or pressure of filling, as appropriate;
– of marks and identification.
(b) LPG to be filled in cylinders shall be of high quality; this is deemed to be fulfilled if the LPG to be filled
is in compliance with the limitations on corrosiveness as specified in ISO 9162:1989.
Periodic inspections
(8) Refillable pressure receptacles shall be subjected to periodic inspections in accordance with the requirements
of 6.2.1.6 and 6.2.3.5 respectively.
(9) If special provisions for certain substances do not appear in the tables below, periodic inspections shall be
carried out:
(a) Every 5 years in the case of pressure receptacles intended for the carriage of gases of classification codes
1T, 1TF, 1TO, 1TC, 1TFC, 1TOC, 2T, 2TO, 2TF, 2TC, 2TFC, 2TOC, 4A, 4F and 4TC;
(b) Every 5 years in the case of pressure receptacles intended for the carriage of substances from other
classes;
(c) Every 10 years in the case of pressure receptacles intended for the carriage of gases of classification
codes 1A, 1O, 1F, 2A, 2O and 2F.
For pressure receptacles which make use of composite materials, the maximum test period shall be 5 years. The
test period may be extended to that specified in Tables 1 and 2 (i.e. up to 10 years), if approved by the competent
authority or body designated by this authority which issued the type approval.
Special packing provisions
(10) Material compatibility
a: Aluminium alloy pressure receptacles shall not be used.
b: Copper valves shall not be used.
c: Metal parts in contact with the contents shall not contain more than 65 % copper.
d: When steel pressure receptacles or composite pressure receptacles with steel liners are used, only those
bearing the “H” mark in accordance with 6.2.2.7.4 (p) are permitted.
(Cont’d on next page)
– 67 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 68 –
P200 PACKING INSTRUCTION (cont’d) P200
Requirements for toxic substances with an LC₅₀ less than or equal to 200 ml/m³ (ppm)
k: Valve outlets shall be fitted with pressure retaining gas-tight plugs or caps having threads that match
those of the valve outlets and made of material not liable to attack by the contents of the pressure
receptacle.
Each cylinder within a bundle shall be fitted with an individual valve that shall be closed during carriage.
After filling, the manifold shall be evacuated, purged and plugged.
Bundles containing UN 1045 Fluorine, compressed, may be constructed with isolation valves on groups
of cylinders not exceeding 150 litres total water capacity instead of isolation valves on every cylinder.
Cylinders and individual cylinders within a bundle shall have a test pressure greater than or equal to 200
bar and a minimum wall thickness of 3.5 mm for aluminium alloy or 2 mm for steel. Individual cylinders
not complying with this requirement shall be carried in a rigid outer packaging that will adequately
protect the cylinder and its fittings and meeting the packing group I performance level. Pressure drums
shall have a minimum wall thickness as specified by the competent authority.
Pressure receptacles shall not be fitted with a pressure relief device.
Cylinders and individual cylinders in a bundle shall be limited to a maximum water capacity of 85 litres.
Each valve shall be capable of withstanding the test pressure of the pressure receptacle and be connected
directly to the pressure receptacle by either a taper thread or other means which meets the requirements
of ISO 10692-2:2001.
Each valve shall either be of the packless type with non-perforated diaphragm, or be of a type which
prevents leakage through or past the packing.
Carriage in capsules is not allowed.
Each pressure receptacle shall be tested for leakage after filling.
Gas specific provisions
l: UN No. 1040 ethylene oxide may also be packed in hermetically sealed glass or metal inner packagings
suitably cushioned in fibreboard, wooden or metal boxes meeting the packing group I performance level.
The maximum quantity permitted in any glass inner packaging is 30 g, and the maximum quantity
permitted in any metal inner packaging is 200 g. After filling, each inner packaging shall be determined
to be leak-tight by placing the inner packaging in a hot water bath at a temperature, and for a period of
time, sufficient to ensure that an internal pressure equal to the vapour pressure of ethylene oxide at 55 °C
is achieved. The maximum net mass in any outer packaging shall not exceed 2.5 kg.
m: Pressure receptacles shall be filled to a working pressure not exceeding 5 bar.
n: Cylinders and individual cylinders in a bundle shall contain not more than 5 kg of the gas. When bundles
containing UN 1045 Fluorine, compressed are divided into groups of cylinders in accordance with
special packing provision “k” each group shall contain not more than 5 kg of the gas.
o: In no case shall the working pressure or filling ratio shown in the tables be exceeded.
p: For UN No. 1001 acetylene, dissolved, and UN No. 3374 acetylene, solvent free: cylinders shall be
filled with a homogeneous monolithic porous material; the working pressure and the quantity of
acetylene shall not exceed the values prescribed in the approval or in ISO 3807-1:2000, ISO 3807-
2:2000 or ISO 3807:2013, as applicable.
For UN No. 1001 acetylene, dissolved: cylinders shall contain a quantity of acetone or suitable solvent
as specified in the approval (see ISO 3807-1:2000, ISO 3807-2:2000 or ISO 3807:2013 as applicable);
cylinders fitted with pressure relief devices or manifolded together shall be carried vertically.
Alternatively, for UN No. 1001 acetylene, dissolved: cylinders which are not UN pressure receptacles
may be filled with a non monolithic porous material; the working pressure, the quantity of acetylene and
the quantity of solvent shall not exceed the values prescribed in the approval. The maximum test period
for periodic inspection of the cylinders shall not exceed five years.
A test pressure of 52 bar shall be applied only to cylinders fitted with a fusible plug.
(Cont’d on next page)
– 68 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 69 –
P200 PACKING INSTRUCTION (cont’d) P200
q: Valve outlets of pressure receptacles for pyrophoric gases or flammable mixtures of gases containing
more than 1 % of pyrophoric compounds shall be fitted with gas-tight plugs or caps which shall be made
of material not liable to attack by the contents of the pressure receptacle. When these pressure receptacles
are manifolded in a bundle, each of the pressure receptacles shall be fitted with an individual valve that
shall be closed during carriage, and the outlet of the manifold valve shall be fitted with a pressure
retaining gas-tight plug or cap. Gas-tight plugs or caps shall have threads that match those of the valve
outlets. Carriage in capsules is not allowed.
r: The filling ratio of this gas shall be limited such that, if complete decomposition occurs, the pressure
does not exceed two thirds of the test pressure of the pressure receptacle.
ra: This gas may also be packed in capsules under the following conditions:
(a) The mass of gas shall not exceed 150 g per capsule;
(b) The capsules shall be free from faults liable to impair the strength;
(c) The leakproofness of the closure shall be ensured by an additional device (cap, crown, seal,
binding, etc.) capable of preventing any leakage of the closure during carriage;
(d) The capsules shall be placed in an outer packaging of sufficient strength. A package shall not
weigh more than 75 kg.
s: Aluminium alloy pressure receptacles shall be:
– Equipped only with brass or stainless steel valves; and
– Cleaned for hydrocarbons contamination and not contaminated with oil. UN pressure receptacles
shall be cleaned in accordance with ISO 11621:1997.
ta: Other criteria may be used for filling of welded steel cylinders intended for the carriage of substances
of UN No. 1965:
(a) with the agreement of the competent authorities of the countries where the carriage is carried out;
and
(b) in compliance with the provisions of a national code or standard recognised by the competent
authorities.
When the criteria for filling are different from those in P200(5), the transport document shall include
the statement “Carriage in accordance with packing instruction P200, special packing provision ta” and
the indication of the reference temperature used for the calculation of the filling ratio.
Periodic inspection
u: The interval between periodic tests may be extended to 10 years for aluminium alloy pressure
receptacles. This derogation may only be applied to UN pressure receptacles when the alloy of the
pressure receptacle has been subjected to stress corrosion testing as specified in ISO 7866:2012 + Cor
1: 2014.
ua: The interval between periodic tests may be extended to 15 years for aluminium alloy cylinders and
bundles of such cylinders if the provisions of paragraph (13) of this packing instruction are applied. This
shall not apply to cylinders made from aluminium alloy AA 6351. For mixtures, this provision “ua” may
be applied provided all the individual gases in the mixture have been allocated “ua” in Table 1 or Table
2.
v: (1) The interval between inspections for steel cylinders, other than refillable welded steel
cylinders for UN Nos. 1011, 1075, 1965, 1969 or 1978, may be extended to 15 years:
(a) with the agreement of the competent authority (authorities) of the country (countries)
where the periodic inspection and the carriage take place; and
(b) in accordance with the requirements of a technical code or a standard recognised by the
competent authority
(2) For refillable welded steel cylinders for UN Nos. 1011, 1075, 1965, 1969 or 1978, the interval
may be extended to 15 years, if the provisions of paragraph (12) of this packing instruction are
applied.
(Cont’d on next page)
– 69 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 70 –
P200 PACKING INSTRUCTION (cont’d) P200
va: For seamless steel cylinders which are equipped with residual pressure valves (RPVs) (see note below)
that have been designed and tested in accordance with EN ISO 15996:2005 + A1:2007 or EN ISO
15996:2017 and for bundles of seamless steel cylinders equipped with main valve(s) with a residual
pressure device, tested in accordance with EN ISO 15996:2005 + A1:2007 or EN ISO 15996:2017, the
interval between periodic tests may be extended to 15 years if the provisions of paragraph (13) of this
packing instruction are applied. For mixtures, this provision “va” may be applied provided all the
individual gases in the mixture have been allocated “va” in Table 1 or Table 2.
NOTE: “Residual Pressure Valve” (RPV) means a closure which incorporates a residual pressure
device that prevents ingress of contaminants by maintaining a positive differential between the pressure
within the cylinder and the valve outlet. In order to prevent back-flow of fluids into the cylinder from a
higher pressure source a “Non-Return Valve” (NRV) function shall either be incorporated into the
residual pressure device or be a discrete additional device in the cylinder valve, e.g. a regulator.
Requirements for N.O.S. entries and for mixtures
z: The construction materials of the pressure receptacles and their accessories shall be compatible with the
contents and shall not react to form harmful or dangerous compounds therewith.
The test pressure and filling ratio shall be calculated in accordance with the relevant requirements of
(5).
Toxic substances with an LC₅₀ less than or equal to 200 ml/m³ shall not be carried in tubes, pressure
drums or MEGCs and shall meet the requirements of special packing provision “k”. However, UN 1975
Nitric oxide and dinitrogen tetroxide mixture may be carried in pressure drums.
For pressure receptacles containing pyrophoric gases or flammable mixtures of gases containing more
than 1 % pyrophoric compounds, the requirements of special packing provision “q” shall be met.
The necessary steps shall be taken to prevent dangerous reactions (i.e. polymerisation or decomposition)
during carriage. If necessary, stabilisation or addition of an inhibitor shall be required.
Mixtures containing UN No. 1911 diborane, shall be filled to a pressure such that, if complete
decomposition of the diborane occurs, two thirds of the test pressure of the pressure receptacle shall not
be exceeded.
Mixtures containing UN 2192 germane, other than mixtures of up to 35 % germane in hydrogen or
nitrogen or up to 28 % germane in helium or argon, shall be filled to a pressure such that, if complete
decomposition of the germane occurs, two thirds of the test pressure of the pressure receptacle shall not
be exceeded.
Mixtures of fluorine and nitrogen with a fluorine concentration below 35 % by volume may be filled in
pressure receptacles up to a maximum allowable working pressure for which the partial pressure of
fluorine does not exceed 3.1 MPa (31 bar) absolute.
𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤 𝑝𝑝𝑤𝑤𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑤𝑤𝑝𝑝 �bar� � 31
𝑥𝑥�
� 1
in which xf = fluorine concentration in % by volume/100.
Mixtures of fluorine and inert gases with a fluorine concentration below 35 % by volume may be filled
in pressure receptacles up to a maximum allowable working pressure for which the partial pressure of
fluorine does not exceed 3.1 MPa (31 bar) absolute, additionally taking the coefficient of nitrogen
equivalency in accordance with ISO 10156:2017 into account when calculating the partial pressure.
𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤 𝑝𝑝𝑤𝑤𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑤𝑤𝑝𝑝 �bar� � 31
𝑥𝑥�
�𝑥𝑥� � �� � 𝑥𝑥� � � 1
where xf = fluorine concentration in % by volume/100;
Kk = coefficient of equivalency of an inert gas relative to nitrogen (coefficient of nitrogen
equivalency);
xk = inert gas concentration in % by volume/100.
However, the working pressure for mixtures of fluorine and inert gases shall not exceed 20 MPa (200
bar). The minimum test pressure of pressure receptacles for mixtures of fluorine and inert gases equals
1.5 times the working pressure or 20 MPa (200 bar), with the greater value to be applied.
(Cont’d on next page)
– 70 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 71 –
P200 PACKING INSTRUCTION (cont’d) P200
Requirements for substances not in Class 2
ab: Pressure receptacles shall satisfy the following conditions:
(i) The pressure test shall include an inspection of the inside of the pressure receptacles and check
of accessories;
(ii) In addition resistance to corrosion shall be checked every two years by means of suitable
instruments (e.g. ultrasound) and the condition of the accessories verified;
(iii) Wall thickness shall not be less than 3 mm.
ac: Tests and inspections shall be carried out under the supervision of an expert approved by the competent
authority.
ad: Pressure receptacles shall satisfy the following conditions:
(i) Pressure receptacles shall be designed for a design pressure of not less than 2.1 MPa (21 bar)
(gauge pressure);
(ii) In addition to the marks for refillable receptacles, the pressure receptacles shall bear the following
particulars in clearly legible and durable characters:
– The UN number and the proper shipping name of the substance according to 3.1.2;
– The maximum permitted mass when filled and the tare of the pressure receptacle, including
accessories fitted during filling, or the gross mass.
(11) The applicable requirements of this packing instruction are considered to have been complied with if the
following standards, as relevant, are applied:
Applicable
requirements Reference Title of document
(7) EN 13365:2002
+A1:2005
Transportable gas cylinders – Cylinder bundles for permanent and
liquefied gases (excluding acetylene) – Inspection at the time of
filling
(7) EN ISO
24431:2016
Gas cylinders – Seamless, welded and composite cylinders for
compressed and liquefied gases (excluding acetylene) – Inspection at
time of filling
(7) (a) ISO 10691:2004 Gas cylinders – Refillable welded steel cylinders for liquefied
petroleum gas (LPG) – Procedures for checking before, during and
after filling.
(7) (a) ISO 11755:2005 Gas cylinders – Cylinder bundles for compressed and liquefied gases
(excluding acetylene) – Inspection at time of filling
(7) (a) and (10)
p
EN ISO
11372:2011
Gas cylinders – Acetylene cylinders – Filling conditions and filling
inspection
(7) (a) and (10)
p
EN ISO
13088:2011
Gas cylinders – Acetylene cylinder bundles – Filling conditions and
filling inspection
(7) and (10) ta
(b)
EN 1439:2021 LPG equipment and accessories – Procedure for checking
transportable refillable LPG cylinders before, during and after filling
(7) and (10) ta
(b)
EN 13952:2017 LPG equipment and accessories – Filling operations for LPG
cylinders
(7) and (10) ta
(b)
EN 14794:2005 LPG equipment and accessories – Transportable refillable aluminium
cylinders for liquefied petroleum gas (LPG) – Procedure for checking
before, during and after filling
(12) An interval of 15 years for the periodic inspection of refillable welded steel cylinders may be granted in
accordance with special packing provision v (2) of paragraph (10), if the following provisions are applied.
1. General provisions
1.1 For the application of this section, the competent authority shall not delegate its tasks and duties
to Xb bodies (inspection bodies of type B) or IS (in-house inspection services) (for the definitions of Xb
and IS, see 6.2.3.6.1).
1.2 The owner of the cylinders shall apply to the competent authority for granting the 15 year interval,
and shall demonstrate that the requirements of sub-paragraphs 2, 3 and 4 are met.
(Cont’d on next page)
– 71 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 72 –
P200 PACKING INSTRUCTION (cont’d) P200
1.3 Cylinders manufactured since 1 January 1999 shall have been manufactured in conformity with
the following standards:
– EN 1442; or
– EN 13322-1; or
– Annex I, parts 1 to 3 to Council Directive 84/527/EECa
as applicable according to the table in 6.2.4.
Other cylinders manufactured before 1 January 2009 in conformity with ADR in accordance with a
technical code accepted by the national competent authority may be accepted for a 15 year interval, if
they are of equivalent safety to the provisions of ADR as applicable at the time of application.
1.4 The owner shall submit documentary evidence to the competent authority demonstrating that the
cylinders comply with the provisions of sub-paragraph 1.3. The competent authority shall verify that
these conditions are met.
1.5 The competent authority shall check whether the provisions of sub-paragraphs 2 and 3 are
fulfilled and correctly applied. If all provisions are fulfilled, it shall authorise the 15-year interval for the
cylinders. In this authorisation, the type of cylinder (as specified in the type approval) or a group of
cylinders (see Note) covered shall be clearly identified. The authorisation shall be delivered to the owner;
the competent authority shall keep a copy. The owner shall keep the documents for as long as the
cylinders are authorised for a 15 year interval.
NOTE: A group of cylinders is defined by the production dates of identical cylinders for a period,
during which the applicable provisions of ADR and of the technical code accepted by the competent
authority have not changed in their technical content. Example: Cylinders of identical design and volume
having been manufactured according to the provisions of ADR as applicable between 1 January 1985
and 31 December 1988 in combination with a technical code accepted by the competent authority
applicable for the same period, form one group in terms of the provisions of this paragraph.
1.6 The competent authority shall monitor the owner of the cylinders for compliance with the
provisions of ADR and the authorisation given as appropriate, but at least every three years or when
changes to the procedures are introduced.
2. Operational provisions
2.1 Cylinders having been granted a 15 year interval for periodic inspection shall only be filled in
filling centres applying a documented quality system to ensure that all the provisions of paragraph (7) of
this packing instruction and the requirements and responsibilities of EN 1439:2021 (or until 31
December 2024, EN 1439:2017) and EN 13952:2017 are fulfilled and correctly applied.
2.2 The competent authority shall verify that these requirements are fulfilled and check this as
appropriate, but at least every three years or when changes to the procedures are introduced.
2.3 The owner shall provide documentary evidence to the competent authority that the filling centre
complies with the provisions of sub-paragraph 2.1.
2.4 If a filling centre is situated in a different Contracting Party to ADR, the owner shall provide
additional documentary evidence that the filling centre is monitored accordingly by the competent
authority of that Contracting Party to ADR.
2.5 To prevent internal corrosion, only gases of high quality with very low potential contamination
shall be filled into the cylinders. This is deemed to be fulfilled, if the gases conform to the limitations on
corrosiveness as specified in ISO 9162:1989.
3. Provisions for qualification and periodic inspection
3.1 Cylinders of a type or group already in use, for which a 15 year interval has been granted and to
which the 15 year interval has been applied, shall be subject to a periodic inspection according to 6.2.3.5.
NOTE: For the definition of a group of cylinders, see Note to sub-paragraph 1.5.
3.2 If a cylinder with a 15-year interval fails the hydraulic pressure test during a periodic inspection
e.g. by bursting or leakage, the owner shall investigate and produce a report on the cause of the failure
and if other cylinders (e.g. of the same type or group) are affected. In the latter case, the owner shall
inform the competent authority. The competent authority shall then decide on appropriate measures and
inform the competent authorities of all other Contracting Parties to ADR accordingly.
(Cont’d on next page)
a Council directive on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to welded unalloyed steel gas
cylinders, published in the Official Journal of the European Communities No. L 300 of 19.11.1984.
– 72 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 73 –
P200 PACKING INSTRUCTION (cont’d) P200
3.3 If internal corrosion as defined in the standard applied (see sub-paragraph 1.3) has been detected,
the cylinder shall be withdrawn from use and shall not be granted any further period for filling and
carriage.
3.4 Cylinders having been granted a 15 year interval shall only be fitted with valves designed and
manufactured for a minimum 15 year period of use according to EN 13152:2001 + A1:2003,
EN 13153:2001 + A1:2003, EN ISO 14245:2010, EN ISO 14245:2019, EN ISO 14245:2021,
EN ISO 15995:2010, EN ISO 15995:2019 or EN ISO 15995:2021. After a periodic inspection, a new
valve shall be fitted to the cylinder, except that manually operated valves, which have been refurbished
or inspected according to EN 14912:2022 may be re-fitted, if they are suitable for another 15 year period
of use. Refurbishment or inspection shall only be carried out by the manufacturer of the valves or
according to his technical instruction by an enterprise qualified for such work and operating under a
documented quality system.
4. Marking
Cylinders having been granted a 15 year interval for periodic inspection in accordance with this
paragraph shall additionally be marked clearly and legibly with “P15Y”. This mark shall be removed if
the cylinder is no longer authorised for a 15 year interval.
NOTE: This mark shall not apply to cylinders subject to the transitional provision in 1.6.2.9, 1.6.2.10
or the provisions of special packing provision v (1) of paragraph (10) of this packing instruction.
(13) An interval of 15 years for the periodic inspection of seamless steel and aluminium alloy cylinders and bundles
of such cylinders may be granted in accordance with special packing provisions ua or va of paragraph (10), if
the following provisions are applied:
1. General provisions
1.1 For the application of this paragraph, the competent authority shall not delegate its tasks and
duties to Xb bodies (inspection bodies of type B) or IS (in-house inspection services) (for the definitions
of Xb and IS, see 6.2.3.6.1).
1.2 The owner of the cylinders or bundles of cylinders shall apply to the competent authority for
granting the 15 year interval, and shall demonstrate that the requirements of sub-paragraphs 2, 3 and 4
are met.
1.3 Cylinders manufactured since 1 January 1999 shall have been manufactured in conformity with
one of the following standards:
– EN 1964-1 or EN 1964-2; or
– EN 1975; or
– EN ISO 9809-1 or EN ISO 9809-2; or
– EN ISO 7866; or
– Annex I, parts 1 to 3 to Council Directive 84/525/EECb and 84/526/EECc
as applicable at the time of manufacture (see also the table in 6.2.4.1).
Other cylinders manufactured before 1 January 2009 in conformity with ADR in accordance with a
technical code accepted by the national competent authority may be accepted for a 15 year interval for
periodic inspection, if they are of equivalent safety to the provisions of ADR as applicable at the time of
application.
NOTE: This provision is considered to be fulfilled if the cylinder has been reassessed according to the
procedure for the reassessment of conformity described in Annex III of Directive 2010/35/EU of 16 June
2010 or Annex IV, Part II, of Directive 1999/36/EC of 29 April 1999.
Cylinders and bundles of cylinders marked with the United Nations packaging symbol specified in
6.2.2.7.2 (a) shall not be granted a 15 year interval for periodic inspection.
(Cont’d on next page)
b Council Directive on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to seamless, steel gas cylinders,
published in the Official Journal of the European Communities No. L 300 of 19.11.1984.
c Council Directive on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to seamless, unalloyed
aluminium and aluminium alloy gas cylinders, published in the Official Journal of the European Communities No. L 300
of 19.11.1984.
– 73 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 74 –
P200 PACKING INSTRUCTION (cont’d) P200
1.4 Bundles of cylinders shall be constructed such that contact between cylinders along the
longitudinal axis of the cylinders does not result in external corrosion. The supports and restraining straps
shall be such as to minimise the risk of corrosion to the cylinders. Shock absorbent materials used in
supports shall only be allowed if they have been treated to eliminate water absorption. Examples of
suitable materials are water resistant belting and rubber.
1.5 The owner shall submit documentary evidence to the competent authority demonstrating that the
cylinders comply with the provisions of sub-paragraph 1.3. The competent authority shall verify that
these conditions are met.
1.6 The competent authority shall check whether the provisions of sub-paragraphs 2 and 3 are
fulfilled and correctly applied. If all provisions are fulfilled, it shall authorise the 15 year interval for
periodic inspection for the cylinders or bundles of cylinders. In this authorisation a group of cylinders
(see NOTE below) covered shall be clearly identified. The authorisation shall be delivered to the owner;
the competent authority shall keep a copy. The owner shall keep the documents for as long as the
cylinders are authorised for a 15 year interval.
NOTE: A group of cylinders is defined by the production dates of identical cylinders for a period,
during which the applicable provisions of ADR and of the technical code accepted by the competent
authority have not changed in their technical content. Example: Cylinders of identical design and volume
having been manufactured according to the provisions of ADR applicable between 1 January 1985 and
31 December 1988 in combination with a technical code accepted by the competent authority applicable
for the same period form one group in terms of the provisions of this paragraph.
1.7 The owner shall ensure compliance with the provisions of ADR and the authorisation given as
appropriate and shall demonstrate this to the competent authority on request but at least every three years
or when significant changes to the procedures are introduced.
2. Operational provisions
2.1 Cylinders or bundles of cylinders having been granted a 15 year interval for periodic inspection
shall only be filled in filling centres applying a documented and certified quality system to ensure that
all the provisions of paragraph (7) of this packing instruction and the requirements and responsibilities
of EN ISO 24431:2016 or EN 13365:2002 as applicable are fulfilled and correctly applied. The quality
system, according to the ISO 9000 (series) or equivalent, shall be certified by an accredited independent
body recognized by the competent authority. This includes procedures for pre- and post-fill inspections
and the filling process for cylinders, bundles of cylinders and valves.
2.2 Aluminium alloy cylinders and bundles of such cylinders without RPVs having been granted a
15 year interval for periodic inspection shall be checked prior to every fill in accordance with a
documented procedure which shall at least include the following:
 Open the cylinder valve or the main valve of the bundle of cylinders to check for residual
pressure;
 If gas is emitted, the cylinder or bundle of cylinders may be filled;
 If no gas is emitted, the internal condition of the cylinder or bundle of cylinders shall be checked
for contamination;
 If no contamination is detected, the cylinder or bundle of cylinders may be filled.
If contamination is detected corrective action is to be carried out.
(Cont’d on next page)
– 74 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 75 –
P200 PACKING INSTRUCTION (cont’d) P200
2.3 Seamless steel cylinders fitted with RPVs and bundles of seamless steel cylinders equipped with
main valve(s) with a residual pressure device having been granted a 15 year interval for periodic
inspection shall be checked prior to every fill in accordance with a documented procedure which shall
at least include the following:
• Open the cylinder valve or bundle of cylinders main valve to check for residual pressure;
• If gas is emitted, the cylinder or bundle of cylinders may be filled;
• If no gas is emitted the functioning of the residual pressure device shall be checked;
• If the check shows that the residual pressure device has retained pressure the cylinder or bundle of
cylinders may be filled;
• If the check shows that the residual pressure device has not retained pressure, the internal condition
of the cylinder or bundle of cylinders shall be checked for contamination:
– If no contamination is detected, the cylinder or bundle of cylinders may be filled following
repair or replacement of the residual pressure device;
– If contamination is detected, a corrective action shall be carried out.
2.4 To prevent internal corrosion, only gases of high quality with very low potential contamination
shall be filled into cylinders or bundles of cylinders. This is deemed to be fulfilled, if the compatibility
of gases/material is acceptable in accordance with EN ISO 11114-1:2020 and EN ISO 11114-2:2013,
and the gas quality meets the specifications in EN ISO 14175:2008 or, for gases not covered in the
standard, a minimum purity of 99.5 % by volume and a maximum moisture content of 40 ml/m³(ppm).
For nitrous oxide the values shall be a minimum purity of 98 % by volume and a maximum moisture
content of 70 ml/m³ (ppm).
2.5 The owner shall ensure that the requirements of 2.1 to 2.4 are fulfilled and provide documentary
evidence of this to the competent authority on request, but at least every three years or when significant
changes to the procedures are introduced.
2.6 If a filling centre is situated in a different Contracting Party to ADR, the owner shall provide to
the competent authority, on request, additional documentary evidence that the filling centre is monitored
accordingly by the competent authority of that Contracting Party to ADR. See also 1.2.
3. Provisions for qualification and periodic inspection
3.1 Cylinders and bundles of cylinders already in use, for which the conditions of sub-paragraph 2
have been met from the date of the last periodic inspection to the satisfaction of the competent authority,
may have their inspection period extended to 15 years from the date of the last periodic inspection.
Otherwise the change of test period from ten to fifteen years shall be made at the time of periodic
inspection. The periodic inspection report shall indicate that this cylinder or bundle of cylinders shall be
fitted with a residual pressure device as appropriate. Other documentary evidence may be accepted by
the competent authority.
3.2 If a cylinder with a 15 year interval fails the pressure test by bursting or leakage or if a severe
defect is detected by a non-destructive test (NDT) during a periodic inspection the owner shall
investigate and produce a report on the cause of the failure and if other cylinders (e.g. of the same type
or group) are affected. In the latter case, the owner shall inform the competent authority. The competent
authority shall then decide on appropriate measures and inform the competent authorities of all other
Contracting Parties to ADR accordingly.
3.3 If internal corrosion and other defects as defined in the periodic inspection standards referenced
in 6.2.4 have been detected, the cylinder shall be withdrawn from use and shall not be granted any further
period for filling and carriage.
3.4 Cylinders or bundles of cylinders having been granted a 15 year interval for periodic inspection
shall only be fitted with valves designed and tested according to EN 849 or EN ISO 10297 as applicable
at the time of manufacture (see also the table in 6.2.4.1). After a periodic inspection a new valve shall
be fitted, except that valves which have been refurbished or inspected according to
EN ISO 22434:2022 may be re-fitted.
(Cont’d on next page)
– 75 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 76 –
P200 PACKING INSTRUCTION (cont’d) P200
4. Marking
Cylinders and bundles of cylinders having been granted a 15 year interval for periodic inspection in
accordance with this paragraph shall have the date (year) of the next periodic inspection as required in
section 5.2.1.6 (c) and at the same time additionally be marked clearly and legibly with “P15Y”. This
mark shall be removed if the cylinder or bundle of cylinders is no longer authorised for a 15 year interval
for periodic inspection.
(Cont’d on next page)
– 76 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 77 –
P200 PACKING INSTRUCTION (cont’d) P200
Table 1: COMPRESSED GASES
UN
No. Name and description
Classification code
LC₅₀ ml/m³
Cylinders
Tubes
Pressure drums
Bundles of cylinders
Test period, years a
Test pressure, bar b
Maximum working
pressure, bar b
Special packing
provisions
1002 AIR, COMPRESSED 1A X X X X 10 ua,
va
1006 ARGON, COMPRESSED 1A X X X X 10 ua,
va
1016 CARBON MONOXIDE,
COMPRESSED
1TF 3760 X X X X 5 u
1023 COAL GAS, COMPRESSED 1TF X X X X 5
1045 FLUORINE, COMPRESSED 1TOC 185 X X 5 200 30 a, k,
n, o
1046 HELIUM, COMPRESSED 1A X X X X 10 ua,
va
1049 HYDROGEN, COMPRESSED 1F X X X X 10 d,
ua,
va
1056 KRYPTON, COMPRESSED 1A X X X X 10 ua,
va
1065 NEON, COMPRESSED 1A X X X X 10 ua,
va
1066 NITROGEN, COMPRESSED 1A X X X X 10 ua,
va
1071 OIL GAS, COMPRESSED 1TF X X X X 5
1072 OXYGEN, COMPRESSED 1O X X X X 10 s, ua,
va
1612 HEXAETHYL
TETRAPHOSPHATE AND
COMPRESSED GAS MIXTURE
1T X X X X 5 z
1660 NITRIC OXIDE, COMPRESSED 1TOC 115 X X 5 225 33 k, o
1953 COMPRESSED GAS, TOXIC,
FLAMMABLE, N.O.S.
1TF  5000 X X X X 5 z
1954 COMPRESSED GAS,
FLAMMABLE, N.O.S
1F X X X X 10 z, ua,
va
1955 COMPRESSED GAS, TOXIC,
N.O.S.
1T  5000 X X X X 5 z
1956 COMPRESSED GAS, N.O.S. 1A X X X X 10 z, ua,
va
1957 DEUTERIUM, COMPRESSED 1F X X X X 10 d,
ua,
va
1964 HYDROCARBON GAS MIXTURE,
COMPRESSED, N.O.S.
1F X X X X 10 z, ua,
va
1971 METHANE, COMPRESSED or
NATURAL GAS, COMPRESSED
with high methane content
1F X X X X 10 ua,
va
– 77 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 78 –
P200 PACKING INSTRUCTION (cont’d) P200
Table 1: COMPRESSED GASES
UN
No. Name and description
Classification code
LC₅₀ ml/m³
Cylinders
Tubes
Pressure drums
Bundles of cylinders
Test period, years a
Test pressure, bar b
Maximum working
pressure, bar b
Special packing
provisions
2034 HYDROGEN AND METHANE
MIXTURE, COMPRESSED
1F X X X X 10 d,
ua,
va
2190 OXYGEN DIFLUORIDE,
COMPRESSED
1TOC 2.6 X X 5 200 30 a, k,
n, o
3156 COMPRESSED GAS, OXIDIZING,
N.O.S.
1O X X X X 10 z, ua,
va
3303 COMPRESSED GAS, TOXIC,
OXIDIZING, N.O.S.
1TO  5000 X X X X 5 z
3304 COMPRESSED GAS, TOXIC,
CORROSIVE, N.O.S.
1TC  5000 X X X X 5 z
3305 COMPRESSED GAS, TOXIC,
FLAMMABLE, CORROSIVE,
N.O.S.
1TFC  5000 X X X X 5 z
3306 COMPRESSED GAS, TOXIC,
OXIDIZING, CORROSIVE, N.O.S.
1TOC  5000 X X X X 5 z
a Not applicable for pressure receptacles made of composite materials.
b Where the entries are blank, the working pressure shall not exceed two thirds of the test pressure.
– 78 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 79 –
P200 PACKING INSTRUCTION (cont’d) P200
Table 2: LIQUEFIED GASES AND DISSOLVED GASES
UN
No. Name and description
Classification code
LC₅₀ ml/m³
Cylinders
Tubes
Pressure drums
Bundles of cylinders
Test period, years a
Test pressure, bar
Filling ratio
Special packing
provisions
1001 ACETYLENE, DISSOLVED 4F X X 10 60 c, p
1005 AMMONIA, ANHYDROUS 2TC 4000 X X X X 5 29 0.54 b, ra
1008 BORON TRIFLUORIDE 2TC 864 X X X X 5 225 0.715 a
300 0.86 a
1009 BROMOTRIFLUORO-
METHANE (REFRIGERANT
GAS R 13B1)
2A X X X X 10 42 1.13 ra
120 1.44 ra
250 1.60 ra
1010 BUTADIENES, STABILIZED
(1,2-butadiene) or
2F X X X X 10 10 0.59 ra
1010 BUTADIENES, STABILIZED
(1,3-butadiene) or
2F X X X X 10 10 0.55 ra
1010 BUTADIENES AND
HYDROCARBON MIXTURE,
STABILIZED
2F X X X X 10 10 0.50 ra, v, z
1011 BUTANE 2F X X X X 10 10 0.52 ra, v
1012 BUTYLENE (Butylenes
mixture) or
2F X X X X 10 10 0.50 ra, z
1012 BUTYLENE (1-Butylene) or 2F X X X X 10 10 0.53
1012 BUTYLENE (cis-2-Butylene)
or
2F X X X X 10 10 0.55
1012 BUTYLENE (trans-2-
Butylene)
2F X X X X 10 10 0.54
1013 CARBON DIOXIDE 2A X X X X 10 190
250
0.68
0.76
ra, ua, va
ra, ua, va
1017 CHLORINE 2TOC 293 X X X X 5 22 1.25 a, ra
1018 CHLORODIFLUORO-
METHANE (REFRIGERANT
GAS R 22)
2A X X X X 10 27 1.03 ra
1020 CHLOROPENTAFLUORO-
ETHANE (REFRIGERANT
GAS R 115)
2A X X X X 10 25 1.05 ra
1021 1-CHLORO-1,2,2,2-
TETRAFLUOROETHANE
(REFRIGERANT GAS R 124)
2A X X X X 10 11 1.20 ra
1022 CHLOROTRIFLUORO-
METHANE (REFRIGERANT
GAS R 13)
2A X X X X 10 100 0.83 ra
120 0.90 ra
190 1.04 ra
250 1.11 ra
1026 CYANOGEN 2TF 350 X X X X 5 100 0.70 ra, u
1027 CYCLOPROPANE 2F X X X X 10 18 0.55 ra
1028 DICHLORODIFLUORO-
METHANE (REFRIGERANT
GAS R 12)
2A X X X X 10 16 1.15 ra
1029 DICHLOROFLUORO-
METHANE (REFRIGERANT
GAS R 21)
2A X X X X 10 10 1.23 ra
– 79 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 80 –
P200 PACKING INSTRUCTION (cont’d) P200
Table 2: LIQUEFIED GASES AND DISSOLVED GASES
UN
No. Name and description
Classification code
LC₅₀ ml/m³
Cylinders
Tubes
Pressure drums
Bundles of cylinders
Test period, years a
Test pressure, bar
Filling ratio
Special packing
provisions
1030 1,1-DIFLUOROETHANE
(REFRIGERANT GAS R
152a)
2F X X X X 10 16 0.79 ra
1032 DIMETHYLAMINE,
ANHYDROUS
2F X X X X 10 10 0.59 b, ra
1033 DIMETHYL ETHER 2F X X X X 10 18 0.58 ra
1035 ETHANE 2F X X X X 10 95 0.25 ra
120 0.30 ra
300 0.40 ra
1036 ETHYLAMINE 2F X X X X 10 10 0.61 b, ra
1037 ETHYL CHLORIDE 2F X X X X 10 10 0.80 a, ra
1039 ETHYL METHYL ETHER 2F X X X X 10 10 0.64 ra
1040 ETHYLENE OXIDE, or
ETHYLENE OXIDE WITH
NITROGEN up to a total
pressure of 1MPa (10 bar) at
50 °C
2TF 2900 X X X X 5 15 0.78 l, ra
1041 ETHYLENE OXIDE AND
CARBON DIOXIDE
MIXTURE with more than 9 %
but not more than 87 %
ethylene oxide
2F X X X X 10 190 0.66 ra
250 0.75 ra
1043 FERTILIZER
AMMONIATING SOLUTION
with free ammonia
4A X X X 5 b, z
1048 HYDROGEN BROMIDE,
ANHYDROUS
2TC 2860 X X X X 5 60 1.51 a, d, ra
1050 HYDROGEN CHLORIDE,
ANHYDROUS
2TC 2810 X X X X 5 100 0.30 a, d, ra
120 0.56 a, d, ra
150 0.67 a, d, ra
200 0.74 a, d, ra
1053 HYDROGEN SULPHIDE 2TF 712 X X X X 5 48 0.67 d, ra, u
1055 ISOBUTYLENE 2F X X X X 10 10 0.52 ra
1058 LIQUEFIED GASES, non-
flammable, charged with
nitrogen, carbon dioxide or air
2A X X X X 10 ra, z
1060 METHYLACETYLENE AND
PROPADIENE MIXTURE,
STABILIZED
2F X X X X 10 c, ra,
z
Propadiene with 1 % to 4 %
methylacetylene
2F X X X X 10 22 0.52 c, ra
Mixture P1 2F X X X X 10 30 0.49 c, ra
Mixture P2 2F X X X X 10 24 0.47 c, ra
1061 METHYLAMINE,
ANHYDROUS
2F X X X X 10 13 0.58 b, ra
1062 METHYL BROMIDE with not
more than 2 % chloropicrin
2T 850 X X X X 5 10 1.51 a
– 80 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 81 –
P200 PACKING INSTRUCTION (cont’d) P200
Table 2: LIQUEFIED GASES AND DISSOLVED GASES
UN
No. Name and description
Classification code
LC₅₀ ml/m³
Cylinders
Tubes
Pressure drums
Bundles of cylinders
Test period, years a
Test pressure, bar
Filling ratio
Special packing
provisions
1063 METHYL CHLORIDE
(REFRIGERANT GAS R 40)
2F X X X X 10 17 0.81 a, ra
1064 METHYL MERCAPTAN 2TF 1350 X X X X 5 10 0.78 d, ra, u
1067 DINITROGEN TETROXIDE
(NITROGEN DIOXIDE)
2TOC 115 X X X 5 10 1.30 k
1069 NITROSYL CHLORIDE 2TC 35 X X 5 13 1.10 k, ra
1070 NITROUS OXIDE 2O X X X X 10 180 0.68 ua, va
225 0.74 ua, va
250 0.75 ua, va
1075 PETROLEUM GASES,
LIQUEFIED
2F X X X X 10 v, z
1076 PHOSGENE 2TC 5 X X X 5 20 1.23 a, k, ra
1077 PROPYLENE 2F X X X X 10 27 0.43 ra
1078 REFRIGERANT GAS, N.O.S. 2A X X X X 10 ra, z
Mixture F1 2A X X X X 10 12 1.23
Mixture F2 2A X X X X 10 18 1.15
Mixture F3 2A X X X X 10 29 1.03
1079 SULPHUR DIOXIDE 2TC 2520 X X X X 5 12 1.23 ra
1080 SULPHUR HEXAFLUORIDE 2A X X X X 10 70 1.06 ra, ua, va
140 1.34 ra, ua, va
160 1.38 ra, ua, va
1081 TETRAFLUOROETHYLENE,
STABILIZED
2F X X X X 10 200 m, o, ra
1082 TRIFLUOROCHLOROETHY-
LENE, STABILIZED
(REFRIGERANT GAS R1113)
2TF 2000 X X X X 5 19 1.13 ra, u
1083 TRIMETHYLAMINE,
ANHYDROUS
2F X X X X 10 10 0.56 b, ra
1085 VINYL BROMIDE,
STABILIZED
2F X X X X 10 10 1.37 a, ra
1086 VINYL CHLORIDE,
STABILIZED
2F X X X X 10 12 0.81 a, ra
1087 VINYL METHYL ETHER,
STABILIZED
2F X X X X 10 10 0.67 ra
1581 CHLOROPICRIN AND
METHYL BROMIDE
MIXTURE with more than 2 %
chloropicrin
2T 850 X X X X 5 10 1.51 a
1582 CHLOROPICRIN AND
METHYL CHLORIDE
MIXTURE
2T d X X X X 5 17 0.81 a
1589 CYANOGEN CHLORIDE,
STABILIZED
2TC 80 X X 5 20 1.03 k
1741 BORON TRICHLORIDE 2TC 2541 X X X X 5 10 1.19 a, ra
1749 CHLORINE TRIFLUORIDE 2TOC 299 X X X X 5 30 1.40 a
– 81 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 82 –
P200 PACKING INSTRUCTION (cont’d) P200
Table 2: LIQUEFIED GASES AND DISSOLVED GASES
UN
No. Name and description
Classification code
LC₅₀ ml/m³
Cylinders
Tubes
Pressure drums
Bundles of cylinders
Test period, years a
Test pressure, bar
Filling ratio
Special packing
provisions
1858 HEXAFLUOROPROPYLENE
(REFRIGERANT GAS
R 1216)
2A X X X X 10 22 1.11 ra
1859 SILICON TETRAFLUORIDE 2TC 922 X X X X 5 200 0.74 a
300 1.10 a
1860 VINYL FLUORIDE,
STABILIZED
2F X X X X 10 250 0.64 a, ra
1911 DIBORANE 2TF 80 X X 5 250 0.07 d, k, o
1912 METHYL CHLORIDE AND
METHYLENE CHLORIDE
MIXTURE
2F X X X X 10 17 0.81 a, ra
1952 ETHYLENE OXIDE AND
CARBON DIOXIDE
MIXTURE with not more than
9 % ethylene oxide
2A X X X X 10 190 0.66 ra
250 0.75 ra
1958 1,2-DICHLORO-1,1,2,2-
TETRAFLUOROETHANE
(REFRIGERANT GAS R 114)
2A X X X X 10 10 1.30 ra
1959 1,1-DIFLUOROETHYLENE
(REFRIGERANT GAS R
1132a)
2F X X X X 10 250 0.77 ra
1962 ETHYLENE 2F X X X X 10 225 0.34
300 0.38
1965 HYDROCARBON GAS
MIXTURE,
LIQUEFIED,N.O.S
2F X X X X 10 b ra, ta,
v, z
Mixture A 2F 10 10 0.50
Mixture A01 2F 10 15 0.49
Mixture A02 2F 10 15 0.48
Mixture A0 2F 10 15 0.47
Mixture A1 2F 10 20 0.46
Mixture B1 2F 10 25 0.45
Mixture B2 2F 10 25 0.44
Mixture B 2F 10 25 0.43
Mixture C 2F 10 30 0.42
1967 INSECTICIDE GAS, TOXIC,
N.O.S.
2T X X X X 5 z
1968 INSECTICIDE GAS, N.O.S. 2A X X X X 10 ra, z
1969 ISOBUTANE 2F X X X X 10 10 0.49 ra, v
1973 CHLORODIFLUOROME-
THANE AND
CHLOROPENTAFLUORO-
ETHANE MIXTURE with
fixed boiling point, with
approximately 49 %
chlorodifluoromethane
(REFRIGERANT GAS R 502)
2A X X X X 10 31 1.01 ra
– 82 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 83 –
P200 PACKING INSTRUCTION (cont’d) P200
Table 2: LIQUEFIED GASES AND DISSOLVED GASES
UN
No. Name and description
Classification code
LC₅₀ ml/m³
Cylinders
Tubes
Pressure drums
Bundles of cylinders
Test period, years a
Test pressure, bar
Filling ratio
Special packing
provisions
1974 CHLORODIFLUORO-
BROMOMETHANE
(REFRIGERANT GAS
R 12B1)
2A X X X X 10 10 1.61 ra
1975 NITRIC OXIDE AND
DINITROGEN TETROXIDE
MIXTURE (NITRIC OXIDE
AND NITROGEN DIOXIDE
MIXTURE)
2TOC 115 X X X 5 k, z
1976 OCTAFLUOROCYCLO-
BUTANE (REFRIGERANT
GAS RC 318)
2.A X X X X 10 11 1.32 ra
1978 PROPANE 2F X X X X 10 23 0.43 ra, v
1982 TETRAFLUOROMETHANE
(REFRIGERANT GAS R 14)
2A X X X X 10 200 0.71
300 0.90
1983 1-CHLORO-2,2,2-
TRIFLUOROETHANE
(REFRIGERANT GAS
R 133a)
2A X X X X 10 10 1.18 ra
1984 TRIFLUOROMETHANE
(REFRIGERANT GAS R 23)
2A X X X X 10 190 0.88 ra
250 0.96 ra
2035 1,1,1-TRIFLUOROETHANE
(REFRIGERANT GAS
R 143a)
2F X X X X 10 35 0.73 ra
2036 XENON 2A X X X X 10 130 1.28
2044 2,2-DIMETHYLPROPANE 2F X X X X 10 10 0.53 ra
2073 AMMONIA SOLUTION,
relative density less than 0.880
at 15 °C in water,
4A
with more than 35 % but not
more than 40 % ammonia
4A X X X X 5 10 0.80 b
with more than 40 % but not
more than 50 % ammonia
4A X X X X 5 12 0.77 b
2188 ARSINE 2TF 178 X X 5 42 1.10 d, k
2189 DICHLOROSILANE 2TFC 314 X X X X 5 10 0.90 a
200 1.08 a
2191 SULPHURYL FLUORIDE 2T 3020 X X X X 5 50 1.10 u
2192 GERMANE c 2TF 620 X X X X 5 250 0.064 d, ra, r, q
2193 HEXAFLUOROETHANE
(REFRIGERANT GAS R 116)
2A X X X X 10 200 1.13
2194 SELENIUM
HEXAFLUORIDE
2TC 50 X X 5 36 1.46 k, ra
2195 TELLURIUM
HEXAFLUORIDE
2TC 25 X X 5 20 1.00 k, ra
2196 TUNGSTEN
HEXAFLUORIDE
2TC 218 X X X X 5 10 3.08 a, ra
2197 HYDROGEN IODIDE,
ANHYDROUS
2TC 2860 X X X X 5 23 2.25 a, d, ra
– 83 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 84 –
P200 PACKING INSTRUCTION (cont’d) P200
Table 2: LIQUEFIED GASES AND DISSOLVED GASES
UN
No. Name and description
Classification code
LC₅₀ ml/m³
Cylinders
Tubes
Pressure drums
Bundles of cylinders
Test period, years a
Test pressure, bar
Filling ratio
Special packing
provisions
2198 PHOSPHORUS
PENTAFLUORIDE
2TC 261 X X X X 5 200 0.90
300 1.25
2199 PHOSPHINE c 2TF 20 X X 5 225 0.30 d, k, q, ra
250 0.45 d, k, q, ra
2200 PROPADIENE, STABILIZED 2F X X X X 10 22 0.50 ra
2202 HYDROGEN SELENIDE,
ANHYDROUS
2TF 51 X X 5 31 1.60 k
2203 SILANE c 2F X X X X 10 225 0.32 q
250 0.36 q
2204 CARBONYL SULPHIDE 2TF 1700 X X X X 5 30 0.87 ra, u
2417 CARBONYL FLUORIDE 2TC 360 X X X X 5 200 0.47
300 0.70
2418 SULPHUR
TETRAFLUORIDE
2TC 40 X X 5 30 0.91 a, k, ra
2419 BROMOTRIFLUORO-
ETHYLENE
2F X X X X 10 10 1.19 ra
2420 HEXAFLUOROACETONE 2TC 470 X X X X 5 22 1.08 ra
2421 NITROGEN TRIOXIDE 2TOC CARRIAGE PROHIBITED
2422 OCTAFLUOROBUT-2-ENE
(REFRIGERANT
GAS R 1318)
2A X X X X 10 12 1.34 ra
2424 OCTAFLUOROPROPANE
(REFRIGERANT GAS R 218)
2A X X X X 10 25 1.04 ra
2451 NITROGEN TRIFLUORIDE 2O X X X X 10 200 0.50
2452 ETHYLACETYLENE,
STABILIZED
2F X X X X 10 10 0.57 c, ra
2453 ETHYL FLUORIDE
(REFRIGERANT GAS R 161)
2F X X X X 10 30 0.57 ra
2454 METHYL FLUORIDE
(REFRIGERANT GAS R 41)
2F X X X X 10 300 0.63 ra
2455 METHYL NITRITE 2A CARRIAGE PROHIBITED
2517 1-CHLORO-1,1-
DIFLUOROETHANE
(REFRIGERANT GAS
R 142b)
2F X X X X 10 10 0.99 ra
2534 METHYLCHLOROSILANE 2TFC 2810 X X X X 5 ra, z
2548 CHLORINE
PENTAFLUORIDE
2TOC 122 X X 5 13 1.49 a, k
2599 CHLOROTRIFLUORO-
METHANE AND
TRIFLUOROMETHANE
AZEOTROPIC MIXTURE
with approximately 60 %
chlorotrifluoromethane
(REFRIGERANT GAS R 503)
2A X X X X 10 31 0.12 ra
42 0.17 ra
100 0.64 ra
2601 CYCLOBUTANE 2F X X X X 10 10 0.63 ra
– 84 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 85 –
P200 PACKING INSTRUCTION (cont’d) P200
Table 2: LIQUEFIED GASES AND DISSOLVED GASES
UN
No. Name and description
Classification code
LC₅₀ ml/m³
Cylinders
Tubes
Pressure drums
Bundles of cylinders
Test period, years a
Test pressure, bar
Filling ratio
Special packing
provisions
2602 DICHLORODIFLUORO-
METHANE AND
DIFLUOROETHANE
AZEOTROPIC MIXTURE
with approximately 74 %
dichlorodifluoromethane
(REFRIGERANT GAS R 500)
2A X X X X 10 22 1.01 ra
2676 STIBINE 2TF 178 X X 5 200 0.49 k, ra, r
2901 BROMINE CHLORIDE 2TOC 290 X X X X 5 10 1.50 a
3057 TRIFLUOROACETYL
CHLORIDE
2TC 10 X X X 5 17 1.17 k, ra
3070 ETHYLENE OXIDE AND
DICHLORODIFLUORO-
METHANE MIXTURE with
not more than 12,5 % ethylene
oxide
2A X X X X 10 18 1.09 ra
3083 PERCHLORYL FLUORIDE 2TO 770 X X X X 5 33 1.21 u
3153 PERFLUORO(METHYL
VINYL ETHER)
2F X X X X 10 20 0.75 ra
3154 PERFLUORO(ETHYL VINYL
ETHER)
2F X X X X 10 10 0.98 ra
3157 LIQUEFIED GAS,
OXIDIZING, N.O.S.
2O X X X X 10 z
3159 1,1,1,2-
TETRAFLUOROETHANE
(REFRIGERANT GAS R
134a)
2A X X X X 10 18 1.05 ra
3160 LIQUEFIED GAS, TOXIC,
FLAMMABLE, N.O.S.
2TF  5000 X X X X 5 ra, z
3161 LIQUEFIED GAS,
FLAMMABLE, N.O.S.
2F X X X X 10 ra, z
3162 LIQUEFIED GAS, TOXIC,
N.O.S.
2T  5000 X X X X 5 z
3163 LIQUEFIED GAS, N.O.S. 2A X X X X 10 ra, z
3220 PENTAFLUOROETHANE
(REFRIGERANT GAS R 125)
2A X X X X 10 49 0.95 ra
35 0.87 ra
3252 DIFLUOROMETHANE
(REFRIGERANT GAS R 32)
2F X X X X 10 48 0.78 ra
3296 HEPTAFLUOROPROPANE
(REFRIGERANT GAS R 227)
2A X X X X 10 13 1.21 ra
3297 ETHYLENE OXIDE AND
CHLOROTETRAFLUORO-
ETHANE MIXTURE with not
more than 8.8 % ethylene oxide
2A X X X X 10 10 1.16 ra
3298 ETHYLENE OXIDE AND
PENTAFLUOROETHANE
MIXTURE with not more than
7.9 % ethylene oxide
2A X X X X 10 26 1.02 ra
– 85 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 86 –
P200 PACKING INSTRUCTION (cont’d) P200
Table 2: LIQUEFIED GASES AND DISSOLVED GASES
UN
No. Name and description
Classification code
LC₅₀ ml/m³
Cylinders
Tubes
Pressure drums
Bundles of cylinders
Test period, years a
Test pressure, bar
Filling ratio
Special packing
provisions
3299 ETHYLENE OXIDE AND
TETRAFLUOROETHANE
MIXTURE with not more than
5.6 % ethylene oxide
2A X X X X 10 17 1.03 ra
3300 ETHYLENE OXIDE AND
CARBON DIOXIDE
MIXTURE with more than
87 % ethylene oxide
2TF More
than
2900
X X X X 5 28 0.73 ra
3307 LIQUEFIED GAS, TOXIC,
OXIDIZING, N.O.S.
2TO  5000 X X X X 5 z
3308 LIQUEFIED GAS, TOXIC,
CORROSIVE, N.O.S.
2TC  5000 X X X X 5 ra, z
3309 LIQUEFIED GAS, TOXIC,
FLAMMABLE, CORROSIVE,
N.O.S.
2TFC  5000 X X X X 5 ra, z
3310 LIQUEFIED GAS, TOXIC,
OXIDIZING, CORROSIVE,
N.O.S.
2TOC  5000 X X X X 5 z
3318 AMMONIA SOLUTION,
relative density less than 0.880
at 15 °C in water, with more
than 50 % ammonia
4TC X X X X 5 b
3337 REFRIGERANT GAS R 404A
(Pentafluoroethane, 1,1,1-
trifluoroethane, and 1,1,1,2-
tetrafluoroethane zeotropic
mixture with approximately
44 % pentafluoroethane and
52 % 1,1,1-trifluoroethane)
2A X X X X 10 36 0.82 ra
3338 REFRIGERANT GAS R 407A
(Difluoromethane,
pentafluoroethane, and 1,1,1,2-
tetrafluoroethane zeotropic
mixture with approximately
20 % difluoromethane and
40 % pentafluoroethane)
2A X X X X 10 32 0.94 ra
3339 REFRIGERANT GAS R 407B
(Difluoromethane,
pentafluoroethane, and 1,1,1,2-
tetrafluoroethane zeotropic
mixture with approximately
10 % difluoromethane and
70 % pentafluoroethane
2A X X X X 10 33 0.93 ra
3340 REFRIGERANT GAS R 407C
(Difluoromethane,
pentafluoroethane, and 1,1,1,2-
tetrafluoroethane zeotropic
mixture with approximately
23 % difluoromethane and
25 % pentafluoroethane)
2A X X X X 10 30 0.95 ra
– 86 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 87 –
P200 PACKING INSTRUCTION (cont’d) P200
Table 2: LIQUEFIED GASES AND DISSOLVED GASES
UN
No. Name and description
Classification code
LC₅₀ ml/m³
Cylinders
Tubes
Pressure drums
Bundles of cylinders
Test period, years a
Test pressure, bar
Filling ratio
Special packing
provisions
3354 INSECTICIDE GAS,
FLAMMABLE, N.O.S
2F X X X X 10 ra, z
3355 INSECTICIDE GAS, TOXIC,
FLAMMABLE, N.O.S.
2TF X X X X 5 ra, z
3374 ACETYLENE, SOLVENT
FREE
2F X X 5 60 c, p
a Not applicable for pressure receptacles made of composite materials.
b For mixtures of UN No. 1965, the maximum permissible filling mass per litre of capacity is as follows:
c Considered as pyrophoric.
d Considered to be toxic. The LC₅₀ value still to be determined.
C
B
B2
B1
A1
A0
A02
A01
A
0.42
0.43
0.44
0.45
0.46
0.47
0.48
0.49
0.50
0.440 0.450 0.463 0.474 0.485 0.495 0.505 0.516 0.525
Maximum permissible mass of
contents per litre of capacity
Density at 50 °C in kg/l
Commercial butane
Commercial
propane
– 87 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 88 –
P200 PACKING INSTRUCTION (cont’d) P200
Table 3: SUBSTANCES NOT IN CLASS 2
UN
No. Name and description
Class
Classification Code
LC₅₀ ml/m³
Cylinders
Tubes
Pressure drums
Bundles of cylinders
Test period, years a
Test pressure, bar
Filling ratio
Special packing
provisions
1051 HYDROGEN CYANIDE,
STABILIZED containing less
than 3 % water
6.1 TF1 40 X X 5 100 0.55 k
1052 HYDROGEN FLUORIDE,
ANHYDROUS
8 CT1 1307 X X X 5 10 0.84 a, ab,
ac
1745 BROMINE
PENTAFLUORIDE
5.1 OTC 25 X X X 5 10 b k, ab,
ad
1746 BROMINE TRIFLUORIDE 5.1 OTC 50 X X X 5 10 b k, ab,
ad
2495 IODINE PENTAFLUORIDE 5.1 OTC 120 X X X 5 10 b k, ab,
ad
a Not applicable for pressure receptacles made of composite materials.
b A minimum ullage of 8 % by volume is required.
P201 PACKING INSTRUCTION P201
This instruction applies to UN Nos. 3167, 3168 and 3169.
The following packagings are authorized:
(1) Cylinders and gas receptacles conforming to the construction, testing and filling requirements approved by the
competent authority.
(2) The following combination packagings provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
Outer packagings:
Drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G);
Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2);
Jerricans (3A1, 3A2, 3B1, 3B2, 3H1, 3H2).
Inner packagings:
(a) For non-toxic gases, hermetically sealed inner packagings of glass or metal with a maximum capacity of
5 litres per package;
(b) For toxic gases, hermetically sealed inner packagings of glass or metal with a maximum capacity of 1
litre per package.
Packagings shall conform to the packing group III performance level.
– 88 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 89 –
P202 PACKING INSTRUCTION P202
(Reserved)
P203 PACKING INSTRUCTION P203
This instruction applies to Class 2 refrigerated liquefied gases.
Requirements for closed cryogenic receptacles:
(1) The special packing provisions of 4.1.6 shall be met.
(2) The requirements of Chapter 6.2 shall be met.
(3) The closed cryogenic receptacles shall be so insulated that they do not become coated with frost.
(4) Test pressure
Refrigerated liquids shall be filled in closed cryogenic receptacles with the following minimum test pressures:
(a) For closed cryogenic receptacles with vacuum insulation, the test pressure shall not be less than 1.3 times
the sum of the maximum internal pressure of the filled receptacle, including during filling and discharge,
plus 100 kPa (1 bar);
(b) For other closed cryogenic receptacles, the test pressure shall be not less than 1.3 times the maximum
internal pressure of the filled receptacle, taking into account the pressure developed during filling and
discharge.
(5) Degree of filling
For non-flammable, non-toxic refrigerated liquefied gases (classification codes 3A and 3O) the volume of liquid
phase at the filling temperature and at a pressure of 100 kPa (1 bar) shall not exceed 98 % of the water capacity
of the pressure receptacle.
For flammable refrigerated liquefied gases (classification code 3F) the degree of filling shall remain below the
level at which, if the contents were raised to the temperature at which the vapour pressure equalled the opening
pressure of the relief valve, the volume of the liquid phase would reach 98 % of the water capacity at that
temperature.
(6) Pressure-relief devices
Closed cryogenic receptacles shall be fitted with at least one pressure-relief device.
(7) Compatibility
Materials used to ensure the leakproofness of the joints or for the maintenance of the closures shall be compatible
with the contents. In the case of receptacles intended for the carriage of oxidizing gases (classification code 3O),
these materials shall not react with these gases in a dangerous manner.
(8) Periodic inspection
(a) The periodic inspection and test frequencies of pressure relief valves in accordance with 6.2.1.6.3 shall not
exceed five years.
(b) The periodic inspection and test frequencies of non-UN closed cryogenic receptacles in accordance with
6.2.3.5.2 shall not exceed 10 years.
(Cont’d on next page)
– 89 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 90 –
P203 PACKING INSTRUCTION (cont’d) P203
Requirements for open cryogenic receptacles:
Only the following non oxidizing refrigerated liquefied gases of classification code 3A may be carried in open cryogenic
receptacles: UN Nos. 1913, 1951, 1963, 1970, 1977, 2591, 3136 and 3158.
Open cryogenic receptacles shall be constructed to meet the following requirements:
(1) The receptacles shall be designed, manufactured, tested and equipped in such a way as to withstand all conditions,
including fatigue, to which they will be subjected during their normal use and during normal conditions of
carriage.
(2) The capacity shall be not more than 450 litres.
(3) The receptacle shall have a double wall construction with the space between the inner and outer wall being
evacuated (vacuum insulation). The insulation shall prevent the formation of hoar frost on the exterior of the
receptacle.
(4) The materials of construction shall have suitable mechanical properties at the service temperature.
(5) Materials which are in direct contact with the dangerous goods shall not be affected or weakened by the dangerous
goods intended to be carried and shall not cause a dangerous effect, e.g. catalysing a reaction or reacting with the
dangerous goods.
(6) Receptacles of glass double wall construction shall have an outer packaging with suitable cushioning or absorbent
materials which withstand the pressures and impacts liable to occur under normal conditions of carriage.
(7) The receptacle shall be designed to remain in an upright position during carriage, e.g. have a base whose smaller
horizontal dimension is greater than the height of the centre of gravity when filled to capacity or be mounted on
gimbals.
(8) The openings of the receptacles shall be fitted with devices allowing gases to escape, preventing any splashing
out of liquid, and so configured that they remain in place during carriage.
(9) Open cryogenic receptacles shall bear the following marks permanently affixed e.g. by stamping, engraving or
etching:
– The manufacturer’s name and address;
– The model number or name;
– The serial or batch number;
– The UN number and proper shipping name of gases for which the receptacle is intended;
– The capacity of the receptacle in litres.
P204 PACKING INSTRUCTION P204
(Deleted)
P205 PACKING INSTRUCTION P205
This instruction applies to UN No. 3468.
(1) For metal hydride storage systems, the special packing provisions of 4.1.6 shall be met.
(2) Only pressure receptacles not exceeding 150 litres in water capacity and having a maximum developed pressure
not exceeding 25 MPa are covered by this packing instruction.
(3) Metal hydride storage systems meeting the applicable requirements for the construction and testing of pressure
receptacles containing gas of Chapter 6.2 are authorised for the carriage of hydrogen only.
(4) When steel pressure receptacles or composite pressure receptacles with steel liners are used, only those bearing
the “H” mark, in accordance with 6.2.2.9.2 (j) shall be used.
(5) Metal hydride storage systems shall meet the service conditions, design criteria, rated capacity, type tests, batch
tests, routine tests, test pressure, rated charging pressure and provisions for pressure relief devices for
transportable metal hydride storage systems specified in ISO 16111:2008 or ISO 16111:2018 (Transportable
gas storage devices – Hydrogen absorbed in reversible metal hydride) and their conformity and approval shall
be assessed in accordance with 6.2.2.5.
(6) Metal hydride storage systems shall be filled with hydrogen at a pressure not exceeding the rated charging
pressure shown in the permanent mark on the system as specified by ISO 16111:2008 or ISO 16111:2018.
(7) The periodic test requirements for a metal hydride storage system shall be in accordance with ISO 16111:2008
or ISO 16111:2018 and carried out in accordance with 6.2.2.6, and the interval between periodic inspections
shall not exceed five years. See 6.2.2.4 to determine which standard is applicable at the time of periodic
inspection and test.
– 90 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 91 –
P206 PACKING INSTRUCTION P206
This instruction applies to UN Nos. 3500, 3501, 3502, 3503, 3504 and 3505.
Unless otherwise indicated in ADR, cylinders and pressure drums conforming to the applicable requirements of Chapter
6.2 are authorized.
(1) The special packing provisions of 4.1.6 shall be met.
(2) The maximum test period for periodic inspection shall be 5 years.
(3) Cylinders and pressure drums shall be so filled that at 50 °C the non-gaseous phase does not exceed 95 % of their
water capacity and they are not completely filled at 60 °C. When filled, the internal pressure at 65 °C shall not
exceed the test pressure of the cylinders and pressure drums. The vapour pressures and volumetric expansion of
all substances in the cylinders and pressure drums shall be taken into account.
For liquids charged with a compressed gas both components – the liquid and the compressed gas – have to be
taken into consideration in the calculation of the internal pressure in the pressure receptacle. When experimental
data is not available, the following steps shall be carried out:
(a) Calculation of the vapour pressure of the liquid and of the partial pressure of the compressed gas at 15 °C
(filling temperature);
(b) Calculation of the volumetric expansion of the liquid phase resulting from the heating from 15 °C to 65 °C
and calculation of the remaining volume for the gaseous phase;
(c) Calculation of the partial pressure of the compressed gas at 65 °C considering the volumetric expansion of
the liquid phase;
NOTE: The compressibility factor of the compressed gas at 15 °C and 65 °C shall be considered.
(d) Calculation of the vapour pressure of the liquid at 65 °C;
(e) The total pressure is the sum of the vapour pressure of the liquid and the partial pressure of the compressed
gas at 65 °C;
(f) Consideration of the solubility of the compressed gas at 65 °C in the liquid phase.
The test pressure of the cylinders or pressure drums shall not be less than the calculated total pressure minus
100 kPa (1bar).
If the solubility of the compressed gas in the liquid phase is not known for the calculation, the test pressure can
be calculated without taking the gas solubility (sub-paragraph (f)) into account.
(4) The minimum test pressure shall be in accordance with packing instruction P200 for the propellant but shall not
be less than 20 bar.
Additional requirement:
Cylinders and pressure drums shall not be offered for carriage when connected with spray application equipment such
as a hose and wand assembly.
Special packing provisions:
PP89 For UN Nos. 3501, 3502, 3503, 3504 and 3505, notwithstanding 4.1.6.9 (b), non-refillable cylinders used may
have a water capacity in litres not exceeding 1 000 litres divided by the test pressure expressed in bars provided
capacity and pressure restrictions of the construction standard comply with ISO 11118:1999, which limits the
maximum capacity to 50 litres.
PP97 For fire extinguishing agents assigned to UN No. 3500 the maximum test period for periodic inspection shall
be 10 years. They may be carried in tubes of a maximum water capacity of 450 l conforming to the applicable
requirements of Chapter 6.2.
– 91 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 92 –
P207 PACKING INSTRUCTION P207
This instruction applies to UN No. 1950.
The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
(a) Drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G);
Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2).
Packagings shall conform to the packing group II performance level.
(b) Rigid outer packagings with a maximum net mass as follows:
Fibreboard 55 kg
Other than fibreboard 125 kg
The provisions of 4.1.1.3 need not be met.
The packagings shall be designed and constructed to prevent excessive movement of the aerosols and inadvertent
discharge during normal conditions of carriage.
Special packing provision:
PP87 For UN 1950 waste aerosols carried in accordance with special provision 327, the packagings shall have a means
of retaining any free liquid that might escape during carriage, e.g. absorbent material. The packagings shall be
adequately ventilated to prevent the creation of dangerous atmospheres and the build-up of pressure.
Special packing provision specific to RID and ADR:
RR6 For UN 1950 in the case of carriage by full load, metal articles may also be packed as follows: The articles shall
be grouped together in units on trays and held in position with an appropriate plastics cover; these units shall be
stacked and suitably secured on pallets.
– 92 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 93 –
P208 PACKING INSTRUCTION P208
This instruction applies to Class 2 adsorbed gases.
(1) The following packagings are authorized provided the general packing requirements of 4.1.6.1 are met:
Cylinders specified in Chapter 6.2 and in accordance with ISO 11513:2011, ISO 11513:2019, ISO 9809-1:2010
or ISO 9809-1:2019.
(2) The pressure of each filled cylinder shall be less than 101.3 kPa at 20 C and less than 300 kPa at 50 C.
(3) The minimum test pressure of the cylinder shall be 21 bar.
(4) The minimum burst pressure of the cylinder shall be 94.5 bar.
(5) The internal pressure at 65 C of the filled cylinder shall not exceed the test pressure of the cylinder.
(6) The adsorbent material shall be compatible with the cylinder and shall not form harmful or dangerous
compounds with the gas to be adsorbed. The gas in combination with the adsorbent material shall not affect or
weaken the cylinder or cause a dangerous reaction (e.g. a catalyzing reaction).
(7) The quality of the adsorbent material shall be verified at the time of each fill to ensure that the pressure and
chemical stability requirements of this packing instruction are met each time an adsorbed gas package is offered
for carriage.
(8) The adsorbent material shall not meet the criteria of any of the classes in ADR.
(9) Requirements for cylinders and closures containing toxic gases with an LC₅₀ less than or equal to 200 ml/m³
(ppm) (see Table 1) shall be as follows:
(a) Valve outlets shall be fitted with pressure retaining gas-tight plugs or caps having threads matching those
of the valve outlets.
(b) Each valve shall either be of the packless type with non-perforated diaphragm, or be of a type which
prevents leakage through or past the packing.
(c) Each cylinder and closure shall be tested for leakage after filling.
(d) Each valve shall be capable of withstanding the test pressure of the cylinder and be directly connected to
the cylinder by either a taper-thread or other means which meets the requirements of ISO 10692-2:2001.
(e) Cylinders and valves shall not be fitted with a pressure relief device.
(10) Valve outlets for cylinders containing pyrophoric gases shall be fitted with gas-tight plugs or caps having
threads matching those of the valve outlets.
(11) The filling procedure shall be in accordance with Annex A of ISO 11513:2011 (applicable until 31 December
2024) or Annex A of ISO 11513:2019.
(12) The maximum period for periodic inspections shall be 5 years.
(13) Special packing provisions that are specific to a substance (see Table 1).
Material compatibility
a: Aluminium alloy cylinders shall not be used.
d: When steel cylinders are used, only those bearing the “H” mark in accordance with 6.2.2.7.4 (p) are
permitted.
Gas specific provisions
r: The filling of this gas shall be limited such that, if complete decomposition occurs, the pressure does not
exceed two thirds of the test pressure of the cylinder.
Material compatibility for n.o.s. adsorbed gas entries
z: The construction materials of the cylinders and their accessories shall be compatible with the contents and
shall not react to form harmful or dangerous compounds therewith.
(Cont’d on next page)
– 93 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 94 –
P208 PACKING INSTRUCTION (cont’d) P208
Table 1: ADSORBED GASES
UN
No. Name and description Classification
code
LC₅₀
ml/m³
Special
packing
provisions
3510 ADSORBED GAS, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S. 9F z
3511 ADSORBED GAS, N.O.S. 9A z
3512 ADSORBED GAS, TOXIC, N.O.S. 9T ≤ 5000 z
3513 ADSORBED GAS, OXIDIZING, N.O.S. 9O z
3514 ADSORBED GAS, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S. 9TF ≤ 5000 z
3515 ADSORBED GAS, TOXIC, OXIDIZING, N.O.S. 9TO ≤ 5000 z
3516 ADSORBED GAS, TOXIC, CORROSIVE, N.O.S. 9TC ≤ 5000 z
3517 ADSORBED GAS, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE, CORROSIVE,
N.O.S. 9TFC ≤ 5000 z
3518 ADSORBED GAS, TOXIC, OXIDIZING, CORROSIVE,
N.O.S. 9TOC ≤ 5000 z
3519 BORON TRIFLUORIDE, ADSORBED 9TC 387 a
3520 CHLORINE, ADSORBED 9TOC 293 a
3521 SILICON TETRAFLUORIDE, ADSORBED 9TC 450 a
3522 ARSINE, ADSORBED 9TF 20 d
3523 GERMANE, ADSORBED 9TF 620 d, r
3524 PHOSPHORUS PENTAFLUORIDE, ADSORBED 9TC 190
3525 PHOSPHINE, ADSORBED 9TF 20 d
3526 HYDROGEN SELENIDE, ADSORBED 9TF 2
P209 PACKING INSTRUCTION P209
This packing instruction applies to UN No. 3150 devices, small, hydrocarbon gas powered or hydrocarbon gas refills
for small devices
(1) The special packing provisions of 4.1.6 when applicable shall be met.
(2) The articles shall comply with the provisions of the country in which they were filled.
(3) The devices and refills shall be packed in outer packagings conforming to 6.1.4 tested and approved in
accordance with Chapter 6.1 for packing group II.
P300 PACKING INSTRUCTION P300
This instruction applies to UN No. 3064.
The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
Combination packagings consisting of inner metal cans of not more than 1 litre capacity each and outer wooden boxes
(4C1, 4C2, 4D or 4F) containing not more than 5 litres of solution.
Additional requirements:
1. Metal cans shall be completely surrounded with absorbent cushioning material.
2. Wooden boxes shall be completely lined with suitable material impervious to water and nitroglycerin.
– 94 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 95 –
P301 PACKING INSTRUCTION P301
This instruction applies to UN No. 3165.
The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
(1) Aluminium pressure receptacle made from tubing and having welded heads.
Primary containment of the fuel within this receptacle shall consist of a welded aluminium bladder having a
maximum internal volume of 46 litres.
The outer receptacle shall have a minimum design gauge pressure of 1 275 kPa and a minimum burst gauge
pressure of 2 755 kPa.
Each receptacle shall be leak checked during manufacture and before dispatch and shall be found leakproof.
The complete inner unit shall be securely packed in non-combustible cushioning material, such as vermiculite,
in a strong outer tightly closed metal packaging which will adequately protect all fittings.
Maximum quantity of fuel per primary containment and package is 42 litres.
(2) Aluminium pressure receptacle.
Primary containment of the fuel within this receptacle shall consist of a welded vapour tight fuel compartment
with an elastomeric bladder having a maximum internal volume of 46 litres.
The pressure receptacle shall have a minimum design gauge pressure of 2 860 kPa and a minimum burst
gauge pressure of 5 170 kPa.
Each receptacle shall be leak-checked during manufacture and before dispatch and shall be securely packed
in non-combustible cushioning material such as vermiculite, in a strong outer tightly closed metal packaging
which will adequately protect all fittings.
Maximum quantity of fuel per primary containment and package is 42 litres.
P302 PACKING INSTRUCTION P302
This instruction applies to UN No. 3269.
The following combination packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
Outer packagings:
Drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G);
Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2);
Jerricans (3A1, 3A2, 3B1, 3B2, 3H1, 3H2);
Inner packagings:
The activator (organic peroxide) shall have a maximum quantity of 125 ml per inner packaging if liquid,
and 500 g per inner packaging if solid.
The base material and the activator shall be each separately packed in inner packagings.
The components may be placed in the same outer packaging provided that they will not interact dangerously in the
event of a leakage.
Packagings shall conform to the packing group II or III performance level according to the criteria for Class 3 applied
to the base material.
– 95 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 96 –
P400 PACKING INSTRUCTION P400
The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
(1) Pressure receptacles, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.3.6 are met. They shall be made of steel and
shall be subjected to an initial test and periodic tests every 10 years at a pressure of not less than 1 MPa (10
bar, gauge pressure). During carriage, the liquid shall be under a layer of inert gas with a gauge pressure of not
less than 20 kPa (0.2 bar);
(2) Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F or 4G), drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1D or 1G) or jerricans
(3A1, 3A2, 3B1 or 3B2) enclosing hermetically sealed metal cans with inner packagings of glass or metal,
with a capacity of not more than 1 litre each, having closures with gaskets. Inner packagings shall have
threaded closures or closures physically held in place by any means capable of preventing back-off or
loosening of the closure by impact or vibration during carriage. Inner packagings shall be cushioned on all
sides with dry, absorbent, non-combustible material in a quantity sufficient to absorb the entire contents. Inner
packagings shall not be filled to more than 90 % of their capacity. Outer packagings shall have a maximum
net mass of 125 kg;
(3) Steel, aluminium or metal drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1 or 1N2), jerricans (3A1, 3A2, 3B1 or 3B2) or
boxes (4A, 4B or 4N) with a maximum net mass of 150 kg each with hermetically sealed inner metal cans not
more than 4 litre capacity each, with closures fitted with gaskets. Inner packagings shall have threaded closures
or closures physically held in place by any means capable of preventing back-off or loosening of the closure
by impact or vibration during carriage. Inner packagings shall be cushioned on all sides with dry, absorbent,
non-combustible material in a quantity sufficient to absorb the entire contents. Each layer of inner packagings
shall be separated by a dividing partition in addition to cushioning material. Inner packagings shall not be filled
to more than 90 % of their capacity.
Special packing provision:
PP86 For UN Nos. 3392 and 3394, air shall be eliminated from the vapour space by nitrogen or other means.
P401 PACKING INSTRUCTION P401
The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
(1) Pressure receptacles, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.3.6 are met. They shall be made of steel and
subjected to an initial test and periodic tests every 10 years at a pressure of not less than 0.6 MPa (6 bar, gauge
pressure). During carriage, the liquid shall be under a layer of inert gas with a gauge pressure of not less than 20
kPa (0.2 bar);
(2) Combination packagings:
Outer packagings:
Drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G);
Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2);
Jerricans (3A1, 3A2, 3B1, 3B2, 3H1, 3H2).
Inner packagings:
Glass, metal or plastics which have threaded closures with a maximum capacity of 1 litre.
Each inner packaging shall be surrounded by inert cushioning and absorbent material in a quantity sufficient to
absorb the entire contents.
The maximum net mass per outer packaging shall not exceed 30 kg.
Special packing provision specific to RID and ADR:
RR7 For UN Nos. 1183, 1242, 1295 and 2988, the pressure receptacles shall however be subjected to the tests every
five years.
– 96 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 97 –
P402 PACKING INSTRUCTION P402
The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
(1) Pressure receptacles, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.3.6 are met. They shall be made of steel and
subjected to an initial test and periodic tests every 10 years at a pressure of not less than 0.6 MPa (6 bar, gauge
pressure). During carriage, the liquid shall be under a layer of inert gas with a gauge pressure of not less than
20 kPa (0.2 bar);
(2) Combination packagings:
Outer packagings:
Drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G);
Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2);
Jerricans (3A1, 3A2, 3B1, 3B2, 3H1, 3H2).
Inner packagings with a maximum net mass as follows:
Glass 10 kg
Metal or plastics 15 kg
Each inner packaging shall be fitted with threaded closures.
Each inner packaging shall be surrounded by inert cushioning and absorbent material in a quantity sufficient to
absorb the entire contents.
The maximum net mass per outer packaging shall not exceed 125 kg.
(3) Steel drums (1A1) with a maximum capacity of 250 litres;
(4) Composite packagings consisting of a plastics receptacle with outer steel drum or aluminium (6HA1 or 6HB1)
with a maximum capacity of 250 litres.
Special packing provisions specific to RID and ADR:
RR4 For UN No. 3130, the openings of receptacles shall be tightly closed by means of two devices in series, one of
which shall be screwed or secured in an equivalent manner.
RR7 For UN No. 3129, the pressure receptacles shall however be subjected to the tests every five years.
RR8 For UN Nos. 1389, 1391, 1411, 1421, 1928, 3129, 3130, 3148 and 3482, the pressure receptacles shall however
be subjected to an initial test and to periodic tests at a pressure of not less than 1 MPa (10 bar).
– 97 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 98 –
P403 PACKING INSTRUCTION P403
The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
Combination packagings: Maximum
net massInner packagings Outer packagings
Glass 2 kg Drums
Plastics 15 kg steel (1A1, 1A2) 400 kg
Metal 20 kg aluminium (1B1, 1B2) 400 kg
other metal (1N1, 1N2) 400 kg
Inner packagings shall be
hermetically sealed (e.g. by
taping or by threaded
closures).
plastics (1H1, 1H2) 400 kg
plywood (1D) 400 kg
fibre (1G) 400 kg
Boxes
steel (4A) 400 kg
aluminium (4B) 400 kg
other metal (4N) 400 kg
natural wood (4C1) 250 kg
natural wood with sift proof walls (4C2) 250 kg
plywood (4D) 250 kg
reconstituted wood (4F) 125 kg
fibreboard (4G) 125 kg
expanded plastics (4H1) 60 kg
solid plastics (4H2) 250 kg
Jerricans
steel (3A1, 3A2) 120 kg
aluminium (3B1, 3B2) 120 kg
plastics (3H1, 3H2) 120 kg
Single packagings:
Drums
steel (1A1, 1A2) 250 kg
aluminium (1B1, 1B2) 250 kg
metal other than steel or aluminium (1N1, 1N2) 250 kg
plastics (1H1, 1H2) 250 kg
Jerricans
steel (3A1, 3A2) 120 kg
aluminium (3B1, 3B2) 120 kg
plastics (3H1, 3H2) 120 kg
Composite packagings
plastics receptacle with outer steel or aluminium drums (6HA1 or 6HB1) 250 kg
plastics receptacle with outer fibre, plastics or plywood drums (6HG1, 6HH1 or 6HD1) 75 kg
plastics receptacle with outer steel or aluminium crate or box or with outer wooden, plywood,
fibreboard or solid plastics boxes (6HA2, 6HB2, 6HC, 6HD2, 6HG2 or 6HH2)
75 kg
Pressure receptacles, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.3.6 are met.
Additional requirement:
Packagings shall be hermetically sealed.
Special packing provision:
PP83 Deleted.
– 98 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 99 –
P404 PACKING INSTRUCTION P404
This instruction applies to pyrophoric solids: UN Nos.: 1383, 1854, 1855, 2008, 2441, 2545, 2546, 2846, 2881, 3200,
3391 and 3393.
The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
(1) Combination packagings
Outer packagings: (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G, 4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D,
4F, 4G or 4H2)
Inner packagings: Metal receptacles with a maximum net mass of 15 kg each. Inner packagings shall
be hermetically sealed;
Glass receptacles, with a maximum net mass of 1 kg each, having closures with
gaskets, cushioned on all sides and contained in hermetically sealed metal cans.
Inner packagings shall have threaded closures or closures physically held in place
by any means capable of preventing back-off or loosening of the closure by impact
or vibration during carriage.
Outer packagings shall have a maximum net mass of 125 kg.
(2) Metal packagings: (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 3A1, 3A2, 3B1 and 3B2) Maximum gross mass: 150 kg;
(3) Composite packagings: Plastics receptacle with outer steel or aluminium drum (6HA1 or 6HB1) Maximum
gross mass: 150 kg.
Pressure receptacles, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.3.6 are met.
Special packing provision:
PP86 For UN Nos. 3391 and 3393, air shall be eliminated from the vapour space by nitrogen or other means.
P405 PACKING INSTRUCTION P405
This instruction applies to UN No. 1381.
The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
(1) For UN No. 1381, phosphorus, wet:
(a) Combination packagings
Outer packagings: (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D or 4F) Maximum net mass: 75 kg
Inner packagings:
(i) hermetically sealed metal cans, with a maximum net mass of 15 kg; or
(ii) glass inner packagings cushioned on all sides with dry, absorbent, non-combustible material in a
quantity sufficient to absorb the entire contents with a maximum net mass of 2 kg; or
(b) Drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1 or 1N2); maximum net mass: 400 kg
Jerricans (3A1 or 3B1); maximum net mass: 120 kg.
These packagings shall be capable of passing the leakproofness test specified in 6.1.5.4 at the packing group II
performance level;
(2) For UN No. 1381, dry phosphorus:
(a) When fused, drums (1A2, 1B2 or 1N2) with a maximum net mass of 400 kg; or
(b) In projectiles or hard cased articles when carried without Class 1 components: as specified by the
competent authority.
– 99 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 100 –
P406 PACKING INSTRUCTION P406
The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
(1) Combination packagings
outer packagings: (4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2, 1G, 1D, 1H1, 1H2, 3H1 or 3H2)
inner packagings: water-resistant packagings;
(2) Plastics, plywood or fibreboard drums (1H2, 1D or 1G) or boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4D, 4F, 4C2, 4G and 4H2)
with a water resistant inner bag, plastics film lining or water resistant coating;
(3) Metal drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1 or 1N2), plastics drums (1H1 or 1H2), metal jerricans (3A1, 3A2, 3B1
or 3B2), plastics jerricans (3H1 or 3H2), plastics receptacle with outer steel or aluminium drums (6HA1 or
6HB1), plastics receptacle with outer fibre, plastics or plywood drums (6HG1, 6HH1 or 6HD1), plastics
receptacle with outer steel or aluminium crate or box or with outer wooden, plywood, fibreboard or solid
plastics boxes (6HA2, 6HB2, 6HC, 6HD2, 6HG2 or 6HH2).
Additional requirements:
1. Packagings shall be designed and constructed to prevent the loss of water or alcohol content or the content of
the phlegmatizer.
2. Packagings shall be so constructed and closed so as to avoid an explosive overpressure or pressure build-up of
more than 300 kPa (3 bar).
Special packing provisions:
PP24 UN Nos. 2852, 3364, 3365, 3366, 3367, 3368 and 3369 shall not be carried in quantities of more than 500 g per
package.
PP25 For UN No. 1347, the quantity carried shall not exceed 15 kg per package.
PP26 For UN Nos. 1310, 1320, 1321, 1322, 1344, 1347, 1348, 1349, 1517, 2907, 3317 and 3376 packagings shall be
lead free.
PP48 For UN No. 3474, metal packagings shall not be used. Packagings of other material with a small amount of
metal, for example metal closures or other metal fittings such as those mentioned in 6.1.4, are not considered
metal packagings.
PP78 UN No. 3370 shall not be carried in quantities of more than 11.5 kg per package.
PP80 For UN No. 2907, packagings shall meet the packing group II performance level. Packagings meeting the test
criteria of packing group I shall not be used.
P407 PACKING INSTRUCTION P407
This instruction applies to UN Nos. 1331, 1944, 1945 and 2254.
The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
Outer packagings:
Drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G);
Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2);
Jerricans (3A1, 3A2, 3B1, 3B2, 3H1, 3H2).
Inner packagings:
Matches shall be tightly packed in securely closed inner packagings to prevent accidental ignition under normal
conditions of carriage.
The maximum gross mass of the package shall not exceed 45 kg except for fibreboard boxes which shall not exceed
30 kg.
Packagings shall conform to the packing group III performance level.
Special packing provision:
PP27 UN No. 1331, Strike-anywhere matches shall not be packed in the same outer packaging with any other
dangerous goods other than safety matches or wax Vesta matches, which shall be packed in separate inner
packagings. Inner packagings shall not contain more than 700 strike-anywhere matches.
– 100 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 101 –
P408 PACKING INSTRUCTION P408
This instruction applies to UN No. 3292.
The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
(1) For cells:
Drums (1A2, 1B2, 1N2, 1H2, 1D, 1G);
Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2);
Jerricans (3A2, 3B2, 3H2).
There shall be sufficient cushioning material to prevent contact between cells and between cells and the internal
surfaces of the outer packaging and to ensure that no dangerous movement of the cells within the outer
packaging occurs in carriage.
Packagings shall conform to the packing group II performance level.
(2) Batteries may be carried unpacked or in protective enclosures (e.g. fully enclosed or wooden slatted crates). The
terminals shall not support the weight of other batteries or materials packed with the batteries.
Packagings need not meet the requirements of 4.1.1.3.
NOTE: The packagings authorized may exceed a net mass of 400 kg (see 4.1.3.3).
Additional requirement:
Cells and batteries shall be protected against short circuit and shall be isolated in such a manner as to prevent
short circuits.
P409 PACKING INSTRUCTION P409
This instruction applies to UN Nos. 2956, 3242 and 3251.
The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
(1) Fibre drum (1G) which may be fitted with a liner or coating; maximum net mass: 50 kg;
(2) Combination packagings: Fibreboard box (4G) with a single inner plastic bag;
maximum net mass: 50 kg;
(3) Combination packagings: Fibreboard box (4G) or fibre drum (1G) with plastics inner packagings each
containing a maximum of 5 kg; maximum net mass: 25 kg.
– 101 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 102 –
P410 PACKING INSTRUCTION P410
The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
Combination packagings: Maximum net mass
Inner packagings Outer packagings Packing group
II
Packing group III
Glass 10 kg Drums
Plastics a 30 kg steel (1A1, 1A2) 400 kg 400 kg
Metal 40 kg aluminium (1B1, 1B2) 400 kg 400 kg
Paper a, b 10 kg other metal (1N1, 1N2)
plastics (1H1, 1H2)
400 kg 400 kg
Fibre a, b 10 kg
plywood (1D) 400 kg 400 kg
fibre (1G)a 400 kg 400 kg
Boxes
steel (4A) 400 kg 400 kg
aluminium (4B) 400 kg 400 kg
other metal (4N) 400 kg 400 kg
natural wood (4C1) 400 kg 400 kg
natural wood with sift-proof walls (4C2) 400 kg 400 kg
plywood (4D) 400 kg 400 kg
reconstituted wood (4F) 400 kg 400 kg
fibreboard (4G) a 400 kg 400 kg
expanded plastics (4H1) 60 kg 60 kg
solid plastics (4H2) 400 kg 400 kg
Jerricans
steel (3A1, 3A2) 120 kg 120 kg
aluminium (3B1, 3B2) 120 kg 120 kg
plastics (3H1, 3H2) 120 kg 120 kg
Single packagings:
Drums
steel (1A1 or 1A2) 400 kg 400 kg
aluminium (1B1 or 1B2) 400 kg 400 kg
metal other than steel or aluminium (1N1 or 1N2) 400 kg 400 kg
plastics (1H1 or 1H2) 400 kg 400 kg
Jerricans
steel (3A1 or 3A2) 120 kg 120 kg
aluminium (3B1 or 3B2) 120 kg 120 kg
plastics (3H1 or 3H2) 120 kg 120 kg
Boxes
steel (4A) c 400 kg 400 kg
aluminium (4B) c 400 kg 400 kg
other metal (4N) c 400 kg 400 kg
natural wood (4C1) c 400 kg 400 kg
plywood (4D) c 400 kg 400 kg
reconstituted wood (4F) c 400 kg 400 kg
natural wood with sift-proof walls (4C2) c 400 kg 400 kg
fibreboard (4G) c 400 kg 400 kg
solid plastics (4H2) c 400 kg 400 kg
Bags
Bags (5H3, 5H4, 5L3, 5M2) c, d 50 kg 50 kg
a These packagings shall be sift-proof.
b These inner packagings shall not be used when the substances being carried may become liquid during carriage.
c These packagings shall not be used when the substances being carried may become liquid during carriage.
d For packing group II substances, these packagings may only be used when carried in a closed vehicle or container.
(Cont’d on next page)
– 102 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 103 –
P410 PACKING INSTRUCTION (cont’d) P410
Composite packagings Maximum net mass
Packing group
II
Packing group
III
plastics receptacle with outer steel, aluminium, plywood, fibre or plastics
drum (6HA1, 6HB1, 6HG1, 6HD1, or 6HH1) 400 kg 400 kg
plastics receptacle with outer steel or aluminium crate or box, or outer
wooden, plywood, fibreboard or solid plastics box (6HA2, 6HB2, 6HC,
6HD2, 6HG2 or 6HH2)
75 kg 75 kg
glass receptacle with outer steel, aluminium, plywood or fibre drum (6PA1,
6PB1, 6PD1 or 6PG1) or outer steel or aluminium crate or box or with outer
wooden or fibreboard box or with outer wickerwork hamper (6PA2, 6PB2,
6PC, 6PD2, or 6PG2) or with outer expanded or solid plastics packaging
(6PH1 or 6PH2)
75 kg 75 kg
Pressure receptacles, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.3.6 are met.
Special packing provisions:
PP39 For UN No. 1378, for metal packagings a venting device is required.
PP40 For UN Nos. 1326, 1352, 1358, 1395, 1396, 1436, 1437, 1871, 2805 and 3182, packing group II, bags are not
allowed.
PP83 Deleted.
P411 PACKING INSTRUCTION P411
This instruction applies to UN No. 3270.
The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
Drums (1A2, 1B2, 1N2, 1H2, 1D, 1G);
Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2);
Jerricans (3A2, 3B2, 3H2);
provided that explosion is not possible by reason of increased internal pressure.
The maximum net mass shall not exceed 30 kg.
P412 PACKING INSTRUCTION P412
This instruction applies to UN No. 3527
The following combination packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
(1) Outer packagings:
Drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G);
Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2)
Jerricans (3A1, 3A2, 3B1, 3B2, 3H1, 3H2);
(2) Inner packagings:
(a) The activator (organic peroxide) shall have a maximum quantity of 125 ml per inner packaging if liquid,
and 500 g per inner packaging if solid.
(b) The base material and the activator shall be each separately packed in inner packagings.
The components may be placed in the same outer packaging provided that they will not interact dangerously in the
event of a leakage.
Packagings shall conform to the packing group II or III performance level according to the criteria for Class 4.1 applied
to the base material.
– 103 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 104 –
P500 PACKING INSTRUCTION P500
This instruction applies to UN No. 3356.
The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
Drums (1A2, 1B2, 1N2, 1H2, 1D, 1G);
Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2);
Jerricans (3A2, 3B2, 3H2).
Packagings shall conform to the packing group II performance level.
The generator(s) shall be carried in a package which meets the following requirements when one generator in the
package is actuated:
(a) Other generators in the package will not be actuated;
(b) Packaging material will not ignite; and
(c) The outside surface temperature of the completed package shall not exceed 100 °C.
P501 PACKING INSTRUCTION P501
This instruction applies to UN No. 2015.
The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
Combination packagings: Inner packaging
maximum capacity
Outer
packaging
maximum
net mass
(1) Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4H2) or drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2,
1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D) or jerricans (3A1, 3A2, 3B1, 3B2, 3H1, 3H2) with
glass, plastics or metal inner packagings
5 l 125 kg
(2) Fibreboard box (4G) or fibre drum (1G), with plastics or metal inner
packagings each in a plastics bag
2 l 50 kg
Single packagings: Maximum capacity
Drums
steel (1A1) 250 l
aluminium (1B1)
metal other than steel or aluminium (1N1)
plastics (1H1)
Jerricans
steel (3A1) 60 l
aluminium (3B1)
plastics (3H1)
Composite packagings
plastics receptacle with outer steel or aluminium drum (6HA1, 6HB1) 250 l
plastics receptacle with outer fibre, plastics or plywood drum (6HG1, 6HH1,
6HD1)
250 l
plastics receptacle with outer steel or aluminium crate or box or plastics
receptacle with outer wooden, plywood, fibreboard or solid plastics box
(6HA2, 6HB2, 6HC, 6HD2, 6HG2 or 6HH2)
60 l
glass receptacle with outer steel, aluminium, fibre or plywood drum (6PA1,
6PB1, 6PD1 or 6PG1) or with outer steel, aluminium, wooden or fibreboard
box or with outer wickerwork hamper (6PA2, 6PB2, 6PC, 6PG2 or 6PD2) or
with outer expanded or solid plastics packaging (6PH1 or 6PH2).
60 l
Additional requirements:
1. Packagings shall have a maximum filling degree of 90 %.
2. Packagings shall be vented.
– 104 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 105 –
P502 PACKING INSTRUCTION P502
The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
Combination packagings: Maximum net
massInner packagings Outer packagings
Glass 5 l Drums
Metal 5 l steel (1A1, 1A2) 125 kg
Plastics 5 l aluminium (1B1, 1B2) 125 kg
other metal (1N1, 1N2) 125 kg
plywood (1D) 125 kg
fibre (1G) 125 kg
plastics (1H1, 1H2) 125 kg
Boxes
steel (4A) 125 kg
aluminium (4B) 125 kg
other metal (4N) 125 kg
natural wood (4C1) 125 kg
natural wood with sift-proof walls (4C2) 125 kg
plywood (4D) 125 kg
reconstituted wood (4F) 125 kg
fibreboard (4G) 125 kg
expanded plastics (4H1) 60 kg
solid plastics (4H2) 125 kg
Single packagings: Maximum
capacity
Drums
steel (1A1) 250 l
aluminium (1B1)
plastics (1H1)
Jerricans
steel (3A1) 60 l
aluminium (3B1)
plastics (3H1)
Composite packagings
plastics receptacle with outer steel or aluminium drum (6HA1, 6HB1) 250 l
plastics receptacle with outer fibre, plastics or plywood drum (6HG1, 6HH1, 6HD1) 250 l
plastics receptacle with outer steel or aluminium crate or box or plastics receptacle with outer
wooden, plywood, fibreboard or solid plastics box (6HA2, 6HB2, 6HC, 6HD2, 6HG2 or 6HH2)
60 l
glass receptacle with outer steel, aluminium, fibre or plywood drum (6PA1, 6PB1, 6PG1 or 6PD1)
or with outer steel, aluminium, wooden or fibreboard box or with outer wickerwork hamper (6PA2,
6PB2, 6PC, 6PG2 or 6PD2) or with outer expanded or solid plastics packaging (6PH1 or 6PH2).
60 l
Special packing provision:
PP28 For UN No. 1873, parts of packagings which are in direct contact with perchloric acid shall be constructed of
glass or plastics.
– 105 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 106 –
P503 PACKING INSTRUCTION P503
The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
Combination packagings:
Inner packagings Outer packagings Maximum net mass
Glass 5 kg Drums
Metal 5 kg steel (1A1, 1A2) 125 kg
Plastics 5 kg aluminium (1B1, 1B2) 125 kg
other metal (1N1, 1N2) 125 kg
plywood (1D) 125 kg
fibre (1G) 125 kg
plastics (1H1, 1H2) 125 kg
Boxes
steel (4A) 125 kg
aluminium (4B) 125 kg
other metal (4N) 125 kg
natural wood (4C1) 125 kg
natural wood with sift-proof walls (4C2) 125 kg
plywood (4D) 125 kg
reconstituted wood (4F) 125 kg
fibreboard (4G) 40 kg
expanded plastics (4H1) 60 kg
solid plastics (4H2) 125 kg
Single packagings:
Metal drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1 or 1N2) with a maximum net mass of 250 kg.
Fibreboard (1G) or plywood drums (1D) fitted with inner liners with a maximum net mass of 200 kg.
– 106 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 107 –
P504 PACKING INSTRUCTION P504
The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
Combination packagings: Maximum net mass
(1) Glass receptacles with a maximum capacity of 5 litres in 1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1,
1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G, 4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H2 outer packagings
75 kg
(2) Plastics receptacles with a maximum capacity of 30 litres in 1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1,
1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G, 4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H2 outer packagings
75 kg
(3) Metal receptacles with a maximum capacity of 40 litres in 1G, 4F or 4G outer
packagings
125 kg
(4) Metal receptacles with a maximum capacity of 40 litres in 1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1,
1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4H2 outer packagings
225 kg
Single packagings: Maximum capacity
Drums
steel, non-removable head (1A1) 250 l
steel, removable head (1A2) 250 l
aluminium, non-removable head (1B1) 250 l
aluminium, removable head (1B2) 250 l
metal other than steel or aluminium, non-removable head (1N1) 250 l
metal other than steel or aluminium, removable head (1N2) 250 l
plastics, non-removable head (1H1) 250 l
plastics, removable head (1H2) 250 l
Jerricans
steel, non-removable head (3A1) 60 l
steel, removable head (3A2) 60 l
aluminium, non-removable head (3B1) 60 l
aluminium, removable head (3B2) 60 l
plastics, non-removable head (3H1) 60 l
plastics, removable head (3H2) 60 l
Composite packagings
plastics receptacle with outer steel or aluminium drum (6HA1, 6HB1) 250 l
plastics receptacle with outer fibre, plastics or plywood drum (6HG1, 6HH1, 6HD1) 120 l
plastics receptacle with outer steel or aluminium crate or box or plastics receptacle with
outer wooden, plywood, fibreboard or solid plastics box (6HA2, 6HB2, 6HC, 6HD2, 6HG2
or 6HH2)
60 l
glass receptacle with outer steel, aluminium, fibre or plywood drum (6PA1, 6PB1, 6PG1 or
6PD1) or with outer steel, aluminium, wooden or fibreboard box or with outer wickerwork
hamper (6PA2, 6PB2, 6PC, 6PG2 or 6PD2) or with outer expanded or solid plastics
packaging (6PH1 or 6PH2).
60 l
Special packing provisions:
PP10 For UN No. 2014, 2984 and 3149, the packaging shall be vented.
– 107 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 108 –
P505 PACKING INSTRUCTION P505
This instruction applies to UN No. 3375.
The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
Combination packagings: Inner packaging
maximum capacity
Outer
packaging
maximum
net mass
Boxes (4B, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4G, 4H2) or drums (1B2, 1G, 1N2, 1H2, 1D) or
jerricans (3B2, 3H2) with glass, plastics or metal inner packagings
5 l 125 kg
Single packagings: Maximum capacity
Drums
aluminium (1B1, 1B2) 250 l
plastics (1H1, 1H2) 250 l
Jerricans:
aluminium (3B1, 3B2) 60 l
plastics (3H1, 3H2) 60 l
Composite packagings:
plastics receptacle with outer aluminium drum (6HB1) 250 l
plastics receptacle with outer fibre, plastics or plywood drum (6HG1, 6HH1,
6HD1)
250 l
plastics receptacle with outer aluminium crate or box or plastics receptacle with
outer wooden, plywood, fibreboard or solid plastics box (6HB2, 6HC, 6HD2,
6HG2 or 6HH2)
60 l
glass receptacle with outer aluminium, fibre or plywood drum (6PB1, 6PG1,
6PD1) or with outer expanded or solid plastics plastics receptacles (6PH1 or
6PH2) or with outer aluminium crate or box or with outer wooden or fibreboard
box or with outer wickerwork hamper (6PB2, 6PC, 6PG2 or 6PD2)
60 l
– 108 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 109 –
P520 PACKING INSTRUCTION P520
This instruction applies to organic peroxides of Class 5.2 and self-reactive substances of Class 4.1
The packagings listed below are authorized provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 and special provisions of
4.1.7.1 are met.
The packing methods are designated OP1 to OP8. The packing methods appropriate for the individual currently assigned
organic peroxides and self-reactive substances are listed in 2.2.41.4 and 2.2.52.4. The quantities specified for each
packing method are the maximum quantities authorized per package. The following packagings are authorized:
(1) Combination packagings with outer packagings comprising boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1 and
4H2), drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1G, 1H1, 1H2 and 1D), jerricans (3A1, 3A2, 3B1, 3B2, 3H1 and 3H2);
(2) Single packagings consisting of drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1G, 1H1, 1H2 and 1D) and jerricans (3A1, 3A2,
3B1, 3B2, 3H1 and 3H2);
(3) Composite packagings with plastics inner receptacles (6HA1, 6HA2, 6HB1, 6HB2, 6HC, 6HD1, 6HD2, 6HG1,
6HG2, 6HH1 and 6HH2).
Maximum quantity per packaging/package a for packing methods OP1 to OP8
Packing
Method
Maximum
Quantity
OP1 OP2 a OP3 OP4 a OP5 OP6 OP7 OP8
Maximum mass (kg) for
solids and for combination
packagings (liquid and
solid)
0.5 0.5/10 5 5/25 25 50 50 400 b
Maximum contents in
litres for liquids c
0.5 – 5 – 30 60 60 225 d
a If two values are given, the first applies to the maximum net mass per inner packaging and the second to the
maximum net mass of the complete package.
b 60 kg for jerricans / 200 kg for boxes and, for solids, 400 kg in combination packagings with outer packagings
comprising boxes (4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1 and 4H2) and with inner packagings of plastics or fibre with a
maximum net mass of 25 kg.
c Viscous substances shall be treated as solids when they do not meet the criteria provided in the definition for
“liquids” presented in 1.2.1.
d 60 litres for jerricans.
Additional requirements:
1. Metal packagings, including inner packagings of combination packagings and outer packagings of combination
or composite packagings may only be used for packing methods OP7 and OP8.
2. In combination packagings, glass receptacles may only be used as inner packagings with maximum contents of
0.5 kg for solids or 0.5 litre for liquids.
3. In combination packagings, cushioning materials shall not be readily combustible.
4. The packaging of an organic peroxide or self-reactive substance required to bear an “EXPLOSIVE” subsidiary
hazard label (model No.1, see 5.2.2.2.2) shall also comply with the provisions given in 4.1.5.10 and 4.1.5.11.
Special packing provisions:
PP21 For certain self-reactive substances of types B or C, UN Nos. 3221, 3222, 3223, 3224, 3231, 3232, 3233 and
3234, a smaller packaging than that allowed by packing methods OP5 or OP6 respectively shall be used (see
4.1.7 and 2.2.41.4).
PP22 UN No. 3241, 2-Bromo-2-nitropropane-1, 3-diol, shall be packed in accordance with packing method OP6.
– 109 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 110 –
P520 PACKING INSTRUCTION (cont’d) P520
Special packing provisions (cont’d):
PP94 Very small amounts of energetic samples of 2.1.4.3 may be carried under UN No. 3223 or UN No. 3224, as
appropriate, provided that:
1. Only combination packagings with outer packagings comprising boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G,
4H1 and 4H2) are used;
2. The samples are carried in microtiter plates or multi-titer plates made of plastics, glass, porcelain or
stoneware as inner packaging;
3. The maximum amount per individual inner cavity does not exceed 0.01 g for solids or 0.01 ml for liquids;
4. The maximum net quantity per outer packaging is 20 g for solids or 20 ml for liquids, or in the case of mixed
packing the sum of grams and millilitres does not exceed 20; and
5. When dry ice or liquid nitrogen is optionally used as a coolant for quality control measures, the requirements
of 5.5.3 are complied with. Interior supports shall be provided to secure the inner packagings in their original
position. The inner and outer packagings shall maintain their integrity at the temperature of the refrigerant
used as well as the temperatures and the pressures which could result if refrigeration were lost.
PP95 Small amounts of energetic samples of 2.1.4.3 may be carried under UN No. 3223 or UN No. 3224, as
appropriate, provided that:
1. The outer packaging consists only of corrugated fibreboard of type 4G having minimum dimensions of 60
cm (length) by 40.5 cm (width) by 30 cm (height) and minimum wall thickness of 1.3 cm;
2. The individual substance is contained in an inner packaging of glass or plastics of maximum capacity 30 ml
placed in an expandable polyethylene foam matrix of at least 130 mm thickness having a density of 18 ± 1
g/l;
3. Within the foam carrier, inner packagings are segregated from each other by a minimum distance of 40 mm
and from the wall of the outer packaging by a minimum distance of 70 mm. The package may contain up to
two layers of such foam matrices, each carrying up to 28 inner packagings;
4. The maximum content of each inner packaging does not exceed 1 g for solids or 1 ml for liquids;
5. The maximum net quantity per outer packaging is 56 g for solids or 56 ml for liquids, or in the case of mixed
packing the sum of grams and millilitres does not exceed 56; and
6. When dry ice or liquid nitrogen is optionally used as a coolant for quality control measures, the requirements
of 5.5.3 are complied with. Interior supports shall be provided to secure the inner packagings in their original
position. The inner and outer packagings shall maintain their integrity at the temperature of the refrigerant
used as well as the temperatures and the pressures which could result if refrigeration were lost.
P600 PACKING INSTRUCTION P600
This instruction applies to UN Nos. 1700, 2016 and 2017.
The following packagings are authorized, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
Outer packagings (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G, 4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H2)
meeting the packing group II performance level. The articles shall be individually packaged and separated from each
other using partitions, dividers, inner packagings or cushioning material to prevent inadvertent discharge during normal
conditions of carriage.
Maximum net mass: 75 kg
– 110 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 111 –
P601 PACKING INSTRUCTION P601
The following packagings are authorized provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met and the packagings
are hermetically sealed:
(1) Combination packagings with a maximum gross mass of 15 kg, consisting of
 one or more glass inner packaging(s) with a maximum quantity of 1 litre each and filled to not more than
90 % of their capacity; the closure(s) of which shall be physically held in place by any means capable of
preventing back-off or loosening by impact or vibration during carriage, individually placed in
 metal receptacles together with cushioning and absorbent material sufficient to absorb the entire contents
of the glass inner packaging(s), further packed in
 1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G, 4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G or 4H2 outer
packagings;
(2) Combination packagings consisting of metal or plastics inner packagings not exceeding 5 litres in capacity
individually packed with absorbent material sufficient to absorb the contents and inert cushioning material in
1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G, 4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G or 4H2 outer packagings
with a maximum gross mass of 75 kg. Inner packagings shall not be filled to more than 90 % of their capacity.
The closure of each inner packaging shall be physically held in place by any means capable of preventing back-
off or loosening of the closure by impact or vibration during carriage;
(3) Packagings consisting of:
Outer packagings: Steel or plastics drums (1A1, 1A2, 1H1 or 1H2), tested in accordance with the test
requirements in 6.1.5 at a mass corresponding to the mass of the assembled package either as a packaging
intended to contain inner packagings, or as a single packaging intended to contain solids or liquids, and marked
accordingly;
Inner packagings:
Drums and composite packagings (1A1, 1B1, 1N1, 1H1 or 6HA1) meeting the requirements of Chapter 6.1 for
single packagings, subject to the following conditions:
(a) The hydraulic pressure test shall be conducted at a pressure of at least 0.3 MPa (gauge pressure);
(b) The design and production leakproofness tests shall be conducted at a test pressure of 30 kPa;
(c) They shall be isolated from the outer drum by the use of inert shock-mitigating cushioning material which
surrounds the inner packaging on all sides;
(d) Their capacity shall not exceed 125 litres;
(Cont’d on next page)
– 111 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 112 –
P601 PACKING INSTRUCTION (cont’d) P601
(3) Packagings consisting of: (cont’d)
(e) Closures shall be of a screw cap type that are:
(i) physically held in place by any means capable of preventing back-off or loosening of the closure
by impact or vibration during carriage; and
(ii) provided with a cap seal;
(f) The outer and inner packagings shall be subjected periodically to a leakproofness test according to (b) at
intervals of not more than two and a half years;
(g) The complete packaging shall be visually inspected to the satisfaction of the competent authority at least
every 3 years; and
(h) The outer and inner packaging shall bear in clearly legible and durable characters:
(i) the date (month, year) of the initial test and the latest periodic test and inspection;
(ii) the stamp of the expert who carried out the test and inspection;
(4) Pressure receptacles, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.3.6 are met. They shall be subjected to an initial
test and periodic tests every 10 years at a pressure of not less than 1 MPa (10 bar) (gauge pressure). Pressure
receptacles may not be equipped with any pressure relief device. Each pressure receptacle containing a toxic
by inhalation liquid with an LC₅₀ less than or equal to 200 ml/m³ (ppm) shall be closed with a plug or valve
conforming to the following:
(a) Each plug or valve shall have a taper-threaded connection directly to the pressure receptacle and be
capable of withstanding the test pressure of the pressure receptacle without damage or leakage;
(b) Each valve shall be of the packless type with non-perforated diaphragm, except that, for corrosive
substances, a valve may be of the packed type with an assembly made gas-tight by means of a seal cap
with gasket joint attached to the valve body or the pressure receptacle to prevent loss of substance
through or past the packing;
(c) Each valve outlet shall be sealed by a threaded cap or threaded solid plug and inert gasket material;
(d) The materials of construction for the pressure receptacle, valves, plugs, outlet caps, luting and gaskets
shall be compatible with each other and with the contents.
Each pressure receptacle with a wall thickness at any point of less than 2.0 mm and each pressure receptacle
which does not have fitted valve protection shall be carried in an outer packaging. Pressure receptacles shall
not be manifolded or interconnected.
Special packing provision:
PP82 (Deleted)
Special packing provisions specific to RID and ADR:
RR3 (Deleted)
RR7 For UN No. 1251, the pressure receptacles shall however be subjected to the tests every five years.
RR10 UN No. 1614, when completely absorbed by an inert porous material, shall be packed in metal receptacles of a
capacity of not more than 7.5 litres, placed in wooden cases in such a manner that they cannot come into contact
with one another. The receptacles shall be entirely filled with the porous material which shall not shake down
or form dangerous spaces even after prolonged use or under impact, even at temperatures of up to 50 °C.
– 112 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 113 –
P602 PACKING INSTRUCTION P602
The following packagings are authorised provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met and the packagings
are hermetically sealed:
(1) Combination packagings with a maximum gross mass of 15 kg, consisting of
 one or more glass inner packaging(s) with a maximum quantity of 1 litre each and filled to not more than
90 % of their capacity; the closure(s) of which shall be physically held in place by any means capable of
preventing back-off or loosening by impact or vibration during carriage, individually placed in
 metal receptacles together with cushioning and absorbent material sufficient to absorb the entire contents
of the glass inner packaging(s), further packed in
 1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G, 4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G or 4H2 outer
packagings;
(2) Combination packagings consisting of metal or plastics inner packagings individually packed with absorbent
material sufficient to absorb the entire contents and inert cushioning material in 1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1,
1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G, 4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G or 4H2 outer packagings with a maximum gross
mass of 75 kg. Inner packagings shall not be filled to more than 90 % of their capacity. The closure of each
inner packaging shall be physically held in place by any means capable of preventing back-off or loosening of
the closure by impact or vibration during carriage. Inner packagings shall not exceed 5 litres in capacity;
(3) Drums and composite packagings (1A1, 1B1, 1N1, 1H1, 6HA1 or 6HH1), subject to the following conditions:
(a) The hydraulic pressure test shall be conducted at a pressure of at least 0.3 MPa (gauge pressure);
(b) The design and production leakproofness tests shall be conducted at a test pressure of 30 kPa; and
(c) Closures shall be of a screw cap type that are:
(i) physically held in place by any means capable of preventing back-off or loosening of the closure
by impact or vibration during carriage; and
(ii) provided with a cap seal;
(4) Pressure receptacles, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.3.6 are met. They shall be subjected to an initial
test and periodic tests every 10 years at a pressure of not less than 1 MPa (10 bar) (gauge pressure). Pressure
receptacles may not be equipped with any pressure relief device. Each pressure receptacle containing a toxic by
inhalation liquid with an LC₅₀ less than or equal to 200 ml/m³ (ppm) shall be closed with a plug or valve
conforming to the following:
(a) Each plug or valve shall have a taper-threaded connection directly to the pressure receptacle and be
capable of withstanding the test pressure of the pressure receptacle without damage or leakage;
(b) Each valve shall be of the packless type with non-perforated diaphragm, except that, for corrosive
substances, a valve may be of the packed type with an assembly made gas-tight by means of a seal cap
with gasket joint attached to the valve body or the pressure receptacle to prevent loss of substance
through or past the packing;
(c) Each valve outlet shall be sealed by a threaded cap or threaded solid plug and inert gasket material;
(d) The materials of construction for the pressure receptacle, valves, plugs, outlet caps, luting and gaskets
shall be compatible with each other and with the contents.
Each pressure receptacle with a wall thickness at any point of less than 2.0 mm and each pressure receptacle
which does not have fitted valve protection shall be carried in an outer packaging. Pressure receptacles shall
not be manifolded or interconnected.
– 113 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 114 –
P603 PACKING INSTRUCTION P603
This instruction applies to UN 3507.
The following packagings are authorized provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 and the special
packing provisions of 4.1.9.1.2, 4.1.9.1.4 and 4.1.9.1.7 are met:
Packagings consisting of:
(a) Metal or plastics primary receptacle(s); in
(b) Leakproof rigid secondary packaging(s); in
(c) A rigid outer packaging:
Drums (1A2, 1B2, 1N2, 1H2, 1D, 1G);
Boxes (4A, 4B, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2);
Jerricans (3A2, 3B2, 3H2).
Additional requirements:
1. Primary inner receptacles shall be packed in secondary packagings in a way that, under normal conditions of
carriage, they cannot break, be punctured or leak their contents into the secondary packaging. Secondary packagings
shall be secured in outer packagings with suitable cushioning material to prevent movement. If multiple primary
receptacles are placed in a single secondary packaging, they shall be either individually wrapped or separated so as
to prevent contact between them.
2. The contents shall comply with the provisions of 2.2.7.2.4.5.2.
3. The provisions of 6.4.4 shall be met.
Special packing provision:
In the case of fissile-excepted material, limits specified in 2.2.7.2.3.5 shall be met.
– 114 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 115 –
P620 PACKING INSTRUCTION P620
This instruction applies to UN Nos. 2814 and 2900.
The following packagings are authorized provided the special packing provisions of 4.1.8 are met:
Packagings meeting the requirements of Chapter 6.3 and approved accordingly consisting of:
(a) Inner packagings comprising:
(i) leakproof primary receptacle(s);
(ii) a leakproof secondary packaging;
(iii) other than for solid infectious substances, an absorbent material in sufficient quantity to absorb the entire
contents placed between the primary receptacle(s) and the secondary packaging; if multiple primary
receptacles are placed in a single secondary packaging, they shall be either individually wrapped or
separated so as to prevent contact between them;
(b) A rigid outer packaging:
Drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G);
Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2);
Jerricans (3A1, 3A2, 3B1, 3B2, 3H1, 3H2).
The smallest external dimension shall be not less than 100 mm.
Additional requirements:
1. Inner packagings containing infectious substances shall not be consolidated with inner packagings containing
unrelated types of goods. Complete packages may be overpacked in accordance with the provisions of 1.2.1 and
5.1.2; such an overpack may contain dry ice.
2. Other than for exceptional consignments, e.g. whole organs which require special packaging, the following
additional requirements shall apply:
(a) Substances consigned at ambient temperatures or at a higher temperature: Primary receptacles shall
be of glass, metal or plastics. Positive means of ensuring a leakproof seal shall be provided, e.g. a heat
seal, a skirted stopper or a metal crimp seal. If screw caps are used, they shall be secured by positive
means, e.g., tape, paraffin sealing tape or manufactured locking closure;
(b) Substances consigned refrigerated or frozen: Ice, dry ice or other refrigerant shall be placed around
the secondary packaging(s) or alternatively in an overpack with one or more complete packages
marked in accordance with 6.3.3. Interior supports shall be provided to secure secondary packaging(s)
or packages in position after the ice or dry ice has dissipated. If ice is used, the outer packaging or
overpack shall be leakproof. If dry ice is used, the outer packaging or overpack shall permit the release
of carbon dioxide gas. The primary receptacle and the secondary packaging shall maintain their
integrity at the temperature of the refrigerant used;
(c) Substances consigned in liquid nitrogen: Plastics primary receptacles capable of withstanding very
low temperature shall be used. The secondary packaging shall also be capable of withstanding very
low temperatures, and in most cases will need to be fitted over the primary receptacle individually.
Provisions for the carriage of liquid nitrogen shall also be fulfilled. The primary receptacle and the
secondary packaging shall maintain their integrity at the temperature of the liquid nitrogen;
(d) Lyophilised substances may also be carried in primary receptacles that are flame-sealed glass
ampoules or rubber-stoppered glass vials fitted with metal seals.
3. Whatever the intended temperature of the consignment, the primary receptacle or the secondary packaging shall
be capable of withstanding without leakage an internal pressure producing a pressure differential of not less than
95 kPa. This primary receptacle or secondary packaging shall also be capable of withstanding temperatures in
the range -40 °C to +55 °C.
4. Other dangerous goods shall not be packed in the same packaging as Class 6.2 infectious substances unless they
are necessary for maintaining the viability, stabilizing or preventing degradation or neutralizing the hazards of
the infectious substances. A quantity of 30 ml or less of dangerous goods included in Classes 3, 8 or 9 may be
packed in each primary receptacle containing infectious substances. These small quantities of dangerous goods
of Classes 3, 8 or 9 are not subject to any additional requirements of ADR when packed in accordance with this
packing instruction.
5. Alternative packagings for the carriage of animal material may be authorized by the competent authority of the
country of origin a in accordance with the provisions of 4.1.8.7.
a If the country of origin is not a Contracting Party to ADR, the competent authority of the first Contracting Party
to the ADR reached by the consignment.
– 115 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 116 –
P621 PACKING INSTRUCTION P621
This instruction applies to UN No. 3291.
The following packagings are authorized provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 except 4.1.1.15 and 4.1.3 are met:
(1) Provided that there is sufficient absorbent material to absorb the entire amount of liquid present and the packaging
is capable of retaining liquids:
Drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G);
Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2);
Jerricans (3A1, 3A2, 3B1, 3B2, 3H1, 3H2).
Packagings shall conform to the packing group II performance level for solids.
(2) For packages containing larger quantities of liquid:
Drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G);
Jerricans (3A1, 3A2, 3B1, 3B2, 3H1, 3H2);
Composites (6HA1, 6HB1, 6HG1, 6HH1, 6HD1, 6HA2, 6HB2, 6HC, 6HD2, 6HG2, 6HH2, 6PA1, 6PB1,
6PG1, 6PD1, 6PH1, 6PH2, 6PA2, 6PB2, 6PC, 6PG2 or 6PD2).
Packagings shall conform to the packing group II performance level for liquids.
Additional requirement:
Packagings intended to contain sharp objects such as broken glass and needles shall be resistant to puncture and retain
liquids under the performance test conditions in Chapter 6.1.
– 116 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 117 –
P622 PACKING INSTRUCTION P622
This instruction applies to waste of UN No. 3549 carried for disposal.
The following packagings are authorized provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings
metal
plastics
metal
plastics
Boxes
steel (4A)
aluminium (4B)
other metal (4N)
plywood (4D)
fibreboard (4G)
plastics, solid (4H2)
Drums
steel (1A2)
aluminium (1B2)
other metal (1N2)
plywood (1D)
fibre (1G)
plastics (1H2)
Jerricans
steel (3A2)
aluminium (3B2)
plastics (3H2)
The outer packaging shall conform to the packing group I performance level for solids.
Additional requirements:
1. Fragile articles shall be contained in either a rigid inner packaging or a rigid intermediate packaging.
2. Inner packagings containing sharp objects such as broken glass and needles shall be rigid and resistant to
puncture.
3. The inner packaging, the intermediate packaging, and the outer packaging shall be capable of retaining liquids.
Outer packagings that are not capable of retaining liquids by design shall be fitted with a liner or suitable measure
of retaining liquids.
4. The inner packaging and/or the intermediate packaging may be flexible. When flexible packagings are used, they
shall be capable of passing the impact resistance test of at least 165 g according to ISO 7765-1:1988 “Plastics film
and sheeting – Determination of impact resistance by the free-falling dart method – Part 1: Staircase methods” and
the tear resistance test of at least 480 g in both parallel and perpendicular planes with respect to the length of the
bag in accordance with ISO 6383-2:1983 “Plastics – Film and sheeting – Determination of tear resistance – Part 2:
Elmendorf method”. The maximum net mass of each flexible inner packaging shall be 30 kg.
5. Each flexible intermediate packaging shall contain only one inner packaging.
6. Inner packagings containing a small amount of free liquid may be included in intermediate packaging provided that
there is sufficient absorbent or solidifying material in the inner or intermediate packaging to absorb or solidify all
the liquid content present. Suitable absorbent material which withstands the temperatures and vibrations liable to
occur under normal conditions of carriage shall be used.
7. Intermediate packagings shall be secured in outer packagings with suitable cushioning and/or absorbent material.
– 117 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 118 –
P650 PACKING INSTRUCTION P650
This packing instruction applies to UN No. 3373.
(1) The packaging shall be of good quality, strong enough to withstand the shocks and loadings normally
encountered during carriage, including transhipment between cargo transport units and between cargo transport
units and warehouses as well as any removal from a pallet or overpack for subsequent manual or mechanical
handling. Packagings shall be constructed and closed to prevent any loss of contents that might be caused under
normal conditions of carriage by vibration or by changes in temperature, humidity or pressure.
(2) The packaging shall consist of at least three components:
(a) a primary receptacle;
(b) a secondary packaging; and
(c) an outer packaging
of which either the secondary or the outer packaging shall be rigid.
(3) Primary receptacles shall be packed in secondary packagings in such a way that, under normal conditions of
carriage, they cannot break, be punctured or leak their contents into the secondary packaging. Secondary
packagings shall be secured in outer packagings with suitable cushioning material. Any leakage of the contents
shall not compromise the integrity of the cushioning material or of the outer packaging.
(4) For carriage, the mark illustrated below shall be displayed on the external surface of the outer packaging on a
background of a contrasting colour and shall be clearly visible and legible. The mark shall be in the form of a
square set at an angle of 45° (diamond-shaped) with minimum dimensions of 50 mm by 50 mm; the width of
the line shall be at least 2 mm and the letters and numbers shall be at least 6 mm high. The proper shipping name
“BIOLOGICAL SUBSTANCE, CATEGORY B” in letters at least 6 mm high shall be marked on the outer
packaging adjacent to the diamond-shaped mark.
(5) At least one surface of the outer packaging shall have a minimum dimension of 100 mm  100 mm.
(6) The completed package shall be capable of successfully passing the drop test in 6.3.5.3 as specified in 6.3.5.2
at a height of 1.2 m. Following the appropriate drop sequence, there shall be no leakage from the primary
receptacle(s) which shall remain protected by absorbent material, when required, in the secondary packaging.
(Cont’d on next page)
– 118 –
Minimum dimension
50 mm
 
Minimum dimension
50 mm

UN3373Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 119 –
P650 PACKING INSTRUCTION (cont’d) P650
(7) For liquid substances:
(a) The primary receptacle(s) shall be leakproof;
(b) The secondary packaging shall be leakproof;
(c) If multiple fragile primary receptacles are placed in a single secondary packaging, they shall be either
individually wrapped or separated to prevent contact between them;
(d) Absorbent material shall be placed between the primary receptacle(s) and the secondary packaging. The
absorbent material shall be in quantity sufficient to absorb the entire contents of the primary receptacle(s)
so that any release of the liquid substance will not compromise the integrity of the cushioning material
or of the outer packaging;
(e) The primary receptacle or the secondary packaging shall be capable of withstanding, without leakage, an
internal pressure of 95 kPa (0.95 bar).
(8) For solid substances:
(a) The primary receptacle(s) shall be siftproof;
(b) The secondary packaging shall be siftproof;
(c) If multiple fragile primary receptacles are placed in a single secondary packaging, they shall be either
individually wrapped or separated to prevent contact between them;
(d) If there is any doubt as to whether or not residual liquid may be present in the primary receptacle during
carriage then a packaging suitable for liquids, including absorbent materials, shall be used.
(9) Refrigerated or frozen specimens: Ice, dry ice and liquid nitrogen:
(a) When dry ice or liquid nitrogen is used as a coolant, the requirements of 5.5.3 shall apply. When used,
ice shall be placed outside the secondary packagings or in the outer packaging or an overpack. Interior
supports shall be provided to secure the secondary packagings in the original position. If ice is used, the
outside packaging or overpack shall be leakproof.
(b) The primary receptacle and the secondary packaging shall maintain their integrity at the temperature of
the refrigerant used as well as the temperatures and the pressures which could result if refrigeration were
lost.
(10) When packages are placed in an overpack, the package marks required by this packing instruction shall either
be clearly visible or be reproduced on the outside of the overpack.
(11) Infectious substances assigned to UN No. 3373 which are packed and packages which are marked in accordance
with this packing instruction are not subject to any other requirement in ADR.
(12) Clear instructions on filling and closing such packages shall be provided by packaging manufacturers and
subsequent distributors to the consignor or to the person who prepares the package (e.g. patient) to enable the
package to be correctly prepared for carriage.
(13) Other dangerous goods shall not be packed in the same packaging as Class 6.2 infectious substances unless they
are necessary for maintaining the viability, stabilizing or preventing degradation or neutralizing the hazards of
the infectious substances. A quantity of 30 ml or less of dangerous goods included in Classes 3, 8 or 9 may be
packed in each primary receptacle containing infectious substances. When these small quantities of dangerous
goods are packed with infectious substances in accordance with this packing instruction no other requirements
of ADR need be met.
(14) If any substance has leaked and has been spilled in a cargo transport unit, it may not be reused until after it has
been thoroughly cleaned and, if necessary, disinfected or decontaminated. Any other goods and articles carried
in the same cargo transport unit shall be examined for possible contamination.
Additional requirement:
Alternative packagings for the carriage of animal material may be authorized by the competent authority of the country
of origin a in accordance with the provisions of 4.1.8.7.
a If the country of origin is not a Contracting Party to ADR, the competent authority of the first Contracting Party
to the ADR reached by the consignment.
– 119 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 120 –
P800 PACKING INSTRUCTION P800
This instruction applies to UN Nos. 2803 and 2809.
The following packagings are authorized, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
(1) Pressure receptacles, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.3.6 are met.
(2) Steel flasks or bottles with threaded closures with a capacity not exceeding 3 l; or
(3) Combination packagings which conform to the following requirements:
(a) Inner packagings shall comprise glass, metal or rigid plastics intended to contain liquids with a
maximum net mass of 15 kg each;
(b) The inner packagings shall be packed with sufficient cushioning material to prevent breakage;
(c) Either the inner packagings or the outer packagings shall have inner liners or bags of strong leakproof
and puncture-resistant material impervious to the contents and completely surrounding the contents to
prevent it from escaping from the package irrespective of its position or orientation;
(d) The following outer packagings and maximum net masses are authorized:
Outer packaging: Maximum net mass
Drums
steel (1A1, 1A2) 400 kg
metal, other than steel or aluminium (1N1, 1N2) 400 kg
plastics (1H1, 1H2) 400 kg
plywood (1D) 400 kg
fibre (1G) 400 kg
Boxes
steel (4A) 400 kg
metal, other than steel or aluminium (4N) 400 kg
natural wood (4C1) 250 kg
natural wood with sift-proof walls (4C2) 250 kg
plywood (4D) 250 kg
reconstituted wood (4F) 125 kg
fibreboard (4G) 125 kg
expanded plastics (4H1) 60 kg
solid plastics (4H2) 125 kg
Special packing provision:
PP41 For UN No. 2803, when it is necessary to carry gallium at low temperatures in order to maintain it in a
completely solid state, the above packagings may be overpack ed in a strong, water-resistant outer packaging
which contains dry ice or other means of refrigeration. If a refrigerant is used, all of the above materials used
in the packaging of gallium shall be chemically and physically resistant to the refrigerant and shall have impact
resistance at the low temperatures of the refrigerant employed. If dry ice is used, the outer packaging shall
permit the release of carbon dioxide gas.
– 120 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 121 –
P801 PACKING INSTRUCTION P801
This instruction applies to UN Nos. 2794, 2795 and 3028 and used batteries of UN No. 2800.
The following packagings are authorized, provided that the provisions of 4.1.1.1, 4.1.1.2, 4.1.1.6, and 4.1.3 are met:
(1) Rigid outer packagings, wooden slatted crates or pallets.
Additionally, the following conditions shall be met:
(a) Battery stacks shall be in tiers separated by a layer of electrically non-conductive material;
(b) Battery terminals shall not support the weight of other superimposed elements;
(c) Batteries shall be packaged or secured to prevent inadvertent movement;
(d) Batteries shall not leak under normal conditions of carriage or appropriate measures shall be taken to
prevent the release of electrolyte from the package (e.g. individually packaging batteries or other equally
effective methods); and
(e) Batteries shall be protected against short circuits.
(2) Stainless steel or plastics bins may also be used to carry used batteries.
Additionally, the following conditions shall be met:
(a) The bins shall be resistant to the electrolyte that was contained in the batteries;
(b) The bins shall not be filled to a height greater than the height of their sides;
(c) The outside of the bins shall be free of residues of electrolyte contained in the batteries;
(d) Under normal conditions of carriage, no electrolyte shall leak from the bins;
(e) Measures shall be taken to ensure that filled bins cannot lose their content;
(f) Measures shall be taken to prevent short circuits (e.g. batteries are discharged, individual protection of the
battery terminals, etc.); and
(g) The bins shall be either:
(i) covered; or
(ii) carried in closed or sheeted vehicles or containers.
NOTE: The packagings authorized in (1) and (2) may exceed a net mass of 400 kg (see 4.1.3.3).
P801a PACKING INSTRUCTION P801a
(Deleted)
– 121 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 122 –
P802 PACKING INSTRUCTION P802
The following packagings are authorized, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
(1) Combination packagings:
Outer packagings: 1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G, 4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G or
4H2;
maximum net mass: 75 kg.
Inner packagings: glass or plastics; maximum capacity: 10 litres;
(2) Combination packagings:
Outer packagings: 1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G, 4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G or
4H2;
maximum net mass: 125 kg.
Inner packagings: metal; maximum capacity: 40 litres;
(3) Composite packagings: Glass receptacle with outer steel, aluminium or plywood drum (6PA1, 6PB1 or 6PD1)
or with outer steel, aluminium or wooden box or with outer wickerwork hamper (6PA2, 6PB2, 6PC or 6PD2)
or with outer solid plastics packaging (6PH2); maximum capacity: 60 litres.
(4) Steel drums (1A1) with a maximum capacity of 250 litres;
(5) Pressure receptacles, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.3.6 are met.
P803 PACKING INSTRUCTION P803
This instruction applies to UN No. 2028.
The following packagings are authorized, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
(1) Drums (1A2, 1B2, 1N2, 1H2, 1D, 1G);
(2) Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H2).
Maximum net mass: 75 kg.
The articles shall be individually packaged and separated from each other using partitions, dividers, inner packagings
or cushioning material to prevent inadvertent discharge during normal conditions of carriage.
– 122 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 123 –
P804 PACKING INSTRUCTION P804
This instruction applies to UN No. 1744.
The following packagings are authorized provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met and the packagings
are hermetically sealed:
(1) Combination packagings with a maximum gross mass of 25 kg, consisting of
– one or more glass inner packaging(s) with a maximum capacity of 1.3 litres each and filled to not more
than 90 % of their capacity; the closure(s) of which shall be physically held in place by any means capable
of preventing back-off or loosening by impact or vibration during carriage, individually placed in
– metal or rigid plastics receptacles together with cushioning and absorbent material sufficient to absorb
the entire contents of the glass inner packaging(s), further packed in
– 1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G, 4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G or 4H2 outer
packagings.
(2) Combination packagings consisting of metal or polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF) inner packagings, not exceeding
5 litres in capacity individually packed with absorbent material sufficient to absorb the contents and inert
cushioning material in 1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G, 4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G
or 4H2 outer packagings with a maximum gross mass of 75 kg. Inner packagings shall not be filled to more than
90 % of their capacity. The closure of each inner packaging shall be physically held in place by any means
capable of preventing back-off or loosening of the closure by impact or vibration during carriage;
(3) Packagings consisting of:
Outer packagings:
Steel or plastics drums (1A1, 1A2, 1H1 or 1H2) tested in accordance with the test requirements in 6.1.5 at a
mass corresponding to the mass of the assembled package either as a packaging intended to contain inner
packagings, or as a single packaging intended to contain solids or liquids, and marked accordingly;
Inner packagings:
Drums and composite packagings (1A1, 1B1, 1N1, 1H1 or 6HA1) meeting the requirements of Chapter 6.1 for
single packagings, subject to the following conditions:
(a) The hydraulic pressure test shall be conducted at a pressure of at least 300 kPa (3 bar) (gauge pressure);
(b) The design and production leakproofness tests shall be conducted at a test pressure of 30 kPa (0.3 bar);
(c) They shall be isolated from the outer drum by the use of inert shock-mitigating cushioning material which
surrounds the inner packaging on all sides;
(d) Their capacity shall not exceed 125 litres;
(e) Closures shall be of a screw type that are:
(i) Physically held in place by any means capable of preventing back-off or loosening of the closure
by impact or vibration during carriage;
(ii) Provided with a cap seal;
(f) The outer and inner packagings shall be subjected periodically to an internal inspection and leakproofness
test according to (b) at intervals of not more than two and a half years; and
(g) The outer and inner packagings shall bear in clearly legible and durable characters:
(i) the date (month, year) of the initial test and the latest periodic test and inspection of the inner
packaging; and
(ii) the name or authorized symbol of the expert who carried out the tests and inspections;
(4) Pressure receptacles, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.3.6 are met.
(a) They shall be subjected to an initial test and periodic tests every 10 years at a pressure of not less than 1
MPa (10 bar) (gauge pressure);
(b) They shall be subjected periodically to an internal inspection and leakproofness test at intervals of not
more than two and a half years;
(c) They may not be equipped with any pressure relief device;
(d) Each pressure receptacle shall be closed with a plug or valve(s) fitted with a secondary closure device;
and
(e) The materials of construction for the pressure receptacle, valves, plugs, outlet caps, luting and gaskets
shall be compatible with each other and with the contents.
– 123 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 124 –
P900 PACKING INSTRUCTION P900
(Reserved)
P901 PACKING INSTRUCTION P901
This instruction applies to UN No. 3316.
The following combination packagings are authorized provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
Drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G);
Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2);
Jerricans (3A1, 3A2, 3B1, 3B2, 3H1, 3H2).
Packagings shall conform to the performance level consistent with the packing group assigned to the kit as a whole
(see special provision 251 of Chapter 3.3). Where the kit contains only dangerous goods to which no packing group is
assigned, packagings shall meet the packing group II performance level.
Maximum quantity of dangerous goods per outer packaging: 10 kg excluding the mass of any carbon dioxide, solid
(dry ice) used as a refrigerant.
Additional requirements:
Dangerous goods in kits shall be packed in inner packagings which shall be protected from other materials in the kit.
P902 PACKING INSTRUCTION P902
This instruction applies to UN No. 3268.
Packaged articles:
The following packagings are authorized provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
Drums (1A2, 1B2, 1N2, 1H2, 1D, 1G);
Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2);
Jerricans (3A2, 3B2, 3H2).
Packagings shall conform to the packing group III performance level.
The packagings shall be designed and constructed so as to prevent movement of the articles and inadvertent operation
during normal conditions of carriage.
Unpackaged articles:
The articles may also be carried unpackaged in dedicated handling devices or cargo transport units when moved to,
from, or between where they are manufactured and an assembly plant including intermediate handling locations.
Additional requirement:
Any pressure receptacle shall be in accordance with the requirements of the competent authority for the substance(s)
contained therein.
– 124 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 125 –
P903 PACKING INSTRUCTION P903
This instruction applies to UN Nos. 3090 , 3091, 3480 and 3481.
For the purpose of this packing instruction, “equipment” means apparatus for which the lithium cells or batteries will
provide electrical power for its operation. The following packagings are authorized provided that the general provisions
of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
(1) For cells and batteries:
Drums (1A2, 1B2, 1N2, 1H2, 1D, 1G);
Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2);
Jerricans (3A2, 3B2, 3H2).
Cells or batteries shall be packed in packagings so that the cells or batteries are protected against damage that
may be caused by the movement or placement of the cells or batteries within the packaging.
Packagings shall conform to the packing group II performance level.
(2) In addition, for a cell or a battery with a gross mass of 12 kg or more employing a strong, impact resistant outer
casing:
(a) Strong outer packagings;
(b) Protective enclosures (e.g., fully enclosed or wooden slatted crates); or
(c) Pallets or other handling devices.
Cells or batteries shall be secured to prevent inadvertent movement, and the terminals shall not support the
weight of other superimposed elements.
Packagings need not meet the requirements of 4.1.1.3.
(3) For cells or batteries packed with equipment:
Packagings conforming to the requirements in paragraph (1) of this packing instruction, then placed with the
equipment in an outer packaging; or
Packagings that completely enclose the cells or batteries, then placed with equipment in a packaging conforming
to the requirements in paragraph (1) of this packing instruction.
The equipment shall be secured against movement within the outer packaging.
(4) For cells or batteries contained in equipment:
Strong outer packagings constructed of suitable material, and of adequate strength and design in relation to the
packaging capacity and its intended use. They shall be constructed in such a manner as to prevent accidental
operation during carriage. Packagings need not meet the requirements of 4.1.1.3.
Large equipment can be offered for carriage unpackaged or on pallets when the cells or batteries are afforded
equivalent protection by the equipment in which they are contained.
When intentionally active, devices such as radio frequency identification (RFID) tags, watches and temperature
loggers, which are not capable of generating a dangerous evolution of heat, may be carried in strong outer
packagings.
NOTE: For carriage in a transport chain including air carriage, these devices, when active, shall meet defined
standards for electromagnetic radiation to ensure that the operation of the devices does not interfere with
aircraft systems.
(Cont’d on next page)
– 125 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 126 –
P903 PACKING INSTRUCTION (cont’d) P903
(5) For packagings containing both cells or batteries packed with equipment and contained in equipment:
(a) For cells and batteries, packagings that completely enclose the cells or batteries, then placed with
equipment in a packaging conforming to the requirements in paragraph (1) of this packing instruction;
or
(b) Packagings conforming to the requirements in paragraph (1) of this packing instruction, then placed with
the equipment in a strong outer packaging constructed of suitable material, and of adequate strength and
design in relation to the packaging capacity and its intended use. The outer packaging shall be
constructed in such a manner as to prevent accidental operation during carriage and need not meet the
requirements of 4.1.1.3.
The equipment shall be secured against movement within the outer packaging.
When intentionally active, devices such as radio frequency identification (RFID) tags, watches and temperature
loggers, which are not capable of generating a dangerous evolution of heat, may be carried in strong outer
packagings.
NOTE: For carriage in a transport chain including air carriage, these devices, when active, shall meet defined
standards for electromagnetic radiation to ensure that the operation of the devices does not interfere with
aircraft systems.
NOTE: The packagings authorized in (2), (4) and (5) may exceed a net mass of 400 kg (see 4.1.3.3).
Additional requirement:
Cells or batteries shall be protected against short circuit.
– 126 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 127 –
P903a PACKING INSTRUCTION P903a
(Deleted)
P903b PACKING INSTRUCTION P903b
(Deleted)
P904 PACKING INSTRUCTION P904
This instruction applies to UN No. 3245.
The following packagings are authorized:
(1) Packagings meeting the provisions of 4.1.1.1, 4.1.1.2, 4.1.1.4, 4.1.1.8 and 4.1.3 and so designed that they meet
the construction requirements of 6.1.4. Outer packagings constructed of suitable material, and of adequate
strength and design in relation to the packaging capacity and its intended use, shall be used. Where this packing
instruction is used for the carriage of inner packagings of combination packagings the packaging shall be
designed and constructed to prevent inadvertent discharge during normal conditions of carriage.
(2) Packagings, which need not conform to the packaging test requirements of Part 6, but conforming to the
following:
(a) An inner packaging comprising:
(i) primary receptacle(s) and a secondary packaging, the primary receptacle(s) or the secondary
packaging shall be leakproof for liquids or siftproof for solids;
(ii) for liquids, absorbent material placed between the primary receptacle(s) and the secondary
packaging. The absorbent material shall be in a quantity sufficient to absorb the entire contents of
the primary receptacle(s) so that any release of the liquid substance will not compromise the
integrity of the cushioning material or of the outer packaging;
(iii) if multiple fragile primary receptacles are placed in a single secondary packaging they shall be
individually wrapped or separated to prevent contact between them;
(b) An outer packaging shall be strong enough for its capacity, mass and intended use, and with a smallest
external dimension of at least 100 mm.
For carriage, the mark illustrated below shall be displayed on the external surface of the outer packaging on a background
of a contrasting colour and shall be clearly visible and legible. The mark shall be in the form of a square set at an angle
of 45° (diamond-shaped) with each side having a length of at least 50 mm; the width of the line shall be at least 2 mm
and the letters and numbers shall be at least 6 mm high.
Additional requirement:
Ice, dry ice and liquid nitrogen
When dry ice or liquid nitrogen is used as a coolant, the requirements of 5.5.3 shall apply. When used, ice shall be
placed outside the secondary packagings or in the outer packaging or an overpack. Interior supports shall be provided
to secure the secondary packaging in the original position. If ice is used, the outside packaging or overpack shall be
leakproof.
– 127 –
UN 3245
Minimum dimension
50 mm

Minimum dimension
50 mm
Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 128 –
P905 PACKING INSTRUCTION P905
This instruction applies to UN Nos. 2990 and 3072.
Any suitable packaging is authorized, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met, except that packagings
need not conform to the requirements of Part 6.
NOTE: The packagings authorized may exceed a net mass of 400 kg (see 4.1.3.3).
When the life saving appliances are constructed to incorporate or are contained in rigid outer weatherproof casings
(such as for lifeboats), they may be carried unpackaged.
Additional requirements:
1. All dangerous substances and articles contained as equipment within the appliances shall be secured to prevent
inadvertent movement and in addition:
(a) Signal devices of Class 1 shall be packed in plastics or fibreboard inner packagings;
(b) Non-flammable, non-toxic gases shall be contained in cylinders as specified by the competent authority,
which may be connected to the appliance;
(c) Electric storage batteries (Class 8) and lithium batteries (Class 9) shall be disconnected or electrically
isolated and secured to prevent any spillage of liquid; and
(d) Small quantities of other dangerous substances (for example in Classes 3, 4.1 and 5.2) shall be packed
in strong inner packagings.
2. Preparation for transport and packaging shall include provisions to prevent any accidental inflation of the
appliance.
P906 PACKING INSTRUCTION P906
This instruction applies to UN Nos. 2315, 3151, 3152 and 3432.
The following packagings are authorized, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
(1) For liquids and solids containing or contaminated with PCBs, polyhalogenated biphenyls, polyhalogenated
terphenyls or halogenated monomethyldiphenylmethanes: Packagings in accordance with packing instructions
P001 or P002, as appropriate.
(2) For transformers and condensers and other articles:
(a) Packagings in accordance with packing instructions P001 or P002. The articles shall be secured with
suitable cushioning material to prevent inadvertent movement during normal conditions of carriage; or
(b) Leakproof packagings which are capable of containing, in addition to the articles, at least 1.25 times the
volume of the liquid PCBs, polyhalogenated biphenyls, polyhalogenated terphenyls or halogenated
monomethyldiphenylmethanes present in them. There shall be sufficient absorbent material in the
packagings to absorb at least 1.1 times the volume of liquid which is contained in the articles. In general,
transformers and condensers shall be carried in leakproof metal packagings which are capable of
holding, in addition to the transformers and condensers, at least 1.25 times the volume of the liquid
present in them.
NOTE: The packagings authorized may exceed a net mass of 400 kg (see 4.1.3.3).
Notwithstanding the above, liquids and solids not packaged in accordance with packing instructions P001 and P002
and unpackaged transformers and condensers may be carried in cargo transport units fitted with a leakproof metal tray
to a height of at least 800 mm, containing sufficient inert absorbent material to absorb at least 1.1 times the volume of
any free liquid.
NOTE: The packagings authorized may exceed a net mass of 400 kg (see 4.1.3.3).
Additional requirement:
Adequate provisions shall be taken to seal the transformers and condensers to prevent leakage during normal conditions
of carriage.
– 128 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 129 –
P907 PACKING INSTRUCTION P907
This instruction applies to articles, such as machinery, apparatus or devices of UN No. 3363.
If the article is constructed and designed so that the receptacles containing the dangerous goods are afforded adequate
protection, an outer packaging is not required. Dangerous goods in an article shall otherwise be packed in outer
packagings constructed of suitable material, and of adequate strength and design in relation to the packaging capacity
and its intended use, and meeting the applicable requirements of 4.1.1.1.
Receptacles containing dangerous goods shall conform to the general provisions in 4.1.1, except that 4.1.1.3, 4.1.1.4,
4.1.1.12 and 4.1.1.14 do not apply. For non-flammable, non-toxic gases, the inner cylinder or receptacle, its contents
and filling ratio shall be to the satisfaction of the competent authority of the country in which the cylinder or receptacle
is filled.
In addition, the manner in which receptacles are contained within the article shall be such that under normal conditions
of carriage, damage to receptacles containing the dangerous goods is unlikely; and in the event of damage to
receptacles containing solid or liquid dangerous goods, no leakage of the dangerous goods from the article is possible
(a leakproof liner may be used to satisfy this requirement). Receptacles containing dangerous goods shall be so
installed, secured or cushioned as to prevent their breakage or leakage and so as to control their movement within the
article during normal conditions of carriage. Cushioning material shall not react dangerously with the content of the
receptacles. Any leakage of the contents shall not substantially impair the protective properties of the cushioning
material.
NOTE: The packagings authorized may exceed a net mass of 400 kg (see 4.1.3.3).
P908 PACKING INSTRUCTION P908
This instruction applies to damaged or defective lithium ion cells and batteries and damaged or defective lithium metal
cells and batteries, including those contained in equipment, of UN Nos. 3090, 3091, 3480 and 3481.
The following packagings are authorized provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
For cells and batteries and equipment containing cells and batteries:
Drums (1A2, 1B2, 1N2, 1H2, 1D, 1G)
Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2)
Jerricans (3A2, 3B2, 3H2)
Packagings shall conform to the packing group II performance level.
1. Each damaged or defective cell or battery or equipment containing such cells or batteries shall be
individually packed in inner packaging and placed inside an outer packaging. The inner packaging or outer
packaging shall be leak-proof to prevent the potential release of electrolyte.
2. Each inner packaging shall be surrounded by sufficient non-combustible and electrically non-conductive
thermal insulation material to protect against a dangerous evolution of heat.
3. Sealed packagings shall be fitted with a venting device when appropriate.
4. Appropriate measures shall be taken to minimize the effects of vibrations and shocks, prevent movement
of the cells or batteries within the package that may lead to further damage and a dangerous condition
during carriage. Cushioning material that is non-combustible and electrically non-conductive may also be
used to meet this requirement.
5. Non combustibility shall be assessed according to a standard recognized in the country where the
packaging is designed or manufactured.
For leaking cells or batteries, sufficient inert absorbent material shall be added to the inner or outer packaging to
absorb any release of electrolyte.
A cell or battery with a net mass of more than 30 kg shall be limited to one cell or battery per outer packaging.
Additional requirement:
Cells or batteries shall be protected against short circuit.
– 129 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 130 –
P909 PACKING INSTRUCTION P909
This instruction applies to UN Nos. 3090, 3091, 3480 and 3481 carried for disposal or recycling, either packed
together with or packed without non-lithium batteries.
(1) Cells and batteries shall be packed in accordance with the following:
(a) The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3, are
met:
Drums (1A2, 1B2, 1N2, 1H2, 1D, 1G);
Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H2); and
Jerricans (3A2, 3B2, 3H2).
(b) Packagings shall conform to the packing group II performance level.
(c) Metal packagings shall be fitted with an electrically non-conductive lining material (e.g. plastics) of
adequate strength for the intended use.
(2) However, lithium ion cells with a Watt-hour rating of not more than 20 Wh, lithium ion batteries with a Watt-
hour rating of not more than 100 Wh, lithium metal cells with a lithium content of not more than 1 g and lithium
metal batteries with an aggregate lithium content of not more than 2 g may be packed in accordance with the
following:
(a) In strong outer packaging up to 30 kg gross mass meeting the general provisions of 4.1.1, except 4.1.1.3,
and 4.1.3.
(b) Metal packagings shall be fitted with an electrically non-conductive lining material (e.g. plastics) of
adequate strength for the intended use.
(3) For cells or batteries contained in equipment, strong outer packagings constructed of suitable material, and of
adequate strength and design in relation to the packaging capacity and its intended use, may be used. Packagings
need not meet the requirements of 4.1.1.3. Equipment may also be offered for carriage unpackaged or on pallets
when the cells or batteries are afforded equivalent protection by the equipment in which they are contained.
(4) In addition, for cells or batteries with a gross mass of 12 kg or more employing a strong, impact resistant outer
casing, strong outer packagings constructed of suitable material and of adequate strength and design in relation
to the packaging’s capacity and its intended use, may be used. Packagings need not meet the requirements of
4.1.1.3.
NOTE: The packagings authorized may exceed a net mass of 400 kg (see 4.1.3.3).
Additional requirements:
1. Cells and batteries shall be designed or packed to prevent short circuits and the dangerous evolution of heat.
2. Protection against short circuits and the dangerous evolution of heat includes, but is not limited to:
– individual protection of the battery terminals,
– inner packaging to prevent contact between cells and batteries,
– batteries with recessed terminals designed to protect against short circuits, or
– the use of an electrically non-conductive and non-combustible cushioning material to fill empty space
between the cells or batteries in the packaging.
3. Cells and batteries shall be secured within the outer packaging to prevent excessive movement during carriage
(e.g. by using a non-combustible and electrically non-conductive cushioning material or through the use of a
tightly closed plastics bag).
– 130 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 131 –
P910 PACKING INSTRUCTION P910
This instruction applies to UN Nos. 3090, 3091, 3480 and 3481 production runs consisting of not more than 100 cells
or batteries and to pre-production prototypes of cells or batteries when these prototypes are carried for testing.
The following packagings are authorized provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
(1) For cells and batteries, including when packed with equipment:
Drums (1A2, 1B2, 1N2, 1H2, 1D, 1G);
Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2);
Jerricans (3A2, 3B2, 3H2).
Packagings shall conform to the packing group II performance level and shall meet the following
requirements:
(a) Batteries and cells, including equipment, of different sizes, shapes or masses shall be packaged in an outer
packaging of a tested design type listed above provided the total gross mass of the package does not exceed
the gross mass for which the design type has been tested;
(b) Each cell or battery shall be individually packed in an inner packaging and placed inside an outer packaging;
(c) Each inner packaging shall be completely surrounded by sufficient non-combustible and electrically non-
conductive thermal insulation material to protect against a dangerous evolution of heat;
(d) Appropriate measures shall be taken to minimize the effects of vibration and shocks and prevent movement
of the cells or batteries within the package that may lead to damage and a dangerous condition during
carriage. Cushioning material that is non-combustible and electrically non-conductive may be used to meet
this requirement;
(e) Non-combustibility shall be assessed according to a standard recognized in the country where the packaging
is designed or manufactured;
(f) A cell or battery with a net mass of more than 30 kg shall be limited to one cell or battery per outer
packaging.
(2) For cells and batteries contained in equipment:
Drums (1A2, 1B2, 1N2, 1H2, 1D, 1G);
Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2);
Jerricans (3A2, 3B2, 3H2).
Packagings shall conform to the packing group II performance level and shall meet the following
requirements:
(a) Equipment of different sizes, shapes or masses shall be packaged in an outer packaging of a tested design
type listed above provided the total gross mass of the package does not exceed the gross mass for which
the design type has been tested;
(b) The equipment shall be constructed or packaged in such a manner as to prevent accidental operation
during carriage;
(c) Appropriate measures shall be taken to minimize the effects of vibration and shocks and prevent
movement of the equipment within the package that may lead to damage and a dangerous condition
during carriage. When cushioning material is used to meet this requirement it shall be non-combustible
and electrically non-conductive; and
(d) Non-combustibility shall be assessed according to a standard recognized in the country where the
packaging is designed or manufactured.
(Cont’d on next page)
– 131 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 132 –
P910 PACKING INSTRUCTION (cont’d) P910
(3) The equipment or the batteries may be carried unpackaged under conditions specified by the competent
authority of any Contracting Party to ADR, which may also recognize an approval granted by the competent
authority of a country which is not a Contracting Party to ADR, provided that this approval has been granted
in accordance with the procedures applicable according to RID, ADR, ADN, the IMDG Code or the ICAO
Technical Instructions. Additional conditions that may be considered in the approval process include, but are
not limited to:
(a) The equipment or the battery shall be strong enough to withstand the shocks and loadings normally
encountered during carriage, including trans-shipment between cargo transport units and between cargo
transport units and warehouses as well as any removal from a pallet for subsequent manual or mechanical
handling; and
(b) The equipment or the battery shall be fixed in cradles or crates or other handling devices in such a way
that it will not become loose during normal conditions of carriage.
NOTE: The packagings authorized may exceed a net mass of 400 kg (see 4.1.3.3).
Additional requirements
The cells and batteries shall be protected against short circuit;
Protection against short circuits includes, but is not limited to,
– individual protection of the battery terminals,
– inner packaging to prevent contact between cells and batteries,
– batteries with recessed terminals designed to protect against short circuits, or
– the use of a electrically non-conductive and non-combustible cushioning material to fill empty space between the
cells or batteries in the packaging.
P911 PACKING INSTRUCTION P911
This instruction applies to damaged or defective cells and batteries of UN Nos. 3090, 3091, 3480 and 3481 liable to
rapidly disassemble, dangerously react, produce a flame or a dangerous evolution of heat or a dangerous emission of
toxic, corrosive or flammable gases or vapours under normal conditions of carriage.
The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
For cells and batteries and equipment containing cells and batteries:
Drums (1A2, 1B2, 1N2, 1H2, 1D, 1G);
Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2);
Jerricans (3A2, 3B2, 3H2)
The packagings shall conform to the packing group I performance level.
(1) The packaging shall be capable of meeting the following additional performance requirements in case of rapid
disassembly, dangerous reaction, production of a flame or a dangerous evolution of heat or a dangerous emission
of toxic, corrosive or flammable gases or vapours of the cells or batteries:
(a) The outside surface temperature of the completed package shall not have a temperature of more than 100°C.
A momentary spike in temperature up to 200 °C is acceptable;
(b) No flame shall occur outside the package;
(c) No projectiles shall exit the package;
(d) The structural integrity of the package shall be maintained; and
(e) The packagings shall have a gas management system (e.g. filter system, air circulation, containment for gas,
gas tight packaging etc.), as appropriate.
(2) The additional packaging performance requirements shall be verified by a test as specified by the competent
authority of any ADR Contracting Party who may also recognize a test specified by the competent authority of
a country which is not an ADR Contracting Party provided that this test has been specified in accordance with
the procedures applicable according to RID, ADR, ADN, the IMDG Code or the ICAO Technical Instructionsa.
A verification report shall be available on request. As a minimum requirement, the cell or battery name, the cell
or battery number, the mass, type, energy content of the cells or batteries, the packaging identification and the
test data according to the verification method as specified by the competent authority shall be listed in the
verification report.
(Cont’d on next page)
– 132 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 133 –
P911 PACKING INSTRUCTION (cont’d) P911
(3) When dry ice or liquid nitrogen is used as a coolant, the requirements of section 5.5.3 shall apply. The inner
packaging and outer packaging shall maintain their integrity at the temperature of the refrigerant used as well as
the temperatures and the pressures which could result if refrigeration were lost.
Additional requirement:
Cells or batteries shall be protected against short circuit.
a The following criteria, as relevant, may be considered to assess the performance of the packaging:
(a) The assessment shall be done under a quality management system (as described e.g. in section
2.2.9.1.7 (e)) allowing for the traceability of tests results, reference data and characterization models used;
(b) The list of hazards expected in case of thermal run-away for the cell or battery type, in the condition
it is carried (e.g. usage of an inner packaging, state of charge (SOC), use of sufficient non-combustible,
electrically non-conductive and absorbent cushioning material etc.), shall be clearly identified and quantified;
the reference list of possible hazards for lithium cells or batteries (rapidly disassemble, dangerously react,
produce a flame or a dangerous evolution of heat or a dangerous emission of toxic, corrosive or flammable gases
or vapours) can be used for this purpose. The quantification of these hazards shall rely on available scientific
literature;
(c) The mitigating effects of the packaging shall be identified and characterized, based on the nature of
the protections provided and the construction material properties. A list of technical characteristics and
drawings shall be used to support this assessment (Density [kg·m -3 ], specific heat capacity [J·kg -1·K-1 ], heating
value [kJ·kg -1 ], thermal conductivity [W·m -1·K-1 ], melting temperature and flammability temperature [K], heat
transfer coefficient of the outer packaging [W·m -2·K-1 ], …);
(d) The test and any supporting calculations shall assess the result of a thermal run-away of the cell or
battery inside the packaging in the normal conditions of carriage;
(e) In case the SOC of the cell or battery is not known, the assessment used, shall be done with the highest
possible SOC corresponding to the cell or battery use conditions;
(f) The surrounding conditions in which the packaging may be used and carried shall be described
(including for possible consequences of gas or smoke emissions on the environment, such as ventilation or other
methods) according to the gas management system of the packaging;
(g) The tests or the model calculation shall consider the worst case scenario for the thermal run-away
triggering and propagation inside the cell or battery; this scenario includes the worst possible failure in the
normal carriage condition, the maximum heat and flame emissions for the possible propagation of the reaction;
(h) These scenarios shall be assessed over a period of time long enough to allow all the possible
consequences to occur (e.g. 24 hours);
(i) In the case of multiple batteries and multiple items of equipment containing batteries, additional
requirements such as the maximum number of batteries and items of equipment, the total maximum energy
content of the batteries, and the configuration inside the package, including separations and protections of the
parts, shall be considered.
R001 PACKING INSTRUCTION R001
The following packagings are authorized provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
Light gauge metal packagings Maximum capacity/maximum net mass
Packing group I Packing group II Packing group III
steel, non-removable head (0A1) Not allowed 40 l / 50 kg 40 l / 50 kg
steel, removable head (0A2) a Not allowed 40 l / 50 kg 40 l / 50 kg
a Not allowed for UN No. 1261 NITROMETHANE.
NOTE 1: This instruction applies to solids and liquids (provided the design type is tested and marked appropriately).
NOTE 2: For Class 3, packing group II, these packagings may be used only for substances with no subsidiary hazard
and a vapour pressure of not more than 110 kPa at 50 °C and for slightly toxic pesticides.
– 133 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 134 –
4.1.4.2 Packing instructions concerning the use of IBCs
IBC01 PACKING INSTRUCTION IBC01
The following IBCs are authorized, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.2 and 4.1.3 are met:
Metal (31A, 31B and 31N).
Special packing provision specific to RID and ADR:
BB1 For UN No. 3130, the openings of receptacles for this substance shall be tightly closed by means of two devices
in series, one of which shall be screwed or secured in an equivalent manner.
IBC02 PACKING INSTRUCTION IBC02
The following IBCs are authorized, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.2 and 4.1.3 are met:
(1) Metal (31A, 31B and 31N);
(2) Rigid plastics (31H1 and 31H2);
(3) Composite (31HZ1).
Special packing provisions:
B5 For UN Nos. 1791, 2014, 2984 and 3149, IBCs shall be provided with a device to allow venting during carriage.
The inlet to the venting device shall be sited in the vapour space of the IBC under maximum filling conditions
during carriage.
B7 For UN Nos. 1222 and 1865, IBCs with a capacity greater than 450 litres are not permitted due to the substance’s
potential for explosion when carried in large volumes.
B8 The pure form of this substance shall not be transported in IBCs since it is known to have a vapour pressure of
more than 110 kPa at 50 °C or 130 kPa at 55 °C.
B15 For UN No. 2031 with more than 55 % nitric acid, the permitted use of rigid plastics IBCs and of rigid plastics
inner receptacles of composite IBCs shall be two years from their date of manufacture.
B16 For UN No. 3375, IBCs of type 31A and 31N are not allowed without competent authority approval.
Special packing provisions specific to RID and ADR:
BB2 For UN No.1203, notwithstanding special provision 534 (see 3.3.1), IBCs shall only be used when the actual
vapour pressure is not more than 110 kPa at 50 °C, or 130 kPa at 55 °C.
BB4 For UN Nos. 1133, 1139, 1197, 1210, 1263, 1266, 1286, 1287, 1306, 1866, 1993 and 1999, assigned to packing
group III in accordance with 2.2.3.1.4, IBCs with a capacity greater than 450 litres are not permitted.
IBC03 PACKING INSTRUCTION IBC03
The following IBCs are authorized, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.2 and 4.1.3 are met:
(1) Metal (31A, 31B and 31N);
(2) Rigid plastics (31H1 and 31H2);
(3) Composite (31HZ1, 31HA2, 31HB2, 31HN2, 31HD2 and 31HH2).
Special packing provision:
B8 The pure form of this substance shall not be carried in IBCs since it is known to have a vapour pressure of more
than 110 kPa at 50 °C or 130 kPa at 55 °C.
B19 For UN Nos. 3532 and 3534, IBCs shall be designed and constructed to permit the release of gas or vapour to
prevent a build-up of pressure that could rupture the IBCs in the event of loss of stabilization.
– 134 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 135 –
IBC04 PACKING INSTRUCTION IBC04
The following IBCs are authorized, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.2 and 4.1.3 are met:
Metal (11A, 11B, 11N, 21A, 21B, 21N, 31A, 31B and 31N).
IBC05 PACKING INSTRUCTION IBC05
The following IBCs are authorized, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.2 and 4.1.3 are met:
(1) Metal (11A, 11B, 11N, 21A, 21B, 21N, 31A, 31B and 31N).);
(2) Rigid plastics (11H1, 11H2, 21H1, 21H2, 31H1 and 31H2);
(3) Composite (11HZ1, 21HZ1 and 31HZ1).
IBC06 PACKING INSTRUCTION IBC06
The following IBCs are authorized, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.2 and 4.1.3 are met:
(1) Metal (11A, 11B, 11N, 21A, 21B, 21N, 31A, 31B and 31N);
(2) Rigid plastics (11H1, 11H2, 21H1, 21H2, 31H1 and 31H2);
(3) Composite (11HZ1, 11HZ2, 21HZ1, 21HZ2 and 31HZ1).
Additional requirement:
Where the solid may become liquid during carriage see 4.1.3.4.
Special packing provisions:
B12 For UN No. 2907, IBCs shall meet the packing group II performance level. IBCs meeting the test criteria of
packing group I shall not be used.
IBC07 PACKING INSTRUCTION IBC07
The following IBCs are authorized, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.2 and 4.1.3 are met:
(1) Metal (11A, 11B, 11N, 21A, 21B, 21N, 31A, 31B and 31N);
(2) Rigid plastics (11H1, 11H2, 21H1, 21H2, 31H1 and 31H2);
(3) Composite (11HZ1, 11HZ2, 21HZ1, 21HZ2 and 31HZ1);
(4) Wooden (11C, 11D and 11F).
Additional requirements:
1. Where the solid may become liquid during carriage see 4.1.3.4.
2. Liners of wooden IBCs shall be siftproof.
Special packing provision:
B18 For UN Nos. 3531 and 3533, IBCs shall be designed and constructed to permit the release of gas or vapour to
prevent a build-up of pressure that could rupture the IBCs in the event of loss of stabilization.
B20 UN No. 3550 may be carried in flexible IBCs (13H3 or 13H4) with siftproof liners to prevent any egress of
dust during carriage.
– 135 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 136 –
IBC08 PACKING INSTRUCTION IBC08
The following IBCs are authorized, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.2 and 4.1.3 are met:
(1) Metal (11A, 11B, 11N, 21A, 21B, 21N, 31A, 31B and 31N);
(2) Rigid plastics (11H1, 11H2, 21H1, 21H2, 31H1 and 31H2);
(3) Composite (11HZ1, 11HZ2, 21HZ1, 21HZ2 and 31HZ1);
(4) Fibreboard (11G);
(5) Wooden (11C, 11D and 11F);
(6) Flexible (13H1, 13H2, 13H3, 13H4, 13H5, 13L1, 13L2, 13L3, 13L4, 13M1 and 13M2).
Additional requirement:
Where the solid may become liquid during carriage see 4.1.3.4.
Special packing provisions:
B3 Flexible IBCs shall be sift-proof and water-resistant or shall be fitted with a sift-proof and water-restistant liner.
B4 Flexible, fibreboard or wooden IBCs shall be sift-proof and water-resistant or shall be fitted with a sift-proof
and water-resistant liner.
B6 For UN Nos. 1363, 1364, 1365, 1386, 1408, 1841, 2211, 2217, 2793 and 3314, IBCs are not required to meet
the IBC testing requirements of Chapter 6.5.
B13 NOTE: For UN Nos. 1748, 2208, 2880, 3485, 3486 and 3487, carriage by sea in IBCs is prohibited according
to the IMDG Code.
Special packing provision specific to RID and ADR:
BB3 For UN 3509, IBCs are not required to meet the requirements of 4.1.1.3.
IBCs meeting the requirements of 6.5.5, made leak tight or fitted with a leak tight and puncture
resistant sealed liner or bag, shall be used.
When the only residues are solids which are not liable to become liquid at temperatures likely to
be encountered during carriage, flexible IBCs may be used.
When liquid residues are present, rigid IBCs that provide a means of retention (e.g. absorbent
material) shall be used.
Before being filled and handed over for carriage, every IBC shall be inspected to ensure that it is
free from corrosion, contamination or other damage. Any IBC showing signs of reduced strength,
shall no longer be used (minor dents and scratches are not considered as reducing the strength of
the IBC).
IBCs intended for the carriage of packagings, discarded, empty, uncleaned with residues of Class
5.1 shall be so constructed or adapted that the goods cannot come into contact with wood or any
other combustible material.
IBC99 PACKING INSTRUCTION IBC99
Only IBCs which are approved for these goods by the competent authority may be used. A copy of the competent
authority approval shall accompany each consignment or the transport document shall include an indication that the
packaging was approved by the competent authority.
– 136 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 137 –
IBC100 PACKING INSTRUCTION IBC100
This instruction applies to UN Nos. 0082, 0222, 0241, 0331 and 0332.
The following IBCs are authorized, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.2 and 4.1.3 and special provisions of
4.1.5 are met:
(1) Metal (11A, 11B, 11N, 21A, 21B, 21N, 31A, 31B and 31N);
(2) Flexible (13H2, 13H3, 13H4, 13L2, 13L3, 13L4 and 13M2);
(3) Rigid plastics (11H1, 11H2, 21H1, 21H2, 31H1 and 31H2);
(4) Composite (11HZ1, 11HZ2, 21HZ1, 21HZ2, 31HZ1 and 31HZ2).
Additional requirements:
1. IBCs shall only be used for free flowing substances.
2. Flexible IBCs shall only be used for solids.
Special packing provisions:
B3 For UN No. 0222, flexible IBCs shall be sift-proof and water resistant or shall be fitted with a sift-proof and
water resistant liner.
B9 For UN No. 0082, this packing instruction may only be used when the substances are mixtures of ammonium
nitrate or other inorganic nitrates with other combustible substances which are not explosive ingredients. Such
explosives shall not contain nitroglycerin, similar liquid organic nitrates, or chlorates. Metal IBCs are not
authorized.
B10 For UN No. 0241, this packing instruction may only be used for substances which consist of water as an
essential ingredient and high proportions of ammonium nitrate or other oxidizing substances some or all of
which are in solution. The other constituents may include hydrocarbons or aluminium powder, but shall not
include nitro-derivatives such as trinitrotoluene. Metal IBCs are not authorized.
B17 For UN No. 0222, metal IBCs are not authorized.
– 137 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 138 –
IBC520 PACKING INSTRUCTION IBC520
This instruction applies to organic peroxides and self-reactive substances of type F.
The IBCs listed below are authorized for the formulations listed, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.2 and
4.1.3 and special provisions of 4.1.7.2 are met. The formulations not listed in 2.2.41.4 or in 2.2.52.4 but listed below
may also be carried packed in accordance with packing method OP8 of packing instruction P520 of 4.1.4.1, with the
same control and emergency temperatures, if applicable.
For formulations not listed below, only IBCs which are approved by the competent authority may be used (see 4.1.7.2.2).
UN No. Organic peroxide Type of
IBC
Maximum
quantity
(litres/kg)
Control
Tempera-
ture
Emergency
Tempera-
ture
3109 ORGANIC PEROXIDE, TYPE F, LIQUID
tert-Butyl cumyl peroxide 31HA1 1000
tert-Butyl hydroperoxide, not more than 72 % with water 31A 1 250
31HA1 1 000
tert-Butyl peroxyacetate, not more than 32 % in diluent
type A
31A
31HA1
1 250
1 000
tert-Butyl peroxybenzoate, not more than 32 % in diluent
type A
31A 1 250
tert-Butyl peroxy-3,5,5-trimethylhexanoate, not more
than 37 % in diluent type A
31A
31HA1
1 250
1 000
Cumyl hydroperoxide, not more than 90 % in diluent type
A
31HA1 1 250
Dibenzoyl peroxide, not more than 42 % as a stable
dispersion in water
31H1 1 000
Di-tert-butyl peroxide, not more than 52 % in diluent type
A
31A
31HA1
1 250
1 000
1,1-Di-(tert-butylperoxy) cyclohexane, not more
than 42 % in diluent type A
31H1 1 000
1,1-Di-(tert-butylperoxy) cyclohexane, not more than
37 % in diluent type A
31A 1 250
Dilauroyl peroxide, not more than 42 %, stable
dispersion, in water
31HA1 1 000
2,5-Dimethyl-2,5-di(tert-butylperoxy)hexane,
not more than 52 % in diluent type A
31HA1 1000
Isopropyl cumyl hydroperoxide, not more than 72 % in
diluent type A
31HA1 1 250
p-Menthyl hydroperoxide, not more than 72 % in diluent
type A
31HA1 1 250
Peroxyacetic acid, stabilized, not more than 17 % 31A
31H1
31H2
31HA1
1 500
1 500
1 500
1 500
3,6,9-Triethyl-3,6,9-trimethyl-1,4,7-triperoxonane
not more than 27 % in diluent type A
31HA1 1000
3110 ORGANIC PEROXIDE, TYPE F, SOLID
Dicumyl peroxide 31A
31H1
31HA1
2 000
(Cont’d on next page)
– 138 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 139 –
IBC520 PACKING INSTRUCTION IBC520
UN No. Organic peroxide Type of
IBC
Maximum
quantity
(litres/kg)
Control
Tempera-
ture
Emergency
Tempera-
ture
3119 ORGANIC PEROXIDE, TYPE F, LIQUID,
TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED
tert-Amyl peroxy-2-ethylhexanoate,
not more than 62 % in diluent type A
31HA1 1000 +15 °C +20 °C
tert-Amyl peroxypivalate, not more than 32 % in diluent
type A
31A 1 250 +10 °C +15 °C
tert-Amyl peroxypivalate, not more than 42 % as a stable
dispersion in water
31HA1 1 000 0 °C +10 °C
tert-Butyl peroxy-2-ethylhexanoate, not more than 32 %
in diluent type B
31HA1
31A
1 000
1 250
+30 °C
+30 °C
+35 °C
+35 °C
tert-Butyl peroxyneodecanoate, not more than 32 % in
diluent type A
31A 1 250 0 °C +10 °C
tert-Butyl peroxyneodecanoate, not more than 52 %,
stable dispersion, in water
31A 1 250 -5 °C +5 °C
tert-Butyl peroxypivalate, not more than 27 % in diluent
type B
31HA1
31A
1 000
1 250
+10 °C
+10 °C
+15 °C
+15 °C
tert-Butyl peroxypivalate, not more than 42 % in a diluent
type A
31HA1
31A
1 000
1 250
+10 °C
+10 °C
+15 °C
+15 °C
Cumyl peroxyneodecanoate, not more than 52 %, stable
dispersion, in water
31A 1 250 -15 °C – 5 °C
tert-Butyl peroxyneodecanoate, not more than 42 %
stable dispersion, in water
31A 1 250 – 5 °C + 5 °C
Di-(4-tert-butylcyclohexyl) peroxydicarbonate, not more
than 42 %, stable dispersion, in water
31HA1 1 000 +30 °C +35 °C
Dicetyl peroxydicarbonate, not more than 42 %, stable
dispersion, in water
31HA1 1 000 +30 °C +35 °C
Di-(2-neodecanoylperoxyisopropyl)benzene, not more
than 42 %, stable dispersion, in water
31A 1 250 -15 °C -5 °C
3-Hydroxy-1,1-dimethylbutyl peroxyneodecanoate, not
more than 52 %, stable dispersion, in water
31A 1 250 -15 °C -5 °C
Di-(2-ethylhexyl) peroxydicarbonate, not more
than 62 %, stable dispersion, in water
31A 1 250 -20 °C -10 °C
31HA1 1000 -20°C -10°C
Dimyristyl peroxydicarbonate, not more than 42 %, stable
dispersion, in water
31HA1 1 000 +15 °C +20 °C
Di-(3,5,5-trimethylhexanoyl) peroxide, not more
than 52 % in diluent type A
31HA1
31A
1 000
1 250
+10 °C
+10 °C
+15 °C
+15 °C
Di-(3,5,5-trimethylhexanoyl) peroxide, not more
than 52 %, stable dispersion, in water
31A 1 250 +10 °C +15 °C
1,1,3,3-Tetramethylbutyl peroxyneodecanoate, not more
than 52 %, stable dispersion, in water
31A
31HA1
1 250
1 000
– 5 °C
-5 °C
+ 5 °C
+5 °C
1,1,3,3-Tetramethylbutyl peroxy-2-ethylhexanoate, not
more than 67 %, in diluent type A
31HA1 1000 +15 °C +20 °C
Dicyclohexylperoxydicarbonate, not more than 42 % as a
stable dispersion, in water
31A 1 250 +10 °C +15 °C
Diisobutyryl peroxide, not more than 28 % as a stable
dispersion in water
31HA1
31A
1 000
1 250
-20 °C
-20 °C
-10 °C
-10 °C
Diisobutyryl peroxide, not more than 42 % as a stable
dispersion in water
31HA1
31A
1 000
1 250
-25 °C
-25 °C
-15 °C
-15 °C
3120 ORGANIC PEROXIDE, TYPE F, SOLID,
TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED
No formulation listed
(Cont’d on next page)
– 139 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 140 –
IBC520 PACKING INSTRUCTION (cont’d) IBC520
Additional requirements:
1. IBCs shall be provided with a device to allow venting during carriage. The inlet to the pressure-relief device
shall be sited in the vapour space of the IBC under maximum filling conditions during carriage.
2. To prevent explosive rupture of metal IBCs or composite IBCs with complete metal casing, the emergency-relief
devices shall be designed to vent all the decomposition products and vapours evolved during self-accelerating
decomposition or during a period of not less than one hour of fire-engulfment as calculated by the formula in
4.2.1.13.8. The control and emergency temperatures specified in this packing instruction are based on a non-
insulated IBC. When consigning an organic peroxide in an IBC in accordance with this instruction, it is the
responsibility of the consignor to ensure that:
(a) the pressure and emergency relief devices installed on the IBC are designed to take appropriate account
of the self-accelerating decomposition of the organic peroxide and of fire-engulfment; and
(b) when applicable, the control and emergency temperatures indicated are appropriate, taking into account
the design (e.g. insulation) of the IBC to be used.
IBC620 PACKING INSTRUCTION IBC620
This instruction applies to UN No. 3291.
The following IBCs are authorized, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1, except 4.1.1.15, 4.1.2 and 4.1.3 are met:
Rigid, leakproof IBCs conforming to the packing group II performance level.
Additional requirements:
1. There shall be sufficient absorbent material to absorb the entire amount of liquid present in the IBC.
2. IBCs shall be capable of retaining liquids.
3. IBCs intended to contain sharp objects such as broken glass and needles shall be resistant to puncture.
– 140 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 141 –
4.1.4.3 Packing instructions concerning the use of large packagings
LP01 PACKING INSTRUCTION (LIQUIDS) LP01
The following large packagings are authorized provided the general provision of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
Inner packagings Large outer packagings Packing group I Packing group II Packing group III
Glass 10 litres Steel (50A)
Not allowed Not allowed Maximum
capacity: 3 m³
Plastics 30 litres Aluminium (50B)
Metal 40 litres Metal other than steel or
aluminium (50N)
Rigid plastics (50H)
Natural wood (50C)
Plywood (50D)
Reconstituted wood (50F)
Rigid fibreboard (50G)
LP02 PACKING INSTRUCTION (SOLIDS) LP02
The following large packagings are authorized provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
Inner packagings Large outer packagings Packing group I Packing group II Packing group III
Glass 10 kg Steel (50A)
Not allowed Not allowed Maximum
capacity: 3 m³
Plastics b 50 kg Aluminium (50B)
Metal 50 kg Metal other than steel or
aluminium (50N)Paper a, b 50 kg
Fibre a, b 50 kg Rigid plastics (50H)
Natural wood (50C)
Plywood (50D)
Reconstituted wood (50F)
Rigid fibreboard (50G)
Flexible plastics (51H) c
a These inner packagings shall not be used when the substances being carried may become liquid during carriage.
b These inner packagings shall be sift-proof.
c To be used with flexible inner packagings only.
Special packing provisions:
L2 Deleted.
L3 NOTE: For UN Nos. 2208 and 3486, carriage by sea in large packagings is prohibited.
(Cont’d on next page)
– 141 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 142 –
LP02 PACKING INSTRUCTION (SOLIDS) (cont’d) LP02
Special packing provision specific to RID and ADR:
LL1 For UN 3509, large packagings are not required to meet the requirements of 4.1.1.3.
Large packagings meeting the requirements of 6.6.4, made leak tight or fitted with a leak tight and puncture
resistant sealed liner or bag, shall be used.
When the only residues are solids which are not liable to become liquid at temperatures likely to be encountered
during carriage, flexible large packagings may be used.
When liquid residues are present, rigid large packagings that provide a means of retention (e.g. absorbent
material) shall be used.
Before being filled and handed over for carriage, every large packaging shall be inspected to ensure that it is free
from corrosion, contamination or other damage. Any large packaging showing signs of reduced strength, shall
no longer be used (minor dents and scratches are not considered as reducing the strength of the large packaging).
Large packagings intended for the carriage of packagings, discarded, empty, uncleaned with residues of Class
5.1 shall be so constructed or adapted that the goods cannot come into contact with wood or any other
combustible material.
LP03 PACKING INSTRUCTION LP03
This instruction applies to UN Nos. 3537 to 3548.
(1) The following large packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
Rigid large packagings conforming to the packing group II performance level made of:
steel (50A);
aluminium (50B);
metal other than steel or aluminium (50N);
rigid plastics (50H);
natural wood (50C);
plywood (50D);
reconstituted wood (50F);
rigid fibreboard (50G).
(2) Additionally, the following conditions shall be met:
(a) Receptacles within articles containing liquids or solids shall be constructed of suitable materials and secured
in the article in such a way that, under normal conditions of carriage, they cannot break, be punctured or
leak their contents into the article itself or the outer packaging;
(b) Receptacles containing liquids with closures shall be packed with their closures correctly oriented. The
receptacles shall in addition conform to the internal pressure test provisions of 6.1.5.5;
(c) Receptacles that are liable to break or be punctured easily, such as those made of glass, porcelain or
stoneware or of certain plastics materials shall be properly secured. Any leakage of the contents shall not
substantially impair the protective properties of the article or of the outer packaging;
(d) Receptacles within articles containing gases shall meet the requirements of Section 4.1.6 and Chapter 6.2
as appropriate or be capable of providing an equivalent level of protection as packing instructions P200 or
P208; and
(e) Where there is no receptacle within the article, the article shall fully enclose the dangerous substances and
prevent their release under normal conditions of carriage.
(3) Articles shall be packed to prevent movement and inadvertent operation during normal conditions of carriage.
– 142 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 143 –
LP99 PACKING INSTRUCTION LP99
Only large packagings which are approved for these goods by the competent authority may be used. A copy of the
competent authority approval shall accompany each consignment or the transport document shall include an indication
that the packaging was approved by the competent authority.
LP101 PACKING INSTRUCTION LP101
The following packagings are authorized, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 and special provisions of
4.1.5 are met:
Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Large outer packagings
Not necessary Not necessary
Steel (50A)
Aluminium (50B)
Metal other than steel or
aluminium (50N)
Rigid plastics (50H)
Natural wood (50C)
Plywood (50D)
Reconstituted
wood (50F)
Rigid fibreboard (50G)
Special packing provision:
L1 For UN Nos. 0006, 0009, 0010, 0015, 0016, 0018, 0019, 0034, 0035, 0038, 0039, 0048, 0056, 0137, 0138,
0168, 0169, 0171, 0181, 0182, 0183, 0186, 0221, 0243, 0244, 0245, 0246, 0254, 0280, 0281, 0286, 0287, 0297,
0299, 0300, 0301, 0303, 0321, 0328, 0329, 0344, 0345, 0346, 0347, 0362, 0363, 0370, 0412, 0424, 0425, 0434,
0435, 0436, 0437, 0438, 0451, 0488, 0502 and 0510:
Large and robust explosives articles, normally intended for military use, without their means of initiation or
with their means of initiation containing at least two effective protective features, may be carried unpackaged.
When such articles have propelling charges or are self-propelled, their ignition systems shall be protected
against stimuli encountered during normal conditions of carriage. A negative result in Test Series 4 on an
unpackaged article indicates that the article can be considered for carriage unpackaged. Such unpackaged
articles may be fixed to cradles or contained in crates or other suitable handling devices.
LP102 PACKING INSTRUCTION LP102
The following packagings are authorized, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 and special provisions of
4.1.5 are met:
Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Large outer packagings
Bags
water resistant
Receptacles
fibreboard
metal
plastics
wood
Sheets
fibreboard, corrugated
Tubes
fibreboard
Not necessary
Steel (50A)
Aluminium (50B)
Metal other than steel
or aluminium (50N)
Rigid plastics (50H)
Natural wood (50C)
Plywood (50D)
Reconstituted wood (50F)
Rigid fibreboard (50G)
– 143 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 144 –
LP200 PACKING INSTRUCTION LP200
This instruction applies to UN Nos. 1950 and 2037.
The following large packagings are authorized for aerosols and gas cartridges, provided that the general provisions of
4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
Rigid large packagings conforming to the packing group II performance level, made of:
steel (50A);
aluminium (50B);
metal other than steel or aluminium (50N);
rigid plastics (50H);
natural wood (50C);
plywood (50D);
reconstituted wood (50F);
rigid fibreboard (50G).
Special packing provision:
L2 The large packagings shall be designed and constructed to prevent dangerous movement and inadvertent
discharge during normal conditions of carriage. For waste aerosols carried in accordance with special provision
327, the large packagings shall have a means of retaining any free liquid that might escape during carriage, e.g.
absorbent material. For waste aerosols and was gas cartridges carried in accordance with special provision 327,
the large packagings shall be adequately ventilated to prevent the creation of dangerous atmospheres and the
build-up of pressure.
LP621 PACKING INSTRUCTION LP621
This instruction applies to UN No. 3291.
The following large packagings are authorized, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
(1) For clinical waste placed in inner packagings: Rigid, leakproof large packagings conforming to the requirements
of Chapter 6.6 for solids, at the packing group II performance level, provided there is sufficient absorbent
material to absorb the entire amount of liquid present and the large packaging is capable of retaining liquids;
(2) For packages containing larger quantities of liquid: Large rigid packagings conforming to the requirements of
Chapter 6.6, at the packing group II performance level, for liquids.
Additional requirement:
Large packagings intended to contain sharp objects such as broken glass and needles shall be resistant to puncture and
retain liquids under the performance test conditions in Chapter 6.6.
– 144 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 145 –
LP622 PACKING INSTRUCTION LP622
This instruction applies to waste of UN No. 3549 carried for disposal.
The following large packagings are authorized provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings
metal
plastics
metal
plastics
steel (50A)
aluminium (50B)
metal other than steel or aluminium
(50N)
plywood (50D)
rigid fibreboard (50G)
rigid plastics (50H)
The outer packaging shall conform to the packing group I performance level for solids.
Additional requirements:
1. Fragile articles shall be contained in either a rigid inner packaging or a rigid intermediate packaging.
2. Inner packagings containing sharp objects such as broken glass and needles shall be rigid and resistant to puncture.
3. The inner packaging, the intermediate packaging and the outer packaging shall be capable of retaining liquids.
Outer packagings that are not capable of retaining liquids by design shall be fitted with a liner or suitable measure
of retaining liquids.
4. The inner packaging and/or the intermediate packaging may be flexible. When flexible packagings are used, they
shall be capable of passing the impact resistance test of at least 165 g according to ISO 7765-1:1988 “Plastics film
and sheeting – Determination of impact resistance by the free-falling dart method – Part 1: Staircase methods” and
the tear resistance test of at least 480 g in both parallel and perpendicular planes with respect to the length of the
bag in accordance with ISO 6383-2:1983 “Plastics – Film and sheeting – Determination of tear resistance – Part 2:
Elmendorf method”. The maximum net mass of each flexible inner packaging shall be 30 kg.
5. Each flexible intermediate packaging shall contain only one inner packaging.
6. Inner packagings containing a small amount of free liquid may be included in intermediate packaging provided that
there is sufficient absorbent or solidifying material in the inner or intermediate packaging to absorb or solidify all
the liquid content present. Suitable absorbent material which withstands the temperatures and vibrations liable to
occur under normal conditions of carriage shall be used.
7. Intermediate packagings shall be secured in outer packagings with suitable cushioning and/or absorbent material.
– 145 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 146 –
LP902 PACKING INSTRUCTION LP902
This instruction applies to UN No. 3268.
Packaged articles:
The following packagings are authorized, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
Rigid large packagings conforming to the packing group III performance level, made of:
steel (50A);
aluminium (50B);
metal other than steel or aluminium (50N);
rigid plastics (50H);
natural wood (50C);
plywood (50D);
reconstituted wood (50F);
rigid fibreboard (50G).
The packagings shall be designed and constructed to prevent movement of the articles and inadvertent operation during
normal conditions of carriage.
Unpackaged articles:
The articles may also be carried unpackaged in dedicated handling devices or cargo transport units when moved to,
from, or between where they are manufactured and an assembly plant including intermediate handling locations.
Additional requirement:
Any pressure receptacle shall be in accordance with the requirements of the competent authority for the substance(s)
contained in the pressure receptacle(s).
LP903 PACKING INSTRUCTION LP903
This instruction applies to UN Nos. 3090, 3091, 3480 and 3481.
The following large packagings are authorized for a single battery and for a single item of equipment containing
batteries, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
Rigid large packagings conforming to the packing group II performance level, made of:
steel (50A);
aluminium (50B);
metal other than steel or aluminium (50N);
rigid plastics (50H);
natural wood (50C);
plywood (50D);
reconstituted wood (50F);
rigid fibreboard (50G).
The battery or the equipment shall be packed so that the battery or the equipment is protected against damage that may
be caused by its movement or placement within the large packaging.
Additional requirement:
Batteries shall be protected against short circuit.
– 146 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 147 –
LP904 PACKING INSTRUCTION LP904
This instruction applies to single damaged or defective batteries and to single items of equipment containing damaged
or defective cells and batteries of UN Nos. 3090, 3091, 3480 and 3481.
The following large packagings are authorized for a single damaged or defective battery and for a single item of
equipment containing damaged or defective cells and batteries, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are
met.
For batteries and equipment containing cells and batteries:
Rigid large packagings conforming to the packing group II performance level, made of:
steel (50A)
aluminium (50B)
metal other than steel or aluminium (50N)
rigid plastics (50H)
plywood (50D)
1. The damaged or defective battery or equipment containing such cells or batteries shall be individually packed in
an inner packaging and placed inside an outer packaging. The inner packaging or outer packaging shall be leak-
proof to prevent the potential release of electrolyte.
2. The inner packaging shall be surrounded by sufficient non-combustible and electrically non-conductive thermal
insulation material to protect against a dangerous evolution of heat.
3. Sealed packagings shall be fitted with a venting device when appropriate.
4. Appropriate measures shall be taken to minimize the effects of vibrations and shocks, prevent movement of the
battery or the equipment within the package that may lead to further damage and a dangerous condition during
carriage. Cushioning material that is non-combustible and electrically non-conductive may also be used to meet
this requirement.
5. Non combustibility shall be assessed according to a standard recognized in the country where the packaging is
designed or manufactured.
For leaking cells and batteries, sufficient inert absorbent material shall be added to the inner or outer packaging to
absorb any release of electrolyte.
Additional requirement:
Cells and batteries shall be protected against short circuit.
– 147 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 148 –
LP905 PACKING INSTRUCTION LP905
This instruction applies to UN Nos. 3090, 3091, 3480 and 3481 production runs consisting of not more than 100 cells
and batteries and to pre-production prototypes of cells and batteries when these prototypes are carried for testing.
The following large packagings are authorized for a single battery and for a single item of equipment containing cells
or batteries, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
(1) For a single battery:
Rigid large packagings conforming to the packing group II performance level, made of:
steel (50A);
aluminium (50B);
metal other than steel or aluminium (50N);
rigid plastics (50H);
natural wood (50C);
plywood (50D);
reconstituted wood (50F);
rigid fibreboard (50G).
Large packagings shall also meet the following requirements:
(a) A battery of different size, shape or mass may be packed in an outer packaging of a tested design type
listed above provided the total gross mass of the package does not exceed the gross mass for which the
design type has been tested;
(b) The battery shall be packed in an inner packaging and placed inside the outer packaging;
(c) The inner packaging shall be completely surrounded by sufficient non-combustible and electrically non-
conductive thermal insulation material to protect against a dangerous evolution of heat;
(d) Appropriate measures shall be taken to minimize the effects of vibration and shocks and prevent
movement of the battery within the package that may lead to damage and a dangerous condition during
carriage. When cushioning material is used to meet this requirement it shall be non-combustible and
electrically non-conductive; and
(e) Non-combustibility shall be assessed according to a standard recognized in the country where the large
packaging is designed or manufactured.
(2) For a single item of equipment containing cells or batteries:
Rigid large packagings conforming to the packing group II performance level, made of:
Steel (50A);
Aluminium (50B);
Metal other than steel or aluminium (50N);
Rigid plastics (50H);
Natural wood (50C);
Plywood (50D);
Reconstituted wood (50F);
Rigid fibreboard (50G).
Large packagings shall also meet the following requirements:
(a) A single item of equipment of different size, shape or mass may be packed in an outer packaging of a
tested design type listed above provided the total gross mass of the package does not exceed the gross
mass for which the design type has been tested;
(b) The equipment shall be constructed or packed in such a manner as to prevent accidental operation during
carriage;
(c) Appropriate measures shall be taken to minimize the effects of vibration and shocks and prevent
movement of the equipment within the package that may lead to damage and a dangerous condition
during carriage. When cushioning material is used to meet this requirement, it shall be non-combustible
and electrically non-conductive; and
(d) Non-combustibility shall be assessed according to a standard recognized in the country where the large
packaging is designed or manufactured.
Additional requirement:
Cells and batteries shall be protected against short circuit.
– 148 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 149 –
LP906 PACKING INSTRUCTION LP906
This instruction applies to damaged or defective batteries of UN Nos. 3090, 3091, 3480 and 3481 liable to rapidly
disassemble, dangerously react, produce a flame or a dangerous evolution of heat or a dangerous emission of toxic,
corrosive or flammable gases or vapours under normal conditions of carriage.
The following large packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
For batteries and items of equipment containing batteries :
Rigid large packagings conforming to the packing group I performance level, made of:
steel (50A);
aluminium (50B);
metal other than steel or aluminium (50N);
rigid plastics (50H);
plywood (50D);
rigid fibreboard (50G)
(1) The large packaging shall be capable of meeting the following additional performance requirements in case of
rapid disassembly, dangerous reaction, production of a flame or a dangerous evolution of heat or a dangerous
emission of toxic, corrosive or flammable gases or vapours of the battery:
(a) The outside surface temperature of the completed package shall not have a temperature of more than 100 °C.
A momentary spike in temperature up to 200 °C is acceptable;
(b) No flame shall occur outside the package;
(c) No projectiles shall exit the package;
(d) The structural integrity of the package shall be maintained; and
(e) The large packagings shall have a gas management system (e.g. filter system, air circulation, containment
for gas, gas tight packaging etc.), as appropriate.
(2) The additional large packaging performance requirements shall be verified by a test as specified by the competent
authority of any ADR Contracting Party who may also recognize a test specified by the competent authority of
a country which is not an ADR Contracting Party provided that this test has been specified in accordance with
the procedures applicable according to RID, ADR, ADN, the IMDG Code or the ICAO Technical Instructions a.
A verification report shall be made available on request. As a minimum requirement, the name of the batteries,
their type as defined in Section 38.3.2.3 of the Manual of Tests and Criteria, the maximum number of batteries,
the total mass of batteries, the total energy content of the batteries, the large packaging identification and the test
data according to the verification method as specified by the competent authority shall be listed in the verification
report. A set of specific instructions describing the way to use the package shall also be part of the verification
report.
(3) When dry ice or liquid nitrogen is used as a coolant, the requirements of section 5.5.3 shall apply. The inner
packaging and outer packaging shall maintain their integrity at the temperature of the refrigerant used as well as
the temperatures and the pressures which could result if refrigeration were lost.
(4) The specific instructions for use of the package shall be made available by the packaging manufacturers and
subsequent distributors to the consignor. They shall include at least the identification of the batteries and items
of equipment that may be contained inside the packaging, the maximum number of batteries contained in the
package and the maximum total of the batteries’ energy content, as well as the configuration inside the package,
including the separations and protections used during the performance verification test.
Additional requirement:
Batteries shall be protected against short circuit.
a The following criteria, as relevant, may be considered to assess the performance of the large packaging:
(a) The assessment shall be done under a quality management system (as described e.g. in section 2.2.9.1.7 (e))
allowing for the traceability of tests results, reference data and characterization models used;
(b) The list of hazards expected in case of thermal run-away for the battery type, in the condition it is carried (e.g.
usage of an inner packaging, state of charge (SOC), use of sufficient non-combustible, electrically non-conductive
and absorbent cushioning material etc.), shall be clearly identified and quantified; the reference list of possible
hazards for lithium batteries (rapidly disassemble, dangerously react, produce a flame or a dangerous evolution of
heat or a dangerous emission of toxic, corrosive or flammable gases or vapours) can be used for this purpose. The
quantification of these hazards shall rely on available scientific literature;
– 149 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 150 –
(c) The mitigating effects of the large packaging shall be identified and characterized, based on the nature of the
protections provided and the construction material properties. A list of technical characteristics and drawings shall
be used to support this assessment (Density [kg·m – ³], specific heat capacity [J·kg -1·K-1 ], heating value [kJ·kg -1 ],
thermal conductivity [W·m -1·K-1 ], melting temperature and flammability temperature [K], heat transfer coefficient
of the outer packaging [W·m -2·K-1 ], …);
(d) The test and any supporting calculations shall assess the result of a thermal run-away of the battery inside the
large packaging in the normal conditions of carriage;
(e) In case the SOC of the battery is not known, the assessment used, shall be done with the highest possible SOC
corresponding to the battery use conditions;
(f) The surrounding conditions in which the large packaging may be used and carried shall be described
(including for possible consequences of gas or smoke emissions on the environment, such as ventilation or other
methods) according to the gas management system of the large packaging;
(g) The tests or the model calculation shall consider the worst case scenario for the thermal run-away triggering
and propagation inside the battery; this scenario includes the worst possible failure in the normal carriage
condition, the maximum heat and flame emissions for the possible propagation of the reaction;
(h) These scenarios shall be assessed over a period of time long enough to allow all the possible consequences to
occur (e.g. 24 hours);
(i) In the case of multiple batteries and multiple items of equipment containing batteries, additional requirements
such as the maximum number of batteries and items of equipment, the total maximum energy content of the batteries,
and the configuration inside the package, including separations and protections of the parts, shall be considered.
4.1.4.4 (Deleted)
4.1.5 Special packing provisions for goods of Class 1
4.1.5.1 The general provisions of Section 4.1.1 shall be met.
4.1.5.2 All packagings for Class 1 goods shall be so designed and constructed that:
(a) They will protect the explosives, prevent them escaping and cause no increase in the risk of
unintended ignition or initiation when subjected to normal conditions of carriage including
foreseeable changes in temperature, humidity and pressure;
(b) The complete package can be handled safely in normal conditions of carriage; and
(c) The packages will withstand any loading imposed on them by foreseeable stacking to which they
will be subject during carriage so that they do not add to the risk presented by the explosives, the
containment function of the packagings is not harmed, and they are not distorted in a way or to
an extent which will reduce their strength or cause instability of a stack.
4.1.5.3 All explosive substances and articles, as prepared for carriage, shall have been classified in accordance
with the procedures detailed in 2.2.1.
4.1.5.4 Class 1 goods shall be packed in accordance with the appropriate packing instruction shown in
Column (8) of Table A of Chapter 3.2, as detailed in 4.1.4.
4.1.5.5 Unless otherwise specified in ADR, packagings, including IBCs and large packagings, shall conform to
the requirements of chapters 6.1, 6.5 or 6.6, as appropriate, and shall meet their test requirements for
packing group II.
4.1.5.6 The closure device of packagings containing liquid explosives shall ensure a double protection against
leakage.
4.1.5.7 The closure device of metal drums shall include a suitable gasket; if a closure device includes a screw-
thread, the ingress of explosive substances into the screw-thread shall be prevented.
4.1.5.8 Packagings for water soluble substances shall be water resistant. Packagings for desensitized or
phlegmatized substances shall be closed to prevent changes in concentration during carriage.
– 150 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 151 –
4.1.5.9 When the packaging includes a double envelope filled with water which may freeze during transport, a
sufficient quantity of an anti-freeze agent shall be added to the water to prevent freezing. Anti-freeze
that could create a fire hazard because of its inherent flammability shall not be used.
4.1.5.10 Nails, staples and other closure devices made of metal without protective covering shall not penetrate
to the inside of the outer packaging unless the inner packaging adequately protects the explosives against
contact with the metal.
4.1.5.11 Inner packagings, fittings and cushioning materials and the placing of explosive substances or articles
in packages shall be accomplished in a manner which prevents the explosive substances or articles from
becoming loose in the outer packaging under normal conditions of carriage. Metallic components of
articles shall be prevented from making contact with metal packagings. Articles containing explosive
substances not enclosed in an outer casing shall be separated from each other in order to prevent friction
and impact. Padding, trays, partitioning in the inner or outer packaging, mouldings or receptacles may
be used for this purpose.
4.1.5.12 Packagings shall be made of materials compatible with, and impermeable to, the explosives contained
in the package, so that neither interaction between the explosives and the packaging materials, nor
leakage, causes the explosive to become unsafe to carriage, or the hazard division or compatibility group
to change.
4.1.5.13 The ingress of explosive substances into the recesses of seamed metal packagings shall be prevented.
4.1.5.14 Plastics packagings shall not be liable to generate or accumulate sufficient static electricity so that a
discharge could cause the packaged explosive substances or articles to initiate, ignite or function.
4.1.5.15 Large and robust explosives articles, normally intended for military use, without their means of
initiation or with their means of initiation containing at least two effective protective features, may be
carried unpackaged. When such articles have propelling charges or are self-propelled, their ignition
systems shall be protected against stimuli encountered during normal conditions of carriage. A negative
result in Test Series 4 on an unpackaged article indicates that the article can be considered for carriage
unpackaged. Such unpackaged articles may be fixed to cradles or contained in crates or other suitable
handling, storage or launching devices in such a way that they will not become loose during normal
conditions of carriage.
Where such large explosive articles are as part of their operational safety and suitability tests subjected
to test regimes that meet the intentions of ADR and such tests have been successfully undertaken, the
competent authority may approve such articles to be carried in accordance with ADR.
4.1.5.16 Explosive substances shall not be packed in inner or outer packagings where the differences in internal
and external pressures, due to thermal or other effects, could cause an explosion or rupture of the
package.
4.1.5.17 Whenever loose explosive substances or the explosive substance of an uncased or partly cased article
may come into contact with the inner surface of metal packagings (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 4A,
4B, 4N and metal receptacles), the metal packaging shall be provided with an inner liner or coating (see
4.1.1.2).
4.1.5.18 Packing instruction P101 may be used for any explosive provided the packaging has been approved by
a competent authority regardless of whether the packaging complies with the packing instruction
assignment in Column (8) of Table A of Chapter 3.2.
4.1.6 Special packing provisions for goods of Class 2 and goods of other classes assigned to packing
instruction P200
4.1.6.1 This section provides general requirements applicable to the use of pressure receptacles and open
cryogenic receptacles for the carriage of Class 2 substances and goods of other classes assigned to
packing instruction P200 (e.g. UN 1051 hydrogen cyanide, stabilized). Pressure receptacles shall be
constructed and closed so as to prevent any loss of contents which might be caused under normal
conditions of carriage, including by vibration, or by changes in temperature, humidity or pressure
(resulting from change in altitude, for example).
4.1.6.2 Parts of pressure receptacles and open cryogenic receptacles which are in direct contact with dangerous
goods shall not be affected or weakened by those dangerous goods and shall not cause a dangerous
– 151 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 152 –
effect (e.g. catalysing a reaction or reacting with the dangerous goods) (see also table of standards at
the end of this section).
4.1.6.3 Pressure receptacles, including their closures and open cryogenic receptacles, shall be selected to
contain a gas or a mixture of gases according to the requirements of 6.2.1.2 and the requirements of the
relevant packing instructions of 4.1.4.1. This sub-section also applies to pressure receptacles which are
elements of MEGCs and battery-vehicles.
4.1.6.4 A change of use of a refillable pressure receptacle shall include emptying, purging and evacuation
operations to the extent necessary for safe operation (see also table of standards at the end of this
section). In addition, a pressure receptacle that previously contained a Class 8 corrosive substance or a
substance of another class with a corrosive subsidiary hazard shall not be authorized for the carriage of
a Class 2 substance unless the necessary inspection and testing as specified in 6.2.1.6 and 6.2.3.5
respectively have been performed.
4.1.6.5 Prior to filling, the packer shall perform an inspection of the pressure receptacle or open cryogenic
receptacle and ensure that the pressure receptacle or open cryogenic receptacle is authorized for the
substance and, in case of a chemical under pressure, for the propellant to be carried and that the
requirements have been met. Shut-off valves shall be closed after filling and remain closed during
carriage. The consignor shall verify that the closures and equipment are not leaking.
NOTE: Shut-off valves fitted to individual cylinders in bundles may be open during carriage, unless
the substance carried is subject to special packing provision ‘k’ or ‘q’ in packing provision P200.
4.1.6.6 Pressure receptacles and open cryogenic receptacles shall be filled according to the working pressures,
filling ratios and provisions specified in the appropriate packing instruction for the specific substance
being filled and taking into account the lowest pressure rating of any component. Service equipment
having a pressure rating lower than other components shall nevertheless comply with 6.2.1.3.1. Reactive
gases and gas mixtures shall be filled to a pressure such that if complete decomposition of the gas
occurs, the working pressure of the pressure receptacle shall not be exceeded.
4.1.6.7 Pressure receptacles, including their closures, shall conform to the design, construction, inspection and
testing requirements detailed in Chapter 6.2. When outer packagings are prescribed, the pressure
receptacles and open cryogenic receptacles shall be firmly secured therein. Unless otherwise specified
in the detailed packing instructions, one or more inner packagings may be enclosed in one outer
packaging.
4.1.6.8 Valves and other components which are to remain connected to the valve during carriage (e.g. handling
devices or adaptors) shall be designed and constructed in such a way that they are inherently able to
withstand damage without release of the contents or shall be protected from damage which could cause
inadvertent release of the contents of the pressure receptacle, by one of the following methods (see also
table of standards at the end of this section):
(a) Valves are placed inside the neck of the pressure receptacle and protected by a threaded plug or
cap;
(b) Valves are protected by caps or guards. Caps shall possess vent-holes of sufficient cross-sectional
area to evacuate the gas if leakage occurs at the valves;
(c) Valves are protected by shrouds or permanent protection attachments;
(d) Pressure receptacles are carried in frames, (e.g. cylinders in bundles); or
(e) Pressure receptacles are carried in protective boxes. For UN pressure receptacles the packaging
as prepared for carriage shall be capable of meeting the drop test specified in 6.1.5.3 at the
packing group I performance level.
4.1.6.9 Non-refillable pressure receptacles shall:
(a) be carried in an outer packaging, such as a box or crate, or in shrink-wrapped or stretch-wrapped
trays;
(b) be of a water capacity less than or equal to 1.25 litres when filled with flammable or toxic gas;
(c) not be used for toxic gases with an LC₅₀ less than or equal to 200 ml/m³; and
– 152 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 153 –
(d) not be repaired after being put into service.
4.1.6.10 Refillable pressure receptacles, other than closed cryogenic receptacles, shall be periodically inspected
according to the provisions of 6.2.1.6, or 6.2.3.5.1 for non UN receptacles, and packing instruction
P200, P205, P206 or P208 as applicable. Pressure relief valves for closed cryogenic receptacles shall be
subject to periodic inspections and tests according to the provisions of 6.2.1.6.3 and packing instruction
P203. Pressure receptacles shall not be filled after they become due for periodic inspection but may be
carried after the expiry of the time-limit for purposes of performing inspection or disposal, including
the intermediate carriage operations.
4.1.6.11 Repairs shall be consistent with the fabrication and testing requirements of the applicable design and
construction standards and are only permitted as indicated in the relevant periodic inspection standards
specified in chapter 6.2. Pressure receptacles, other than the jacket of closed cryogenic receptacles, shall
not be subjected to repairs of any of the following:
(a) weld cracks or other weld defects;
(b) cracks in walls;
(c) leaks or defects in the material of the wall, head or bottom.
4.1.6.12 Receptacles shall not be offered for filling:
(a) when damaged to such an extent that the integrity of the receptacle or its service equipment may
be affected;
(b) unless the receptacle and its service equipment has been examined and found to be in good
working order; and
(c) unless the required certification, retest, and filling marks are legible.
4.1.6.13 Filled receptacles shall not be offered for carriage:
(a) when leaking;
(b) when damaged to such an extent that the integrity of the receptacle or its service equipment may
be affected;
(c) unless the receptacle and its service equipment has been examined and found to be in good
working order; and
(d) unless the required certification, retest, and filling marks are legible.
4.1.6.14 Owners shall, on the basis of a reasoned request from the competent authority, provide it with all the
information necessary to demonstrate the conformity of the pressure receptacle in a language easily
understood by the competent authority. They shall cooperate with that authority, at its request, on any
action taken to eliminate non-conformity of the pressure receptacles which they own.
4.1.6.15 For UN pressure receptacles, the ISO standards and EN ISO standards listed in Table 4.1.6.15.1, except
EN ISO 14245 and EN ISO 15995, shall be applied. For information on which standard shall be used
at the time of manufacturing the equipment, see 6.2.2.3.
For other pressure receptacles, the requirements of section 4.1.6 are considered to have been complied
with if the standards in Table 4.1.6.15.1, as relevant, are applied. For information on which standards
shall be used for the manufacture of valves with inherent protection, see 6.2.4.1. For information on the
applicability of standards for manufacturing valve protection caps and valve guards, see Table
4.1.6.15.2.
– 153 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 154 –
Table 4.1.6.15.1: Standards for UN and non-UN pressure receptacles
Applicable
paragraphs
Reference Title of document
4.1.6.2 EN ISO 11114-1:2020 Gas cylinders – Compatibility of cylinder and valve materials with
gas contents – Part 1: Metallic materials
EN ISO 11114-2:2013 Gas cylinders – Compatibility of cylinder and valve materials with
gas contents – Part 2: Non-metallic materials
4.1.6.4 ISO 11621:1997 or
EN ISO 11621:2005
Gas cylinders – Procedures for change of gas service
4.1.6.8
Valves with
inherent
protection
Clause 4.6.2 of EN ISO
10297:2006 or clause
5.5.2 of EN ISO
10297:2014 or clause
5.5.2 of EN ISO
10297:2014 + A1:2017
Gas cylinders – Cylinder valves – Specification and type testing
Clause 5.3.8 of EN
13152:2001 + A1:2003
Testing and specifications of LPG cylinder valves – Self-closing
Clause 5.3.7 of EN
13153:2001 + A1:2003
Specifications and testing of LPG cylinder valves – Manually
operated
Clause 5.9 of EN ISO
14245:2010, clause 5.9
of EN ISO 14245:2019
or clause 5.9 of EN ISO
14245:2021
Gas cylinders – Specifications and testing of LPG cylinder valves
– Self-closing
Clause 5.10 of EN ISO
15995:2010, clause 5.9
of EN ISO 15995:2019
or clause 5.9 of EN ISO
15995:2021
Gas cylinders – Specifications and testing of LPG cylinder valves
– Manually operated
Clause 5.4.2 of EN ISO
17879:2017
Gas cylinders – Self-closing cylinder valves – Specification and
type testing
Clause 7.4 of EN
12205:2001 or clause
9.2.5 of EN ISO
11118:2015 or clause
9.2.5 of EN ISO
11118:2015 + A1:2020
Gas cylinders – Non-refillable metallic gas cylinders –
Specification and test methods
4.1.6.8 (b) ISO 11117:1998 or
EN ISO 11117:2008 +
Cor 1:2009 or EN ISO
11117:2019
0
B
Gas cylinders – Valve protection caps and guards – Design,
construction and tests
EN 962:1996 +
A2:2000
Transportable gas cylinders – Valve protection caps and valve
guards for industrial and medical gas cylinders – Design,
construction and tests
4.1.6.8 (c) Requirements for shrouds and permanent protection attachments used as valve protection under
4.1.6.8 (c) are given in the relevant pressure receptacle shell design standards (see 6.2.2.3 for
UN pressure receptacles and 6.2.4.1 for non-UN pressure receptacles).
4.1.6.8 (b) and
(c)
ISO 16111:2008 or
ISO 16111:2018
Transportable gas storage devices – Hydrogen absorbed in
reversible metal hydride
– 154 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 155 –
Table 4.1.6.15.2: Manufacturing dates applicable to valve protection caps and guards
fitted to non-UN pressure receptacles
Reference Title of document Applicable for
manufacture
ISO 11117:1998 Gas cylinders – Valve protection caps and valve guards for
industrial and medical gas cylinders – Design construction and tests
Until 31
December 2014
EN ISO 11117: 2008
+ Cor 1:2009
Gas cylinders – Valve protection caps and valve guards – Design,
construction and tests
Until 31
December 2024
EN ISO 11117:2019 Gas cylinders – Valve protection caps and guards – Design,
construction and tests
Until further
notice
EN 962:1996
+A2:2000
Transportable gas cylinders – Valve protection caps and valve
guards for industrial and medical gas cylinders – Design,
construction and tests
Until 31
December 2014
4.1.7 Special packing provisions for organic peroxides (Class 5.2) and self-reactive substances of
Class 4.1
4.1.7.0.1 For organic peroxides, all receptacles shall be “effectively closed”. Where significant internal pressure
may develop in a package by the evolution of a gas, a vent may be fitted, provided the gas emitted will
not cause danger, otherwise the degree of filling shall be limited. Any venting device shall be so
constructed that liquid will not escape when the package is in an upright position and it shall be able to
prevent ingress of impurities. The outer packaging, if any, shall be so designed as not to interfere with
the operation of the venting device.
4.1.7.1 Use of packagings (except IBCs)
4.1.7.1.1 Packagings for organic peroxides and self-reactive substances shall conform to the requirements of
Chapter 6.1 and shall meet its test requirements for packing group II.
4.1.7.1.2 The packing methods for organic peroxides and self-reactive substances are listed in packing instruction
520 and are designated OP1 to OP8. The quantities specified for each packing method are the maximum
quantities authorized per package.
4.1.7.1.3 The packing methods appropriate for the individual currently assigned organic peroxides and self-
reactive substances are listed in 2.2.41.4 and 2.2.52.4.
4.1.7.1.4 For new organic peroxides, new self-reactive substances or new formulations of currently assigned
organic peroxides or self-reactive substances, the following procedure shall be used to assign the
appropriate packing method:
(a) ORGANIC PEROXIDE, TYPE B or SELF-REACTIVE SUBSTANCE, TYPE B:
Packing method OP5 shall be assigned, provided that the organic peroxide (or self-reactive
substance) satisfies the criteria of 20.4.3 (b) (resp. 20.4.2 (b)) of the Manual of Tests and Criteria
in a packaging authorized by the packing method. If the organic peroxide (or self-reactive
substance) can only satisfy these criteria in a smaller packaging than those authorized by packing
method OP5 (viz. one of the packagings listed for OP1 to OP4), then the corresponding packing
method with the lower OP number is assigned;
(b) ORGANIC PEROXIDE, TYPE C or SELF-REACTIVE SUBSTANCE, TYPE C:
Packing method OP6 shall be assigned, provided that the organic peroxide (or self-reactive
substance) satisfies the criteria of 20.4.3 (c) (resp. 20.4.2 (c)) of the Manual of Tests and Criteria
in a packaging authorized by the packing method. If the organic peroxide (or self-reactive
substance) can only satisfy these criteria in a smaller packaging than those authorized by packing
method OP6 then the corresponding packing method with the lower OP number is assigned;
(c) ORGANIC PEROXIDE, TYPE D or SELF-REACTIVE SUBSTANCE, TYPE D:
Packing method OP7 shall be assigned to this type of organic peroxide or self-reactive substance;
(d) ORGANIC PEROXIDE, TYPE E or SELF-REACTIVE SUBSTANCE, TYPE E:
– 155 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 156 –
Packing method OP8 shall be assigned to this type of organic peroxide or self-reactive substance;
(e) ORGANIC PEROXIDE, TYPE F or SELF-REACTIVE SUBSTANCE, TYPE F:
Packing method OP8 shall be assigned to this type of organic peroxide or self-reactive substance.
4.1.7.2 Use of intermediate bulk containers
4.1.7.2.1 The currently assigned organic peroxides specifically listed in packing instruction IBC520 may be
carried in IBCs in accordance with this packing instruction. IBCs shall conform to the requirements of
Chapter 6.5 and shall meet its test requirements for packing group II.
4.1.7.2.2 Other organic peroxides and self-reactive substances of type F may be carried in IBCs under conditions
established by the competent authority of the country of origin when, on the basis of the appropriate
tests, that competent authority is satisfied that such carriage may be safely conducted. The tests
undertaken shall include those necessary:
(a) To prove that the organic peroxide (or self-reactive substance) complies with the principles for
classification given in 20.4.3 (f) [resp. 20.4.2 (f)] of the Manual of Tests and Criteria, exit box F
of Figure 20.1 (b) of the Manual;
(b) To prove the compatibility of all materials normally in contact with the substance during
carriage;
(c) To determine, when applicable, the control and emergency temperatures associated with the
carriage of the product in the IBC concerned as derived from the SADT;
(d) To design, when applicable, pressure and emergency relief devices; and
(e) To determine if any special provisions are necessary for safe carriage of the substance.
If the country of origin is not a Contracting Party to ADR, the classification and transport conditions
shall be recognized by the competent authority of the first country Contracting Party to ADR reached
by the consignment.
4.1.7.2.3 Emergencies to be taken into account are self-accelerating decomposition and fire engulfment. To
prevent explosive rupture of metal or composite IBCs with a complete metal casing, the emergency-
relief devices shall be designed to vent all the decomposition products and vapours evolved during self-
accelerating decomposition or during a period of not less than one hour of complete fire engulfment
calculated by the equations given in 4.2.1.13.8.
4.1.8 Special packing provisions for infectious substances (Class 6.2)
4.1.8.1 Consignors of infectious substances shall ensure that packages are prepared in such a manner that they
arrive at their destination in good condition and present no hazard to persons or animals during carriage.
4.1.8.2 The definitions in 1.2.1 and the general packing provisions of 4.1.1.1 to 4.1.1.17, except 4.1.1.10 to
4.1.1.12 and 4.1.1.15 apply to infectious substances packages. However, liquids shall only be filled into
packagings which have an appropriate resistance to the internal pressure that may develop under normal
conditions of carriage.
4.1.8.3 An itemized list of contents shall be enclosed between the secondary packaging and the outer packaging.
When the infectious substances to be carried are unknown, but suspected of meeting the criteria for
inclusion in Category A, the words “suspected Category A infectious substance” shall be shown, in
parenthesis, following the proper shipping name on the document inside the outer packaging.
4.1.8.4 Before an empty packaging is returned to the consignor, or sent elsewhere, it shall be disinfected or
sterilized to nullify any hazard and any label or mark indicating that it had contained an infectious
substance shall be removed or obliterated.
4.1.8.5 Provided an equivalent level of performance is maintained, the following variations in the primary
receptacles placed within a secondary packaging are allowed without the need for further testing of the
completed packaging:
– 156 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 157 –
(a) Primary receptacles of equivalent or smaller size as compared to the tested primary receptacles
may be used provided:
(i) the primary receptacles are of similar design to the primary receptacle tested (e.g. shape:
round, rectangular, etc.);
(ii) the material of construction of the primary receptacles (e.g. glass, plastics, metal) offers
resistance to impact and stacking forces equivalent to or better than that of the primary
receptacles originally tested;
(iii) the primary receptacles have the same or smaller openings and the closure is of equivalent
design (e.g. screw cap, friction lid, etc.);
(iv) sufficient additional cushioning material is used to take up empty spaces and to prevent
significant movement of the primary receptacles; and
(v) primary receptacles are oriented within the secondary packagings in the same manner as
in the tested package;
(b) A lesser number of the tested primary receptacles, or of the alternative types of primary
receptacles identified in (a) above, may be used provided sufficient cushioning is added to fill
the void space(s) and to prevent significant movement of the primary receptacles.
4.1.8.6 Paragraphs 4.1.8.1 to 4.1.8.5 only apply to infectious substances of Category A (UN Nos. 2814 and
2900). They do not apply to UN No. 3373 BIOLOGICAL SUBSTANCE, CATEGORY B (see packing
instruction P650 of 4.1.4.1), nor to UN No. 3291 CLINICAL WASTE, UNSPECIFIED, N.O.S. or
(BIO) MEDICAL WASTE, N.O.S. or REGULATED MEDICAL WASTE, N.O.S.
4.1.8.7 For the carriage of animal material, packagings or IBCs not specifically authorized in the applicable
packing instruction shall not be used for the carriage of a substance or article unless specifically
approved by the competent authority of the country of origin2 and provided:
(a) The alternative packaging complies with the general requirements of this Part;
(b) When the packing instruction indicated in Column (8) of Table A of Chapter 3.2 so specifies,
the alternative packaging meets the requirements of Part 6;
(c) The competent authority of the country of origin2 determines that the alternative packaging
provides at least the same level of safety as if the substance were packed in accordance with a
method specified in the particular packing instruction indicated in Column (8) of Table A of
Chapter 3.2; and
(d) A copy of the competent authority approval accompanies each consignment or the transport
document includes an indication that alternative packaging was approved by the competent
authority.
4.1.9 Special packing provisions for radioactive material
4.1.9.1 General
4.1.9.1.1 Radioactive material, packagings and packages shall meet the requirements of Chapter 6.4. The quantity
of radioactive material in a package shall not exceed the limits specified in 2.2.7.2.2, 2.2.7.2.4.1,
2.2.7.2.4.4, 2.2.7.2.4.5, 2.2.7.2.4.6, special provision 336 of Chapter 3.3 and 4.1.9.3.
The types of packages for radioactive materials covered by ADR, are:
(a) Excepted package (see 1.7.1.5);
(b) Industrial package Type 1 (Type IP-1 package);
(c) Industrial package Type 2 (Type IP-2 package);
2 If the country of origin is not a Contracting Party to ADR, the competent authority of the first Contracting Party
to the ADR reached by the consignment.
– 157 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 158 –
(d) Industrial package Type 3 (Type IP-3 package);
(e) Type A package;
(f) Type B(U) package;
(g) Type B(M) package;
(h) Type C package.
Packages containing fissile material or uranium hexafluoride are subject to additional requirements.
4.1.9.1.2 The non-fixed contamination on the external surfaces of any package shall be kept as low as practicable
and, under routine conditions of transport, shall not exceed the following limits:
(a) 4 Bq/cm² for beta and gamma emitters and low toxicity alpha emitters; and
(b) 0.4 Bq/cm² for all other alpha emitters.
These limits are applicable when averaged over any area of 300 cm² of any part of the surface.
4.1.9.1.3 A package shall not contain any items other than those that are necessary for the use of the radioactive
material. The interaction between these items and the package under the conditions of carriage
applicable to the design, shall not reduce the safety of the package.
4.1.9.1.4 Except as provided in 7.5.11, CV33, the level of non-fixed contamination on the external and internal
surfaces of overpacks, containers and vehicles shall not exceed the limits specified in 4.1.9.1.2. This
requirement does not apply to the internal surfaces of containers being used as packagings, either loaded
or empty.
4.1.9.1.5 For radioactive material having other dangerous properties the package design shall take into account
those properties. Radioactive material with a subsidiary hazard, packaged in packages that do not
require competent authority approval, shall be carried in packagings, IBCs, tanks or bulk containers
fully complying with the requirements of the relevant chapters of Part 6 as appropriate, as well as
applicable requirements of chapters 4.1, 4.2 or 4.3 for that subsidiary hazard.
4.1.9.1.6 Before a packaging is first used to carry radioactive material, it shall be confirmed that it has been
manufactured in conformity with the design specifications to ensure compliance with the relevant
provisions of ADR and any applicable certificate of approval. The following requirements shall also be
fulfilled, if applicable:
(a) If the design pressure of the containment system exceeds 35 kPa (gauge), it shall be ensured that
the containment system of each packaging conforms to the approved design requirements
relating to the capability of that system to maintain its integrity under that pressure;
(b) For each packaging intended for use as a Type B(U), Type B(M) or Type C package and for each
packaging intended to contain fissile material, it shall be ensured that the effectiveness of its
shielding and containment and, where necessary, the heat transfer characteristics and the
effectiveness of the confinement system, are within the limits applicable to or specified for the
approved design;
(c) For each packaging intended to contain fissile material, it shall be ensured that the effectiveness
of the criticality safety features is within the limits applicable to or specified for the design and
in particular where, in order to comply with the requirements of 6.4.11.1 neutron poisons are
specifically included, checks shall be performed to confirm the presence and distribution of those
neutron poisons.
4.1.9.1.7 Before each shipment of any package, it shall be ensured that the package contains neither:
(a) Radionuclides different from those specified for the package design; nor
(b) Contents in a form, or physical or chemical state different from those specified for the package
design.
4.1.9.1.8 Before each shipment of any package, it shall be ensured that all the requirements specified in the
relevant provisions of ADR and in the applicable certificates of approval have been fulfilled. The
following requirements shall also be fulfilled, if applicable:
– 158 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 159 –
(a) It shall be ensured that lifting attachments which do not meet the requirements of 6.4.2.2 have
been removed or otherwise rendered incapable of being used for lifting the package, in
accordance with 6.4.2.3;
(b) Each Type B(U), Type B(M) and Type C package shall be held until equilibrium conditions have
been approached closely enough to demonstrate compliance with the requirements for
temperature and pressure unless an exemption from these requirements has received unilateral
approval;
(c) For each Type B(U), Type B(M) and Type C package, it shall be ensured by inspection and/or
appropriate tests that all closures, valves and other openings of the containment system through
which the radioactive contents might escape are properly closed and, where appropriate, sealed
in the manner for which the demonstrations of compliance with the requirements of 6.4.8.8 and
6.4.10.3 were made;
(d) For packages containing fissile material the measurement specified in 6.4.11.5 (b) and the tests
to demonstrate closure of each package as specified in 6.4.11.8 shall be performed;
(e) For packages intended to be used for shipment after storage, it shall be ensured that all packaging
components and radioactive contents have been maintained during storage in a manner such that
all the requirements specified in the relevant provisions of ADR and in the applicable certificates
of approval have been fulfilled.
4.1.9.1.9 The consignor shall also have a copy of any instructions with regard to the proper closing of the package
and any preparation for shipment before making any shipment under the terms of the certificates.
4.1.9.1.10 Except for consignments under exclusive use, the transport index of any package or overpack shall not
exceed 10, nor shall the criticality safety index of any package or overpack exceed 50.
4.1.9.1.11 Except for packages or overpacks carried under exclusive use under the conditions specified in 7.5.11,
CV33 (3.5)(a), the maximum dose rate at any point on any external surface of a package or overpack
shall not exceed 2 mSv/h.
4.1.9.1.12 The maximum dose rate at any point on any external surface of a package or overpack under exclusive
use shall not exceed 10 mSv/h.
4.1.9.2 Requirements and controls for carriage of LSA material and SCO
4.1.9.2.1 The quantity of LSA material or SCO in a single Type IP-1 package , Type IP-2 package, Type IP-3
package , or object or collection of objects, whichever is appropriate, shall be so restricted that the
external dose rate at 3 m from the unshielded material or object or collection of objects does not exceed
10 mSv/h.
4.1.9.2.2 For LSA material and SCO which are or contain fissile material, which is not excepted under 2.2.7.2.3.5,
the applicable requirements of 7.5.11, CV33 (4.1) and (4.2) shall be met.
4.1.9.2.3 For LSA material and SCO which are or contain fissile material, the applicable requirements of 6.4.11.1
shall be met.
4.1.9.2.4 LSA material and SCO in groups LSA-I, SCO-I and SCO-III may be carried unpackaged under the
following conditions:
(a) All unpackaged material other than ores containing only naturally occurring radionuclides shall
be carried in such a manner that under routine conditions of carriage there will be no escape of
the radioactive contents from the vehicle nor will there be any loss of shielding;
(b) Each vehicle shall be under exclusive use, except when only carrying SCO-I on which the
contamination on the accessible and the inaccessible surfaces is not greater than ten times the
corresponding level according to the definition of “contamination” in 2.2.7.1.2;
(c) For SCO-I where it is suspected that non-fixed contamination exists on inaccessible surfaces in
excess of the values specified in 2.2.7.2.3.2 (a)(i), measures shall be taken to ensure that the
radioactive material is not released into the vehicle;
(d) Unpackaged fissile material shall meet the requirements of 2.2.7.2.3.5 (e); and
– 159 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 160 –
(e) For SCO-III:
(i) Carriage shall be under exclusive use;
(ii) Stacking shall not be permitted;
(iii) All activities associated with the shipment, including radiation protection, emergency
response and any special precautions or special administrative or operational controls that
are to be employed during carriage shall be described in a transport plan. The transport
plan shall demonstrate that the overall level of safety in carriage is at least equivalent to
that which would be provided if the requirements of 6.4.7.14 (only for the test specified
in 6.4.15.6, preceded by the tests specified in 6.4.15.2 and 6.4.15.3) had been met;
(iv) The requirements of 6.4.5.1 and 6.4.5.2 for a Type IP-2 package shall be satisfied, except
that the maximum damage referred to in 6.4.15.4 may be determined based on provisions
in the transport plan, and the requirements of 6.4.15.5 are not applicable;
(v) The object and any shielding are secured to the conveyance in accordance with 6.4.2.1;
(vi) The shipment shall be subject to multilateral approval.
4.1.9.2.5 LSA material and SCO, except as otherwise specified in 4.1.9.2.4, shall be packaged in accordance with
the table below:
Table 4.1.9.2.5: Industrial package requirements for LSA material and SCO
Radioactive contents Industrial package type
Exclusive use Not under exclusive use
LSA-I
Solid a
Liquid
Type IP-1
Type IP-1
Type IP-1
Type IP-2
LSA-II
Solid
Liquid and gas
Type IP-2
Type IP-2
Type IP-2
Type IP-3
LSA-III Type IP-2 Type IP-3
SCO-I a Type IP-1 Type IP-1
SCO-II Type IP-2 Type IP-2
a Under the conditions specified in 4.1.9.2.4, LSA-I material and SCO-I may be carried unpackaged.
4.1.9.3 Packages containing fissile material
The contents of packages containing fissile material shall be as specified for the package design either
directly in ADR or in the certificate of approval.
4.1.10 Special provisions for mixed packing
4.1.10.1 When mixed packing is permitted in accordance with the provisions of this section, different dangerous
goods or dangerous goods and other goods may be packed together in combination packagings
conforming to 6.1.4.21, provided that they do not react dangerously with one another and that all other
relevant provisions of this Chapter are complied with.
NOTE 1: See also 4.1.1.5 and 4.1.1.6.
NOTE 2: For radioactive material, see 4.1.9.
4.1.10.2 Except for packages containing Class 1 goods only or Class 7 goods only, if wooden or fibreboard boxes
are used as outer packagings, a package containing different goods packed together shall not weigh
more than 100 kg.
4.1.10.3 Unless otherwise prescribed by a special provision applicable according to 4.1.10.4, dangerous goods
of the same class and the same classification code may be packed together.
– 160 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 161 –
4.1.10.4 When indicated for a given entry in Column (9b) of Table A of Chapter 3.2, the following special
provisions shall apply to the mixed packing of the goods assigned to that entry with other goods in the
same package.
MP1 May only be packed together with goods of the same type within the same compatibility
group.
MP2 Shall not be packed together with other goods.
MP3 Mixed packing of UN No. 1873 with UN No. 1802 is permitted.
MP4 Shall not be packed together with goods of other classes or with goods which are not
subject to the requirements of ADR. However, if this organic peroxide is a hardener or
compound system for Class 3 substances, mixed packing is permitted with these
substances of Class 3.
MP5 UN No. 2814 and UN No. 2900 may be packed together in a combination packaging in
conformity with packing instruction P620. They shall not be packed together with other
goods; this does not apply to UN No. 3373 Biological substance, Category B packed in
accordance with packing instruction P650 or to substances added as coolants, e.g. ice, dry
ice or refrigerated liquid nitrogen.
MP6 Shall not be packed together with other goods. This does not apply to substances added
as coolants, e.g. ice, dry ice or refrigerated liquid nitrogen.
MP7 May – in quantities not exceeding 5 litres per inner packaging – be packed together in a
combination packaging conforming to 6.1.4.21:
– with goods of the same class covered by other classification codes when mixed
packing is also permitted for these; or
– with goods which are not subject to the requirements of ADR,
provided they do not react dangerously with one another.
MP8 May – in quantities not exceeding 3 litres per inner packaging – be packed together in a
combination packaging conforming to 6.1.4.21:
– with goods of the same class covered by other classification codes when mixed
packing is also permitted for these; or
– with goods which are not subject to the requirements of ADR,
provided they do not react dangerously with one another.
MP9 May be packed together in an outer packaging for combination packagings in accordance
with 6.1.4.21:
– with other goods of Class 2;
– with goods of other classes, when the mixed packing is also permitted for these;
or
– with goods which are not subject to the requirements of ADR,
provided they do not react dangerously with one another.
MP10 May – in quantities not exceeding 5 kg per inner packaging – be packed together in a
combination packaging conforming to 6.1.4.21:
– with goods of the same class covered by other classification codes or with goods
of other classes, when mixed packing is also permitted for these; or
– 161 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 162 –
– with goods which are not subject to the requirements of ADR,
provided they do not react dangerously with one another.
MP11 May – in quantities not exceeding 5 kg per inner packaging – be packed together in a
combination packaging conforming to 6.1.4.21:
– with goods of the same class covered by other classification codes or with goods
of other classes (except substances of packing group I or II of Class 5.1) when
mixed packing is also permitted for these; or
– with goods which are not subject to the requirements of ADR,
provided they do not react dangerously with one another.
MP12 May – in quantities not exceeding 5 kg per inner packaging – be packed together in a
combination packaging conforming to 6.1.4.21:
– with goods of the same class covered by other classification codes or with goods
of other classes (except substances of packing group I or II of Class 5.1) when
mixed packing is also permitted for these; or
– with goods which are not subject to the requirements of ADR,
provided they do not react dangerously with one another.
Packages shall not weigh more than 45 kg. If fibreboard boxes are used as outer
packagings however, a package shall not weigh more than 27 kg.
MP13 May – in quantities not exceeding 3 kg per inner packaging and per package – be packed
together in a combination packaging conforming to 6.1.4.21:
– with goods of the same class covered by other classification codes or with goods
of other classes, when mixed packing is also permitted for these; or
– with goods which are not subject to the requirements of ADR,
provided they do not react dangerously with one another.
MP14 May – in quantities not exceeding 6 kg per inner packaging – be packed together in a
combination packaging conforming to 6.1.4.21:
– with goods of the same class covered by other classification codes or with goods
of other classes, when mixed packing is also permitted for these; or
– with goods which are not subject to the requirements of ADR,
provided they do not react dangerously with one another.
MP15 May – in quantities not exceeding 3 litres per inner packaging – be packed together in a
combination packaging conforming to 6.1.4.21:
– with goods of the same class covered by other classification codes or with goods
of other classes, when mixed packing is also permitted for these; or
– with goods which are not subject to the requirements of ADR,
provided they do not react dangerously with one another.
MP16 (Reserved)
MP17 May – in quantities not exceeding 0.5 litre per inner packaging and 1 litre per package –
be packed together in a combination packaging conforming to 6.1.4.21:
– with goods of other classes, except Class 7, when mixed packing is also permitted
for these; or
– 162 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 163 –
– with goods which are not subject to the requirements of ADR,
provided they do not react dangerously with one another.
MP18 May – in quantities not exceeding 0.5 kg per inner packaging and 1 kg per package – be
packed together in a combination packaging conforming to 6.1.4.21:
– with goods of other classes, except Class 7, when mixed packing is also permitted
for these; or
– with goods which are not subject to the requirements of ADR,
provided they do not react dangerously with one another.
MP19 May – in quantities not exceeding 5 litres per inner packaging – be packed together in a
combination packaging conforming to 6.1.4.21:
– with goods of the same class covered by other classification codes or with goods
of other classes, when mixed packing is also permitted for these; or
– with goods which are not subject to the requirements of ADR, provided they do
not react dangerously with one another.
MP20 May be packed together with substances covered by the same UN number.
Shall not be packed together with goods of Class 1 having different UN numbers, except
if provided for by special provision MP 24.
Shall not be packed together with goods of other classes or with goods which are not
subject to the requirements of ADR.
MP21 May be packed together with articles covered by the same UN number.
Shall not be packed together with goods of Class 1 having different UN numbers, except
for:
(a) their own means of initiation, provided that
(i) the means of initiation will not function under normal conditions of
carriage; or
(ii) such means have at least two effective protective features which prevent
explosion of an article in the event of accidental functioning of the means
of initiation; or
(iii) when such means do not have two effective protective features (i.e. means
of initiation assigned to compatibility group B), in the opinion of the
competent authority of the country of origin3, the accidental functioning of
the means of initiation does not cause the explosion of an article under
normal conditions of carriage;
(b) articles of compatibility groups C, D and E.
Shall not be packed together with goods of other classes or with goods which are not
subject to the requirements of ADR.
When goods are packed together in accordance with this special provision, account shall
be taken of a possible amendment of the classification of packages in accordance with
2.2.1.1. For the description of the goods in the transport document, see 5.4.1.2.1 (b).
3 If the country of origin is not a Contracting Party to ADR, the approval shall require validation by the competent
authority of the first country Contracting Party to ADR reached by the consignment.
– 163 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 164 –
MP22 May be packed together with articles covered by the same UN number.
Shall not be packed together with goods of Class 1 having different UN numbers, except
(a) With their own means of initiation, provided that the means of initiation will not
function under normal conditions of carriage; or
(b) With articles of compatibility groups C, D and E; or
(c) If provided for by special provision MP 24.
Shall not be packed together with goods of other classes or with goods which are not
subject to the requirements of ADR.
When goods are packed together in accordance with this special provision, account shall
be taken of a possible amendment of the classification of packages in accordance with
2.2.1.1. For the description of the goods in the transport document, see 5.4.1.2.1 (b).
MP23 May be packed together with articles covered by the same UN number.
Shall not be packed together with goods of Class 1 having different UN numbers, except
(a) With their own means of initiation, provided that the means of initiation will not
function under normal conditions of carriage; or
(b) If provided for by special provision MP 24.
Shall not be packed together with goods of other classes or with goods which are not
subject to the requirements of ADR.
When goods are packed together in accordance with this special provision, account shall
be taken of a possible amendment of the classification of packages in accordance with
2.2.1.1. For the description of the goods in the transport document, see 5.4.1.2.1 (b).
MP24 May be packed together with goods with the UN numbers shown in the table below, under
the following conditions:
– if a letter A is indicated in the table, the goods with those UN numbers may be
included in the same package without any special limitation of mass;
– if a letter B is indicated in the table, the goods with those UN numbers may be
included in the same package up to a total mass of 50 kg of explosive substances.
When goods are packed together in accordance with this special provision, account shall
be taken of a possible amendment of the classification of packages in accordance with
2.2.1.1. For the description of the goods in the transport document, see 5.4.1.2.1 (b).
– 164 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 165 –
UN
No.
0012
0014
0027
0028
0044
0054
0160
0161
0186
0191
0194
0195
0197
0238
0240
0312
0333
0334
0335
0336
0337
0373
0405
0428
0429
0430
0431
0432
0505
0506
0507
0509
0012 A
0014 A
0027 B B B B B
0028 B B B B B
0044 B B B B B
0054 B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B
0160 B B B B B
0161 B B B B B
0186 B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B
0191 B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B
0194 B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B
0195 B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B
0197 B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B
0238 B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B
0240 B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B
0312 B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B
0333 A A A A
0334 A A A A
0335 A A A A
0336 A A A A
0337 A A A A
0373 B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B
0405 B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B
0428 B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B
0429 B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B
0430 B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B
0431 B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B
0432 B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B
0505 B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B
0506 B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B
0507 B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B
0509 B B B B B
– 165 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 167 –
CHAPTER 4.2
USE OF PORTABLE TANKS AND UN
MULTIPLE-ELEMENT GAS CONTAINERS (MEGCs)
NOTE 1: For fixed tanks (tank-vehicles), demountable tanks and tank-containers and tank swap bodies, with shells made
of metallic materials, and battery-vehicles and multiple element gas containers (MEGCs), see Chapter 4.3; for fibre-
reinforced plastics tanks, see Chapter 4.4; for vacuum operated waste tanks, see Chapter 4.5.
NOTE 2: Portable tanks and UN MEGCs marked in accordance with the applicable provisions of Chapter 6.7 but which
were approved in a State which is not a Contracting Party to ADR may nevertheless be used for carriage under ADR.
4.2.1 General provisions for the use of portable tanks for the carriage of substances of Class 1 and
Classes 3 to 9
4.2.1.1 This section provides general provisions applicable to the use of portable tanks for the carriage of
substances of Classes 1, 3, 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 5.1, 5.2, 6.1, 6.2, 7, 8 and 9. In addition to these general
provisions, portable tanks shall conform to the design, construction, inspection and testing requirements
detailed in 6.7.2. Substances shall be carried in portable tanks conforming to the applicable portable
tank instruction identified in Column (10) of the Table A of Chapter 3.2 and described in 4.2.5.2.6 (T1
to T23) and the portable tank special provisions assigned to each substance in Column (11) of Table A
of Chapter 3.2 and described in 4.2.5.3.
4.2.1.2 During carriage, portable tanks shall be adequately protected against damage to the shell and service
equipment resulting from lateral and longitudinal impact and overturning. If the shell and service
equipment are so constructed as to withstand impact or overturning it need not be protected in this way.
Examples of such protection are given in 6.7.2.17.5.
4.2.1.3 Certain substances are chemically unstable. They are accepted for carriage only when the necessary
steps have been taken to prevent their dangerous decomposition, transformation or polymerization
during carriage. To this end, care shall in particular be taken to ensure that shells do not contain any
substances liable to promote these reactions.
4.2.1.4 The temperature of the outer surface of the shell excluding openings and their closures or of the thermal
insulation shall not exceed 70 °C during carriage. When necessary, the shell shall be thermally insulated.
4.2.1.5 Empty portable tanks not cleaned and not gas-free shall comply with the same provisions as portable
tanks filled with the previous substance.
4.2.1.6 Substances shall not be carried in the same or in adjoining compartments of shells when they may react
dangerously with each other (see definition for “dangerous reaction” in 1.2.1).
4.2.1.7 The design approval certificate, the test report and the certificate showing the results of the initial
inspection and test for each portable tank issued by the competent authority or its authorized body shall
be retained by the authority or body and the owner. Owners shall be able to provide this documentation
upon the request of any competent authority.
4.2.1.8 Unless the name of the substance(s) being carried appears on the metal plate described in 6.7.2.20.2 a
copy of the certificate specified in 6.7.2.18.1 shall be made available upon the request of a competent
authority or its authorized body and readily provided by the consignor, consignee or agent, as
appropriate.
4.2.1.9 Degree of filling
4.2.1.9.1 Prior to filling, the consignor shall ensure that the appropriate portable tank is used and that the portable
tank is not filled with substances which in contact with the materials of the shell, gaskets, service
equipment and any protective linings, are likely to react dangerously with them to form dangerous
products or appreciably weaken these materials. The consignor may need to consult the manufacturer
of the substance in conjunction with the competent authority for guidance on the compatibility of the
substance with the portable tank materials.
– 167 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 168 –
4.2.1.9.1.1 Portable tanks shall not be filled above the extent provided in 4.2.1.9.2 to 4.2.1.9.6. The applicability of
4.2.1.9.2, 4.2.1.9.3 or 4.2.1.9.5.1 to individual substances is specified in the applicable portable tank
instruction or special provisions in 4.2.5.2.6 or 4.2.5.3 and Column (10) or (11) of Table A of Chapter
3.2.
4.2.1.9.2 The maximum degree of filling (in %) for general use is determined by the formula:
)t-(t1
97
fillingofDegree
fr


4.2.1.9.3 The maximum degree of filling (in %) for liquids of Class 6.1 and Class 8, in packing groups I and II,
and liquids with an absolute vapour pressure of more than 175 kPa (1.75 bar) at 65 °C, is determined
by the formula:
)t-(t1
95
fillingofDegree
fr

4.2.1.9.4 In these formulae,  is the mean coefficient of cubical expansion of the liquid between the mean
temperature of the liquid during filling (tf ) and the maximum mean bulk temperature during carriage (tr )
(both in °C). For liquids carried under ambient conditions  could be calculated by the formula:
50
5015
35d
d-d


in which d 15 and d 50 are the densities of the liquid at 15 °C and 50 °C, respectively.
4.2.1.9.4.1 The maximum mean bulk temperature (tr ) shall be taken as 50 °C except that, for journeys under
temperate or extreme climatic conditions, the competent authorities concerned may agree to a lower or
require a higher temperature, as appropriate.
4.2.1.9.5 The provisions of 4.2.1.9.2 to 4.2.1.9.4.1 do not apply to portable tanks which contain substances
maintained at a temperature above 50 °C during carriage (e.g. by means of a heating device). For
portable tanks equipped with a heating device, a temperature regulator shall be used to ensure the
maximum degree of filling is not more than 95 % full at any time during carriage.
4.2.1.9.5.1 The maximum degree of filling (in %) for solids carried above their melting point and for elevated
temperature liquids shall be determined by the following formula:
f
r
d
d
95fillingofDegree 
in which d f and d r are the densities of the liquid at the mean temperature of the liquid during filling and
the maximum mean bulk temperature during carriage respectively.
4.2.1.9.6 Portable tanks shall not be offered for carriage:
(a) With a degree of filling, for liquids having a viscosity less than 2 680 mm²/s at 20 °C or
maximum temperature of the substance during carriage in the case of the heated substance, of
more than 20 % but less than 80 % unless the shells of portable tanks are divided, by partitions
or surge plates, into sections of not more than 7 500 litres capacity;
(b) With residue of substances previously carried adhering to the outside of the shell or service
equipment;
(c) When leaking or damaged to such an extent that the integrity of the portable tank or its lifting or
securing arrangements may be affected; and
(d) Unless the service equipment has been examined and found to be in good working order.
4.2.1.9.7 Forklift pockets of portable tanks shall be closed off when the tank is filled. This provision does not
apply to portable tanks which according to 6.7.2.17.4 need not be provided with a means of closing off
the forklift pockets.
– 168 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 169 –
4.2.1.10 Additional provisions applicable to the carriage of Class 3 substances in portable tanks
4.2.1.10.1 All portable tanks intended for the carriage of flammable liquids shall be closed and be fitted with relief
devices in accordance with 6.7.2.8 to 6.7.2.15.
4.2.1.10.1.1 For portable tanks intended for use only on land, open venting systems may be used if allowed according
to Chapter 4.3.
4.2.1.11 Additional provisions applicable to the carriage of Classes 4.1, 4.2 or 4.3 substances (other than Class
4.1 self-reactive substances) in portable tanks
(Reserved)
NOTE: For Class 4.1 self-reactive substances, see 4.2.1.13.1.
4.2.1.12 Additional provisions applicable to the carriage of Class 5.1 substances in portable tanks
(Reserved)
4.2.1.13 Additional provisions applicable to the carriage of Class 5.2 substances and Class 4.1
self-reactive substances in portable tanks
4.2.1.13.1 Each substance shall have been tested and a report submitted to the competent authority of the country
of origin for approval. Notification thereof shall be sent to the competent authority of the country of
destination. The notification shall contain relevant transport information and the report with test results.
The tests undertaken shall include those necessary:
(a) To prove the compatibility of all materials normally in contact with the substance during
carriage;
(b) To provide data for the design of the pressure and emergency relief devices taking into account
the design characteristics of the portable tank.
Any additional provision necessary for safe carriage of the substance shall be clearly described in the
report.
4.2.1.13.2 The following provisions apply to portable tanks intended for the carriage of Type F organic peroxides
or Type F self-reactive substances with a Self-Accelerating Decomposition Temperature (SADT) of
55 °C or more. In case of conflict these provisions prevail over those specified in Section 6.7.2.
Emergencies to be taken into account are self-accelerating decomposition of the substance and
fire-engulfment as described in 4.2.1.13.8.
4.2.1.13.3 The additional provisions for carriage of organic peroxides or self-reactive substances with a SADT less
than 55 °C in portable tanks shall be specified by the competent authority of the country of origin.
Notification thereof shall be sent to the competent authority of the country of destination.
4.2.1.13.4 The portable tank shall be designed for a test pressure of at least 0.4 MPa (4 bar).
4.2.1.13.5 Portable tanks shall be fitted with temperature sensing devices.
4.2.1.13.6 Portable tanks shall be fitted with pressure-relief devices and emergency-relief devices. Vacuum-relief
devices may also be used. Pressure-relief devices shall operate at pressures determined according to
both the properties of the substance and the construction characteristics of the portable tank. Fusible
elements are not allowed in the shell.
4.2.1.13.7 The pressure-relief devices shall consist of spring-loaded valves fitted to prevent significant build-up
within the portable tank of the decomposition products and vapours released at a temperature of 50 °C.
The capacity and start-to-discharge pressure of the relief valves shall be based on the results of the tests
specified in 4.2.1.13.1. The start-to-discharge pressure shall, however, in no case be such that liquid
would escape from the valve(s) if the portable tank were overturned.
4.2.1.13.8 The emergency-relief devices may be of the spring-loaded or frangible types, or a combination of the
two, designed to vent all the decomposition products and vapours evolved during a period of not less
than one hour of complete fire-engulfment as calculated by the following formula:
– 169 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 170 –
0.82
AF70961q 
where:
q = heat absorption [W]
A = wetted area [m²]
F = insulation factor
= 1 for non-insulated shells, or
shellsinsulatedfor
47032
T)-(923U
F 
where:
K = heat conductivity of insulation layer [W. m-1 . K -1 ]
L = thickness of insulation layer [m]
U = K/L = heat transfer coefficient of the insulation [W. m-2 . K-1 ]
T = temperature of the substance at relieving conditions [K]
The start-to-discharge pressure of the emergency-relief device(s) shall be higher than that specified
in 4.2.1.13.7 and based on the results of the tests referred to in 4.2.1.13.1. The emergency-relief devices
shall be dimensioned in such a way that the maximum pressure in the portable tank never exceeds the
test pressure of the tank.
NOTE: An example of a method to determine the size of emergency-relief devices is given in
Appendix 5 of the “Manual of Tests and Criteria”.
4.2.1.13.9 For insulated portable tanks the capacity and setting of emergency-relief device(s) shall be determined
assuming a loss of insulation from 1 % of the surface area.
4.2.1.13.10 Vacuum-relief devices and spring-loaded valves shall be provided with flame arresters. Due attention
shall be paid to the reduction of the relief capacity caused by the flame arrester.
4.2.1.13.11 Service equipment such as valves and external piping shall be so arranged that no substance remains in
them after filling the portable tank.
4.2.1.13.12 Portable tanks may be either insulated or protected by a sun-shield. If the SADT of the substance in the
portable tank is 55 °C or less, or the portable tank is constructed of aluminium, the portable tank shall
be completely insulated. The outer surface shall be finished in white or bright metal.
4.2.1.13.13 The degree of filling shall not exceed 90 % at 15 C.
4.2.1.13.14 The mark as required in 6.7.2.20.2 shall include the UN number and the technical name with the
approved concentration of the substance concerned.
4.2.1.13.15 Organic peroxides and self-reactive substances specifically listed in portable tank instruction T23
in 4.2.5.2.6 may be carried in portable tanks.
4.2.1.14 Additional provisions applicable to the carriage of Class 6.1 substances in portable tanks
(Reserved)
4.2.1.15 Additional provisions applicable to the carriage of Class 6.2 substances in portable tanks
(Reserved)
4.2.1.16 Additional provisions applicable to the carriage of Class 7 substances in portable tanks
4.2.1.16.1 Portable tanks used for the carriage of radioactive material shall not be used for the carriage of other
goods.
– 170 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 171 –
4.2.1.16.2 The degree of filling for portable tanks shall not exceed 90 % or, alternatively, any other value approved
by the competent authority.
4.2.1.17 Additional provisions applicable to the carriage of Class 8 substances in portable tanks
4.2.1.17.1 Pressure-relief devices of portable tanks used for the carriage of Class 8 substances shall be inspected
at intervals not exceeding one year.
4.2.1.18 Additional provisions applicable to the carriage of Class 9 substances in portable tanks
(Reserved)
4.2.1.19 Additional provisions applicable to the carriage of solid substances carried above their melting point
4.2.1.19.1 Solid substances carried or offered for carriage above their melting point which are not assigned a
portable tank instruction in column (10) of the Table A of Chapter 3.2 or when the assigned portable
tank instruction does not apply to carriage at temperatures above their melting point may be carried in
portable tanks provided that the solid substances are classified in Classes 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 5.1, 6.1, 8 or 9
and have no subsidiary hazard other than that of Class 6.1 or Class 8 and are in packing group II or III.
4.2.1.19.2 Unless otherwise indicated in the Table A of Chapter 3.2, portable tanks used for the carriage of these
solid substances above their melting point shall conform to the provisions of portable tank instruction
T4 for solid substances of packing group III or T7 for solid substances of packing group II. A portable
tank which affords an equivalent or greater level of safety may be selected according to 4.2.5.2.5. The
maximum degree of filling (in %) shall be determined according to 4.2.1.9.5 (TP3).
4.2.2 General provisions for the use of portable tanks for the carriage of non-refrigerated liquefied
gases and chemicals under pressure
4.2.2.1 This section provides general provisions applicable to the use of portable tanks for the carriage of non-
refrigerated liquefied gases and chemicals under pressure.
4.2.2.2 Portable tanks shall conform to the design, construction, inspection and testing requirements detailed in
6.7.3. Non-refrigerated liquefied gases and chemicals under pressure shall be carried in portable tanks
conforming to portable tank instruction T50 as described in 4.2.5.2.6 and any portable tank special
provisions assigned to specific non-refrigerated liquefied gases in Column (11) of Table A of Chapter
3.2 and described in 4.2.5.3.
4.2.2.3 During carriage, portable tanks shall be adequately protected against damage to the shell and service
equipment resulting from lateral and longitudinal impact and overturning. If the shell and service
equipment are so constructed as to withstand impact or overturning it need not be protected in this way.
Examples of such protection are given in 6.7.3.13.5.
4.2.2.4 Certain non-refrigerated liquefied gases are chemically unstable. They are accepted for carriage only
when the necessary steps have been taken to prevent their dangerous decomposition, transformation or
polymerization during carriage. To this end, care shall in particular be taken to ensure that portable
tanks do not contain any non-refrigerated liquefied gases liable to promote these reactions.
4.2.2.5 Unless the name of the gas(es) being carried appears on the metal plate described in 6.7.3.16.2, a copy
of the certificate specified in 6.7.3.14.1 shall be made available upon a competent authority request and
readily provided by the consignor, consignee or agent, as appropriate.
4.2.2.6 Empty portable tanks not cleaned and not gas-free shall comply with the same provisions as portable
tanks filled with the previous non-refrigerated liquefied gas.
4.2.2.7 Filling
4.2.2.7.1 Prior to filling the portable tank shall be inspected to ensure that it is authorized for the non-refrigerated
liquefied gas or the propellant of the chemical under pressure to be carried and that the portable tank is
not loaded with non-refrigerated liquefied gases, or with chemicals under pressure which in contact with
the materials of the shell, gaskets, service equipment and any protective linings, are likely to react
dangerously with them to form dangerous products or appreciably weaken these materials. During
filling, the temperature of the non-refrigerated liquefied gas or propellant of chemicals under pressure
shall fall within the limits of the design temperature range.
– 171 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 172 –
4.2.2.7.2 The maximum mass of non-refrigerated liquefied gas per litre of shell capacity (kg/l) shall not exceed
the density of the non-refrigerated liquefied gas at 50 °C multiplied by 0.95. Furthermore, the shell shall
not be liquid-full at 60 °C.
4.2.2.7.3 Portable tanks shall not be filled above their maximum permissible gross mass and the maximum
permissible load mass specified for each gas to be carried.
4.2.2.8 Portable tanks shall not be offered for carriage:
(a) In an ullage condition liable to produce an unacceptable hydraulic force due to surge within the
shell;
(b) When leaking;
(c) When damaged to such an extent that the integrity of the tank or its lifting or securing
arrangements may be affected; and
(d) Unless the service equipment has been examined and found to be in good working order.
4.2.2.9 Forklift pockets of portable tanks shall be closed off when the tank is filled. This provision does not
apply to portable tanks which according to 6.7.3.13.4 need not be provided with a means of closing off
the forklift pockets.
4.2.3 General provisions for the use of portable tanks for the carriage of refrigerated liquefied gases
4.2.3.1 This section provides general provisions applicable to the use of portable tanks for the carriage of
refrigerated liquefied gases.
4.2.3.2 Portable tanks shall conform to the design, construction, inspection and testing requirements detailed in
6.7.4. Refrigerated liquefied gases shall be carried in portable tanks conforming to portable tank
instruction T75 as described in 4.2.5.2.6 and the portable tank special provisions assigned to each
substance in Column (11) of Table A of Chapter 3.2 and described in 4.2.5.3.
4.2.3.3 During carriage, portable tanks shall be adequately protected against damage to the shell and service
equipment resulting from lateral and longitudinal impact and overturning. If the shell and service
equipment are so constructed as to withstand impact or overturning it need not be protected in this way.
Examples of such protection are provided in 6.7.4.12.5.
4.2.3.4 Unless the name of the gas(es) being carried appears on the metal plate described in 6.7.4.15.2, a copy
of the certificate specified in 6.7.4.13.1 shall be made available upon a competent authority request and
readily provided by the consignor, consignee or agent, as appropriate.
4.2.3.5 Empty portable tanks not cleaned and not gas-free shall comply with the same provisions as portable
tanks filled with the previous substance.
4.2.3.6 Filling
4.2.3.6.1 Prior to filling the portable tank shall be inspected to ensure that it is authorized for the refrigerated
liquefied gas to be carried and that the portable tank is not loaded with refrigerated liquefied gases which
in contact with the materials of the shell, gaskets, service equipment and any protective linings, are
likely to react dangerously with them to form dangerous products or appreciably weaken these materials.
During filling, the temperature of the refrigerated liquefied gas shall be within the limits of the design
temperature range.
4.2.3.6.2 In estimating the initial degree of filling the necessary holding time for the intended journey including
any delays which might be encountered shall be taken into consideration. The initial degree of filling of
the shell, except as provided for in 4.2.3.6.3 and 4.2.3.6.4, shall be such that if the contents, except
helium, were to be raised to a temperature at which the vapour pressure is equal to the maximum
allowable working pressure (MAWP) the volume occupied by liquid would not exceed 98 %.
4.2.3.6.3 Shells intended for the carriage of helium can be filled up to but not above the inlet of the pressure-relief
device.
– 172 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 173 –
4.2.3.6.4 A higher initial degree of filling may be allowed, subject to approval by the competent authority, when
the intended duration of carriage is considerably shorter than the holding time.
4.2.3.7 Actual holding time
4.2.3.7.1 The actual holding time shall be calculated for each journey in accordance with a procedure recognized
by the competent authority, on the basis of the following:
(a) The reference holding time for the refrigerated liquefied gas to be carried (see 6.7.4.2.8.1) (as
indicated on the plate referred to in 6.7.4.15.1);
(b) The actual filling density;
(c) The actual filling pressure;
(d) The lowest set pressure of the pressure limiting device(s).
4.2.3.7.2 The actual holding time shall be marked either on the portable tank itself or on a metal plate firmly
secured to the portable tank, in accordance with 6.7.4.15.2.
4.2.3.7.3 The date at which the actual holding time ends shall be entered in the transport document (see
5.4.1.2.2 (d)).
4.2.3.8 Portable tanks shall not be offered for carriage:
(a) In an ullage condition liable to produce an unacceptable hydraulic force due to surge within the
shell;
(b) When leaking;
(c) When damaged to such an extent that the integrity of the portable tank or its lifting or securing
arrangements may be affected;
(d) Unless the service equipment has been examined and found to be in good working order;
(e) Unless the actual holding time for the refrigerated liquefied gas being carried has been
determined in accordance with 4.2.3.7 and the portable tank is marked in accordance
with 6.7.4.15.2; and
(f) Unless the duration of carriage, after taking into consideration any delays which might be
encountered, does not exceed the actual holding time.
4.2.3.9 Forklift pockets of portable tanks shall be closed off when the tank is filled. This provision does not
apply to portable tanks which according to 6.7.4.12.4, need not be provided with a means of closing off
the forklift pockets.
4.2.4 General provisions for the use of UN multiple-element gas containers (MEGCs)
4.2.4.1 This section provides general requirements applicable to the use of multiple-element gas containers
(MEGCs) for the carriage of non-refrigerated gases referred to in 6.7.5.
4.2.4.2 MEGCs shall conform to the design, construction, inspection and testing requirements detailed in 6.7.5.
The elements of MEGCs shall be periodically inspected according to the provisions set out in packing
instruction P200 of 4.1.4.1 and in 6.2.1.6.
4.2.4.3 During carriage, MEGCs shall be protected against damage to the elements and service equipment
resulting from lateral and longitudinal impact and overturning. If the elements and service equipment
are so constructed as to withstand impact or overturning, they need not be protected in this way.
Examples of such protection are given in 6.7.5.10.4.
4.2.4.4 The periodic testing and inspection requirements for MEGCs are specified in 6.7.5.12. MEGCs or their
elements shall not be charged or filled after they become due for periodic inspection but may be carried
after the expiry of the time limit.
– 173 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 174 –
4.2.4.5 Filling
4.2.4.5.1 Prior to filling, the MEGC shall be inspected to ensure that it is authorized for the gas to be carried and
that the applicable provisions of ADR have been met.
4.2.4.5.2 Elements of MEGCs shall be filled according to the working pressures, filling ratios and filling
provisions specified in packing instruction P200 of 4.1.4.1 for the specific gas being filled into each
element. In no case shall an MEGC or group of elements be filled as a unit in excess of the lowest
working pressure of any given element.
4.2.4.5.3 MEGCs shall not be filled above their maximum permissible gross mass.
4.2.4.5.4 Isolation valves shall be closed after filling and remain closed during carriage. Toxic gases (gases of
groups T, TF, TC, TO, TFC and TOC) shall only be carried in MEGCs where each element is equipped
with an isolation valve.
4.2.4.5.5 The opening(s) for filling shall be closed by caps or plugs. The leakproofness of the closures and
equipment shall be verified by the filler after filling.
4.2.4.5.6 MEGCs shall not be offered for filling:
(a) when damaged to such an extent that the integrity of the pressure receptacles or its structural or
service equipment may be affected;
(b) unless the pressure receptacles and its structural and service equipment has been examined and
found to be in good working order; and
(c) unless the required certification, retest, and filling marks are legible.
4.2.4.6 Charged MEGCs shall not be offered for carriage;
(a) when leaking;
(b) when damaged to such an extent that the integrity of the pressure receptacles or its structural or
service equipment may be affected;
(c) unless the pressure receptacles and its structural and service equipment have been examined and
found to be in good working order; and
(d) unless the required certification, retest, and filling marks are legible.
4.2.4.7 Empty MEGCs that have not been cleaned and purged shall comply with the same requirements as
MEGCs filled with the previous substance.
4.2.5 Portable tank instructions and special provisions
4.2.5.1 General
4.2.5.1.1 This section includes the portable tank instructions and special provisions applicable to dangerous goods
authorized to be carried in portable tanks. Each portable tank instruction is identified by an alpha-
numeric code (e.g. T1). Column (10) of Table A of Chapter 3.2 indicates the portable tank instruction
that shall be used for each substance permitted for carriage in a portable tank. When no portable tank
instruction appears in Column (10) for a specific dangerous goods entry then carriage of the substance
in portable tanks is not permitted unless a competent authority approval is granted as detailed in 6.7.1.3.
Portable tank special provisions are assigned to specific dangerous goods in Column (11) of Table A of
Chapter 3.2. Each portable tank special provision is identified by an alpha-numeric code (e.g. TP1). A
listing of the portable tank special provisions is provided in 4.2.5.3.
NOTE: The gases authorized for carriage in MEGCs are indicated with the letter “(M)” in Column
(10) of Table A of Chapter 3.2.
– 174 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 175 –
4.2.5.2 Portable tank instructions
4.2.5.2.1 Portable tank instructions apply to dangerous goods of Classes 1 to 9. Portable tank instructions provide
specific information relevant to portable tanks provisions applicable to specific substances. These
provisions shall be met in addition to the general provisions in this Chapter and the general requirements
in Chapter 6.7 or Chapter 6.9.
4.2.5.2.2 For substances of Class 1 and Classes 3 to 9, the portable tank instructions indicate the applicable
minimum test pressure, the minimum shell thickness, bottom opening requirements and pressure relief
requirements. In portable tank instruction T23, self-reactive substances of Class 4.1 and Class 5.2
organic peroxides permitted to be carried in portable tanks are listed along with the applicable control
and emergency temperatures.
4.2.5.2.3 Non-refrigerated liquefied gases are assigned to portable tank instruction T50. T50 provides the
maximum allowable working pressures, the requirements for the openings below liquid level, pressure-
relief requirements and maximum filling density requirements for non-refrigerated liquefied gases
permitted for carriage in portable tanks.
4.2.5.2.4 Refrigerated liquefied gases are assigned to portable tank instruction T75.
4.2.5.2.5 Determination of the appropriate portable tank instructions
When a specific portable tank instruction is specified in Column (10) of Table A of Chapter 3.2 for a
specific dangerous goods entry additional portable tanks which possess higher minimum test pressures,
greater shell thicknesses, more stringent bottom opening and pressure-relief device arrangements may
be used. The following guidelines apply to determining the appropriate portable tanks which may be
used for carriage of particular substances:
Portable tank
instruction specified Portable tank instructions also permitted
T1 T2, T3, T4, T5, T6, T7, T8, T9, T10, T11, T12, T13, T14, T15, T16, T17, T18, T19, T20, T21,
T22
T2 T4, T5, T7, T8, T9, T10, T11, T12, T13, T14, T15, T16, T17, T18, T19, T20, T21, T22
T3 T4, T5, T6, T7, T8, T9, T10, T11, T12, T13, T14, T15, T16, T17, T18, T19, T20, T21, T22
T4 T5, T7, T8, T9, T10, T11, T12, T13, T14, T15, T16, T17, T18, T19, T20, T21, T22
T5 T10, T14, T19, T20, T22
T6 T7, T8, T9, T10, T11, T12, T13, T14, T15, T16, T17, T18, T19, T20, T21, T22
T7 T8, T9, T10, T11, T12, T13, T14, T15, T16, T17, T18, T19, T20, T21, T22
T8 T9, T10, T13, T14, T19, T20, T21, T22
T9 T10, T13, T14, T19, T20, T21, T22
T10 T14, T19, T20, T22
T11 T12, T13, T14, T15, T16, T17, T18, T19, T20, T21, T22
T12 T14, T16, T18, T19, T20, T22
T13 T14, T19, T20, T21, T22
T14 T19, T20, T22
T15 T16, T17, T18, T19, T20, T21, T22
T16 T18, T19, T20, T22
T17 T18, T19, T20, T21, T22
T18 T19, T20, T22
T19 T20, T22
T20 T22
T21 T22
T22 None
T23 None
– 175 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 176 –
4.2.5.2.6 Portable tank instructions
Portable tank instructions specify the requirements applicable to a portable tank when used for the
carriage of specific substances. Portable tank instructions T1 to T22 specify the applicable minimum
test pressure, the minimum shell thickness in mm reference steel for shells made of metallic materials
or the minimum FRP shell thickness, and the pressure-relief and bottom-opening requirements.
T1 – T22 PORTABLE TANK INSTRUCTIONS T1 – T22
These portable tank instructions apply to liquid and solid substances of Class 1 and Classes 3 to 9. The general provisions
of Section 4.2.1 and the requirements of Section 6.7.2 shall be met. The instructions for portable tanks with FRP shells
apply to substances of classes 1, 3, 5.1, 6.1, 6.2, 8 and 9. Additionally, the requirements of Chapter 6.9 apply.
Portable tank
instruction
Minimum test
pressure (bar)
Minimum shell thickness
(in mm-reference steel
for shells made of
metallic materials)
(see 6.7.2.4)
Pressure-relief
requirements a
(see 6.7.2.8)
Bottom opening
requirements b
(see 6.7.2.6)
T1 1.5 See 6.7.2.4.2 Normal See 6.7.2.6.2
T2 1.5 See 6.7.2.4.2 Normal See 6.7.2.6.3
T3 2.65 See 6.7.2.4.2 Normal See 6.7.2.6.2
T4 2.65 See 6.7.2.4.2 Normal See 6.7.2.6.3
T5 2.65 See 6.7.2.4.2 See 6.7.2.8.3 Not allowed
T6 4 See 6.7.2.4.2 Normal See 6.7.2.6.2
T7 4 See 6.7.2.4.2 Normal See 6.7.2.6.3
T8 4 See 6.7.2.4.2 Normal Not allowed
T9 4 6 mm Normal Not allowed
T10 4 6 mm See 6.7.2.8.3 Not allowed
T11 6 See 6.7.2.4.2 Normal See 6.7.2.6.3
T12 6 See 6.7.2.4.2 See 6.7.2.8.3 See 6.7.2.6.3
T13 6 6 mm Normal Not allowed
T14 6 6 mm See 6.7.2.8.3 Not allowed
T15 10 See 6.7.2.4.2 Normal See 6.7.2.6.3
T16 10 See 6.7.2.4.2 See 6.7.2.8.3 See 6.7.2.6.3
T17 10 6 mm Normal See 6.7.2.6.3
T18 10 6 mm See 6.7.2.8.3 See 6.7.2.6.3
T19 10 6 mm See 6.7.2.8.3 Not allowed
T20 10 8 mm See 6.7.2.8.3 Not allowed
T21 10 10 mm Normal Not allowed
T22 10 10 mm See 6.7.2.8.3 Not allowed
a When the word “Normal” is indicated, all the requirements of 6.7.2.8 apply except for 6.7.2.8.3.
b When this column indicates “Not allowed”, bottom openings are not permitted when the substance to be carried is
a liquid (see 6.7.2.6.1). When the substance to be carried is a solid at all temperatures encountered under normal
conditions of carriage, bottom openings conforming to the requirements of 6.7.2.6.2 are authorized.
– 176 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 177 –
T23 PORTABLE TANK INSTRUCTION T23
This portable tank instruction applies to self-reactive substances of Class 4.1 and organic peroxides of Class 5.2. The
general provisions of Section 4.2.1 and the requirements of Section 6.7.2 shall be met. The additional provisions specific
to self-reactive substances of Class 4.1 and organic peroxides of Class 5.2 in 4.2.1.13 shall also be met. The formulations
not listed in 2.2.41.4 or in 2.2.52.4 but listed below may also be carried packed in accordance with packing method OP8
of packing instruction P520 of 4.1.4.1, with the same control and emergency temperatures, if applicable.
UN
No. Substance Minimum
test
pressure
(bar)
Minimum
shell
thickness
(mm-
reference
steel)
Bottom
opening
requi-
rements
Pressure-
relief
requi-
rements
Degree of
filling Control
tempe-
rature
Emergency
temperature
3109 ORGANIC PEROXIDE,
TYPE F, LIQUID
4 See
6.7.2.4.2
See
6.7.2.6.3
See 6.7.2.8.2
4.2.1.13.6
4.2.1.13.7
4.2.1.13.8
See
4.2.1.13.13
tert-Butyl hydro-
peroxidea, not more than
72 % with water
tert-Butyl hydro-
peroxide, not more than
56 % in diluent type Bb
Cumyl hydroperoxide,
not more than 90 % in
diluent type A
Di-tert-butyl peroxide,
not more than 32 % in
diluent type A
Isopropyl cumyl hydro-
peroxide, not more
than 72 % in diluent
type A
p-Menthyl hydro-
peroxide, not more than
72 % in diluent type A
Pinanyl hydro-
peroxide, not more than
56 % in diluent type A
3110 ORGANIC PEROXIDE
TYPE F, SOLID
4 See
6.7.2.4.2
See
6.7.2.6.3
See 6.7.2.8.2
4.2.1.13.6
4.2.1.13.7
4.2.1.13.8
See
4.2.1.13.13
Dicumyl peroxidec
3119 ORGANIC PEROXIDE,
TYPE F, LIQUID,
TEMPERATURE
CONTROLLED
4 See
6.7.2.4.2
See
6.7.2.6.3 See 6.7.2.8.2
4.2.1.13.6
4.2.1.13.7
4.2.1.13.8
See
4.2.1.13.13
d d
tert-Amyl
peroxyneodecanoate, not
more than 47 % in
diluent type A
-10 °C -5 °C
tert-Butyl peroxyacetate,
not more than 32 % in
diluent type B
+30 °C +35 °C
(Cont’d on next page)
a Provided that steps have been taken to achieve the safety equivalence of 65% tert-Butyl hydroperoxide and 35%
water.
b Diluent type B is tert-Butyl alcohol.
c Maximum quantity per portable tank: 2000 kg.
d As approved by the competent authority.
– 177 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 178 –
T23 PORTABLE TANK INSTRUCTION (cont’d) T23
This portable tank instruction applies to self-reactive substances of Class 4.1 and organic peroxides of Class 5.2. The
general provisions of Section 4.2.1 and the requirements of Section 6.7.2 shall be met. The additional provisions specific
to self-reactive substances of Class 4.1 and organic peroxides of Class 5.2 in 4.2.1.13 shall also be met. The formulations
listed below may also be carried packed in accordance with packing method OP8 of packing instruction P520 of 4.1.4.1,
with the same control and emergency temperatures, if applicable.
UN
No. Substance Minimum
test
pressure
(bar)
Minimum
shell
thickness
(mm-
reference
steel)
Bottom
opening
requi-
rements
Pressure-
relief
requi-
rements
Degree of
filling Control
tempe-
rature
Emergency
temperature
3119
(Cont’d)
tert-Butyl peroxy-2-
ethylhexanoate, not
more than 32 % in
diluent type B
+15 °C +20 °C
tert-Butyl
peroxypivalate, not
more than 27 % in
diluent type B
c +5 °C +10 °C
tert-Butyl peroxy-
3,5,5-trimethyl-
hexanoate, not more
than 32 % in diluent
type B
+35 °C +40 °C
Di-(3,5,5-trimethyl-
hexanoyl) peroxide,
not more than 38 % in
diluent type A or
type B
0 °C +5 °C
Peroxyacetic acid,
distilled, type F,
stabilizede
+30 C +35 C
3120 ORGANIC
PEROXIDE, TYPE F,
SOLID,
TEMPERATURE
CONTROLLED
4 See
6.7.2.4.2 See
6.7.2.6.3 See 6.7.2.8.2
4.2.1.13.6
4.2.1.13.7
4.2.1.13.8
See
4.2.1.13.13
d d
3229 SELF-REACTIVE
LIQUID TYPE F 4 See
6.7.2.4.2 See
6.7.2.6.3 See
6.7.2.8.2
4.2.1.13.6
4.2.1.13.7
4.2.1.13.8
See
4.2.1.13.13
3230 SELF-REACTIVE
SOLID TYPE F 4 See
6.7.2.4.2 See
6.7.2.6.3 See
6.7.2.8.2
4.2.1.13.6
4.2.1.13.7
4.2.1.13.8
See
4.2.1.13.13
3239 SELF-REACTIVE
LIQUID TYPE F,
TEMPERATURE
CONTROLLED
4 See
6.7.2.4.2 See
6.7.2.6.3 See
6.7.2.8.2
4.2.1.13.6
4.2.1.13.7
4.2.1.13.8
See
4.2.1.13.13
d d
3240 SELF-REACTIVE
SOLID TYPE F,
TEMPERATURE
CONTROLLED
4 See
6.7.2.4.2 See
6.7.2.6.3 See
6.7.2.8.2
4.2.1.13.6
4.2.1.13.7
4.2.1.13.8
See
4.2.1.13.13
d d
d As approved by the competent authority.
e Formulation derived from distillation of peroxyacetic acid originating from peroxyacetic acid in concentration
of not more than 41% with water, total active oxygen (Peroxyacetic acid+H2O 2)
 9.5%, which fulfils the criteria of the
Manual of Tests and Criteria, paragraph 20.4.3 (f). “CORROSIVE” subsidiary hazard placard required (Model No 8,
see 5.2.2.2.2).
– 178 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 179 –
T50 PORTABLE TANK INSTRUCTION T50
This portable tank instruction applies to non-refrigerated liquefied gases and chemicals under pressure (UN Nos. 3500,
3501, 3502, 3503, 3504 and 3505). The general provisions of Section 4.2.2 and the requirements of Section 6.7.3 shall
be met.
UN
No.
Non-refrigerated
liquefied gases
Max. allowable working
pressure (bar): Small;
Bare; Sunshield;
Insulated; respectivelya
Openings
below liquid
level
Pressure- relief
requirements b
(see 6.7.3.7)
Maximum filling
ratio
1005 Ammonia, anhydrous 29.0
25.7
22.0
19.7
Allowed See 6.7.3.7.3 0.53
1009 Bromotrifluoromethane
(Refrigerant gas R 13B1)
38.0
34.0
30.0
27.5
Allowed Normal 1.13
1010 Butadienes, stabilized 7.5
7.0
7.0
7.0
Allowed Normal 0.55
1010 Butadienes and hydrocarbon
mixture, stabilized
See MAWP definition in
6.7.3.1
Allowed Normal See 4.2.2.7
1011 Butane 7.0
7.0
7.0
7.0
Allowed Normal 0.51
1012 Butylene 8.0
7.0
7.0
7.0
Allowed Normal 0.53
1017 Chlorine 19.0
17.0
15.0
13.5
Not Allowed See 6.7.3.7.3 1.25
1018 Chlorodifluoromethane
(Refrigerant gas R 22)
26.0
24.0
21.0
19.0
Allowed Normal 1.03
1020 Chloropentafluoroethane
(Refrigerant gas R 115)
23.0
20.0
18.0
16.0
Allowed Normal 1.06
1021 1-Chloro-
1,2,2,2-tetrafluoroethane
(Refrigerant gas R 124)
10.3
9.8
7.9
7.0
Allowed Normal 1.20
1027 Cyclopropane 18.0
16.0
14.5
13.0
Allowed Normal 0.53
a “Small” means tanks having a shell with a diameter of 1.5 m or less; “Bare” means tanks having a shell with a
diameter of more than 1.5 m without insulation or sun shield (see 6.7.3.2.12); “Sunshield” means tanks having a shell
with a diameter of more than 1.5 m with sun shield (see 6.7.3.2.12); “Insulated” means tanks having a shell with a
diameter of more than 1.5 m with insulation (see 6.7.3.2.12); (See definition of “Design reference temperature” in 6.7.3.1).
b The word “Normal” in the pressure relief requirements column indicates that a frangible disc as specified in
6.7.3.7.3 is not required.
– 179 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 180 –
T50 PORTABLE TANK INSTRUCTION (cont’d) T50
This portable tank instruction applies to non-refrigerated liquefied gases and chemicals under pressure (UN Nos. 3500,
3501, 3502, 3503, 3504 and 3505). The general provisions of Section 4.2.2 and the requirements of Section 6.7.3 shall
be met.
UN
No.
Non-refrigerated
liquefied gases
Max. allowable working
pressure (bar): Small;
Bare; Sunshield;
Insulated; respectivelya
Openings
below liquid
level
Pressure- relief
requirements b
(see 6.7.3.7)
Maximum filling
ratio
1028 Dichlorodifluoromethane
(Refrigerant gas R 12)
16.0
15.0
13.0
11.5
Allowed Normal 1.15
1029 Dichlorofluoromethane
(Refrigerant gas R 21)
7.0
7.0
7.0
7.0
Allowed Normal 1.23
1030 1,1-Difluoroethane
(Refrigerant gas R 152a)
16.0
14.0
12.4
11.0
Allowed Normal 0.79
1032 Dimethylamine, anhydrous 7.0
7.0
7.0
7.0
Allowed Normal 0.59
1033 Dimethyl ether 15.5
13.8
12.0
10.6
Allowed Normal 0.58
1036 Ethylamine 7.0
7.0
7.0
7.0
Allowed Normal 0.61
1037 Ethyl chloride 7.0
7.0
7.0
7.0
Allowed Normal 0.80
1040 Ethylene oxide with nitrogen up
to a total pressure of 1MPa
(10 bar) at 50 °C



10.0
Not Allowed See 6.7.3.7.3 0.78
1041 Ethylene oxide and carbon
dioxide mixture with more than
9 % but not more than 87 %
ethylene oxide
See MAWP definition in
6.7.3.1
Allowed Normal See 4.2.2.7
1055 Isobutylene 8.1
7.0
7.0
7.0
Allowed Normal 0.52
a “Small” means tanks having a shell with a diameter of 1.5 m or less; “Bare” means tanks having a shell with a
diameter of more than 1.5 m without insulation or sun shield (see 6.7.3.2.12); “Sunshield” means tanks having a shell
with a diameter of more than 1.5 m with sun shield (see 6.7.3.2.12); “Insulated” means tanks having a shell with a
diameter of more than 1.5 m with insulation (see 6.7.3.2.12); (See definition of “Design reference temperature” in 6.7.3.1).
b The word “Normal” in the pressure relief requirements column indicates that a frangible disc as specified in
6.7.3.7.3 is not required.
– 180 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 181 –
T50 PORTABLE TANK INSTRUCTION (cont’d) T50
This portable tank instruction applies to non-refrigerated liquefied gases and chemicals under pressure (UN Nos. 3500,
3501, 3502, 3503, 3504 and 3505). The general provisions of Section 4.2.2 and the requirements of Section 6.7.3 shall
be met.
UN
No.
Non-refrigerated
liquefied gases
Max. allowable working
pressure (bar): Small;
Bare; Sunshield;
Insulated; respectivelya
Openings
below liquid
level
Pressure- relief
requirements b
(see 6.7.3.7)
Maximum filling
ratio
1060 Methylacetylene and propadiene
mixture, stabilized
28.0
24.5
22.0
20.0
Allowed Normal 0.43
1061 Methylamine, anhydrous 10.8
9.6
7.8
7.0
Allowed Normal 0.58
1062 Methyl bromide with not more
than 2 % chloropicrin
7.0
7.0
7.0
7.0
Not Allowed See 6.7.3.7.3 1.51
1063 Methyl chloride
(Refrigerant gas R 40)
14.5
12.7
11.3
10.0
Allowed Normal 0.81
1064 Methyl mercaptan 7.0
7.0
7.0
7.0
Not Allowed See 6.7.3.7.3 0.78
1067 Dinitrogen tetroxide 7.0
7.0
7.0
7.0
Not Allowed See 6.7.3.7.3 1.30
1075 Petroleum gases, liquefied See MAWP definition in
6.7.3.1
Allowed Normal See 4.2.2.7
1077 Propylene 28.0
24.5
22.0
20.0
Allowed Normal 0.43
1078 Refrigerant gas, n.o.s. See MAWP definition in
6.7.3.1
Allowed Normal See 4.2.2.7
1079 Sulphur dioxide 11.6
10.3
8.5
7.6
Not Allowed See 6.7.3.7.3 1.23
1082 Trifluorochloroethylene,
stabilized
(Refrigerant gas R 1113)
17.0
15.0
13.1
11.6
Not Allowed See 6.7.3.7.3 1.13
a “Small” means tanks having a shell with a diameter of 1.5 m or less; “Bare” means tanks having a shell with a
diameter of more than 1.5 m without insulation or sun shield (see 6.7.3.2.12); “Sunshield” means tanks having a shell
with a diameter of more than 1.5 m with sun shield (see 6.7.3.2.12); “Insulated” means tanks having a shell with a
diameter of more than 1.5 m with insulation (see 6.7.3.2.12); (See definition of “Design reference temperature” in 6.7.3.1).
b The word “Normal” in the pressure relief requirements column indicates that a frangible disc as specified in
6.7.3.7.3 is not required.
– 181 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 182 –
T50 PORTABLE TANK INSTRUCTION (cont’d) T50
This portable tank instruction applies to non-refrigerated liquefied gases and chemicals under pressure (UN Nos. 3500,
3501, 3502, 3503, 3504 and 3505). The general provisions of Section 4.2.2 and the requirements of Section 6.7.3 shall
be met.
UN
No.
Non-refrigerated
liquefied gases
Max. allowable working
pressure (bar): Small;
Bare; Sunshield;
Insulated; respectivelya
Openings
below liquid
level
Pressure- relief
requirements b
(see 6.7.3.7)
Maximum filling
ratio
1083 Trimethylamine, anhydrous 7.0
7.0
7.0
7.0
Allowed Normal 0.56
1085 Vinyl bromide, stabilized 7.0
7.0
7.0
7.0
Allowed Normal 1.37
1086 Vinyl chloride, stabilized 10.6
9.3
8.0
7.0
Allowed Normal 0.81
1087 Vinyl methyl ether, stabilized 7.0
7.0
7.0
7.0
Allowed Normal 0.67
1581 Chloropicrin and methyl
bromide mixture with more than
2 % chloropicrin
7.0
7.0
7.0
7.0
Not Allowed See 6.7.3.7.3 1.51
1582 Chloropicrin and methyl
chloride mixture
19.2
16.9
15.1
13.1
Not Allowed See 6.7.3.7.3 0.81
1858 Hexafluoropropylene
(Refrigerant gas R 1216)
19.2
16.9
15.1
13.1
Allowed Normal 1.11
1912 Methyl chloride and methylene
chloride mixture
15.2
13.0
11.6
10.1
Allowed Normal 0.81
1958 1,2-Dichloro-1,1,2,2-
tetrafluoroethane
(Refrigerant gas R 114)
7.0
7.0
7.0
7.0
Allowed Normal 1.30
1965 Hydrocarbon gas, mixture
liquefied, n.o.s.
See MAWP definition in
6.7.3.1
Allowed Normal See 4.2.2.7
1969 Isobutane 8.5
7.5
7.0
7.0
Allowed Normal 0.49
a “Small” means tanks having a shell with a diameter of 1.5 m or less; “Bare” means tanks having a shell with a
diameter of more than 1.5 m without insulation or sun shield (see 6.7.3.2.12); “Sunshield” means tanks having a shell
with a diameter of more than 1.5 m with sun shield (see 6.7.3.2.12); “Insulated” means tanks having a shell with a
diameter of more than 1.5 m with insulation (see 6.7.3.2.12); (See definition of “Design reference temperature” in 6.7.3.1).
b The word “Normal” in the pressure relief requirements column indicates that a frangible disc as specified in
6.7.3.7.3 is not required.
– 182 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 183 –
T50 PORTABLE TANK INSTRUCTION (cont’d) T50
This portable tank instruction applies to non-refrigerated liquefied gases and chemicals under pressure (UN Nos. 3500,
3501, 3502, 3503, 3504 and 3505). The general provisions of Section 4.2.2 and the requirements of Section 6.7.3 shall
be met.
UN
No.
Non-refrigerated
liquefied gases
Max. allowable working
pressure (bar): Small;
Bare; Sunshield;
Insulated; respectivelya
Openings
below liquid
level
Pressure- relief
requirements b
(see 6.7.3.7)
Maximum filling
ratio
1973 Chlorodifluoromethane and
chloropentafluoroethane
mixture with fixed boiling point,
with approximately 49 %
chlorodifluoromethane
(Refrigerant gas R 502)
28.3
25.3
22.8
20.3
Allowed Normal 1.05
1974 Chlorodifluorobromomethane
(Refrigerant gas R 12B1)
7.4
7.0
7.0
7.0
Allowed Normal 1.61
1976 Octafluorocyclobutane
(Refrigerant gas RC 318)
8.8
7.8
7.0
7.0
Allowed Normal 1.34
1978 Propane 22.5
20.4
18.0
16.5
Allowed Normal 0.42
1983 1-Chloro-2,2,2-trifluoroethane
(Refrigerant gas R 133a)
7.0
7.0
7.0
7.0
Allowed Normal 1.18
2035 1,1,1-Trifluoroethane
(Refrigerant gas R 143a)
31.0
27.5
24.2
21.8
Allowed Normal 0.76
2424 Octafluoropropane
(Refrigerant gas R 218)
23.1
20.8
18.6
16.6
Allowed Normal 1.07
2517 1-Chloro-1,1-difluoroethane
(Refrigerant gas R 142b)
8.9
7.8
7.0
7.0
Allowed Normal 0.99
2602 Dichlorodifluoromethane and
1,1-difluoroethane azeotropic
mixture with approximately
74 % dichlorodifluoromethane
(Refrigerant gas R 500)
20.0
18.0
16.0
14.5
Allowed Normal 1.01
a “Small” means tanks having a shell with a diameter of 1.5 m or less; “Bare” means tanks having a shell with a
diameter of more than 1.5 m without insulation or sun shield (see 6.7.3.2.12); “Sunshield” means tanks having a shell
with a diameter of more than 1.5 m with sun shield (see 6.7.3.2.12); “Insulated” means tanks having a shell with a
diameter of more than 1.5 m with insulation (see 6.7.3.2.12); (See definition of “Design reference temperature” in 6.7.3.1).
b The word “Normal” in the pressure relief requirements column indicates that a frangible disc as specified in
6.7.3.7.3 is not required.
– 183 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 184 –
T50 PORTABLE TANK INSTRUCTION (cont’d) T50
This portable tank instruction applies to non-refrigerated liquefied gases and chemicals under pressure (UN Nos. 3500,
3501, 3502, 3503, 3504 and 3505). The general provisions of Section 4.2.2 and the requirements of Section 6.7.3 shall
be met.
UN
No.
Non-refrigerated
liquefied gases
Max. allowable working
pressure (bar): Small;
Bare; Sunshield;
Insulated; respectivelya
Openings
below liquid
level
Pressure- relief
requirements b
(see 6.7.3.7)
Maximum filling
ratio
3057 Trifluoroacetyl chloride 14.6
12.9
11.3
9.9
Not allowed See 6.7.3.7.3 1.17
3070 Ethylene oxide and
dichlorodifluoromethane
mixture with not more than
12.5 % ethylene oxide
14.0
12.0
11.0
9.0
Allowed See 6.7.3.7.3 1.09
3153 Perfluoro (methyl vinyl ether) 14.3
13.4
11.2
10.2
Allowed Normal 1.14
3159 1,1,1,2-Tetrafluoroethane
(Refrigerant gas R 134a)
17.7
15.7
13.8
12.1
Allowed Normal 1.04
3161 Liquefied gas, flammable, n.o.s. See
MAWP definition
in 6.7.3.1
Allowed Normal See 4.2.2.7
3163 Liquefied gas, n.o.s. See
MAWP definition
in 6.7.3.1
Allowed Normal See 4.2.2.7
3220 Pentafluoroethane
(Refrigerant gas R 125)
34.4
30.8
27.5
24.5
Allowed Normal 0.87
3252 Difluoromethane
(Refrigerant gas R 32)
43.0
39.0
34.4
30.5
Allowed Normal 0.78
3296 Heptafluoropropane
(Refrigerant gas R 227)
16.0
14.0
12.5
11.0
Allowed Normal 1.20
3297 Ethylene oxide and
chlorotetrafluoroethane mixture,
with not more than 8.8 %
ethylene oxide
8.1
7.0
7.0
7.0
Allowed Normal 1.16
a “Small” means tanks having a shell with a diameter of 1.5 m or less; “Bare” means tanks having a shell with a
diameter of more than 1.5 m without insulation or sun shield (see 6.7.3.2.12); “Sunshield” means tanks having a shell
with a diameter of more than 1.5 m with sun shield (see 6.7.3.2.12); “Insulated” means tanks having a shell with a
diameter of more than 1.5 m with insulation (see 6.7.3.2.12); (See definition of “Design reference temperature” in 6.7.3.1).
b The word “Normal” in the pressure relief requirements column indicates that a frangible disc as specified in
6.7.3.7.3 is not required.
– 184 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 185 –
T50 PORTABLE TANK INSTRUCTION (cont’d) T50
This portable tank instruction applies to non-refrigerated liquefied gases and chemicals under pressure (UN Nos. 3500,
3501, 3502, 3503, 3504 and 3505). The general provisions of Section 4.2.2 and the requirements of Section 6.7.3 shall
be met.
UN
No.
Non-refrigerated
liquefied gases
Max. allowable working
pressure (bar): Small;
Bare; Sunshield;
Insulated; respectivelya
Openings
below liquid
level
Pressure- relief
requirements b
(see 6.7.3.7)
Maximum filling
ratio
3298 Ethylene oxide and
pentafluoroethane mixture, with
not more than 7.9 % ethylene
oxide
25.9
23.4
20.9
18.6
Allowed Normal 1.02
3299 Ethylene oxide and
tetrafluoroethane mixture, with
not more than 5.6 % ethylene
oxide
16.7
14.7
12.9
11.2
Allowed Normal 1.03
3318 Ammonia solution, relative
density less than 0.880 at 15 °C
in water, with more than 50 %
ammonia
See MAWP definition in
6.7.3.1
Allowed See 6.7.3.7.3 See 4.2.2.7
3337 Refrigerant gas R 404A 31.6
28.3
25.3
22.5
Allowed Normal 0.84
3338 Refrigerant gas R 407A 31.3
28.1
25.1
22.4
Allowed Normal 0.95
3339 Refrigerant gas R 407B 33.0
29.6
26.5
23.6
Allowed Normal 0.95
3340 Refrigerant gas R 407C 29.9
26.8
23.9
21.3
Allowed Normal 0.95
3500 Chemical under pressure, n.o.s. See MAWP definition in
6.7.3.1
Allowed See 6.7.3.7.3 TP4c
3501 Chemical under pressure,
flammable, n.o.s.
See MAWP definition in
6.7.3.1
Allowed See 6.7.3.7.3 TP4c
3502 Chemical under pressure, toxic,
n.o.s.
See MAWP definition in
6.7.3.1
Allowed See 6.7.3.7.3 TP4c
3503 Chemical under pressure,
corrosive, n.o.s.
See MAWP definition in
6.7.3.1
Allowed See 6.7.3.7.3 TP4c
3504 Chemical under pressure,
flammable, toxic, n.o.s.
See MAWP definition in
6.7.3.1
Allowed See 6.7.3.7.3 TP4c
3505 Chemical under pressure,
flammable, corrosive, n.o.s.
See MAWP definition in
6.7.3.1
Allowed See 6.7.3.7.3 TP4c
a “Small” means tanks having a shell with a diameter of 1.5 m or less; “Bare” means tanks having a shell with a
diameter of more than 1.5 m without insulation or sun shield (see 6.7.3.2.12); “Sunshield” means tanks having a shell
with a diameter of more than 1.5 m with sun shield (see 6.7.3.2.12); “Insulated” means tanks having a shell with a
diameter of more than 1.5 m with insulation (see 6.7.3.2.12); (See definition of “Design reference temperature” in 6.7.3.1).
b The word “Normal” in the pressure relief requirements column indicates that a frangible disc as specified in
6.7.3.7.3 is not required.
c For UN Nos. 3500, 3501, 3502, 3503, 3504 and 3505, the degree of filling shall be considered instead of the
maximum filling ratio.
– 185 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 186 –
T75 PORTABLE TANK INSTRUCTION T75
This portable tank instruction applies to refrigerated liquefied gases. The general provisions of Section 4.2.3 and the
requirements of Section 6.7.4 shall be met.
4.2.5.3 Portable tank special provisions
Portable tank special provisions are assigned to certain substances to indicate provisions which are in
addition to or in lieu of those provided by the portable tank instructions or the requirements in
Chapter 6.7. Portable tank special provisions are identified by an alpha numeric code beginning with
the letters “TP” (tank provision) and are assigned to specific substances in Column (11) of Table A of
Chapter 3.2. The following is a list of the portable tank special provisions:
TP1 The degree of filling prescribed in 4.2.1.9.2 shall not be exceeded.
)
)t(t1
97
fillingof(
fr 


Degree
TP2 The degree of filling prescribed in 4.2.1.9.3 shall not be exceeded.
)
)t(t1
95
fillingof(
fr 


Degree
TP3 The maximum degree of filling (in %) for solids carried above their melting point and for
elevated temperature liquids shall be determined in accordance with 4.2.1.9.5.
)
d
d
95fillingof(
f
r
Degree
TP4 The degree of filling shall not exceed 90 % or, alternatively, any other value approved by
the competent authority (see 4.2.1.16.2).
TP5 The degree of filling prescribed in 4.2.3.6 shall be met.
TP6 To prevent the tank bursting in any event, including fire engulfment, it shall be provided
with pressure-relief devices which are adequate in relation to the capacity of the tank and
to the nature of the substance carried. The device shall also be compatible with the
substance.
TP7 Air shall be eliminated from the vapour space by nitrogen or other means.
TP8 The test pressure may be reduced to 1.5 bar when the flash point of the substances carried
is greater than 0 °C.
TP9 A substance under this description shall only be carried in a portable tank under an
approval granted by the competent authority.
TP10 A lead lining, not less than 5 mm thick, which shall be tested annually, or another suitable
lining material approved by the competent authority is required. A portable tank may be
offered for carriage after the date of expiry of the last lining inspection for a period not to
exceed three months beyond that date, after emptying but before cleaning, for purposes
of performing the next required test or inspection prior to refilling.
TP12 (Deleted)
TP13 (Reserved)
TP16 The tank shall be fitted with a special device to prevent under-pressure and excess pressure
during normal carriage conditions. This device shall be approved by the competent
authority.
Pressure-relief requirements are as indicated in 6.7.2.8.3 to prevent crystallization of the
product in the pressure-relief valve.
– 186 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 187 –
TP17 Only inorganic non-combustible materials shall be used for thermal insulation of the tank.
TP18 Temperature shall be maintained between 18 °C and 40 °C. Portable tanks containing
solidified methacrylic acid shall not be reheated during carriage.
TP19 At the time of construction, the minimum shell thickness determined according to 6.7.3.4
shall be increased by 3 mm as a corrosion allowance. Shell thickness shall be verified
ultrasonically at intervals midway between periodic hydraulic tests and shall never be
lower than the minimum shell thickness determined according to 6.7.3.4.
TP20 This substance shall only be carried in insulated tanks under a nitrogen blanket.
TP21 The shell thickness shall be not less than 8 mm. Tanks shall be hydraulically tested and
internally inspected at intervals not exceeding 2.5 years.
TP22 Lubricant for joints or other devices shall be oxygen compatible.
TP23 Deleted.
TP24 The portable tank may be fitted with a device located under maximum filling conditions
in the vapour space of the shell to prevent the build-up of excess pressure due to the slow
decomposition of the substance carried. This device shall also prevent an unacceptable
amount of leakage of liquid in the case of overturning or entry of foreign matter into the
tank. This device shall be approved by the competent authority or its authorized body.
TP25 Sulphur trioxide 99.95 % pure and above may be carried in tanks without an inhibitor
provided that it is maintained at a temperature equal to or above 32.5 °C.
TP26 When carried under heated conditions, the heating device shall be fitted outside the shell.
For UN 3176 this requirement only applies when the substance reacts dangerously with
water.
TP27 A portable tank having a minimum test pressure of 4 bar may be used if it is shown that a
test pressure of 4 bar or less is acceptable according to the test pressure definition
in 6.7.2.1.
TP28 A portable tank having a minimum test pressure of 2.65 bar may be used if it is shown
that a test pressure of 2.65 bar or less is acceptable according to the test pressure definition
in 6.7.2.1.
TP29 A portable tank having a minimum test pressure of 1.5 bar may be used if it is shown that
a test pressure of 1.5 bar or less is acceptable according to the test pressure definition
in 6.7.2.1.
TP30 This substance shall be carried in insulated tanks.
TP31 This substance may only be carried in tanks in the solid state.
TP32 For UN Nos. 0331, 0332 and 3375, portable tanks may be used subject to the following
conditions:
(a) To avoid unnecessary confinement, each portable tank constructed of metal or
fibre-reinforced plastics shall be fitted with a pressure-relief device that may be of
the reclosing spring-loaded type, a frangible disc or a fusible element. The set to
discharge or burst pressure, as applicable, shall not be greater than 2.65 bar for
portable tanks with minimum test pressures greater than 4 bar.
(b) For UN 3375 only, the suitability for carriage in tanks shall be demonstrated. One
method to evaluate this suitability is test 8 (d) in Test Series 8 (see Manual of Tests
and Criteria, Part 1, Sub-section 18.7).
(c) Substances shall not be allowed to remain in the portable tank for any period that
could result in caking. Appropriate measures shall be taken to avoid accumulation
and packing of substances in the tank (e.g. cleaning, etc).
– 187 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 188 –
TP33 The portable tank instruction assigned for this substance applies to granular and powdered
solids and to solids which are filled and discharged at temperatures above their melting
point which are cooled and carried as a solid mass. For solids which are carried above
their melting point, see 4.2.1.19.
TP34 Portable tanks need not be subjected to the impact test in 6.7.4.14.1 if the portable tank is
marked “NOT FOR RAIL TRANSPORT” on the plate specified in 6.7.4.15.1 and also in
letters of at least 10 cm high on both sides of the outer jacket.
TP35 Deleted.
TP36 Fusible elements in the vapour space may be used on portable tanks.
TP37, TP38 and TP39 (Deleted)
TP40 Portable tanks shall not be carried when connected with spray application equipment.
TP41 With the agreement of the competent authority, the 2.5 year internal examination may be
waived or substituted by other test methods or inspection procedures, provided that the
portable tank is dedicated to the carriage of the organometallic substances to which this
tank special provision is assigned. However this examination is required when the
conditions of 6.7.2.19.7 are met.
– 188 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 189 –
CHAPTER 4.3
USE OF FIXED TANKS (TANK-VEHICLES), DEMOUNTABLE TANKS,
TANK-CONTAINERS AND TANK SWAP BODIES WITH SHELLS MADE
OF METALLIC MATERIALS, AND BATTERY-VEHICLES AND
MULTIPLE-ELEMENT GAS CONTAINERS (MEGCs)
NOTE: For portable tanks and UN multiple-element gas containers (MEGCs) see Chapter 4.2; for fibre-reinforced
plastics tanks, see Chapter 4.4; for vacuum operated waste tanks, see Chapter 4.5.
4.3.1 Scope
4.3.1.1 Provisions which take up the whole width of the page apply both to fixed tanks (tank-vehicles),
demountable tanks and battery-vehicles, and to tank-containers, tank swap bodies and MEGCs.
Provisions contained in a single column apply only to:
– fixed tanks (tank-vehicles), demountable tanks and battery-vehicles (left-hand column);
– tank-containers, tank swap bodies and MEGCs (right-hand column).
4.3.1.2 These provisions apply to:
fixed tanks (tank-vehicles), demountable tanks
and battery-vehicles
tank-containers, tank swap bodies and MEGCs
used for the carriage of gaseous, liquid, powdery or granular substances.
4.3.1.3 Section 4.3.2 lists the provisions applicable to fixed tanks (tank-vehicles), demountable tanks, tank-
containers and tank swap bodies, intended for the carriage of substances of all classes, and to battery-
vehicles and MEGCs intended for the carriage of gases of Class 2. Sections 4.3.3 and 4.3.4 contain
special provisions adding to or amending the provisions of Section 4.3.2.
4.3.1.4 For requirements concerning the construction, equipment, type approval, inspections and tests and
marking, see Chapter 6.8.
4.3.1.5 For transitional measures concerning the application of this Chapter, see:
1.6.3. 1.6.4.
4.3.2 Provisions applicable to all classes
4.3.2.1 Use
4.3.2.1.1 A substance subject to ADR may be carried in fixed tanks (tank-vehicles), demountable tanks, battery-
vehicles, tank-containers, tank swap bodies and MEGCs only when provision is made for a tank code
according to 4.3.3.1.1 and 4.3.4.1.1 in Column (12) of Table A in Chapter 3.2.
4.3.2.1.2 The required type of tank, battery-vehicle and MEGC is given in code form in Column (12) of Table A
in Chapter 3.2. The explanations for reading the four parts of the code are given in 4.3.3.1.1 (when the
substance to be carried belongs to Class 2) and in 4.3.4.1.1 (when the substance to be carried belongs
to Classes 1 and 3 to 9)1.
4.3.2.1.3 The required type according to 4.3.2.1.2 corresponds to the least stringent construction requirements
which are acceptable for the dangerous substance in question unless otherwise prescribed in this Chapter
or in Chapter 6.8. It is possible to use tanks corresponding to codes prescribing a higher minimum
calculation pressure, or more stringent requirements for filling or discharge openings or for safety
valves/devices (see 4.3.3.1.1 for Class 2 and 4.3.4.1.1 for Classes 3 to 9).
1 An exception is made for tanks intended for the carriage of substances of classes 1, 5.2 or 7 (see 4.3.4.1.3).
– 189 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 190 –
4.3.2.1.4 For certain substances, tanks, battery-vehicles or MEGCs are subject to additional provisions which are
included as special provisions in Column (13) of Table A in Chapter 3.2.
4.3.2.1.5 Tanks, battery-vehicles and MEGCs shall not be loaded with any dangerous substances other than those
for the carriage of which they have been approved according to 6.8.2.3.2 and which, in contact with the
materials of the shell, gaskets, equipment and protective linings, are not liable to react dangerously with
them (see “dangerous reaction” in 1.2.1), to form dangerous products or appreciably to weaken these
materials2.
4.3.2.1.6 Foodstuffs shall not be carried in tanks used for dangerous substances unless the necessary steps have
been taken to prevent any harm to public health.
4.3.2.1.7 The tank record shall be retained by the owner or the operator who shall be able to provide this
documentation at the request of the competent authority. The tank record shall be maintained throughout
the life of the tank and retained for 15 months after the tank is taken out of service.
Should a change of owner or operator occur during the life of the tank the tank record shall be transferred
without delay to the new owner or operator.
Copies of the tank record or all necessary documents shall be made available to the inspection body for
tests and inspections on tanks in accordance with 6.8.2.4.5 or 6.8.3.4.18, on the occasion of periodic or
exceptional inspections.
4.3.2.2 Degree of filling
4.3.2.2.1 The following degrees of filling shall not be exceeded in tanks intended for the carriage of liquids at
ambient temperatures:
(a) for flammable substances, environmentally hazardous substances and flammable
environmentally hazardous substances, without additional hazards (e.g. toxicity or corrosivity),
in tanks with a breather device or with safety valves (even where preceded by a bursting disc):
capacityof%
)t-(501
100
fillingofDegree
F


(b) for toxic or corrosive substances (whether flammable or environmentally hazardous or not) in
tanks with a breather device or with safety valves (even where preceded by a bursting disc):
capacityof%
)t-(501
98
fillingofDegree
F


(c) for flammable substances, environmentally hazardous substances and slightly toxic or corrosive
substances (whether flammable or environmentally hazardous or not) in hermetically closed
tanks without a safety device:
capacityof%
)t-(501
97
fillingofDegree
F


(d) for highly toxic, toxic, highly corrosive or corrosive substances (whether flammable or
environmentally hazardous or not) in hermetically closed tanks without a safety device:
capacityof%
)t-(501
95
fillingofDegree
F


4.3.2.2.2 In these formulae,  is the mean coefficient of cubical expansion of the liquid between 15 °C and 50 °C,
i.e. for a maximum variation in temperature of 35 °C.
2 It may be necessary to consult the manufacturer of the substance and the competent authority for guidance on the
compatibility of the substance with the materials of the tank, battery-vehicle or MEGC.
– 190 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 191 –
 is calculated by the formula:
50
5015
35d
dd 


where d 15 and d 50 are the relative densities of the liquid at 15 °C and 50 °C respectively.
tF is the mean temperature of the liquid during filling.
4.3.2.2.3 The provisions of 4.3.2.2.1 (a) to (d) above shall not apply to tanks whose contents are, by means of a
heating device, maintained at a temperature above 50 °C during carriage. In this case the degree of
filling at the outset shall be such, and the temperature so regulated, that the tank is not full to more than
95 % of its capacity and that the filling temperature is not exceeded, at any time during carriage.
4.3.2.2.4 Shells intended for the carriage of substances in the liquid state or liquefied gases or refrigerated
liquefied gases, which are not divided by partitions or surge plates into sections of not more than 7 500
litres capacity, shall be filled to not less than 80 % or not more than 20 % of their capacity.
This provision is not applicable to:
– liquids with a kinematic viscosity at 20 °C of at least 2 680 mm²/s;
– molten substances with a kinematic viscosity at the temperature of filling of at least 2 680 mm²/s;
– UN 1963 HELIUM, REFRIGERATED, LIQUID and UN 1966 HYDROGEN,
REFRIGERATED, LIQUID.
4.3.2.3 Operation
4.3.2.3.1 The thickness of the walls of the shell shall not, throughout its use, fall below the minimum figure
prescribed in:
6.8.2.1.17 to 6.8.2.1.21. 6.8.2.1.17 to 6.8.1.20.
4.3.2.3.2 During carriage tank-containers/MEGCs shall be
loaded on the carrying vehicle in such a way as to
be adequately protected by the fittings of the
carrying vehicle or of the tank-container/MEGC
itself against lateral and longitudinal impact and
against overturning3. If the tank-
containers/MEGCs, including the service
equipment, are so constructed as to withstand
impact or overturning they need not be protected in
this way.
4.3.2.3.3 During filling and discharge of tanks, battery-vehicles and MEGCs, appropriate measures shall be taken
to prevent the release of dangerous quantities of gases and vapours. Tanks, battery-vehicles and MEGCs
shall be closed so that the contents cannot spill out uncontrolled. The openings of bottom-discharge
tanks shall be closed by means of screw-threaded plugs, blank flanges or other equally effective devices.
After filling, the filler shall ensure that all the closures of the tanks, battery-vehicles and MEGCs are in
the closed position and there is no leakage. This also applies to the upper part of the dip tube.
4.3.2.3.4 Where several closure systems are fitted in series, that nearest to the substance being carried shall be
closed first.
3 Examples of protection of shells:
– protection against lateral impact may, for example, consist of longitudinal bars protecting the shell on both
sides at the level of the median line;
– protection against overturning may, for example, consist of reinforcing rings or bars fixed transversally in
relation to the frame;
– protection against rear impact, may, for example, consist of a bumper or frame.
– 191 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 192 –
4.3.2.3.5 No dangerous residue of the filling substance shall adhere to the outside of the tank during carriage.
4.3.2.3.6 Substances which may react dangerously with each other shall not be carried in adjoining compartments
of tanks.
Substances which may react dangerously with each other may be carried in adjoining compartments of
tanks, when these compartments are separated by a partition with a wall thickness equal to or greater
than that of the tank itself. They may also be carried separated by an empty space or an empty
compartment between loaded compartments.
4.3.2.3.7 Fixed tanks (tank-vehicles), demountable tanks, battery-vehicles, tank-containers, tank swap bodies and
MEGCs may not be filled or offered for carriage after the date specified for the inspection required by
6.8.2.4.2, 6.8.2.4.3, 6.8.3.4.6 and 6.8.3.4.12.
However, fixed tanks (tank-vehicles), demountable tanks, battery-vehicles, tank-containers, tank swap
bodies and MEGCs filled prior to the date specified for the next inspection may be carried:
(a) for a period not to exceed one month after the date specified if the inspection due is a periodic
inspection in accordance with 6.8.2.4.2, 6.8.3.4.6 (a) and 6.8.3.4.12;
(b) unless otherwise approved by the competent authority, for a period not to exceed three months
after the expiry of the date specified, if the inspection due is a periodic inspection in accordance
with 6.8.2.4.2, 6.8.3.4.6 (a) and 6.8.3.4.12 in order to allow the return of dangerous goods for
proper disposal or recycling. Reference to this exemption shall be mentioned in the transport
document;
(c) for a period not to exceed three months after the date specified, if the inspection due is an
intermediate inspection in accordance with 6.8.2.4.3, 6.8.3.4.6 (b) and 6.8.3.4.12.
4.3.2.4 Empty tanks, battery-vehicles and MEGCs, uncleaned
NOTE: For empty tanks, battery-vehicles and MEGCs, uncleaned, special provisions TU1, TU2, TU4,
TU16 and TU35 of 4.3.5 may apply.
4.3.2.4.1 No dangerous residue of the filling substance shall adhere to the outside of the tank during carriage.
4.3.2.4.2 To be accepted for carriage, empty tanks, battery-vehicles and MEGCs, uncleaned, shall be closed in
the same manner and be leakproof to the same degree as if they were full.
4.3.2.4.3 Where empty tanks, battery-vehicles and MEGCs, uncleaned, are not closed in the same manner and
are not leakproof to the same degree as if they were full and where the provisions of ADR cannot be
complied with, they shall be carried, with due regard to adequate safety, to the nearest suitable place
where cleaning or repair can be carried out. Carriage is adequately safe if suitable measures have been
taken to ensure equivalent safety commensurate with the provisions of ADR and to prevent the
uncontrolled release of the dangerous goods.
4.3.2.4.4 Empty fixed tanks (tank-vehicles), demountable tanks, battery-vehicles, tank-containers, tank swap
bodies and MEGCs, uncleaned, may also be carried after the expiry of the periods established in
6.8.2.4.2 and 6.8.2.4.3 for undergoing the inspection.
– 192 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 193 –
4.3.3 Special provisions applicable to Class 2
4.3.3.1 Coding and hierarchy of tanks
4.3.3.1.1 Coding of tanks, battery-vehicles and MEGCs
The four parts of the codes (tank codes) given in Column (12) of Table A in Chapter 3.2 have the
following meanings:
Part Description Tank Code
1 Types of tank,
battery-vehicle or
MEGC
C = tank, battery-vehicle or MEGC for compressed gases;
P = tank, battery-vehicle or MEGC for liquefied gases or
dissolved gases;
R = tank for refrigerated liquefied gases.
2 Calculation pressure X = value of the minimum relevant test pressure according to
the table in 4.3.3.2.5; or
22 = minimum calculation pressure in bar.
3 Openings (see
6.8.2.2 and
6.8.3.2)
B = tank with bottom filling or discharge openings with
3 closures; or
battery-vehicle or MEGC with openings below the surface
of the liquid or for compressed gases;
C = tank with top filling or discharge openings with 3 closures
with only cleaning openings below the surface of the liquid;
D = tank with top filling or discharge openings with 3 closures;
or
battery-vehicle or MEGC with no openings below the
surface of the liquid.
4 Safety valves/devices N = tank, battery-vehicle or MEGC with safety valve according
to 6.8.3.2.9 or 6.8.3.2.10 which is not hermetically closed;
H = hermetically closed tank, battery-vehicle or MEGC (see
1.2.1);
NOTE 1: The special provision TU17 indicated in Column (13) of Table A in Chapter 3.2 for certain
gases means that the gas may only be carried in a battery-vehicle or MEGC the elements of which are
composed of receptacles.
NOTE 2: The special provision TU40 indicated in Column (13) of Table A in Chapter 3.2 for certain
gases means that the gas may only be carried in a battery-vehicle or MEGC, the elements of which are
composed of seamless receptacles.
NOTE 3: The pressures indicated on the tank itself or on the panel shall be not less than the value of
“X” or the minimum calculation pressure.
– 193 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 194 –
4.3.3.1.2 Hierarchy of tanks
Tank
code
Other tank code(s) permitted for the substances under this code
C*BN
C*BH
C*CN
C*CH
C*DN
C*DH
P*BN
P*BH
P*CN
P*CH
P*DN
P*DH
R*BN
R*CN
R*DN
C#BN, C#CN, C#DN, C#BH, C#CH, C#DH
C#BH, C#CH, C#DH
C#CN, C#DN, C#CH, C#DH
C#CH, C#DH
C#DN, C#DH
C#DH
P#BN, P#CN, P#DN, P#BH, P#CH, P#DH
P#BH, P#CH, P#DH
P#CN, P#DN, P#CH, P#DH
P#CH, P#DH
P#DN, P#DH
P#DH
R#BN, R#CN, R#DN
R#CN, R#DN
R#DN
The figure represented by “#” shall be equal to or greater than the figure represented by “*”.
NOTE: This hierarchy does not take any special provisions into account (see 4.3.5 and 6.8.4) for each
entry.
4.3.3.2 Filling conditions and test pressures
4.3.3.2.1 The test pressure for tanks intended for the carriage of compressed gases shall be at least 1.5 times the
working pressure as defined in 1.2.1 for pressure receptacles.
4.3.3.2.2 The test pressure for tanks intended for the carriage of:
– high pressure liquefied gases; and
– dissolved gases
shall be such that, when the shell is filled to the maximum filling ratio, the pressure reached in the shell
by the substance at 55 °C for tanks with thermal insulation or 65 °C for tanks without thermal insulation
does not exceed the test pressure.
4.3.3.2.3 The test pressure for tanks intended for the carriage of low pressure liquefied gases will be:
(a) If the tank is equipped with thermal insulation, at least equal to the vapour pressure, reduced by
0.1 MPa (1 bar) of the liquid at 60 °C, but not less than 1 MPa (10 bar);
(b) If the tank is not equipped with thermal insulation, at least equal to the vapour pressure, reduced
by 0.1 MPa (1 bar), of the liquid at 65 °C, but not less than 1 MPa (10 bar).
The maximum permissible mass of contents per litre of capacity is calculated as follows:
Maximum permissible mass of contents per litre of capacity = 0.95
 density of the liquid phase at 50 °C
(in kg/l)
Moreover the vapour phase shall not disappear below 60 °C.
If the shells are not more than 1.5 m in diameter, the values of the test pressure and maximum filling
ratio conforming to packing instruction P200 in 4.1.4.1 shall be applicable.
4.3.3.2.4 The test pressure for tanks intended for the carriage of refrigerated liquefied gases shall be not less than
1.3 times the maximum allowable working pressure and indicated on the tank but not less than 300 kPa
(3 bar) (gauge pressure); for tanks with vacuum insulation the test pressure shall be not less than 1.3
times the maximum allowable working pressure increased by 100 kPa (1 bar).
– 194 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 195 –
4.3.3.2.5 Table of gases and gas mixtures which may be carried in fixed tanks (tank-vehicles), battery-vehicles,
demountable tanks, tank-containers or MEGCs indicating the minimum test pressure for tanks and as
far as applicable the filling ratio
In the case of gases and gas mixtures classified under n.o.s. entries, the values of the test pressure and
the filling ratio shall be prescribed by the inspection body.
When tanks for compressed or high pressure liquefied gases have been subjected to a test pressure lower
than shown in the table, and the tanks are fitted with thermal insulation, a lower maximum load may be
prescribed by the inspection body, provided that the pressure reached in the tank by the substance at
55 °C does not exceed the test pressure stamped on the tank.
UN
No.
Name Classification
code
Minimum test pressure for tanks Maximum
permissible mass
of contents per
litre of capacity
With thermal
insulation
Without
thermal
insulation
MPa bar MPa bar kg
1001 Acetylene, dissolved 4 F only in battery-vehicles and MEGCs composed of
receptacles
1002 Air, compressed 1 A see 4.3.3.2.1
1003 Air, refrigerated liquid 3 O see 4.3.3.2.4
1005 Ammonia, anhydrous 2 TC 2.6 26 2.9 29 0.53
1006 Argon, compressed 1 A see 4.3.3.2.1
1008 Boron trifluoride 2 TC 22.5 225 22.5 225 0.715
30 300 30 300 0.86
1009 Bromotrifluoromethane (Refrigerant gas
R13B1)
2 A 12 120 1.50
4.2 42 1.13
12 120 1.44
25 250 1.60
1010 BUTADIENES, STABILIZED (1,2-
butadiene) or 2 F 1 10 1 10 0.59
1010 BUTADIENES, STABILIZED (1,3-
butadiene) or 2 F 1 10 1 10 0.55
1010 BUTADIENES AND
HYDROCARBON, MIXTURE,
STABILIZED
2 F 1 10 1 10 0.50
1011 Butane 2 F 1 10 1 10 0.51
1012 BUTYLENE (1-Butylene) or 2 F 1 10 1 10 0.53
1012 BUTYLENE (trans-2-Butylene) or 2 F 1 10 1 10 0.54
1012 BUTYLENE (cis-2-Butylene) or 2 F 1 10 1 10 0.55
1012 BUTYLENE (Butylenes mixture) 2 F 1 10 1 10 0.50
1013 Carbon dioxide 2 A 19 190 0.73
22.5 225 0.78
19 190 0.66
25 250 0.75
1016 Carbon monoxide, compressed 1 TF see 4.3.3.2.1
1017 Chlorine 2 TOC 1.7 17 1.9 19 1.25
1018 Chlorodifluoromethane (Refrigerant gas
R22)
2 A 2.4 24 2.6 26 1.03
1020 Chloropentafluoroethane (Refrigerant
gas R115)
2 A 2 20 2.3 23 1.08
1021 1-chloro-1,2,2,2- tetrafluoroethane
(Refrigerant gas R124)
2 A 1 10 1.1 11 1.2
1022 Chlorotrifluoromethane (Refrigerant gas
R13)
2 A 12 120 0.96
22.5 225 1.12
10 100 0.83
12 120 0.90
19 190 1.04
25 250 1.10
1023 Coal gas, compressed TF see 4.3.3.2.1
1026 Cyanogen 2 TF 10 100 10 100 0.70
1027 Cyclopropane 2 F 1.6 16 1.8 18 0.53
– 195 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 196 –
UN
No.
Name Classification
code
Minimum test pressure for tanks Maximum
permissible mass
of contents per
litre of capacity
With thermal
insulation
Without
thermal
insulation
MPa bar MPa bar kg
1028 Dichlorodifluoromethane (Refrigerant
gas R12)
2 A 1.5 15 1.6 16 1.15
1029 Dichlorofluoromethane (Refrigerant gas
R21)
2 A 1 10 1 10 1.23
1030 1,1-difluoroethane
(Refrigerant gas R152a)
2 F 1.4 14 1.6 16 0.79
1032 Dimethylamine, anhydrous 2 F 1 10 1 10 0.59
1033 Dimethyl ether 2 F 1.4 14 1.6 16 0.58
1035 Ethane 2 F 12 120 0.32
9.5 95 0.25
12 120 0.29
30 300 0.39
1036 Ethylamine 2 F 1 10 1 10 0.61
1037 Ethyl chloride 2 F 1 10 1 10 0.8
1038 Ethylene, refrigerated liquid 3 F see 4.3.3.2.4
1039 Ethyl methyl ether 2 F 1 10 1 10 0.64
1040 Ethylene oxide with nitrogen up to a
total pressure of 1MPa (10 bar) at 50 °C
2 TF 1.5 15 1.5 15 0.78
1041 Ethylene oxide and carbon dioxide
mixture, with more than 9 % but not
more than 87 % ethylene oxide
2 F 2.4 24 2.6 26 0.73
1046 Helium, compressed 1 A see 4.3.3.2.1
1048 Hydrogen bromide, anhydrous 2 TC 5 50 5.5 55 1.54
1049 Hydrogen, compressed 1 F see 4.3.3.2.1
1050 Hydrogen chloride, anhydrous 2 TC 12 120 0.69
10 100 0.30
12 120 0.56
15 150 0.67
20 200 0.74
1053 Hydrogen sulphide 2 TF 4.5 45 5 50 0.67
1055 Isobutylene 2 F 1 10 1 10 0.52
1056 Krypton, compressed 1 A see 4.3.3.2.1
1058 Liquefied gases, non flammable,
charged with nitrogen, carbon dioxide
or air
2 A 1.5  filling pressure
see 4.3.3.2.2 or 4.3.3.2.3
1060 Methylacetylene and propadiene
mixture, stabilized:
2 F see 4.3.3.2.2 or 4.3.3.2.3
mixture P1 2 F 2.5 25 2.8 28 0.49
mixture P2 2 F 2.2 22 2.3 23 0.47
propadiene with 1 % to 4 %
methylacetylene
2 F 2.2 22 2.2 22 0.50
1061 Methylamine, anhydrous 2 F 1 10 1.1 11 0.58
1062 Methyl bromide with not more than 2 %
chloropicrin
2 T 1 10 1 10 1.51
1063 Methyl chloride
(Refrigerant gas R40)
2 F 1.3 13 1.5 15 0.81
1064 Methyl mercaptan 2 TF 1 10 1 10 0.78
1065 Neon, compressed 1 A see 4.3.3.2.1
1066 Nitrogen, compressed 1 A see 4.3.3.2.1
1067 Dinitrogen tetroxide (nitrogen dioxide) 2 TOC only in battery-vehicles and MEGCs composed of
receptacles
1070 Nitrous oxide 2 O 22.5 225 0.78
18 180 0.68
22.5 225 0.74
25 250 0.75
1071 Oil gas, compressed 1 TF see 4.3.3.2.1
1072 Oxygen, compressed 1 O see 4.3.3.2.1
– 196 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 197 –
UN
No.
Name Classification
code
Minimum test pressure for tanks Maximum
permissible mass
of contents per
litre of capacity
With thermal
insulation
Without
thermal
insulation
MPa bar MPa bar kg
1073 Oxygen, refrigerated liquid 3 O see 4.3.3.2.4
1075 Petroleum gases, liquefied 2 F See 4.3.3.2.2 or 4.3.3.2.3
1076 Phosgene 2 TC only in battery-vehicles and MEGCs composed of
receptacles
1077 Propylene 2 F 2.5 25 2.7 27 0.43
1078 Refrigerant gases, n.o.s. such as: 2 A
mixture F1 2 A 1 10 1.1 11 1.23
mixture F2 2 A 1.5 15 1.6 16 1.15
mixture F3 2 A 2.4 24 2.7 27 1.03
other mixtures 2 A see 4.3.3.2.2 or 4.3.3.2.3
1079 Sulphur dioxide 2 TC 1 10 1.2 12 1.23
1080 Sulphur hexafluoride 2 A 12 120 1.34
7 70 1.04
14 140 1.33
16 160 1.37
1081 Tetrafluoroethylene, stabilized 2 F only in battery-vehicles and MEGCs composed of
seamless receptacles
1082 Trifluorochloroethylene, stabilized
(Refrigerant gas R1113)
2 TF 1.5 15 1.7 17 1.13
1083 Trimethylamine, anhydrous 2 F 1 10 1 10 0.56
1085 Vinyl bromide, stabilized 2 F 1 10 1 10 1.37
1086 Vinyl chloride, stabilized 2 F 1 10 1.1 11 0.81
1087 Vinyl methyl ether, stabilized 2 F 1 10 1 10 0.67
1581 Chloropicrin and methyl bromide
mixture with more than 2 %
chloropicrin
2 T 1 10 1 10 1.51
1582 Chloropicrin and methyl chloride
mixture
2 T 1.3 13 1.5 15 0.81
1612 Hexaethyl tetraphosphate and
compressed gas mixture
1 T see 4.3.3.2.1
1749 Chlorine trifluoride 2 TOC 3 30 3 30 1.40
1858 Hexafluoropropylene
(Refrigerant gas R 1216)
2A 1.7 17 1.9 19 1.11
1859 Silicon tetrafluoride 2 TC 20
30
200
300
20
30
200
300
0.74
1.10
1860 Vinyl fluoride, stabilized 2 F 12 120 0.58
22.5 225 0.65
25 250 0.64
1912 Methyl chloride and methylene chloride
mixture
2 F 1.3 13 1.5 15 0.81
1913 Neon, refrigerated liquid 3 A see 4.3.3.2.4
1951 Argon, refrigerated liquid 3 A see 4.3.3.2.4
1952 Ethylene oxide and carbon dioxide
mixture, with not more than 9 %
ethylene oxide
2 A 19 190 19 190 0.66
25 250 25 250 0.75
1953 Compressed gas, toxic, flammable,
n.o.s. a
1 TF see 4.3.3.2.1 or 4.3.3.2.2
1954 Compressed gas, flammable n.o.s. 1 F see 4.3.3.2.1 or 4.3.3.2.2
1955 Compressed gas, toxic, n.o.s.a 1 T see 4.3.3.2.1 or 4.3.3.2.2
1956 Compressed gas, n.o.s. 1 A see 4.3.3.2.1 or 4.3.3.2.2
1957 Deuterium, compressed 1 F see 4.3.3.2.1
1958 1,2-dichloro-1,1,2,2-tetrafluoroethane
(Refrigerant gas R114)
2 A 1 10 1 10 1.3
a Allowed if LC₅₀ equal to or greater than 200 ppm.
– 197 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 198 –
UN
No.
Name Classification
code
Minimum test pressure for tanks Maximum
permissible mass
of contents per
litre of capacity
With thermal
insulation
Without
thermal
insulation
MPa bar MPa bar kg
1959 1,1-difluoroethylene (Refrigerant gas
R1132a)
2 F 12 120 0.66
22.5 225 0.78
25 250 0.77
1961 Ethane, refrigerated liquid 3 F see 4.3.3.2.4
1962 Ethylene 2 F 12 120 0.25
22.5 225 0.36
22.5 225 0.34
30 300 0.37
1963 Helium, refrigerated liquid 3 A see 4.3.3.2.4
1964 Hydrocarbon gas mixture, compressed,
n.o.s.
1 F see 4.3.3.2.1 or 4.3.3.2.2
1965 Hydrocarbon gas mixture, liquefied,
n.o.s.:
2 F
Mixture A 2 F 1 10 1 10 0.50
Mixture A01 2 F 1.2 12 1.4 14 0.49
Mixture A02 2 F 1.2 12 1.4 14 0.48
Mixture A0 2 F 1.2 12 1.4 14 0.47
Mixture A1 2 F 1.6 16 1.8 18 0.46
Mixture B1 2 F 2 20 2.3 23 0.45
Mixture B2 2 F 2 20 2.3 23 0.44
Mixture B 2 F 2 20 2.3 23 0.43
Mixture C 2 F 2.5 25 2.7 27 0.42
Other mixtures 2 F see 4.3.3.2.2 or 4.3.3.2.3
1966 Hydrogen, refrigerated liquid 3 F see 4.3.3.2.4
1967 Insecticide gas, toxic, n.o.s.a 2 T see 4.3.3.2.2 or 4.3.3.2.3
1968 Insecticide gas, n.o.s. 2 A see 4.3.3.2.2 or 4.3.3.2.3
1969 Isobutane 2 F 1 10 1 10 0.49
1970 Krypton, refrigerated liquid 3 A see 4.3.3.2.4
1971 Methane, compressed or natural gas,
compressed with high methane content
1 F see 4.3.3.2.1
1972 Methane, refrigerated liquid or natural
gas, refrigerated liquid with high
methane content
3 F see 4.3.3.2.4
1973 Chlorodifluoromethane and
chloropentafluoroethane mixture with
fixed boiling point, with approximately
49 % chlorodifluoromethane
(Refrigerant gas R502)
2 A 2.5 25 2.8 28 1.05
1974 Chlorodifluorobromomethane
(Refrigerant gas R12B1)
2 A 1 10 1 10 1.61
1976 Octafluorocyclobutane (Refrigerant gas
RC318)
2 A 1 10 1 10 1.34
1977 Nitrogen, refrigerated liquid 3 A see 4.3.3.2.4
1978 Propane 2 F 2.1 21 2.3 23 0.42
1982 Tetrafluoromethane (Refrigerant gas
R14)
2 A 20 200 20 200 0.62
30 300 30 300 0.94
1983 1-chloro-2,2,2-trifluoroethane
(Refrigerant gas R133a)
2 A 1 10 1 10 1.18
1984 Trifluoromethane (Refrigerant gas R23) 2 A 19 190 0.92
25 250 0.99
19 190 0.87
25 250 0.95
2034 Hydrogen and methane mixture,
compressed
1 F see 4.3.3.2.1
2035 1,1,1-trifluoroethane
(Refrigerant gas R143a)
2 F 2.8 28 3.2 32 0.79
2036 Xenon 2 A 12 120 1.30
– 198 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 199 –
UN
No.
Name Classification
code
Minimum test pressure for tanks Maximum
permissible mass
of contents per
litre of capacity
With thermal
insulation
Without
thermal
insulation
MPa bar MPa bar kg
13 130 1.24
2044 2,2-dimethylpropane 2 F 1 10 1 10 0.53
2073 Ammonia solutions, relative density less
than 0.880 at 15 °C in water:
4 A
with more than 35 % and not more than
40 % ammonia
4 A 1 10 1 10 0.80
with more than 40 % and not more than
50 % ammonia
4 A 1.2 12 1.2 12 0.77
2187 Carbon dioxide, refrigerated liquid 3 A see 4.3.3.2.4
2189 Dichlorosilane 2 TFC 1 10 1 10 0.90
2191 Sulfuryl fluoride 2 T 5 50 5 50 1.1
2193 Hexafluoroethane
(Refrigerant gas R116)
2 A 16 160 1.28
20 200 1.34
20 200 1.10
2197 Hydrogen iodide, anhydrous 2 TC 1.9 19 2.1 21 2.25
2200 Propadiene, stabilized 2 F 1.8 18 2.0 20 0.50
2201 Nitrous oxide, refrigerated liquid 3 O see 4.3.3.2.4
2203 Silaneb 2 F 22.5 225 22.5 225 0.32
25 250 25 250 0.36
2204 Carbonyl sulphide 2 TF 2.7 27 3.0 30 0.84
2417 Carbonyl fluoride 2 TC 20 200 20 200 0.47
30 300 30 300 0.70
2419 Bromotrifluoroethylene 2 F 1 10 1 10 1.19
2420 Hexafluoroacetone 2 TC 1.6 16 1.8 18 1.08
2422 Octafluorobut-2-ene
(Refrigerant gas R1318)
2 A 1 10 1 10 1.34
2424 Octafluoropropane
(Refrigerant gas R218)
2 A 2.1 21 2.3 23 1.07
2451 Nitrogen trifluoride 2 O 20 200 20 200 0.50
30 300 30 300 0.75
2452 Ethylacetylene, stabilized 2 F 1 10 1 10 0.57
2453 Ethyl fluoride
(Refrigerant gas R161)
2 F 2.1 21 2.5 25 0.57
2454 Methyl fluoride
(Refrigerant gas R41)
2 F 30 300 30 300 0.36
2517 1-chloro-1,1-difluoroethane
(Refrigerant gas R142b)
2 F 1 10 1 10 0.99
2591 Xenon, refrigerated liquid 3 A see 4.3.3.2.4
2599 Chlorotrifluoromethane and
trifluoromethane, azeotropic mixture
with approximately
60 % chlorotrifluoromethane
(Refrigerant gas R503)
2 A 3.1 31 3.1 31 0.11
4.2 42 0.21
10 100 0.76
4.2 42 0.20
10 100 0.66
2601 Cyclobutane 2 F 1 10 1 10 0.63
2602 Dichlorodifluoromethane and
difluoro-1,1 ethane, azeotropic
mixture with approximately
74 % dichlorodifluoromethane
(Refrigerant gas R500)
2 A 1.8 18 2 20 1.01
2901 Bromine chloride 2 TOC 1 10 1 10 1.50
3057 Trifluoroacetyl chloride 2 TC 1.3 13 1.5 15 1.17
3070 Ethylene oxide and
dichlorodifluoromethane mixture with
not more than 12.5 % ethylene oxide
2 A 1.5 15 1.6 16 1.09
b Considered as pyrophoric.
– 199 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 200 –
UN
No.
Name Classification
code
Minimum test pressure for tanks Maximum
permissible mass
of contents per
litre of capacity
With thermal
insulation
Without
thermal
insulation
MPa bar MPa bar kg
3083 Perchloryl fluoride 2 TO 2.7 27 3.0 30 1.21
3136 Trifluoromethane, refigerated liquid 3 A See 4.3.3.2.4
3138 Ethylene, acetylene propylene in
mixture, refrigerated liquid, containing
at least 71.5 % ethylene with not more
than 22.5 % acetylene and not more
than 6 % propylene
3 F see 4.3.3.2.4
3153 Perfluoro(methyl vinyl ether) 2 F 1.4 14 1.5 15 1.14
3154 Perfluoro(ethyl vinyl ether) 2 F 1 10 1 10 0.98
3156 Compressed gas, oxidizing, n.o.s. 1 O see 4.3.3.2.1 or 4.3.3.2.2
3157 Liquefied gas, oxidizing, n.o.s. 2 O see 4.3.3.2.2 or 4.3.3.2.3
3158 Gas, refrigerated liquid, n.o.s. 3 A see 4.3.3.2.4
3159 1,1,1,2-tetrafluoroethane (Refrigerant
gas R134a)
2 A 1.6 16 1.8 18 1.04
3160 Liquefied gas, toxic, flammable, n.o.s.a 2 TF see 4.3.3.2.2 or 4.3.3.2.3
3161 Liquefied gas, flammable, n.o.s. 2 F see 4.3.3.2.2 or 4.3.3.2.3
3162 Liquefied gas, toxic, n.o.s.a 2 T see 4.3.3.2.2 or 4.3.3.2.3
3163 Liquefied gas, n.o.s. 2 A see 4.3.3.2.2 or 4.3.3.2.3
3220 Pentafluoroethane
(Refrigerant gas R125)
2 A 4.1 41 4.9 49 0.95
3252 Difluoromethane
(Refrigerant gas R32)
2 F 3.9 39 4.3 43 0.78
3296 Heptafluoropropane
(Refrigerant gas R227)
2 A 1.4 14 1.6 16 1.20
3297 Ethylene oxide and
chlorotetrafluoroethane mixture, with
not more than 8.8 % ethylene oxide
2 A 1 10 1 10 1.16
3298 Ethylene oxide and pentafluoroethane
mixture, with not more than 7.9 %
ethylene oxide
2 A 2.4 24 2.6 26 1.02
3299 Ethylene oxide and tetrafluoroethane
mixture, with not more than 5.6 %
ethylene oxide
2 A 1.5 15 1.7 17 1.03
3300 Ethylene oxide and carbon dioxide
mixture, with more than 87 % ethylene
oxide
2 TF 2.8 28 2.8 28 0.73
3303 Compressed gas, toxic, oxidizing, n.o.s.a 1 TO see 4.3.3.2.1 or 4.3.3.2.2
3304 Compressed gas, toxic, corrosive, n.o.s.a 1 TC see 4.3.3.2.1 or 4.3.3.2.2
3305 Compressed gas, toxic, flammable,
corrosive, n.o.s.a
1 TFC see 4.3.3.2.1 or 4.3.3.2.2
3306 Compressed gas, toxic, oxidizing,
corrosive, n.o.s. a
1 TOC see 4.3.3.2.1 or 4.3.3.2.2
3307 Liquefied gas, toxic, oxidizing, n.o.s.a 2 TO see 4.3.3.2.2 or 4.3.3.2.3
3308 Liquefied gas, toxic, corrosive, n.o.s.a 2 TC see 4.3.3.2.2 or 4.3.3.2.3
3309 Liquefied gas, toxic, flammable,
corrosive, n.o.s.a
2 TFC see 4.3.3.2.2 or 4.3.3.2.3
3310 Liquefied gas, toxic, oxidizing,
corrosive, n.o.s.a
2 TOC see 4.3.3.2.2 or 4.3.3.2.3
3311 Gas, refrigerated liquid, oxidizing, n.o.s. 3 O see 4.3.3.2.4
3312 Gas, refrigerated liquid, flammable,
n.o.s.
3 F see 4.3.3.2.4
3318 Ammonia solutions, relative density less
than 0.880 at 15 °C in water, with more
than 50 % ammonia
4 TC see 4.3.3.2.2
3337 Refrigerant gas R404A 2 A 2.9 29 3.2 32 0.84
a Allowed if LC₅₀ equal to or greater than 200 ppm.
– 200 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 201 –
UN
No.
Name Classification
code
Minimum test pressure for tanks Maximum
permissible mass
of contents per
litre of capacity
With thermal
insulation
Without
thermal
insulation
MPa bar MPa bar kg
3338 Refrigerant gas R407A 2 A 2.8 28 3.2 32 0.95
3339 Refrigerant gas R407B 2 A 3.0 30 3.3 33 0.95
3340 Refrigerant gas R407C 2 A 2.7 27 3.0 30 0.95
3354 Insecticide gas, flammable, n.o.s. 2 F see 4.3.3.2.2 or 4.3.3.2.3
3355 Insecticide gas, toxic, flammable, n.o.s.a 2 TF see 4.3.3.2.2 or 4.3.3.2.3
a Allowed if LC₅₀ equal to or greater than 200 ppm.
4.3.3.3 Operation
4.3.3.3.1 When tanks, battery-vehicles or MEGCs are approved for different gases, the change of use shall include
emptying, purging and evacuation operations to the extent necessary for safe operation.
4.3.3.3.2 (Deleted)
4.3.3.3.3 All the elements of a battery-vehicle or MEGC shall contain only one and the same gas.
4.3.3.3.4 When the external overpressure could be greater than the tank resistance to external pressure (e.g. due
to low ambient temperatures), adequate measures shall be taken to protect tanks carrying low pressure
liquefied gases against the risk of deformation, e.g. by filling them with nitrogen or another inert gas in
order to maintain sufficient pressure inside the tank.
4.3.3.4 (Reserved)
4.3.3.5 The actual holding time shall be determined for each
journey of a tank-container carrying a refrigerated
liquefied gas on the basis of the following:
(a) The reference holding time for the refrigerated
liquefied gas to be carried (see 6.8.3.4.10) as
indicated on the plate referred to in 6.8.3.5.4;
(b) The actual filling density;
(c) The actual filling pressure;
(d) The lowest set pressure of the pressure limiting
device(s);
(e) The deterioration of the insulation4.
NOTE: ISO 21014:2006 ‘Cryogenic vessels –
Cryogenic insulation performance’ details methods of
determining the insulation performance of cryogenic
vessels and provides a method of calculating the
holding time.
The date at which the actual holding time ends shall be
entered in the transport document (see 5.4.1.2.2. (d)).
4 Guidance is provided in the European Industrial Gases Association (EIGA) document “Methods to prevent the
premature activation of relief devices on tanks” available at www.eiga.eu.
– 201 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 202 –
4.3.3.6 Tank-containers shall not be offered for carriage:
(a) In an ullage condition liable to produce an
unacceptable hydraulic force due to surge within
the shell;
(b) When leaking;
(c) When damaged to such an extent that the integrity
of the tank-container or its lifting or securing
arrangements may be affected;
(d) Unless the service equipment has been examined
and found to be in good working order;
(e) Unless the actual holding time for the refrigerated
liquefied gas being carried has been determined;
(f) Unless the duration of carriage, after taking into
consideration any delays which might be
encountered, does not exceed the actual holding
time;
(g) Unless the pressure is steady and has been lowered
to a level such that the actual holding time may be
achieved4.
4.3.4 Special provisions applicable to Classes 1 and 3 to 9
4.3.4.1 Coding, rationalized approach and hierarchy of tanks
4.3.4.1.1 Coding of tanks
The four parts of the codes (tank codes) given in Column (12) of Table A in Chapter 3.2 have the
following meanings:
Part Description Tank code
1 Types of tank L = tank for substances in the liquid state (liquids or solids
handed over for carriage in the molten state);
S = tank for substances in the solid state (powdery or granular).
2 Calculation pressure G = minimum calculation pressure according to the general
requirements of 6.8.2.1.14; or
1.5; 2.65; 4; 10; 15 or 21 = minimum calculation pressure in bar
(see 6.8.2.1.14).
3 Openings
(see 6.8.2.2.2)
A = tank with bottom-filling or bottom-discharge openings with
2 closures;
B = tank with bottom-filling or bottom-discharge openings with
3 closures;
C = tank with top-filling and discharge openings with only
cleaning openings below the surface of the liquid;
D = tank with top-filling and discharge openings with no
openings below the surface of the liquid.
4 Guidance is provided in the European Industrial Gases Association (EIGA) document “Methods to prevent the
premature activation of relief devices on tanks” available at www.eiga.eu.
– 202 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 203 –
Part Description Tank code
4 Safety
valves/devices
V = tank with a breather device, according to 6.8.2.2.6, but no
device protecting against the propagation of a flame; or
non-explosion pressure shock resistant tank ;
F = tank with a breather device, according to 6.8.2.2.6, fitted
with a device protecting against the propagation of a flame;
or
explosion pressure shock resistant tank ;
N = tank without a breather device according to 6.8.2.2.6 and not
hermetically closed;
H = hermetically closed tank (see 1.2.1).
4.3.4.1.2 Rationalized approach for assignment of ADR tank codes to groups of substances and hierarchy of
tanks
NOTE: Certain substances and groups of substances are not included in the rationalized approach,
see 4.3.4.1.3.
Rationalized approach
Tank code Group of permitted substances
Class Classification code Packing group
LIQUIDS
LGAV 3 F2 III
9 M9 III
LGBV 4.1 F2 II, III
5.1 O1 III
9 M6 III
M11 III
and groups of permitted substances for tank code LGAV
LGBF 3 F1 II
vapour pressure at 50 °C ≤ 1.1 bar
F1 III
D II
vapour pressure at 50 °C ≤ 1.1 bar
D III
and groups of permitted substances for tank codes LGAV and LGBV
L1.5BN 3 F1 II
vapour pressure at 50 °C > 1.1 bar
F1 III
flash-point < 23 °C, viscous,
vapour pressure at 50 °C > 1.1 bar
boiling point > 35 °C
D II
vapour pressure at 50 °C > 1.1 bar
and groups of permitted substances for tank codes LGAV, LGBV and LGBF
– 203 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 204 –
Tank code Group of permitted substances
Class Classification code Packing group
L4BN 3 F1 I,
III boiling point ≤ 35 °C
FC III
D I
5.1 O1 I, II
OT1 I
8 C1 II, III
C3 II, III
C4 II, III
C5 II, III
C7 II, III
C8 II, III
C9 II, III
C10 II, III
CF1 II
CF2 II
CS1 II
CW1 II
CW2 II
CO1 II
CO2 II
CT1 II, III
CT2 II, III
CFT II
9 M11 III
and groups of permitted substances for tank codes LGAV, LGBV, LGBF and L1.5BN
L4BH 3 FT1 II, III
FT2 II
FC II
FTC II
6.1 T1 II, III
T2 II, III
T3 II, III
T4 II, III
T5 II, III
T6 II, III
T7 II, III
TF1 II
TF2 II, III
TF3 II
TS II
TW1 II
TW2 II
TO1 II
TO2 II
TC1 II
TC2 II
TC3 II
TC4 II
TFC II
6.2 I3 II
I4
9 M2 II
and groups of permitted substances for tank codes LGAV, LGBV, LGBF, L1.5BN and L4BN
L4DH 4.2 S1 II, III
S3 II, III
ST1 II, III
ST3 II, III
SC1 II, III
SC3 II, III
4.3 W1 II, III
WF1 II, III
WT1 II, III
WC1 II, III
8 CT1 II, III
and groups of permitted substances for tank codes LGAV, LGBV, LGBF, L1.5BN, L4BN and L4BH
– 204 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 205 –
Tank code Group of permitted substances
Class Classification code Packing group
L10BH 8 C1 I
C3 I
C4 I
C5 I
C7 I
C8 I
C9 I
C10 I
CF1 I
СF2 I
CS1 I
СW1 I
СW2 I
CO1 I
CO2 I
CT1 I
CT2 I
COT I
and groups of permitted substances for tank codes LGAV, LGBV, LGBF, L1.5BN, L4BN, and L4BH
L10CH 3 FT1 I
FT2 I
FC I
FTC I
6.1* T1 I
T2 I
T3 I
T4 I
T5 I
T6 I
T7 I
TF1 I
TF2 I
TF3 I
TS I
TW1 I
TO1 I
TC1 I
TC2 I
TC3 I
TC4 I
TFC I
TFW I
and groups of permitted substances for tank codes LGAV, LGBV, LGBF, L1.5BN, L4BN, L4BH, and L10BH
* Substances with an LC₅₀ lower than or equal to 200 ml/m³ and saturated vapour concentration greater than or
equal to 500 LC₅₀ shall be assigned to tank code L15CH.
L10DH 4.3 W1 I
WF1 I
WT1 I
WC1 I
WFC I
5.1 OTC I
8 CT1 I
and groups of permitted substances for tank codes LGAV, LGBV, LGBF, L1.5BN, L4BN, L4BH, L4DH, L10BH
and L10CH
– 205 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 206 –
Tank code Group of permitted substances
Class Classification code Packing group
L15CH 3 FT1 I
6.1** T1 I
T4 I
TF1 I
TW1 I
TO1 I
TC1 I
TC3 I
TFC I
TFW I
and groups of permitted substances for tank codes LGAV, LGBV, LGBF, L1.5BN, L4BN, L4BH, L10BH and
L10CH
** Substances with an LC₅₀ lower than or equal to 200 ml/m³ and saturated vapour concentration greater than or
equal to 500 LC₅₀ shall be assigned to this tank code.
L21DH 4.2 S1 I
S3 I
SW I
ST3 I
and groups of permitted substances for tank codes LGAV, LGBV, LGBF, L1.5BN, L4BN, L4BH, L4DH, L10BH,
L10CH, L10DH and L15CH
SOLIDS
SGAV 4.1 F1 III
F3 III
4.2 S2 II, III
S4 III
5.1 O2 II, III
8 C2 II, III
C4 III
C6 III
C8 III
C10 II, III
СT2 III
9 M7 III
M11 II, III
SGAN 4.1 F1 II
F3 II
FT1 II, III
FT2 II, III
FC1 II, III
FC2 II, III
4.2 S2 II
S4 II, III
ST2 II, III
ST4 II, III
SC2 II, III
SC4 II, III
4.3 W2 II, III
WF2 II
WS II, III
WT2 II, III
WC2 II, III
5.1 O2 II, III
OT2 II, III
OC2 II, III
8 C2 II
С4 II
С6 II
С8 II
С10 II
CF2 II
CS2 II
CW2 II
CO2 II
CT2 II
9 M3 III
and groups of permitted substances for tank codes SGAV
– 206 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 207 –
Tank code Group of permitted substances
Class Classification code Packing group
SGAH 6.1 T2 II, III
T3 II, III
T5 II, III
T7 II, III
T9 II
TF3 II
TS II
TW2 II
TO2 II
TC2 II
TC4 II
9 M1 II, III
and groups of permitted substances for tanks codes SGAV and SGAN
S4AH 6.2 I3 II
9 M2 II
and groups of permitted substances for tanks codes SGAV, SGAN and SGAH
S10AN 8 C2 I
C4 I
C6 I
C8 I
C10 I
CF2 I
CS2 I
CW2 I
CO2 I
CT2 I
and groups of permitted substances for tank codes SGAV and SGAN
S10AH 6.1 T2 I
T3 I
T5 I
T7 I
TS I
TW2 I
TO2 I
TC2 I
TC4 I
and groups of permitted substances for tank codes SGAV, SGAN, SGAH and S10AN
Hierarchy of tanks
Tanks with tank codes different from those indicated in this table or in Table A of Chapter 3.2 may also
be used provided that any element (number or letter) of parts 1 to 4 of these tank codes correspond to a
level of safety at least equivalent to the corresponding element of the tank code indicated in Table A of
Chapter 3.2, according to the following increasing order:
Part 1: Types of tanks
S  L
Part 2: Calculation pressure
G  1.5  2.65  4  10  15  21 bar
Part 3: Openings
A  B  C  D
Part 4: Safety valves/devices
V  F  N  H
For example:
– A tank with the tank code L10CN is authorized for the carriage of a substance to which the tank
code L4BN has been assigned;
– 207 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 208 –
– A tank with the tank code L4BN is authorized for the carriage of a substance to which the tank
code SGAN has been assigned.
NOTE: The hierarchy does not take account of any special provisions for each entry (see 4.3.5 and
6.8.4).
4.3.4.1.3 The following substances and groups of substances in respect of which a “(+)” is given after the tank
code in Column (12) of Table A in Chapter 3.2 are subject to special provisions. In that case the alternate
use of the tanks for other substances and groups of substances is permitted only where this is specified
in the certificate of type approval. Higher value tanks according to the provisions at the end of the table
in 4.3.4.1.2 may be used with due regard to the special provisions indicated in Column (13) of Table A
in Chapter 3.2. The requirements for these tanks are given by the following tank codes supplemented
by the relevant special provisions indicated in column (13) of table A in Chapter 3.2.
Class UN No. Name and description Tank code
1 0331 Explosive, blasting, Type B S2.65AN
4.1 2448 Sulphur, molten LGBV
3531 Polymerizing substance, solid, stabilized, N.O.S. SGAN
3533 Polymerizing substance, solid, temperature controlled, N.O.S
3532 Polymerizing substance, liquid, stabilized, N.O.S L4BN
3534 Polymerizing substance, liquid, temperature controlled, N.O.S.
4.2 1381 Phosphorus, white or yellow, dry, under water or in solution L10DH
2447 Phosphorus, white, molten
4.3 1389 Alkali metal amalgam, liquid
L10BN
1391 Alkali metal dispersion or Alkaline earth metal dispersion
1392 Alkaline earth metal amalgam, liquid
1415 Lithium
1420 Potassium metal alloys, liquid
1421 Alkali metal alloy, liquid, N.O.S.
1422 Potassium sodium alloys, liquid
1428 Sodium
2257 Potassium
3401 Alkali metal amalgam, solid
3402 Alkaline earth metal amalgam, solid
3403 Potassium metal alloys, solid
3404 Potassium sodium alloys, solid
3482 Alkali metal dispersion, flammable or Alkaline earth metal dispersion,
flammable
1407 Caesium L10CH
1423 Rubidium
1402 Calcium carbide, packing group I S2.65AN
5.1 1873 Perchloric acid with more than 50 % but not more than 72 % acid, by mass L4DN
2015 Hydrogen peroxide, aqueous solution, stabilized with more than 70 %
hydrogen peroxide L4DV
2014 Hydrogen peroxide, aqueous solution with not less than 20 % but not more
than 60 % hydrogen peroxide
L4BV
2015 Hydrogen peroxide, aqueous solution, stabilized with more than 60 %
hydrogen peroxide and not more than 70 % hydrogen peroxide
2426 Ammonium nitrate, liquid (hot concentrated solution)
3149 Hydrogen peroxide and peroxyacetic acid mixture, stabilized
3375 Ammonium nitrate emulsion, suspension or gel, intermediate for blasting
explosives, liquid LGAV
3375 Ammonium nitrate emulsion, suspension or gel, intermediate for blasting
explosives, solid SGAV
5.2 3109 Organic peroxide, type F, liquid L4BN
3119 Organic peroxide, type F, liquid, temperature controlled
3110 Organic peroxide, type F, Solid S4AN
3120 Organic peroxide, type F, solid, temperature controlled
6.1 1613 Hydrogen cyanide, aqueous solution L15DH
3294 Hydrogen cyanide solution in alcohol
– 208 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 209 –
Class UN No. Name and description Tank code
7 a All substances special tanks
Minimum requirement for liquids L2.65CN
Minimum requirement for solids S2.65AN
8 1052 Hydrogen fluoride, anhydrous
L21DH1744 Bromine or bromine solution
1790 Hydrofluoric acid with more than 85 % hydrogen fluoride
1791 Hypochlorite solution L4BV
1908 Chlorite solution
a Notwithstanding the general requirements of this paragraph, tanks used for radioactive material may also
be used for the carriage of other goods provided the requirements of 5.1.3.2 are complied with.
4.3.4.1.4 Tanks intended for the carriage of liquid wastes complying with the requirements of Chapter 6.10 and
equipped with two closures in accordance with 6.10.3.2, shall be assigned to tank code L4AH. If the
tanks concerned are equipped for the alternate carriage of liquid and solid substances, they shall be
assigned to the combined codes L4AH+S4AH.
4.3.4.2 General provisions
4.3.4.2.1 Where hot substances are loaded, the temperature of the outer surface of the tank or of the thermal
insulation shall not exceed 70 °C during carriage.
4.3.4.2.2 The connecting pipes between independent but
interconnected tanks of a transport unit shall be empty
during carriage. Flexible filling and discharge pipes
which are not permanently connected to the tank shall
be empty during carriage.
4.3.4.2.3 (Reserved)
4.3.5 Special provisions
When they are shown under an entry in Column (13) of Table of A in Chapter 3.2, the following special
provisions apply:
TU1 The tanks shall not be handed over for carriage until the substance has solidified completely
and been covered by an inert gas. Uncleaned empty tanks which have contained these
substances shall be filled with an inert gas.
TU2 The substance shall be covered by an inert gas. Uncleaned empty tanks which have contained
these substances shall be filled with an inert gas.
TU3 The inside of the shell and all parts liable to come into contact with the substance shall be
kept clean. No lubricant capable of combining dangerously with the substance shall be used
for pumps, valves or other devices.
TU4 During carriage, these substances shall be under a layer of inert gas, the gauge pressure of
which shall not be less than 50 kPa (0.5 bar).
Uncleaned empty tanks which have contained these substances shall when handed over for
carriage be filled with an inert gas at a gauge pressure of at least 50 kPa (0.5 bar).
TU5 (Reserved)
TU6 Not authorized for carriage in tanks, battery-vehicles and MEGCs when having a LC₅₀ lower
than 200 ppm.
TU7 The materials used to ensure leakproofness of the joints or for the maintenance of the closures
shall be compatible with the contents.
TU8 An aluminium-alloy tank shall not be used for carriage unless the tank is reserved solely for
such carriage and the acetaldehyde is free from acid.
– 209 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 210 –
TU9 UN No.1203 petrol (gasoline) with a vapour pressure at 50 °C of more than 110 kPa (1.1 bar)
but not above 150 kPa (1.5 bar) may also be carried in tanks designed according to 6.8.2.1.14
(a) and having equipment conforming to 6.8.2.2.6.
TU10 (Reserved)
TU11 During filling, the temperature of this substance shall not exceed 60 °C. A maximum filling
temperature of 80 °C is allowed provided that smoulder spots are prevented and that the
following conditions are met. After filling, the tanks shall be pressurized (e.g. with
compressed air) to check tightness. It shall be ensured that no depressurization takes place
during carriage. Before discharge, it shall be checked if pressure in the tanks is still above
atmospheric. If this is not the case, an inert gas shall be introduced into the tanks prior to
discharge.
TU12 In the event of a change of use, shells and equipment shall be thoroughly cleansed of all
residues before and after the carriage of this substance.
TU13 Tanks shall be free from impurities at the time of filling. Service equipment such as valves
and external piping shall be emptied after filling or discharging.
TU14 The protective caps of closures shall be locked during carriage.
TU15 Tanks shall not be used for the carriage of foodstuffs, articles of consumption or animal feeds.
TU16 When handed over for carriage, uncleaned empty tanks shall be filled with a protective agent
fulfilling one of the following measures:
Protective
agent
Degree of filling
of water
Additional requirements for carriage at low
ambient temperatures
Nitrogena –
Water and
nitrogena

Water not less than
96 % and not
more than 98 %
The water shall contain sufficient anti-freeze agent
to prevent it from freezing. The anti-freeze agent
shall be free from corrosive action and not liable to
react with the substance.
a The tank shall be filled with nitrogen in such a way that, even after cooling, the pressure
at no time falls below atmospheric pressure. The tank shall be closed in such a way that no
leakage of gas occurs.
TU17 Only to be carried in battery-vehicles or MEGCs the elements of which are composed of
receptacles.
TU18 The degree of filling shall remain below the level at which, if the contents were raised to a
temperature at which the vapour pressure equalled the opening pressure of the safety valve,
the volume of the liquid would reach 95 % of the tank’s capacity at that temperature. The
provision in 4.3.2.3.4 shall not apply.
TU19 Tanks may be filled to 98 % at the filling temperature and pressure. The provision in 4.3.2.3.4
shall not apply.
TU20 (Reserved)
– 210 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 211 –
TU21 The substance shall be protected by a protective agent in the following ways:
Protective
agent
A layer
of water
in the
tank
Degree of filling of
the substance
(including water if
any) at a
temperature of
60° C shall not
exceed
Additional requirements for carriage at
low ambient temperatures
Nitrogena – 96 % –
Water and
nitrogena
– 98 % The water shall contain sufficient anti-
freeze agent to prevent it from freezing. The
anti-freeze agent shall be free from
corrosive action and not liable to react with
the substance.
Water not less
than
12 cm
98 %
a The remaining space of the tank shall be filled with nitrogen in such a way that, even after cooling,
the pressure at no time falls below atmospheric pressure. The tank shall be closed in such a way that
no leakage of gas occurs.
TU22 Tanks shall be filled to not more than 90 % of their capacity; for liquids, a space of 5 % shall
remain empty when the liquid is at an average temperature of 50 °C.
TU23 The degree of filling shall not exceed 0.93 kg per litre of capacity, if filling is by mass. If
filling is by volume, the degree of filling shall not exceed 85 %.
TU24 The degree of filling shall not exceed 0.95 kg per litre of capacity, if filling is by mass. If
filling is by volume, the degree of filling shall not exceed 85 %.
TU25 The degree of filling shall not exceed 1.14 kg per litre of capacity, if filling is by mass. If
filling is by volume, the degree of filling shall not exceed 85 %.
TU26 The degree of filling shall not exceed 85 %.
TU27 Tanks shall not be filled to more than 98 % of their capacity.
TU28 Tanks shall be filled to not more than 95 % of their capacity at a reference temperature of
15 °C.
TU29 Tanks shall be filled to not more than 97 % of their capacity and the maximum temperature
after filling shall not exceed 140 °C.
TU30 Tanks shall be filled as set out in the test report for the type approval of the tank but shall be
filled to not more than 90 % of their capacity.
TU31 Tanks shall not be filled to more than 1 kg per litre of capacity.
TU32 Tanks shall not be filled to more than 88 % of their capacity.
TU33 Tanks shall be filled to not less than 88 % and not more than 92 % of their capacity or to 2.86
kg per litre of capacity.
TU34 Tanks shall not be filled to more than 0.84 kg per litre of capacity.
TU35 Empty fixed tanks (tank-vehicles), empty demountable tanks and empty tank-containers,
uncleaned, which have contained these substances are not subject to the requirements of ADR
if adequate measures have been taken to nullify any hazard.
TU36 The degree of filling according to 4.3.2.2, at the reference temperature of 15 °C, shall not
exceed 93 % of the capacity.
TU37 Carriage in tanks is limited to substances containing pathogens which are unlikely to be a
serious hazard, and for which, while capable of causing serious infection on exposure,
effective treatment and preventive measures are available and the risk of spread of infection
is limited (i.e. moderate individual risk and low community risk).
– 211 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 212 –
TU38 (Reserved)
TU39 The suitability of the substance for carriage in tanks shall be demonstrated. The method to
evaluate this suitability shall be approved by the competent authority. One method is test 8(d)
in Test Series 8 (see Manual of Tests and Criteria, Part 1, sub-section 18.7).
Substances shall not be allowed to remain in the tank for any period that could result in
caking. Appropriate measures shall be taken to avoid accumulation and packing of substances
in the tank (e.g. cleaning etc.).
TU40 Only to be carried in battery-vehicles or MEGCs, the elements of which are composed of
seamless receptacles.
TU41 The suitability of the substance for carriage in tanks shall be demonstrated to the satisfaction
of the competent authority of every country through or into which the carriage is performed.
The method to evaluate this suitability shall be approved by the competent authority of any
ADR Contracting Party who may also recognize an approval granted by the competent
authority of a country which is not an ADR Contracting Party provided that this approval has
been granted in accordance with the procedures applicable according to ADR, RID, ADN or
the IMDG Code.
Substances shall not be allowed to remain in the tank for any period that could result in
caking. Appropriate measures shall be taken to avoid accumulation and packing of substances
in the tank (e.g. cleaning etc.).
TU42 Tanks with a shell constructed of aluminium alloy, including those with a protective lining,
shall only be used if the pH value of the substance is not less than 5.0 and not more than 8.0.
TU43 An empty uncleaned tank may be offered for carriage after the date of expiry of the last
inspection of the lining for a period not to exceed three months beyond this date for the
purposes of performing the next inspection of the lining prior to refilling (see special
provision TT2 in 6.8.4 (d)).
– 212 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 213 –
CHAPTER 4.4
USE OF FIBRE-REINFORCED PLASTICS (FRP) TANKS, FIXED TANKS
(TANK-VEHICLES), DEMOUNTABLE TANKS, TANK-CONTAINERS
AND TANK SWAP BODIES
NOTE: For portable tanks and UN multiple-element gas containers (MEGCs), see Chapter 4.2; for fixed tanks (tank-
vehicles), demountable tanks, tank-containers and tank swap bodies, with shells made of metallic materials, and battery-
vehicles and multiple elements gas containers (MEGCs) other than UN MEGCs, see Chapter 4.3; for vacuum operated
waste containers, see Chapter 4.5.
4.4.1 General
The carriage of dangerous substances in fibre-reinforced plastics (FRP) tanks is permitted only when
the following conditions are met:
(a) The substance is classified in Class 3, 5.1, 6.1, 6.2, 8 or 9;
(b) The maximum vapour pressure (absolute pressure) at 50 °C of the substance does not exceed
110 kPa (1.1 bar);
(c) The carriage of the substance in metallic tanks is authorized according to 4.3.2.1.1;
(d) The calculation pressure specified for that substance in part 2 of the tank code given in Column
(12) of Table A in Chapter 3.2 does not exceed 4 bar (see also 4.3.4.1.1); and
(e) The tank complies with the provisions of Chapter 6.13 applicable for the carriage of the
substance.
4.4.2 Operation
4.4.2.1 The provisions of 4.3.2.1.5 to 4.3.2.2.4, 4.3.2.3.3 to 4.3.2.3.6, 4.3.2.4.1, 4.3.2.4.2, 4.3.4.1 and 4.3.4.2
shall apply.
4.4.2.2 The temperature of the substance carried shall not exceed, at the time of filling, the maximum service
temperature indicated on the tank plate referred to in 6.13.6.
4.4.2.3 When applicable to carriage in metallic tanks, the special provisions (TU) of 4.3.5 shall also apply, as
indicated in Column (13) of Table A in Chapter 3.2.
– 213 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 215 –
CHAPTER 4.5
USE OF VACUUM OPERATED WASTE TANKS
NOTE: For portable tanks and UN multiple-element gas containers (MEGCs), see Chapter 4.2; for fixed tanks (tank-
vehicles), demountable tanks, tank-containers and tank swap bodies, with shells made of metallic materials, and battery-
vehicles and multiple elements gas containers (MEGCs) other than UN MEGCs, see Chapter 4.3; for fibre reinforced
plastics tanks, see Chapter 4.4.
4.5.1 Use
4.5.1.1 Wastes consisting of substances in Classes 3, 4.1, 5.1, 6.1, 6.2, 8 and 9 may be carried in vacuum-
operated waste tanks conforming to Chapter 6.10 if their carriage in fixed tanks, demountable tanks,
tank-containers or tank swap bodies is permitted according to Chapter 4.3. Wastes consisting of
substances assigned to tank code L4BH in Column (12) of Table A of Chapter 3.2 or to another tank
code permitted under the hierarchy in 4.3.4.1.2 may be carried in vacuum operated waste tanks with the
letter “A” or “B” in part 3 of the tank code, as indicated in No. 9.5 of the vehicle approval certificate
conforming to 9.1.3.5.
4.5.1.2 Non waste substances may be carried in vacuum-operated waste tanks under the same conditions as
mentioned under 4.5.1.1.
4.5.2 Operation
4.5.2.1 The provisions of Chapter 4.3 except those of 4.3.2.2.4 and 4.3.2.3.3 apply to the carriage in vacuum
operated waste tanks and are supplemented by the provisions of 4.5.2.2 to 4.5.2.6 below.
4.5.2.2 For carriage of liquids meeting the flash point criteria of Class 3, vacuum-operated waste tanks shall be
filled through filling devices which discharge into the tank at a low level. Measures shall be taken to
minimize the production of spray.
4.5.2.3 When discharging flammable liquids with a flash-point below 23 °C by using air pressure, the
maximum allowed pressure is 100 kPa (1 bar).
4.5.2.4 The use of tanks fitted with an internal piston operating as a compartment wall is allowed only when
the substances on either side of the wall (piston) do not react dangerously with each other (see 4.3.2.3.6).
4.5.2.5 (Reserved)
4.5.2.6 When a vacuum pump/exhauster unit which may provide a source of ignition is used to fill or discharge
flammable liquids, precautions shall be taken to avoid ignition of the substance or to avoid the
propagation of the effects of the ignition outside the tank itself.
– 215 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 217 –
CHAPTER 4.6
(Reserved)
– 217 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 219 –
CHAPTER 4.7
USE OF MOBILE EXPLOSIVES MANUFACTURING UNITS (MEMUs)
NOTE 1: For packagings, see Chapter 4.1; for portable tanks, see Chapter 4.2; for fixed tanks (tank vehicles),
demountable tanks, tank-containers and tank swap bodies with shells made of metallic materials, see Chapter 4.3; for
fibre-reinforced plastics (FRP) tanks, see Chapter 4.4; for vacuum operated waste tanks, see Chapter 4.5.
NOTE 2: For requirements concerning construction, equipment, type approval, inspections and tests and marking, see
Chapters 6.7, 6.8, 6.9, 6.11, 6.12 and 6.13.
4.7.1 Use
4.7.1.1 Substances of Classes 3, 5.1, 6.1 and 8 may be carried on MEMUs conforming to Chapter 6.12, in
portable tanks if their carriage is permitted according to Chapter 4.2; or in fixed tanks, demountable
tanks, tank containers or tank swap bodies if their carriage is permitted according to Chapter 4.3; or in
fibre-reinforced plastics (FRP) tanks if their carriage is permitted according to Chapter 4.4; or in bulk
containers, if their carriage is permitted according to Chapter 7.3.
4.7.1.2 Subject to the approval of the competent authority (see 7.5.5.2.3) explosive substances or articles of
Class 1 may be carried in packages, in special compartments conforming to section 6.12.5, if their
packaging is permitted according to Chapter 4.1 and their carriage is permitted according to Chapter
7.2 and 7.5.
4.7.2 Operation
4.7.2.1 The following provisions apply for operation of tanks according to Chapter 6.12:
(a) For tanks with a capacity of 1 000 litres or more, the provisions of Chapter 4.2, Chapter 4.3,
except 4.3.1.4, 4.3.2.3.1, 4.3.3 and 4.3.4, or Chapter 4.4 apply to the carriage on MEMUs, and
are supplemented by the provisions of 4.7.2.2 , 4.7.2.3 and 4.7.2.4 below.
(b) For tanks with a capacity of less than 1 000 litres, the provisions of Chapter 4.2, Chapter 4.3,
except 4.3.1.4, 4.3.2.1, 4.3.2.3.1, 4.3.3 and 4.3.4, or Chapter 4.4 apply to the carriage on
MEMUs, and are supplemented by the provisions of 4.7.2.2, 4.7.2.3 and 4.7.2.4 below.
4.7.2.2 The thickness of the walls of the shell shall not, throughout its use, fall below the minimum figure
prescribed in the appropriate construction requirements.
4.7.2.3 Flexible discharge pipes, whether permanently connected or not, and hoppers shall be empty of mixed
or sensitised explosive substances during carriage.
4.7.2.4 When applicable to carriage in tanks, the special provisions (TU) of 4.3.5 shall also apply as indicated
in Column (13) of Table A in Chapter 3.2.
4.7.2.5 Operators shall ensure that the locks specified in 9.8.8 are used during carriage.
– 219 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
PART 5
Consignment proceduresCopyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 223 –
CHAPTER 5.1
GENERAL PROVISIONS
5.1.1 Application and general provisions
This Part sets forth the provisions for dangerous goods consignments relative to marking, labelling, and
documentation, and, where appropriate, authorization of consignments and advance notifications.
5.1.2 Use of overpacks
5.1.2.1 (a) Unless marks and labels required in Chapter 5.2, except 5.2.1.3 to 5.2.1.6, 5.2.1.7.2 to 5.2.1.7.8
and 5.2.1.10, representative of all dangerous goods in the overpack are visible, the overpack shall
be:
(i) marked with the word “OVERPACK”. The lettering of the “OVERPACK” mark shall be
at least 12 mm high. The mark shall be in an official language of the country of origin
and also, if that language is not English, French or German, in English, French or German,
unless agreements, if any, concluded between the countries concerned in the transport
operation provide otherwise; and
(ii) labelled and marked with the UN number and other marks, as required for packages in
Chapter 5.2 except 5.2.1.3 to 5.2.1.6, 5.2.1.7.2 to 5.2.1.7.8 and 5.2.1.10, for each item of
dangerous goods contained in the overpack. Each applicable mark or label only needs to
be applied once.
Labelling of overpacks containing radioactive material shall be in accordance with 5.2.2.1.11.
(b) Orientation arrows illustrated in 5.2.1.10 shall be displayed on two opposite sides of overpacks
containing packages which shall be marked in accordance with 5.2.1.10.1, unless the marks
remains visible.
5.1.2.2 Each package of dangerous goods contained in an overpack shall comply with all applicable provisions
of ADR. The intended function of each package shall not be impaired by the overpack.
5.1.2.3 Each package bearing package orientation marks as prescribed in 5.2.1.10 and which is overpacked or
placed in a large packaging shall be oriented in accordance with such marks.
5.1.2.4 The prohibitions on mixed loading also apply to these overpacks.
5.1.3 Empty uncleaned packagings (including IBCs and large packagings), tanks, MEMUs, vehicles
and containers for carriage in bulk
5.1.3.1 Empty uncleaned packagings (including IBCs and large packagings), tanks (including tank-vehicles,
battery-vehicles, demountable tanks, portable tanks, tank-containers, MEGCs), MEMUs, vehicles and
containers for carriage in bulk having contained dangerous goods of the different classes other than
Class 7, shall be marked and labelled as if they were full.
NOTE: For documentation, see Chapter 5.4.
5.1.3.2 Containers, tanks, IBCs, as well as other packagings and overpacks, used for the carriage of radioactive
material shall not be used for the storage or carriage of other goods unless decontaminated below the
level of 0.4 Bq/cm² for beta and gamma emitters and low toxicity alpha emitters and 0.04 Bq/cm² for
all other alpha emitters.
5.1.4 Mixed packing
When two or more dangerous goods are packed within the same outer packaging, the package shall be
labelled and marked as required for each substance or article. If the same label is required for different
goods, it only needs to be applied once.
– 223 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 224 –
5.1.5 General provisions for Class 7
5.1.5.1 Approval of shipments and notification
5.1.5.1.1 General
In addition to the approval of package designs described in Chapter 6.4, multilateral shipment approval
is also required in certain circumstances (5.1.5.1.2 and 5.1.5.1.3). In some circumstances it is also
necessary to notify competent authorities of a shipment (5.1.5.1.4).
5.1.5.1.2 Shipment approvals
Multilateral approval shall be required for:
(a) the shipment of Type B(M) packages not conforming with the requirements of 6.4.7.5 or
designed to allow controlled intermittent venting;
(b) the shipment of Type B(M) packages containing radioactive material with an activity greater
than 3 000 A 1 or 3 000 A2, as appropriate, or 1 000 TBq, whichever is the lower;
(c) The shipment of packages containing fissile materials if the sum of the criticality safety indexes
of the packages in a single vehicle or container exceeds 50; and
(d) (Reserved)
(e) the shipment of SCO-III.
except that a competent authority may authorize carriage into or through its country without shipment
approval, by a specific provision in its design approval (see 5.1.5.2.1).
5.1.5.1.3 Shipment approval by special arrangement
A competent authority may approve provisions under which consignments that do not satisfy all the
applicable requirements of ADR may be carried under special arrangement (see 1.7.4).
5.1.5.1.4 Notifications
Notification to competent authorities is required as follows:
(a) Before the first shipment of any package requiring competent authority approval, the consignor
shall ensure that copies of each applicable competent authority certificate applying to that
package design have been submitted to the competent authority of the country of origin of the
shipment and to the competent authority of each country through or into which the consignment
is to be carried. The consignor is not required to await an acknowledgement from the competent
authority, nor is the competent authority required to make such acknowledgement of receipt of
the certificate;
(b) For each of the following types of shipments:
(i) Type C packages containing radioactive material with an activity greater than 3 000 A 1
or 3 000 A2, as appropriate, or 1 000 TBq, whichever is the lower;
(ii) Type B(U) packages containing radioactive material with an activity greater than 3 000
A 1 or 3 000 A 2, as appropriate, or 1 000 TBq, whichever is the lower;
(iii) Type B(M) packages;
(iv) Shipment under special arrangement;
The consignor shall notify the competent authority of the country of origin of the shipment and
the competent authority of each country through or into which the consignment is to be carried.
This notification shall be in the possession of each competent authority prior to the
commencement of the shipment, and preferably at least 7 days in advance;
(c) The consignor is not required to send a separate notification if the required information has been
included in the application for approval of shipment (see 6.4.23.2);
– 224 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 225 –
(d) The consignment notification shall include:
(i) sufficient information to enable the identification of the package or packages including
all applicable certificate numbers and identification marks;
(ii) information on the date of shipment, the expected date of arrival and proposed routeing;
(iii) the name(s) of the radioactive material(s) or nuclide(s);
(iv) descriptions of the physical and chemical forms of the radioactive material, or whether it
is special form radioactive material or low dispersible radioactive material; and
(v) the maximum activity of the radioactive contents during carriage expressed in becquerels
(Bq) with an appropriate SI prefix symbol (see 1.2.2.1). For fissile material, the mass of
fissile material (or of each fissile nuclide for mixtures when appropriate) in grams (g), or
multiples thereof, may be used in place of activity.
5.1.5.2 Certificates issued by the competent authority
5.1.5.2.1 Certificates issued by the competent authority are required for the following:
(a) Designs for:
(i) special form radioactive material;
(ii) low dispersible radioactive material;
(iii) fissile material excepted under 2.2.7.2.3.5 (f);
(iv) packages containing 0.1 kg or more of uranium hexafluoride;
(v) packages containing fissile material unless excepted by 2.2.7.2.3.5, 6.4.11.2 or 6.4.11.3;
(vi) Type B(U) packages and Type B(M) packages;
(vii) Type C packages;
(b) Special arrangements;
(c) Certain shipments (see 5.1.5.1.2);
(d) Determination of the basic radionuclide values referred to in 2.2.7.2.2.1 for individual
radionuclides which are not listed in Table 2.2.7.2.2.1 (see 2.2.7.2.2.2 (a));
(e) Alternative activity limits for an exempt consignment of instruments or articles (see
2.2.7.2.2.2 (b)).
The certificates shall confirm that the applicable requirements are met, and for design approvals shall
attribute to the design an identification mark.
The certificates of approval for the package design and the shipment may be combined into a single
certificate.
Certificates and applications for these certificates shall be in accordance with the requirements in 6.4.23.
5.1.5.2.2 The consignor shall be in possession of a copy of each applicable certificate.
5.1.5.2.3 For package designs where it is not required that a competent authority issue a certificate of approval,
the consignor shall, on request, make available for inspection by the competent authority, documentary
evidence of the compliance of the package design with all the applicable requirements.
– 225 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 226 –
5.1.5.3 Determination of transport index (TI) and criticality safety index (CSI)
5.1.5.3.1 The transport index (TI) for a package, overpack or container, or for unpackaged LSA-I, SCO-I or
SCO-III, shall be the number derived in accordance with the following procedure:
(a) Determine the maximum dose rate in units of millisieverts per hour (mSv/h) at a distance of 1 m
from the external surfaces of the package, overpack, container, or unpackaged LSA-I, SCO-I or
SCO-III. The value determined shall be multiplied by 100. For uranium and thorium ores and
their concentrates, the maximum dose rate at any point 1 m from the external surface of the load
may be taken as:
0.4 mSv/h for ores and physical concentrates of uranium and thorium;
0.3 mSv/h for chemical concentrates of thorium;
0.02 mSv/h for chemical concentrates of uranium, other than uranium hexafluoride;
(b) For tanks, containers and unpackaged LSA-I, SCO-I and SCO-III, the value determined in
step (a) above shall be multiplied by the appropriate factor from Table 5.1.5.3.1;
(c) The value obtained in steps (a) and (b) above shall be rounded up to the first decimal place (e.g.
1.13 becomes 1.2), except that a value of 0.05 or less may be considered as zero and the resulting
number is the TI value.
Table 5.1.5.3.1: Multiplication factors for tanks, containers
and unpackaged LSA-I, SCO-I and SCO-III
Size of load a Multiplication factor
size of load  1 m² 1
1 m² < size of load  5 m² 2
5 m² < size of load  20 m² 3
20 m² < size of load 10
a Largest cross-sectional area of the load being measured.
5.1.5.3.2 The TI for each rigid overpack, container or vehicle shall be determined as the sum of the TIs of all the
packages contained therein. For a shipment from a single consignor, the consignor may determine the
TI by direct measurement of dose rate.
The TI for a non-rigid overpack shall be determined only as the sum of the TIs of all the packages within
the overpack.
5.1.5.3.3 The criticality safety index for each overpack or container shall be determined as the sum of the CSIs
of all the packages contained. The same procedure shall be followed for determining the total sum of
the CSIs in a consignment or aboard a vehicle.
5.1.5.3.4 Packages, overpacks and containers shall be assigned to either category I-WHITE, II-YELLOW or
III-YELLOW in accordance with the conditions specified in Table 5.1.5.3.4 and with the following
requirements:
(a) For a package, overpack or container, both the transport index and the surface dose rate
conditions shall be taken into account in determining which is the appropriate category. Where
the transport index satisfies the condition for one category but the surface dose rate satisfies the
condition for a different category, the package, overpack or container shall be assigned to the
higher category. For this purpose, category I-WHITE shall be regarded as the lowest category;
(b) The TI shall be determined following the procedures specified in 5.1.5.3.1 and 5.1.5.3.2;
(c) If the surface dose rate is greater than 2 mSv/h, the package or overpack shall be carried under
exclusive use and under the provisions of 7.5.11, CV33 (1.3) and (3.5) (a);
(d) A package carried under a special arrangement shall be assigned to category III-YELLOW
except under the provisions of 5.1.5.3.5;
(e) An overpack or container which contains packages carried under special arrangement shall be
assigned to category III-YELLOW except under the provisions of 5.1.5.3.5.
– 226 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 227 –
Table 5.1.5.3.4: Categories of packages, overpacks and containers
Conditions
Transport index Maximum dose rate at any point
on external surface Category
0a Not more than 0.005 mSv/h I-WHITE
More than 0 but not
more than 1a More than 0.005 mSv/h but not more than 0.5 mSv/h II-YELLOW
More than 1 but not
more than 10 More than 0.5 mSv/h but not more than 2 mSv/h III-YELLOW
More than 10 More than 2 mSv/h but not more than 10 mSv/h III-YELLOW b
a If the measured TI is not greater than 0.05, the value quoted may be zero in accordance
with 5.1.5.3.1 (c).
b Shall also be carried under exclusive use except for containers (see Table D in 7.5.11 CV33 (3.3)).
5.1.5.3.5 In all cases of international carriage of packages requiring competent authority approval of design or
shipment, for which different approval types apply in the different countries concerned by the shipment,
the categorization shall be in accordance with the certificate of the country of origin of design.
5.1.5.4 Specific provisions for excepted packages of radioactive material of Class 7
5.1.5.4.1 Excepted packages of radioactive material of Class 7 shall be legibly and durably marked on the outside
of the packaging with:
(a) The UN number preceded by the letters “UN”;
(b) An identification of either the consignor or consignee, or both; and
(c) The permissible gross mass if this exceeds 50 kg.
5.1.5.4.2 The documentation requirements of Chapter 5.4 do not apply to excepted packages of radioactive
material of Class 7, except that:
(a) The UN number preceded by the letters “UN” and the name and address of the consignor and the
consignee and, if relevant, the identification mark for each competent authority certificate of
approval (see 5.4.1.2.5.1 (g)) shall be shown on a transport document such as a bill of lading, air
waybill or CMR or CIM consignment note;
(b) If relevant, the requirements of 5.4.1.2.5.1 (g), 5.4.1.2.5.3 and 5.4.1.2.5.4 shall apply;
(c) The requirements of 5.4.2 and 5.4.4 shall apply.
5.1.5.4.3 The requirements of 5.2.1.7.8 and 5.2.2.1.11.5 shall apply if relevant.
5.1.5.5 Summary of approval and prior notification requirements
NOTE 1: Before first shipment of any package requiring competent authority approval of the design,
the consignor shall ensure that a copy of the approval certificate for that design has been submitted to
the competent authority of each country en route (see 5.1.5.1.4 (a)).
NOTE 2: Notification required if contents exceed 3 × 10 3 A1, or 3 × 10 3 A2, or 1 000 TBq; (see 5.1.5.1.4
(b)).
NOTE 3: Multilateral approval of shipment required if contents exceed 3 × 10 3 A 1, or 3 × 10 3 A2, or
1 000 TBq, or if controlled intermittent venting is allowed (see 5.1.5.1).
NOTE 4: See approval and prior notification provisions for the applicable package for carrying this
material.
– 227 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 228 –
Subject UN
Number
Competent Authority
approval required
Consignor required to
notify the competent
authorities of the
country of origin and
of the countries en
route a before each
shipment
Reference
Country
of origin
Countries
en route a
Calculation of unlisted A1 and
A 2 values
– Yes Yes No 2.2.7.2.2.2
(a),
5.1.5.2.1 (d)
Excepted packages
– package design
– shipment
2908, 2909,
2910, 2911 No
No
No
No
No
No

LSA material b and SCO b
Industrial packages types 1, 2
or 3, non fissile and fissile
excepted
2912, 2913,
3321, 3322

– package design
– shipment
No
No
No
No
No
No
Type A packages b, non fissile
and fissile excepted
2915, 3332 —
– package design
– shipment
No
No
No
No
No
No
Type B(U) packages b , non
fissile and fissile excepted
2916 5.1.5.1.4 (b),
5.1.5.2.1 (a),
6.4.22.2- package design
– shipment
Yes
No
No
No
See Note 1
See Note 2
Type B(M) packages b, non
fissile and fissile excepted
2917 5.1.5.1.4 (b),
5.1.5.2.1 (a),
5.1.5.1.2,
6.4.22.3
– package design
– shipment
Yes
See Note 3
Yes
See Note 3
No
Yes
Type C packages b, non fissile
and fissile excepted
3323 5.1.5.1.4 (b),
5.1.5.2.1 (a),
6.4.22.2- package design
– shipment
Yes
No
No
No
See Note 1
See Note 2
Packages for fissile material
– package design
– shipment:
– sum of criticality safety
indexes not more than 50
– sum of criticality safety
indexes greater than 50
2977, 3324,
3325, 3326,
3327, 3328,
3329, 3330,
3331, 3333
Yes c
No d
Yes
Yes c
No d
Yes
No
See Note 2
See Note 2
5.1.5.2.1 (a),
5.1.5.1.2,
6.4.22.4,
6.4.22.5
Special form radioactive
material
– design
– shipment

See Note 4
Yes
See Note 4
No
See Note 4
No
See Note 4
1.6.6.4,
5.1.5.2.1 (a)
6.4.22.5
a Countries from, through or into which the consignment is carried.
b If the radioactive contents are fissile material which is not excepted from the provisions for packages containing
fissile material, then the provisions for fissile material packages apply (see 6.4.11).
c Designs of packages for fissile material may also require approval in respect of one of the other items
in the table.
d Shipments may, however, require approval in respect of one of the other items in the table.
– 228 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 229 –
Subject UN
Number
Competent Authority
approval required
Consignor required to
notify the competent
authorities of the
country of origin and
of the countries en
route a before each
shipment
Reference
Country
of origin
Countries
en route a
Low dispersible radioactive
material
5.1.5.2.1 (a),
6.4.22.5
– design
– shipment

See Note 4
Yes
See Note 4
No
See Note 4
No
See Note 4
Packages containing 0.1 kg or
more of uranium hexafluoride
5.1.5.2.1 (a),
6.4.22.1
– design
– shipment

See Note 4
Yes
See Note 4
No
See Note 4
No
See Note 4
Special Arrangement
– shipment
2919, 3331
Yes Yes Yes
1.7.4.2,
5.1.5.2.1 (b),
5.1.5.1.4 (b)
Approved packages designs
subjected to transitional
measures
– See 1.6.6 See 1.6.6 See Note 1 1.6.6.2,
5.1.5.1.4 (b),
5.1.5.2.1 (a),
5.1.5.1.2,
6.4.22.9
Alternative activity limits for
an exempt consignment of
instruments or articles
– Yes Yes No 5.1.5.2.1(e),
6.4.22.7
Fissile material excepted in
accordance with 2.2.7.2.3.5 (f)
– Yes Yes No 5.1.5.2.1 (a)
(iii),
6.4.22.6
a Countries from, through or into which the consignment is carried.
– 229 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 231 –
CHAPTER 5.2
MARKING AND LABELLING
5.2.1 Marking of packages
NOTE 1: For marks related to the construction, testing and approval of packagings, large packagings,
gas receptacles and IBCs, see Part 6.
NOTE 2: In accordance with the GHS, a GHS pictogram not required by ADR should only appear in
carriage as part of a complete GHS label and not independently (see GHS 1.4.10.4.4).
5.2.1.1 Unless provided otherwise in ADR, the UN number corresponding to the dangerous goods contained,
preceded by the letters “UN” shall be clearly and durably marked on each package. The UN number
and the letters “UN” shall be at least 12 mm high, except for packages of 30 l capacity or less or of
30 kg maximum net mass and for cylinders of 60 l water capacity or less when they shall be at least
6 mm in height and except for packages of 5 l capacity or less or of 5 kg maximum net mass when they
shall be of an appropriate size. In the case of unpackaged articles the mark shall be displayed on the
article, on its cradle or on its handling, storage or launching device.
5.2.1.2 All package marks required by this Chapter:
(a) shall be readily visible and legible;
(b) shall be able to withstand open weather exposure without a substantial reduction in effectiveness.
5.2.1.3 Salvage packagings including large salvage packagings and salvage pressure receptacles shall
additionally be marked with the word “SALVAGE”. The lettering of the “SALVAGE” mark shall be
at least 12 mm high.
5.2.1.4 Intermediate bulk containers of more than 450 litres capacity and large packagings shall be marked on
two opposite sides.
5.2.1.5 Additional provisions for goods of Class 1
For goods of Class 1, packages shall, in addition, bear the proper shipping name as determined in
accordance with 3.1.2. The mark, which shall be clearly legible and indelible, shall be in one or more
languages, one of which shall be French, German or English, unless any agreements concluded between
the countries concerned in the transport operation provide otherwise.
5.2.1.6 Additional provisions for goods of Class 2
Refillable receptacles shall bear the following particulars in clearly legible and durable characters:
(a) the UN number and the proper shipping name of the gas or mixture of gases, as determined in
accordance with 3.1.2.
In the case of gases classified under an N.O.S. entry, only the technical name1 of the gas has to
be indicated in addition to the UN number.
In the case of mixtures, not more than the two constituents which most predominantly contribute
to the hazards have to be indicated;
1 Instead of the technical name the use of one of the following names is permitted:
– for UN No. 1078 refrigerant gas, n.o.s: mixture F1, mixture F2, mixture F3;
– for UN No. 1060 methylacetylene and propadiene mixtures, stabilized: mixture P1, mixture P2;
– for UN No. 1965 hydrocarbon gas mixture, liquefied, n.o.s.: mixture A or butane, mixture A01 or butane,
mixture A02 or butane, mixture A0 or butane, mixture A1, mixture B1, mixture B2, mixture B, mixture C or
propane;
– for UN No. 1010 Butadienes, stabilized: 1,2-Butadiene, stabilized, 1,3-Butadiene, stabilized.
– For UN No. 1012 Butylene: 1-butylene, cis-2-butylene, trans-2-butylene, butylenes mixture.
– 231 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 232 –
(b) for compressed gases filled by mass and for liquefied gases, either the maximum filling mass
and the tare of the receptacle with fittings and accessories as fitted at the time of filling, or the
gross mass;
(c) the date (year) of the next periodic inspection.
These particulars can either be engraved or indicated on a durable information disk or label attached on
the receptacle or indicated by an adherent and clearly visible mark such as by printing or by any
equivalent process.
NOTE 1: See also 6.2.2.7.
NOTE 2: For non refillable receptacles, see 6.2.2.8.
5.2.1.7 Special marking provisions for radioactive material
5.2.1.7.1 Each package shall be legibly and durably marked on the outside of the packaging with an identification
of either the consignor or consignee, or both. Each overpack shall be legibly and durably marked on the
outside of the overpack with an identification of either the consignor or consignee, or both unless these
marks of all packages within the overpack are clearly visible.
5.2.1.7.2 For each package, other than excepted packages, the UN number preceded by the letters “UN” and the
proper shipping name shall be legibly and durably marked on the outside of the packaging. The marking
of excepted packages shall be as required by 5.1.5.4.1.
5.2.1.7.3 Each package of gross mass exceeding 50 kg shall have its permissible gross mass legibly and durably
marked on the outside of the packaging.
5.2.1.7.4 Each package which conforms to:
(a) a Type IP-1 package, a Type IP-2 package or a Type IP-3 package design shall be legibly and
durably marked on the outside of the packaging with “TYPE IP-1”, “TYPE IP-2” or “TYPE IP‑3”
as appropriate;
(b) a Type A package design shall be legibly and durably marked on the outside of the packaging
with “TYPE A”;
(c) a Type IP-2 package, a Type IP-3 package or a Type A package design shall be legibly and
durably marked on the outside of the packaging with the distinguishing sign used on vehicles in
international road traffic2 of the country of origin of design and either the name of the
manufacturer or other identification of the packaging specified by the competent authority of the
country of origin of design.
5.2.1.7.5 Each package which conforms to a design approved under one or more of paragraphs 1.6.6.2.1,
5.1.5.2.1, 6.4.22.1 to 6.4.22.4 and 6.4.23.4 to 6.4.23.7 shall be legibly and durably marked on the outside
of the package with the following information:
(a) the identification mark allocated to that design by the competent authority;
(b) a serial number to uniquely identify each packaging which conforms to that design;
(c) “Type B(U)”, “Type B(M)” or “Type C”, in the case of a Type B(U), Type B(M) or Type C
package design.
5.2.1.7.6 Each package which conforms to a Type B(U), Type B(M) or Type C package design shall have the
outside of the outermost receptacle which is resistant to the effects of fire and water plainly marked by
embossing, stamping or other means resistant to the effects of fire and water with the trefoil symbol
shown in the figure below.
2 Distinguishing sign of the State of registration used on motor vehicles and trailers in international road traffic,
e.g. in accordance with the Geneva Convention on Road Traffic of 1949 or the Vienna Convention on Road Traffic of
1968.
– 232 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 233 –
Basic trefoil symbol with proportions based on a central circle of radius X.
The minimum allowable size of X shall be 4 mm.
Any mark on the package made in accordance with the requirements of 5.2.1.7.4 (a) and (b) and
5.2.1.7.5 (c) relating to the package type that does not relate to the UN number and proper shipping
name assigned to the consignment shall be removed or covered.
5.2.1.7.7 Where LSA-I or SCO-I material is contained in receptacles or wrapping materials and is carried under
exclusive use as permitted by 4.1.9.2.4, the outer surface of these receptacles or wrapping materials
may bear the mark “RADIOACTIVE LSA-I” or “RADIOACTIVE SCO-I”, as appropriate.
5.2.1.7.8 In all cases of international carriage of packages requiring competent authority approval of design or
shipment, for which different approval types apply in the different countries concerned by the shipment,
marking shall be in accordance with the certificate of the country of origin of the design.
5.2.1.8 Special marking provisions for environmentally hazardous substances
5.2.1.8.1 Packages containing environmentally hazardous substances meeting the criteria of 2.2.9.1.10 shall be
durably marked with the environmentally hazardous substance mark shown in 5.2.1.8.3 with the
exception of single packagings and combination packagings where such single packagings or inner
packagings of such combination packagings have:
– a quantity of 5 l or less for liquids; or
– a net mass of 5 kg or less for solids.
5.2.1.8.2 The environmentally hazardous substance mark shall be located adjacent to the marks required by
5.2.1.1. The requirements of 5.2.1.2 and 5.2.1.4 shall be met.
5.2.1.8.3 The environmentally hazardous substance mark shall be as shown in Figure 5.2.1.8.3.
– 233 –
.Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
Figure 5.2.1.8.3
Environmentally hazardous substance mark
The mark shall be in the form of a square set at an angle of 45° (diamond-shaped). The symbol (fish
and tree) shall be black on white or suitable contrasting background. The minimum dimensions shall be
100 mm × 100 mm and the minimum width of the line forming the diamond shall be 2 mm. If the size
of the package so requires, the dimensions/line thickness may be reduced, provided the mark remains
clearly visible. Where dimensions are not specified, all features shall be in approximate proportion to
those shown.
NOTE: The labelling provisions of 5.2.2 apply in addition to any requirement for packages to bear the
environmentally hazardous substance mark.
5.2.1.9 Lithium battery mark
5.2.1.9.1 Packages containing lithium cells or batteries prepared in accordance with special provision 188 of
Chapter 3.3 shall be marked as shown in Figure 5.2.1.9.2.
5.2.1.9.2 The mark shall indicate the UN number preceded by the letters “UN”, i.e. ‘UN 3090’ for lithium metal
cells or batteries or ‘UN 3480’ for lithium ion cells or batteries. Where the lithium cells or batteries are
contained in, or packed with, equipment, the UN number preceded by the letters “UN”, i.e. ‘UN 3091’
or ‘UN 3481’ as appropriate shall be indicated. Where a package contains lithium cells or batteries
assigned to different UN numbers, all applicable UN numbers shall be indicated on one or more marks.
Figure 5.2.1.9.2
Lithium battery mark
* Place for UN number(s)
– 234 –
Minimum dimension
100 mm
 
Minimum dimension
100 mm

Minimum dimension 100 mm
Minimum dimension 100 mm
*Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 235 –
The mark shall be in the form of a rectangle or a square with hatched edging. The dimensions shall be
a minimum of 100 mm wide × 100 mm high and the minimum width of the hatching shall be 5 mm.
The symbol (group of batteries, one damaged and emitting flame, above the UN number for lithium ion
or lithium metal batteries or cells) shall be black on white or suitable contrasting background. The
hatching shall be red. If the size of the package so requires, the dimensions may be reduced to not less
than 100 mm wide × 70 mm high. Where dimensions are not specified, all features shall be in
approximate proportion to those shown.
5.2.1.10 Orientation arrows
5.2.1.10.1 Except as provided in 5.2.1.10.2:
(a) combination packagings having inner packagings containing liquids;
(b) single packagings fitted with vents;
(c) closed or open cryogenic receptacles intended for the carriage of refrigerated liquefied gases;
and
(d) machinery or apparatus containing liquid dangerous goods when it is required to ensure the
liquid dangerous goods remain in their intended orientation (see special provision 301 of Chapter
3.3);
shall be legibly marked with package orientation arrows which are similar to the illustration shown
below or with those meeting the specifications of ISO 780:1997. The orientation arrows shall appear
on two opposite vertical sides of the package with the arrows pointing in the correct upright direction.
They shall be rectangular and of a size that is clearly visible commensurate with the size of the package.
Depicting a rectangular border around the arrows is optional.
Figure 5.2.1.10.1.1 Figure 5.2.1.10.1.2
Two black or red arrows on white or suitable contrasting background.
The rectangular border is optional.
All features shall be in approximate proportion to those shown.
5.2.1.10.2 Orientation arrows are not required on:
(a) Outer packagings containing pressure receptacles except closed or open cryogenic receptacles;
(b) Outer packagings containing dangerous goods in inner packagings each containing not more
than 120 ml, with sufficient absorbent material between the inner and outer packagings to
completely absorb the liquid contents;
(c) Outer packagings containing Class 6.2 infectious substances in primary receptacles each
containing not more than 50 ml;
(d) Type IP-2, type IP-3, type A, type B(U), type B(M) or type C packages containing Class 7
radioactive material;
(e) Outer packagings containing articles which are leak-tight in all orientations (e.g. alcohol or
mercury in thermometers, aerosols, etc.); or
(f) Outer packagings containing dangerous goods in hermetically sealed inner packagings each
containing not more than 500 ml.
5.2.1.10.3 Arrows for purposes other than indicating proper package orientation shall not be displayed on a
package marked in accordance with this sub-section.
or
– 235 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 236 –
5.2.2 Labelling of packages
5.2.2.1 Labelling provisions
5.2.2.1.1 For each article or substance listed in Table A of Chapter 3.2, the labels shown in Column (5) shall be
affixed unless otherwise provided for by a special provision in Column (6).
5.2.2.1.2 Indelible danger marks corresponding exactly to the prescribed models may be used instead of labels.
5.2.2.1.3 to 5.2.2.1.5 (Reserved)
5.2.2.1.6 Except as provided in 5.2.2.2.1.2, each label shall:
(a) be affixed to the same surface of the package, if the dimensions of the package allow; for
packages of Class1 and 7, near the mark indicating the proper shipping name;
(b) be so placed on the package that it is not covered or obscured by any part or attachment to the
packaging or any other label or marks; and
(c) be displayed next to each other when more than one label is required.
Where a package is of such an irregular shape or small size that a label cannot be satisfactorily affixed,
the label may be attached to the package by a securely affixed tag or other suitable means.
5.2.2.1.7 Intermediate bulk containers of more than 450 litres capacity and large packagings shall be labelled on
two opposite sides.
5.2.2.1.8 (Reserved)
5.2.2.1.9 Special provisions for the labelling of self-reactive substances and organic peroxides
(a) The label conforming to model No. 4.1 also implies that the product may be flammable and
hence no label conforming to model No. 3 is required. In addition, a label conforming to model
No. 1 shall be applied for self-reactive substances Type B, unless the competent authority has
permitted this label to be dispensed with for a specific packaging because test data have proven
that the self-reactive substance in such a packaging does not exhibit explosive behaviour.
(b) The label conforming to model No. 5.2 also implies that the product may be flammable and
hence no label conforming to model No. 3 is required. In addition, the following labels shall be
applied:
(i) A label conforming to model No. 1 for organic peroxides type B, unless the competent
authority has permitted this label to be dispensed with for a specific packaging because
test data have proven that the organic peroxide in such a packaging does not exhibit
explosive behaviour;
(ii) A label conforming to model No. 8 is required when Packing Group I or II criteria of
Class 8 are met.
For self-reactive substances and organic peroxides mentioned by name, the labels to be affixed are
indicated in the list found in 2.2.41.4 and 2.2.52.4 respectively.
5.2.2.1.10 Special provisions for the labelling of infectious substances packages
In addition to the label conforming to model No. 6.2, infectious substances packages shall bear any
other label required by the nature of the contents.
5.2.2.1.11 Special provisions for the labelling of radioactive material
5.2.2.1.11.1 Except when enlarged labels are used in accordance with 5.3.1.1.3, each package, overpack and
container containing radioactive material shall bear the labels conforming to the applicable models Nos.
7A, 7B or 7C, according to the appropriate category. Labels shall be affixed to two opposite sides on
the outside of the package or overpack or on the outside of all four sides of a container or tank. In
addition, each package, overpack and container containing fissile material, other than fissile material
excepted under the provisions of 2.2.7.2.3.5 shall bear labels conforming to model No.7E; such labels,
where applicable, shall be affixed adjacent to the labels conforming to the applicable model Nos. 7A,
7B or 7C.. Labels shall not cover the marks specified in 5.2.1. Any labels which do not relate to the
contents shall be removed or covered.
– 236 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 237 –
5.2.2.1.11.2 Each label conforming to the applicable model No. 7A, 7B or 7C shall be completed with the following
information.
(a) Contents:
(i) except for LSA-I material, the name(s) of the radionuclide(s) as taken from
Table 2.2.7.2.2.1, using the symbols prescribed therein. For mixtures of radionuclides,
the most restrictive nuclides shall be listed to the extent the space on the line permits.
The group of LSA or SCO shall be shown following the name(s) of the radionuclide(s).
The terms “LSA-II”,”LSA-III”, “SCO-I” and “SCO-II” shall be used for this purpose;
(ii) for LSA-I material, only the term “LSA-I” is necessary; the name of the radionuclide is
not necessary;
(b) Activity: The maximum activity of the radioactive contents during carriage expressed in
becquerels (Bq) with the appropriate SI prefix symbol (see 1.2.2.1). For fissile material, the total
mass of fissile nuclides in units of grams (g), or multiples thereof, may be used in place of
activity;
(c) For overpacks and containers the “contents” and “activity” entries on the label shall bear the
information required in (a) and (b) above, respectively, totalled together for the entire contents
of the overpack or container except that on labels for overpacks or containers containing mixed
loads of packages containing different radionuclides, such entries may read “See Transport
Documents”;
(d) Transport index: The number determined in accordance with 5.1.5.3.1 and 5.1.5.3.2 (except for
category I-WHITE).
5.2.2.1.11.3 Each label conforming to the model No. 7E shall be completed with the criticality safety index (CSI)
as stated in the certificate of approval applicable in the countries through or into which the consignment
is carried and issued by the competent authority or as specified in 6.4.11.2 or 6.4.11.3.
5.2.2.1.11.4 For overpacks and containers, the label conforming to model No. 7E shall bear the sum of the criticality
safety indexes of all the packages contained therein.
5.2.2.1.11.5 In all cases of international carriage of packages requiring competent authority approval of design or
shipment, for which different approval types apply in the different countries concerned by the shipment,
labelling shall be in accordance with the certificate of the country of origin of design.
5.2.2.1.12 Special provisions for the labelling of articles containing dangerous goods carried as UN Nos. 3537,
3538, 3539, 3540, 3541, 3542, 3543, 3544, 3545, 3546, 3547 and 3548
5.2.2.1.12.1 Packages containing articles or articles carried unpackaged shall bear labels according to 5.2.2.1
reflecting the hazards established according to 2.1.5, except that for articles that in addition contain
lithium batteries, a lithium battery mark or a label conforming to model No. 9A is not required.
5.2.2.1.12.2 When it is required to ensure articles containing liquid dangerous goods remain in their intended
orientation, orientation arrows meeting 5.2.1.10.1 shall be affixed and visible on at least two opposite
vertical sides of the package or of the unpackaged article where possible, with the arrows pointing in
the correct upright direction.
5.2.2.2 Provisions for labels
5.2.2.2.1 Labels shall satisfy the provisions below and conform, in terms of colour, symbols and general format,
to the models shown in 5.2.2.2.2. Corresponding models required for other modes of transport, with
minor variations which do not affect the obvious meaning of the label, are also acceptable.
NOTE: Where appropriate, labels in 5.2.2.2.2 are shown with a dotted outer boundary as provided for
in 5.2.2.2.1.1. This is not required when the label is applied on a background of contrasting colour.
– 237 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 238 –
5.2.2.2.1.1 Labels shall be configured as shown in Figure 5.2.2.2.1.1.
Figure 5.2.2.2.1.1
Class/division label
* The class or for Classes 4.1, 4.2 and 4.3, the figure “4” or for Classes 6.1 and
6.2, the figure “6”, shall be shown in the bottom corner.
** Additional text/numbers/symbol/letters shall (if mandatory) or may (if
optional) be shown in this bottom half.
*** The class symbol or, for divisions 1.4, 1.5 and 1.6, the division number and
for Model No 7E the word “FISSILE” shall be shown in this top half.
5.2.2.2.1.1.1 Labels shall be displayed on a background of contrasting colour, or shall have either a dotted or solid
outer boundary line.
5.2.2.2.1.1.2 The label shall be in the form of a square set at an angle of 45° (diamond-shaped). The minimum
dimensions shall be 100 mm × 100 mm. There shall be a line inside the edge forming the diamond
which shall be parallel and approximately 5 mm from the outside of that line to the edge of the label.
The line inside the edge on the upper half of the label shall be the same colour as the symbol and the
line inside the edge on the lower half of the label shall be the same colour as the class or division number
in the bottom corner. Where dimensions are not specified, all features shall be in approximate proportion
to those shown.
5.2.2.2.1.1.3 If the size of the package so requires the dimensions may be reduced proportionally, provided the
symbols and other elements of the label remain clearly visible. Dimensions for cylinders shall comply
with 5.2.2.2.1.2.
5.2.2.2.1.2 Cylinders for Class 2 may, on account of their shape, orientation and securing mechanisms for carriage,
bear labels representative of those specified in this section and the environmentally hazardous substance
mark when appropriate, which have been reduced in size, according to the dimensions outlined in
ISO 7225:2005, “Gas cylinders – Precautionary labels”, for display on the non-cylindrical part
(shoulder) of such cylinders.
NOTE: When the diameter of the cylinder is too small to permit the display of the reduced size labels
on the non-cylindrical upper part of the cylinder, the reduced sized labels may be displayed on the
cylindrical part.
Notwithstanding the provisions of 5.2.2.1.6, labels and the environmentally hazardous substance mark
(see 5.2.1.8.3) may overlap to the extent provided for by ISO 7225:2005. However, in all cases, the
primary hazard label and the figures appearing on any label shall remain fully visible and the symbols
recognizable.
Empty uncleaned pressure receptacles for gases of Class 2 may be carried with obsolete or damaged
labels for the purposes of refilling or inspection as appropriate and the application of a new label in
conformity with current regulations or for the disposal of the pressure receptacle.
– 238 –
* * *
* *
*Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 239 –
5.2.2.2.1.3 With the exception of labels for Divisions 1.4, 1.5 and 1.6 of Class 1, the upper half of the label shall
contain the pictorial symbol and the lower half shall contain:
(a) For Classes 1, 2, 3, 5.1, 5.2, 7, 8 and 9, the class number;
(b) For Classes 4.1, 4.2 and 4.3, the figure “4”;
(c) For Classes 6.1 and 6.2, the figure “6”.
However for label model No. 9A, the upper half of the label shall only contain the seven vertical stripes
of the symbol and the lower half shall contain the group of batteries of the symbol and the class number.
Except for label model No. 9A, the labels may include text such as the UN number or words describing
the hazard (e.g. “flammable”) in accordance with 5.2.2.2.1.5 provided the text does not obscure or
detract from the other required label elements.
5.2.2.2.1.4 In addition, except for Divisions 1.4, 1.5 and 1.6, labels for Class 1 shall show in the lower half, above
the class number, the division number and the compatibility group letter for the substance or article.
Labels for Divisions 1.4, 1.5 and 1.6 shall show in the upper half the division number, and in the lower
half the class number and the compatibility group letter.
5.2.2.2.1.5 On labels other than those for material of Class 7, the optional insertion of any text (other than the class
number) in the space below the symbol shall be confined to particulars indicating the nature of the
hazard and precautions to be taken in handling.
5.2.2.2.1.6 The symbols, text and numbers shall be clearly legible and indelible and shall be shown in black on all
labels except for:
(a) The Class 8 label, where the text (if any) and class number shall appear in white;
(b) Labels with entirely green, red or blue backgrounds where they may be shown in white;
(c) The Class 5.2 label, where the symbol may be shown in white; and
(d) Labels conforming to model No. 2.1 displayed on cylinders and gas cartridges for liquefied
petroleum gases, where they may be shown in the background colour of the receptacle if
adequate contrast is provided.
5.2.2.2.1.7 All labels shall be able to withstand open weather exposure without a substantial reduction in
effectiveness.
5.2.2.2.2 Specimen labels
– 239 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
Label
model
No.
Division or
Category Symbol and symbol colour Background
Figure in bottom
corner (and figure
colour)
Specimen labels Note
Class 1 hazard: Explosive substances or articles
1 Divisions 1.1,
1.2, 1.3
Exploding bomb: black Orange 1
(black)
 Place for division – to be left blank if
explosive is the subsidiary hazard
 Place for compatibility group – to be
left blank if explosive is the subsidiary
hazard
1.4 Division 1.4 1.4: black
Numerals shall be about 30 mm
in height and be about 5 mm
thick (for a label measuring 100
mm × 100 mm)
Orange 1
(black)
 Place for compatibility group
1.5 Division 1.5 1.5: black
Numerals shall be about 30 mm
in height and be about 5 mm
thick (for a label measuring 100
mm × 100 mm)
Orange 1
(black)
 Place for compatibility group
1.6 Division 1.6 1.6: black
Numerals shall be about 30 mm
in height and be about 5 mm
thick (for a label measuring 100
mm × 100 mm)
Orange 1
(black)
 Place for compatibility group
– 240 –
1
* *
*
1
1
1Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
Label
model
No.
Division or
Category Symbol and symbol colour Background
Figure in bottom
corner (and figure
colour)
Specimen labels Note
Class 2 hazard: Gases
2.1 Flammable
gases
Flame: black or white (except as
provided for in 5.2.2.2.1.6 d))
Red 2
(black or white)
(except as provided
for in 5.2.2.2.1.6
d))

2.2 Non-
flammable,
non-toxic
gases
Gas cylinder: black or white Green 2
(black or white)

2.3 Toxic gases Skull and crossbones: black White 2
(black)

Class 3 hazard: Flammable liquids
3 – Flame: black or white Red 3
(black or white)

– 241 –
2
3 3
2 2
22Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
Label
model
No.
Division or
Category Symbol and symbol colour Background
Figure in bottom
corner (and figure
colour)
Specimen labels Note
Class 4.1 hazard: Flammable solids, self-reactive substances, polymerizing substances and solid desensitized explosives
4.1 – Flame: black White with 7
vertical red
stripes
4
(black)

Class 4.2 hazard: Substances liable to spontaneous combustion
4.2 – Flame: black Upper half
white, lower
half red
4
(black)

Class 4.3 hazard: Substances which, in contact with water emit flammable gases
4.3 – Flame: black or white Blue 4
(black or white)

– 242 –
4
4
4 4Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
Label
model
No.
Division or
Category Symbol and symbol colour Background
Figure in bottom
corner (and figure
colour)
Specimen labels Note
Class 5.1 hazard: Oxidizing substances
5.1 – Flame over circle: black Yellow 5.1
(black)

Class 5.2 hazard: Organic peroxides
5.2 – Flame: black or white Upper half
red, lower
half yellow
5.2
(black)

Class 6.1 hazard: Toxic substances
6.1 – Skull and crossbones: black White 6
(black)

Class 6.2 hazard: Infectious substances
6.2 – Three crescents superimposed
on a circle: black
White 6
(black)
The lower half of the label may bear the
inscriptions: “INFECTIOUS
SUBSTANCE” and “In the case of
damage or leakage immediately notify
Public Health Authority” in black colour
– 243 –
5.2 5.2
6
6Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
Label
model
No.
Division or
Category Symbol and symbol colour Background
Figure in bottom
corner (and figure
colour)
Specimen labels Note
Class 7 hazard: Radioactive material
7A Category I –
WHITE
Trefoil: black White 7
(black)
Text (mandatory), black in lower half of
label:
“RADIOACTIVE”
“CONTENTS …”
“ACTIVITY …”
One red vertical bar shall follow the
word: “RADIOACTIVE”
7B Category II –
YELLOW
Trefoil: black Upper half
yellow with
white
border,
lower half
white
7
(black)
Text (mandatory), black in lower half of
label:
“RADIOACTIVE”
“CONTENTS …”
“ACTIVITY …”
In a black outlined box:
“TRANSPORT INDEX”;
Two red vertical bars shall follow the
word: “RADIOACTIVE”
7C Category III
– YELLOW
Trefoil: black Upper half
yellow with
white
border,
lower half
white
7
(black)
Text (mandatory), black in lower half of
label:
“RADIOACTIVE”
“CONTENTS …”
“ACTIVITY …”
In a black outlined box:
“TRANSPORT INDEX”.
Three red vertical bars shall follow the
word: “RADIOACTIVE”
7E Fissile
material
– White 7
(black)
Text (mandatory): black in upper half of
label: “FISSILE”;
In a black outlined box in the lower half
of label: “CRITICALITY SAFETY
INDEX”
– 244 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 245 –
Label
model
No.
Division or
Category Symbol and symbol colour Background
Figure in bottom
corner (and figure
colour)
Specimen labels Note
Class 8 hazard: Corrosive substances
8 – Liquids, spilling from two glass
vessels and attacking a hand and
a metal: black
Upper half
white, lower
half black
with white
border
8
(white)

Class 9 hazard: Miscellaneous dangerous substances and articles
9 – 7 vertical stripes in upper half:
black
White 9 underlined
(black)

9A – 7 vertical stripes in upper half:
black;
battery group, one broken and
emitting flame in lower half:
black
White 9 underlined
(black)

– 245 –
9
8Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 247 –
CHAPTER 5.3
PLACARDING AND MARKING OF CONTAINERS, BULK CONTAINERS, MEGCs,
MEMUs, TANK-CONTAINERS, PORTABLE TANKS AND VEHICLES
NOTE 1: For marking and placarding of containers, bulk containers, MEGCs, tank-containers and portable tanks for
carriage in a transport chain including a maritime journey, see also 1.1.4.2.1. If the provisions of 1.1.4.2.1 (c) are
applied, only 5.3.1.3 and 5.3.2.1.1 of this Chapter are applicable.
NOTE 2: In accordance with the GHS, a GHS pictogram not required by ADR should only appear in carriage as part
of a complete GHS label and not independently (see GHS 1.4.10.4.4).
5.3.1 Placarding
5.3.1.1 General provisions
5.3.1.1.1 As and when required in this section, placards shall be affixed to the exterior surface of containers, bulk
containers, MEGCs, MEMUs, tank-containers, portable tanks and vehicles. Placards shall correspond
to the labels required in Column (5) and, where appropriate, Column (6) of Table A of Chapter 3.2 for
the dangerous goods contained in the container, bulk containers, MEGC, MEMU, tank-container,
portable tank or vehicle and shall conform to the specifications given in 5.3.1.7. Placards shall be
displayed on a background of contrasting colour, or shall have either a dotted or solid outer boundary
line. The placards shall be weather-resistant and shall ensure durable marking throughout the entire
journey.
5.3.1.1.2 For Class 1, compatibility groups shall not be indicated on placards if the vehicle, container or special
compartments of MEMUs are carrying substances or articles belonging to two or more compatibility
groups. Vehicles, containers or special compartments of MEMUs carrying substances or articles of
different divisions shall bear only placards conforming to the model of the most dangerous division in
the order:
1.1 (most dangerous), 1.5, 1.2, 1.3, 1.6, 1.4 (least dangerous).
When 1.5 D substances are carried with substances or articles of Division 1.2, the vehicle or container
shall be placarded as Division 1.1.
Placards are not required for the carriage of explosives of Division 1.4, compatibility group S.
5.3.1.1.3 For Class 7, the primary hazard placard shall conform to model No. 7D as specified in 5.3.1.7.2. This
placard is not required for vehicles or containers carrying excepted packages and for small containers.
Where both Class 7 labels and placards would be required to be affixed to vehicles, containers, MEGCs,
tank-containers or portable tanks, an enlarged label corresponding to the required label of model No.
7A, 7B or 7C may be displayed instead of placard No.7D to serve both purposes. In that case, the
dimensions shall be not less than 250 mm by 250 mm.
5.3.1.1.4 For Class 9 the placard shall correspond to the label model No. 9 as in 5.2.2.2.2; label model No. 9A
shall not be used for placarding purposes.
5.3.1.1.5 Containers, MEGCs, MEMUs, tank-containers, portable tanks or vehicles containing goods of more
than one class need not bear a subsidiary hazard placard if the hazard represented by that placard is
already indicated by a primary or subsidiary hazard placard.
5.3.1.1.6 Placards which do not relate to the dangerous goods being carried, or residues thereof, shall be removed
or covered.
5.3.1.1.7 When the placarding is affixed to folding panels, they shall be designed and secured so that they cannot
unfold or come loose from the holder during carriage (especially as a result of impacts or unintentional
actions).
– 247 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 248 –
5.3.1.2 Placarding of containers, bulk containers, MEGCs, tank-containers and portable tanks
NOTE: This sub-section does not apply to swap bodies, except tank swap bodies or swap bodies
carried in combined road/rail transport.
The placards shall be affixed to both sides and at each end of the container, bulk container, MEGC,
tank-container or portable tank and to two opposite sides in the case of flexible bulk containers.
When the tank-container or portable tank has multiple compartments and carries two or more dangerous
goods, the appropriate placards shall be displayed along each side at the position of the relevant
compartments and one placard of each model shown on each side at both ends. If all compartments have
to bear the same placards, these placards need to be displayed only once along each side and at both
ends of the tank container or portable tank.
5.3.1.3 Placarding of vehicles carrying containers, bulk containers, MEGCs, tank-containers or portable
tanks
NOTE: This sub-section does not apply to the placarding of vehicles carrying swap bodies other than
tank swap bodies or than swap bodies carried in combined road/rail transport; for such vehicles, see
5.3.1.5.
If the placards affixed to the containers, bulk containers, MEGCs, tank-containers or portable tanks are
not visible from outside the carrying vehicles, the same placards shall also be affixed to both sides and
at the rear of the vehicle. Otherwise, no placard need be affixed on the carrying vehicle.
5.3.1.4 Placarding of vehicles for carriage in bulk, tank-vehicles, battery-vehicles, MEMUs and vehicles
with demountable tanks
5.3.1.4.1 Placards shall be affixed to both sides and at the rear of the vehicle.
When the tank-vehicle or the demountable tank carried on the vehicle has multiple compartments and
carries two or more dangerous goods, the appropriate placards shall be displayed along each side at the
position of the relevant compartments and one placard of each model shown on each side at the rear of
the vehicle. If all compartments have to bear the same placards, these placards need be displayed only
once along each side and at the rear of the vehicle.
Where more than one placard is required for the same compartment, these placards shall be displayed
adjacent to each other.
NOTE: When, in the course of an ADR journey or at the end of an ADR journey, a tank semi-trailer is
separated from its tractor to be loaded on board a ship or an inland navigation vessel, placards shall
also be displayed at the front of the semi-trailer.
5.3.1.4.2 MEMUs with tanks and bulk containers shall be placarded in accordance with 5.3.1.4.1 for the
substances contained therein. For tanks with a capacity of less than 1 000 litres placards may be replaced
by labels conforming to 5.2.2.2.
5.3.1.4.3 For MEMUs carrying packages containing substances or articles of Class 1 (other than of Division 1.4,
Compatibility group S), placards shall be affixed to both sides and at the rear of the MEMU.
Special compartments for explosives shall be placarded in accordance with the provisions of 5.3.1.1.2.
The last sentence of 5.3.1.1.2 does not apply.
5.3.1.5 Placarding of vehicles carrying packages only
NOTE: This sub-section applies also to vehicles carrying swap bodies loaded with packages, except
for combined road/rail transport; for combined road/rail transport, see 5.3.1.2 and 5.3.1.3.
5.3.1.5.1 For vehicles carrying packages containing substances or articles of Class 1 (other than of Division 1.4,
compatibility group S), placards shall be affixed to both sides and at the rear of the vehicle.
5.3.1.5.2 For vehicles carrying radioactive material of Class 7 in packagings or IBCs (other than excepted
packages), placards shall be affixed to both sides and at the rear of the vehicle.
– 248 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 249 –
5.3.1.6 Placarding of empty tank-vehicles, battery-vehicles, MEGCs, MEMUs, tank-containers, portable
tanks and empty vehicles and containers for carriage in bulk
5.3.1.6.1 Empty tank-vehicles, vehicles with demountable tanks, battery-vehicles, MEGCs,
MEMUs, tank-containers and portable tanks uncleaned and not degassed, and empty vehicles and
containers for carriage in bulk, uncleaned, shall continue to display the placards required for the
previous load.
5.3.1.7 Specifications for placards
5.3.1.7.1 Except as provided in 5.3.1.7.2 for the Class 7 placard, and in 5.3.6.2 for the environmentally hazardous
substance mark, a placard shall be configured as shown in Figure 5.3.1.7.1.
Figure 5.3.1.7.1
Placard (except for Class 7)
The placard shall be in the form of a square set at an angle of 45° (diamond-shaped). The minimum
dimensions shall be 250 mm × 250 mm (to the edge of the placard). The line inside the edge shall be
parallel and 12.5 mm from the outside of that line to the edge of the placard. The symbol and line inside
the edge shall correspond in colour to the label for the class or division of the dangerous goods in
question. The class or division symbol/numeral shall be positioned and sized in proportion to those
prescribed in 5.2.2.2 for the corresponding class or division of the dangerous goods in question. The
placard shall display the number of the class or division (and for goods in Class 1, the compatibility
group letter) of the dangerous goods in question in the manner prescribed in 5.2.2.2 for the
corresponding label, in digits not less than 25 mm high. Where dimensions are not specified, all features
shall be in approximate proportion to those shown. The deviations specified in 5.2.2.2.1, second
sentence, 5.2.2.2.1.3, third sentence and 5.2.2.2.1.5 for danger labels also apply to placards.
5.3.1.7.2 The Class 7 placard shall be not less than 250 mm by 250 mm with a black line running 5 mm inside
the edge and parallel with it and is otherwise as shown below (Model No. 7D). The number “7” shall
not be less than 25 mm high. The background colour of the upper half of the placard shall be yellow
and of the lower half white, the colour of the trefoil and the printing shall be black. The use of the word
“RADIOACTIVE” in the bottom half is optional to allow the use of this placard to display the
appropriate UN number for the consignment.
– 249 –
12,5 mm
MINIMUM DIMENSION
250 mm
MINIMUM DIMENSION
250 mmCopyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
Placard for radioactive material of Class 7
(No.7D)
Symbol (trefoil): black;
Background:upper half yellow with white border, lower half white;
The lower half shall show the word “RADIOACTIVE” or alternatively,
the appropriate UN Number, and the figure “7” in the bottom corner.
5.3.1.7.3 For tanks with a capacity of not more than 3 m³ and for small containers, placards may be replaced by
labels conforming to 5.2.2.2. If these labels are not visible from outside the carrying vehicle, placards
according to 5.3.1.7.1 shall also be affixed to both sides and at the rear of the vehicle.
5.3.1.7.4 For Classes 1 and 7, if the size and construction of the vehicle are such that the available surface area
is insufficient to affix the prescribed placards, their dimensions may be reduced to 100 mm on each
side.
5.3.2 Orange-coloured plate marking
5.3.2.1 General orange-coloured plate marking provisions
5.3.2.1.1 Transport units carrying dangerous goods shall display two rectangular orange-coloured plates
conforming to 5.3.2.2.1, set in a vertical plane. They shall be affixed one at the front and the other at
the rear of the transport unit, both perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the transport unit. They shall
be clearly visible.
If a trailer containing dangerous goods is detached from its motor vehicle during carriage of dangerous
goods, an orange-coloured plate shall remain affixed to the rear of the trailer. When tanks are marked
in accordance with 5.3.2.1.3, this plate shall correspond to the most hazardous substance carried in the
tank.
5.3.2.1.2 When a hazard identification number is indicated in Column (20) of table A of Chapter 3.2, tank-
vehicles, battery vehicles or transport units having one or more tanks carrying dangerous goods shall in
addition display on the sides of each tank, each tank compartment or each element of battery vehicles,
clearly visible and parallel to the longitudinal axis of the vehicle, orange-coloured plates identical with
those prescribed in 5.3.2.1.1. These orange-coloured plates shall bear the hazard identification number
and the UN number prescribed respectively in Columns (20) and (1) of table A of Chapter 3.2 for each
of the substances carried in the tank, in a compartment of the tank or in an element of a battery vehicle.
For MEMUs these requirements shall only apply to tanks with a capacity of 1 000 litres or more and
bulk containers.
5.3.2.1.3 For tank-vehicles or transport units having one or more tanks carrying substances with UN Nos. 1202,
1203 or 1223, or aviation fuel classified under UN Nos. 1268 or 1863, but no other dangerous substance,
the orange-coloured plates prescribed in 5.3.2.1.2 need not be affixed if the plates affixed to the front
– 250 –
7
10 mm
MINIMUM
5 mm
RADIOACTIVE
MINIMUM DIMENSION
250 mm
MINIMUM DIMENSION
250 mmCopyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 251 –
and rear in accordance with 5.3.2.1.1 bear the hazard identification number and the UN number
prescribed for the most hazardous substance carried, i.e. the substance with the lowest flash-point.
5.3.2.1.4 When a hazard identification number is indicated in Column (20) of Table A of Chapter 3.2, vehicles,
containers and bulk containers carrying unpackaged solids or articles or packaged radioactive material
with a single UN number required to be carried under exclusive use and no other dangerous goods shall
in addition display on the sides of each vehicle, container or bulk container, clearly visible and parallel
to the longitudinal axis of the vehicle, orange-coloured plates identical with those prescribed
in 5.3.2.1.1. These orange-coloured plates shall bear the hazard identification number and the UN
number prescribed respectively in Columns (20) and (1) of table A of Chapter 3.2 for each of the
substances carried in bulk in the vehicle, in the container or in the bulk container or for the packaged
radioactive material when required to be carried under exclusive use in the vehicle or in the container.
5.3.2.1.5 If the orange-coloured plates prescribed in 5.3.2.1.2 and 5.3.2.1.4 affixed to the containers, bulk
containers, tank-containers, MEGCs or portable tanks are not clearly visible from outside the carrying
vehicle, the same plates shall also be affixed to both sides of the vehicle.
NOTE: This paragraph need not be applied to vehicles carrying containers for carriage in bulk, tanks
and MEGCs with a maximum capacity of 3 000 litres.
5.3.2.1.6 For transport units carrying only one dangerous substance and no non-dangerous substance, the orange-
coloured plates prescribed in 5.3.2.1.2, 5.3.2.1.4 and 5.3.2.1.5 shall not be necessary provided that those
displayed at the front and rear in accordance with 5.3.2.1.1 bear the hazard identification number and
the UN number for that substance prescribed respectively in Columns (20) and (1) of Table A of
Chapter 3.2.
5.3.2.1.7 The requirements of 5.3.2.1.1 to 5.3.2.1.5 are also applicable to empty fixed or demountable tanks,
battery-vehicles, tank-containers, portable tanks and MEGCs, uncleaned, not degassed or not
decontaminated, MEMUs, uncleaned as well as to empty vehicles and containers for carriage in bulk,
uncleaned or not decontaminated.
5.3.2.1.8 Orange-coloured plates which do not relate to dangerous goods carried, or residues thereof, shall be
removed or covered. If plates are covered, the covering shall be total and remain effective after 15
minutes’ engulfment in fire.
5.3.2.2 Specifications for the orange-coloured plates
5.3.2.2.1 The orange-coloured plates shall be reflectorized and shall be of 40 cm base and of 30 cm high; they
shall have a black border of 15 mm wide. The material used shall be weather-resistant and ensure
durable marking. The plate shall not become detached from its mount in the event of 15 minutes’
engulfment in fire. It shall remain affixed irrespective of the orientation of the vehicle. The orange-
coloured plates may be separated in their middle with a black horizontal line of 15 mm thickness.
If the size and construction of the vehicle are such that the available surface area is insufficient to affix
these orange-coloured plates, their dimensions may be reduced to a minimum of 300 mm for the base,
120 mm for the height and 10 mm for the black border. In this case, a different set of dimensions within
the specified range may be used for the two orange-coloured plates specified in 5.3.2.1.1.
When reduced dimensions of orange-coloured plates are used for a packaged radioactive material
carried under exclusive use, only the UN number is required and the size of the digits stipulated in
5.3.2.2.2 may be reduced to 65 mm in height and 10 mm in stroke thickness.
For containers carrying dangerous solid substances in bulk and for tank-containers, MEGCs and
portable tanks, the plates prescribed in 5.3.2.1.2, 5.3.2.1.4 and 5.3.2.1.5 may be replaced by a self-
adhesive sheet, by paint or by any other equivalent process. This alternative marking shall conform to
the specifications set in this sub-section except for the provisions concerning resistance to fire
mentioned in 5.3.2.2.1 and 5.3.2.2.2.
NOTE: The colour of the orange plates in conditions of normal use should have chromaticity co-
ordinates lying within the area on the chromaticity diagram formed by joining the following co-
ordinates:
– 251 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
Chromaticity co-ordinates of points at the corners of the area on the chromaticity diagram
x
y
0.52
0.38
0.52
0.40
0.578
0.422
0.618
0.38
Luminance factor of reflectorized colour: β > 0.12.
Reference centre E, standard illuminant C, normal incidence 45°, viewed at 0°.
Co-efficient of reflex luminous intensity at an angle of illumination of 5°, viewed at 0.2°: not less than
20 candelas per lux per m².
5.3.2.2.2 The hazard identification number and the UN number shall consist of black digits 100 mm high and of
15 mm stroke thickness. The hazard-identification number shall be inscribed in the upper part of the
plate and the UN number in the lower part; they shall be separated by a horizontal black line, 15 mm in
stroke width, extending from side to side of the plate at mid-height (see 5.3.2.2.3).The hazard
identification number and the UN number shall be indelible and shall remain legible after 15 minute’
engulfment in fire. Interchangeable numbers and letters on plates presenting the hazard identification
number and the UN number shall remain in place during carriage and irrespective of the orientation of
the vehicle.
5.3.2.2.3 Example of orange-coloured plate with hazard identification number and UN number
Background orange.
Border, horizontal line and figures black, 15 mm thickness.
5.3.2.2.4 The permitted tolerances for dimensions specified in this sub-section are ± 10 %.
5.3.2.2.5 When the orange-coloured plate is affixed to folding panels, they shall be designed and secured so that
they cannot unfold or come loose from the holder during carriage (especially as a result of impacts or
unintentional actions).
5.3.2.3 Meaning of hazard identification numbers
5.3.2.3.1 The hazard identification number consists of two or three figures. In general, the figures indicate the
following hazards:
2 Emission of gas due to pressure or to chemical reaction
3 Flammability of liquids (vapours) and gases or self-heating liquid
4 Flammability of solids or self-heating solid
5 Oxidizing (fire-intensifying) effect
6 Toxicity or risk of infection
7 Radioactivity
8 Corrosivity
9 Risk of spontaneous violent reaction
Hazard Identification
number (2 or 3 figures
preceded where
appropriate by the
letter X, see 5.3.2.3)
UN number
(4 figures)
– 252 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 253 –
NOTE: The risk of spontaneous violent reaction within the meaning of figure 9 include the possibility
following from the nature of a substance of a risk of explosion, disintegration and polymerization
reaction following the release of considerable heat or flammable and/or toxic gases.
Doubling of a figure indicates an intensification of that particular hazard.
Where the hazard associated with a substance can be adequately indicated by a single figure,
this is followed by zero.
The following combinations of figures, however, have a special meaning: 22, 323, 333, 362, 382, 423,
44, 446, 462, 482, 539, 606, 623, 642, 823, 842, 90 and 99, see 5.3.2.3.2 below.
If a hazard identification number is prefixed by the letter “X”, this indicates that the substance will react
dangerously with water. For such substances, water may only be used by approval of experts.
For substances of Class 1, the classification code in accordance with Column (3 b) of Table A of
Chapter 3.2, shall be used as the hazard identification number. The classification code consists of:
 the division number in accordance with 2.2.1.1.5; and
 the compatibility group letter in accordance with 2.2.1.1.6.
5.3.2.3.2 The hazard identification numbers listed in Column (20) of table A of Chapter 3.2 have the following
meanings:
20 asphyxiant gas or gas with no subsidiary hazard
22 refrigerated liquefied gas, asphyxiant
223 refrigerated liquefied gas, flammable
225 refrigerated liquefied gas, oxidizing (fire-intensifying)
23 flammable gas
238 gas, flammable corrosive
239 flammable gas, which can spontaneously lead to violent reaction
25 oxidizing (fire-intensifying) gas
26 toxic gas
263 toxic gas, flammable
265 toxic gas, oxidizing (fire-intensifying)
268 toxic gas, corrosive
28 gas, corrosive
30 flammable liquid (flash-point between 23 °C and 60 °C, inclusive) or
flammable liquid or solid in the molten state with a flash-point above 60 °C, heated to a
temperature equal to or above its flash-point, or
self-heating liquid
323 flammable liquid which reacts with water, emitting flammable gases
X323 flammable liquid which reacts dangerously with water, emitting flammable gases1
33 highly flammable liquid (flash-point below 23 °C)
333 pyrophoric liquid
X333 pyrophoric liquid which reacts dangerously with water1
336 highly flammable liquid, toxic
338 highly flammable liquid, corrosive
X338 highly flammable liquid, corrosive, which reacts dangerously with water1
339 highly flammable liquid which can spontaneously lead to violent reaction
36 flammable liquid (flash-point between 23 °C and 60 °C, inclusive), slightly toxic, or self-
heating liquid, toxic
362 flammable liquid, toxic, which reacts with water, emitting flammable gases
X362 flammable liquid toxic, which reacts dangerously with water, emitting flammable gases1
368 flammable liquid, toxic, corrosive
38 flammable liquid (flash-point between 23 °C and 60 °C, inclusive), slightly corrosive or
self-heating liquid, corrosive
382 flammable liquid, corrosive, which reacts with water, emitting flammable gases
1 Water not to be used except by approval of experts.
– 253 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 254 –
X382 flammable liquid, corrosive, which reacts dangerously with water, emitting flammable
gases1
39 flammable liquid, which can spontaneously lead to violent reaction
40 flammable solid, or self-reactive substance, or self-heating substance, or polymerizing
substance
423 solid which reacts with water, emitting flammable gases, or flammable solid which reacts
with water, emitting flammable gases or self-heating solid which reacts with water,
emitting flammable gases
X423 solid which reacts dangerously with water, emitting flammable gases, or flammable solid
which reacts dangerously with water, emitting flammable gases, or self-heating solid
which reacts dangerously with water, emitting flammable gases1
43 spontaneously flammable (pyrophoric) solid
X432 spontaneously flammable (pyrophoric) solid which reacts dangerously with water,
emitting flammable gases1
44 flammable solid, in the molten state at an elevated temperature
446 flammable solid, toxic, in the molten state, at an elevated temperature
46 flammable or self-heating solid, toxic
462 toxic solid which reacts with water, emitting flammable gases
X462 solid which reacts dangerously with water, emitting toxic gases1
48 flammable or self-heating solid, corrosive
482 corrosive solid which reacts with water, emitting flammable gases
X482 solid which reacts dangerously with water, emitting corrosive gases1
50 oxidizing (fire-intensifying) substance
539 flammable organic peroxide
55 strongly oxidizing (fire-intensifying) substance
556 strongly oxidizing (fire-intensifying) substance, toxic
558 strongly oxidizing (fire-intensifying) substance, corrosive
559 strongly oxidizing (fire-intensifying) substance, which can spontaneously lead to violent
reaction
56 oxidizing substance (fire-intensifying), toxic
568 oxidizing substance (fire-intensifying), toxic, corrosive
58 oxidizing substance (fire-intensifying), corrosive
59 oxidizing substance (fire-intensifying) which can spontaneously lead to violent reaction
60 toxic or slightly toxic substance
606 infectious substance
623 toxic liquid, which reacts with water, emitting flammable gases
63 toxic substance, flammable (flash-point between 23 °C and 60 °C, inclusive)
638 toxic substance, flammable (flash-point between 23 °C and 60 °C, inclusive), corrosive
639 toxic substance, flammable (flash-point not above 60 °C) which can spontaneously lead
to violent reaction
64 toxic solid, flammable or self-heating
642 toxic solid, which reacts with water, emitting flammable gases
65 toxic substance, oxidizing (fire-intensifying)
66 highly toxic substance
663 highly toxic substance, flammable (flash-point not above 60 °C)
664 highly toxic solid, flammable or self-heating
665 highly toxic substance, oxidizing (fire-intensifying)
668 highly toxic substance, corrosive
X668 highly toxic substance, corrosive, which reacts dangerously with water1
669 highly toxic substance which can spontaneously lead to violent reaction
68 toxic substance, corrosive
69 toxic or slightly toxic substance, which can spontaneously lead to violent reaction
70 radioactive material
768 radioactive material, toxic, corrosive
78 radioactive material, corrosive
80 corrosive or slightly corrosive substance
X80 corrosive or slightly corrosive substance, which reacts dangerously with water1
1 Water not to be used except by approval of experts.
– 254 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
823 corrosive liquid which reacts with water, emitting flammable gases
83 corrosive or slightly corrosive substance, flammable (flash-point between 23 °C and
60 °C, inclusive)
X83 corrosive or slightly corrosive substance, flammable, (flash-point between 23 °C and
60 °C, inclusive), which reacts dangerously with water1
836 Corrosive or slightly corrosive substance, flammable (flash-point between 23 °C and
60 °C, inclusive) and toxic
839 corrosive or slightly corrosive substance, flammable (flash-point between 23 °C and
60 °C inclusive) which can spontaneously lead to violent reaction
X839 corrosive or slightly corrosive substance, flammable (flash-point between 23 °C and
60 °C inclusive), which can spontaneously lead to violent reaction and which reacts
dangerously with water1
84 corrosive solid, flammable or self-heating
842 corrosive solid which reacts with water, emitting flammable gases
85 corrosive or slightly corrosive substance, oxidizing (fire-intensifying)
856 corrosive or slightly corrosive substance, oxidizing (fire-intensifying) and toxic
86 corrosive or slightly corrosive substance, toxic
88 highly corrosive substance
X88 highly corrosive substance, which reacts dangerously with water1
883 highly corrosive substance, flammable (flash-point between 23 °C and 60 °C inclusive)
884 highly corrosive solid, flammable or self-heating
885 highly corrosive substance, oxidizing (fire-intensifying)
886 highly corrosive substance, toxic
X886 highly corrosive substance, toxic, which reacts dangerously with water1
89 corrosive or slightly corrosive substance, which can spontaneously lead to violent
reaction
90 environmentally hazardous substance; miscellaneous dangerous substances
99 miscellaneous dangerous substance carried at an elevated temperature.
5.3.3 Elevated temperature substance mark
Tank-vehicles, tank-containers, portable tanks, special vehicles or containers or specially equipped
vehicles or containers containing a substance that is carried or handed over for carriage in a liquid state
at or above 100 °C or in a solid state at or above 240 °C shall bear on both sides and at the rear for
vehicles, and on both sides and at each end for containers, tank-containers and portable tanks, the mark
shown in Figure 5.3.3.
Figure 5.3.3
Mark for carriage at elevated temperature
The mark shall be an equilateral triangle. The colour of the mark shall be red. The minimum dimension
of the sides shall be 250 mm. For tank-containers or portable tanks with a capacity of not more than
3 000 litres and with an available surface area insufficient to affix the prescribed marks, the minimum
dimensions of the sides may be reduced to 100 mm. Where dimensions are not specified, all features
1 Water not to be used except by approval of experts.
– 255 –
Minimum dimension 250 mm
Minimum dimension 250 mm
Minimum dimension 250 mmCopyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 256 –
shall be in approximate proportion to those shown. The mark shall be weather-resistant and shall ensure
durable marking throughout the entire journey.
5.3.4 (Reserved)
5.3.5 (Reserved)
5.3.6 Environmentally hazardous substance mark
5.3.6.1 When a placard is required to be displayed in accordance with the provisions of section 5.3.1,
containers, bulk containers, MEGCs, tank-containers, portable tanks and vehicles containing
environmentally hazardous substances meeting the criteria of 2.2.9.1.10 shall be marked with the
environmentally hazardous substance mark shown in 5.2.1.8.3. This does not apply to the exceptions
listed in 5.2.1.8.1.
5.3.6.2 The environmentally hazardous substance mark for containers, bulk containers, MEGCs, tank-
containers, portable tanks and vehicles shall be as described in 5.2.1.8.3 and Figure 5.2.1.8.3, except
that the minimum dimensions shall be 250 mm × 250 mm. For tank-containers or portable tanks with a
capacity of not more than 3 000 litres and with an available surface area insufficient to affix the
prescribed marks, the minimum dimensions may be reduced to 100 mm × 100 mm. The other provisions
of section 5.3.1 concerning placards shall apply mutatis mutandis to the mark.
– 256 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 257 –
CHAPTER 5.4
DOCUMENTATION
5.4.0 General
5.4.0.1 Unless otherwise specified, any carriage of goods governed by ADR shall be accompanied by the
documentation prescribed in this Chapter, as appropriate.
NOTE: For the list of documentation to be carried on board transport units, see 8.1.2.
5.4.0.2 The use of electronic data processing (EDP) or electronic data interchange (EDI) techniques as an aid
to or instead of paper documentation is permitted, provided that the procedures used for the capture,
storage and processing of electronics data meet the legal requirements as regards the evidential value
and availability of data during transport in a manner at least equivalent to that of paper documentation.
5.4.0.3 When the dangerous goods transport information is given to the carrier by EDP or EDI techniques, the
consignor shall be able to give the information to the carrier as a paper document, with the information
in the sequence required by this Chapter.
5.4.1 Dangerous goods transport document and related information
5.4.1.1 General information required in the transport document
5.4.1.1.1 The transport document(s) shall contain the following information for each dangerous substance,
material or article offered for carriage:
(a) the UN number preceded by the letters “UN”;
(b) the proper shipping name supplemented, when applicable (see 3.1.2.8.1) with the technical name
in brackets (see 3.1.2.8.1.1), as determined in accordance with 3.1.2;
(c) – for substances and articles of Class 1: the classification code given in Column (3b) of
Table A in Chapter 3.2.
When, in Column (5) of Table A in Chapter 3.2, label model numbers other than 1, 1.4,
1.5 and 1.6 are given, these label model numbers, in brackets, shall follow the
classification code;
– for radioactive material of Class 7: the Class number: “7”;
NOTE: For radioactive material with a subsidiary hazard, see also special provision
172 in Chapter 3.3.
– for lithium batteries of UN numbers 3090, 3091, 3480 and 3481: the Class number “9”;
– for other substances and articles: the label model numbers given in Column (5) of Table
A in Chapter 3.2 or applicable according to a special provision referred to in Column (6).
When more than one label model numbers are given, the numbers following the first one
shall be given in brackets. For substances and articles for which no label model is given
in Column (5) of Table A in Chapter 3.2, their class according to Column (3a) shall be
given instead;
(d) where assigned, the packing group for the substance which may be preceded by the letters “PG”
(e.g. “PG II”), or the initials corresponding to the words “Packing Group” in the languages used
according to 5.4.1.4.1;
NOTE: For radioactive material of Class 7 with subsidiary hazards, see special provision 172
(d) in Chapter 3.3.
– 257 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 258 –
(e) the number and a description of the packages when applicable. UN packaging codes may only
be used to supplement the description of the kind of package (e.g. one box (4G));
NOTE: The number, type and capacity of each inner packaging within the outer packaging of
a combination packaging is not required to be indicated.
(f) the total quantity of each item of dangerous goods bearing a different UN number, proper
shipping name or, when applicable, packing group (as a volume or as a gross mass, or as a net
mass as appropriate);
NOTE 1: In the case of intended application of 1.1.3.6, the total quantity and the calculated
value of dangerous goods for each transport category shall be indicated in the transport
document in accordance with 1.1.3.6.3 and 1.1.3.6.4 .
NOTE 2: For dangerous goods in machinery or equipment specified in this Annex, the quantity
indicated shall be the total quantity of dangerous goods contained therein in kilograms or litres
as appropriate.
(g) the name and address of the consignor;
(h) the name and address of the consignee(s). With the agreement of the competent authorities of
the countries concerned by the carriage, when dangerous goods are carried to be delivered to
multiple consignees who cannot be identified at the start of the carriage, the words “Delivery
Sale” may be given instead;
(i) a declaration as required by the terms of any special agreement;
(j) (Reserved)
(k) for carriage that includes passage through tunnels with restrictions for carriage of dangerous
goods, the tunnel restriction code given in Column (15) of Table A of Chapter 3.2, in capitals
within parenthesis, or the mention ‘(─)’ or as specified in a special arrangement in accordance
with 1.7.4.2.
The location and order in which the elements of information required appear in the transport document
is left optional, except that (a), (b), (c), (d) and (k) shall be shown in the order listed above (i.e. (a), (b),
(c), (d), (k)) with no information interspersed, except as provided in ADR.
Examples of such permitted dangerous goods descriptions are:
“UN 1098 ALLYL ALCOHOL, 6.1 (3), I, (C/D)” or
“UN 1098, ALLYL ALCOHOL, 6.1 (3), PG I, (C/D)”
5.4.1.1.2 The information required on a transport document shall be legible.
Although upper case is used in Chapter 3.1 and in Table A in Chapter 3.2 to indicate the elements which
shall be part of the proper shipping name, and although upper and lower case are used in this Chapter
to indicate the information required in the transport document, except for the provisions in 5.4.1.1.1 (k),
the use of upper or of lower case for entering the information in the transport document is left optional.
5.4.1.1.3 Special provisions for wastes
5.4.1.1.3.1 If waste containing dangerous goods (other than radioactive wastes) is being carried, the proper shipping
name shall be preceded by the word “WASTE”, unless this term is part of the proper shipping name,
e.g.:
“UN 1230 WASTE METHANOL, 3 (6.1), II, (D/E)”, or
“UN 1230 WASTE METHANOL, 3 (6.1), PG II, (D/E)”, or
“UN 1993 WASTE FLAMMABLE LIQUID, N.O.S. (toluene and ethyl alcohol), 3, II, (D/E)”, or
“UN 1993 WASTE FLAMMABLE LIQUID, N.O.S. (toluene and ethyl alcohol), 3, PG II, (D/E)”.
If the provision for waste as set out in 2.1.3.5.5 is applied, the following shall be added to the dangerous
goods description required in 5.4.1.1.1 (a) to (d) and (k):
– 258 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 259 –
“WASTE IN ACCORDANCE WITH 2.1.3.5.5” (e.g. “UN 3264, CORROSIVE LIQUID, ACIDIC,
INORGANIC, N.O.S., 8, II, (E), WASTE IN ACCORDANCE WITH 2.1.3.5.5”).
The technical name, as prescribed in Chapter 3.3, special provision 274, need not be added.
5.4.1.1.3.2 If it is not possible to measure the exact quantity of the waste at the place of loading, the quantity
according to 5.4.1.1.1 (f) may be estimated for the following cases under the following conditions:
(a) For packagings, a list of packagings including the type and the nominal volume is added to the
transport document;
(b) For containers, the estimation is based on their nominal volume and other available information
(e.g. type of waste, average density, degree of filling);
(c) For vacuum-operated waste tanks, the estimation is justified (e.g. by means of an estimation
provided by the consigner or by vehicle equipment).
Such estimation of the quantity is not allowed for:
– Exemptions for which the exact quantity is essential (e.g. 1.1.3.6);
– Waste containing substances mentioned in 2.1.3.5.3 or substances of Class 4.3;
– Tanks other than vacuum-operated waste tanks.
A statement shall be included in the transport document, as follows:
“QUANTITY ESTIMATED IN ACCORDANCE WITH 5.4.1.1.3.2”.
5.4.1.1.4 (Deleted)
5.4.1.1.5 Special provisions for salvage packagings including large salvage packagings and salvage pressure
receptacles
When dangerous goods are carried in salvage packagings in accordance with 4.1.1.19, including large
salvage packagings, larger size packagings or large packagings of appropriate type and performance
level to be used as a salvage packaging, the words “SALVAGE PACKAGING” shall be added after
the description of the goods in the transport document.
When dangerous goods are carried in salvage pressure receptacles in accordance with 4.1.1.20, the
words “SALVAGE PRESSURE RECEPTACLE” shall be added after the description of the goods in
the transport document.
5.4.1.1.6 Special provision for empty means of containment, uncleaned
5.4.1.1.6.1 For empty means of containment, uncleaned, which contain the residue of dangerous goods of classes
other than Class 7, the words “EMPTY, UNCLEANED” or “RESIDUE, LAST CONTAINED” shall be
indicated before or after the dangerous goods description specified in 5.4.1.1.1 (a) to (d) and (k).
Moreover, 5.4.1.1.1 (f) does not apply.
5.4.1.1.6.2 The special provision of 5.4.1.1.6.1 may be replaced with the provisions of 5.4.1.1.6.2.1, 5.4.1.1.6.2.2
or 5.4.1.1.6.2.3, as appropriate.
5.4.1.1.6.2.1 For empty packagings, uncleaned, which contain the residue of dangerous goods of classes other than
Class 7, including empty uncleaned receptacles for gases with a capacity of not more than 1 000 litres,
the particulars according to 5.4.1.1.1 (a), (b), (c), (d), (e) and (f) are replaced with “EMPTY
PACKAGING”, “EMPTY RECEPTACLE”, “EMPTY IBC” or “EMPTY LARGE PACKAGING”, as
appropriate, followed by the information of the goods last loaded, as described in 5.4.1.1.1 (c).
See example as follows: “EMPTY PACKAGING, 6.1 (3)”.
In addition, in such a case:
– 259 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 260 –
(a) If the dangerous goods last loaded are goods of Class 2, the information prescribed in
5.4.1.1.1 (c) may be replaced by the number of the Class “2”;
(b) If the dangerous goods last loaded are goods of Classes 3, 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 5.1, 5.2, 6.1, 8 or 9, the
information of the goods last loaded, as described in 5.4.1.1.1 (c) may be replaced by the words
“WITH RESIDUES OF […]” followed by the class(es) and subsidiary hazard(s) corresponding
to the different residues, in the class numbering order.
Example:
Empty packagings, uncleaned, having contained goods of Class 3 carried together with empty
packagings, uncleaned, having contained goods of Class 8 with a Class 6.1 subsidiary hazard may be
referred to in the transport document as:
“EMPTY PACKAGINGS, WITH RESIDUES OF 3, 6.1, 8”.
5.4.1.1.6.2.2 For empty means of containment other than packagings, uncleaned, which contain the residue of
dangerous goods of classes other than Class 7 and for empty uncleaned receptacles for gases with a
capacity of more than 1 000 litres, the particulars according to 5.4.1.1.1 (a) to (d) and (k) are preceded
by “EMPTY TANK-VEHICLE”, “EMPTY DEMOUNTABLE TANK”, “EMPTY TANK-
CONTAINER”, “EMPTY PORTABLE TANK”, “EMPTY BATTERY-VEHICLE”, “EMPTY
MEGC”, “EMPTY MEMU”, “EMPTY VEHICLE”, “EMPTY CONTAINER” or “EMPTY
RECEPTACLE”, as appropriate, followed by the words “LAST LOAD:”. Moreover, paragraph
5.4.1.1.1 (f) does not apply.
See examples as follows:
“EMPTY TANK-VEHICLE, LAST LOAD: UN 1098 ALLYL ALCOHOL, 6.1 (3), I, (C/D)” or
“EMPTY TANK-VEHICLE, LAST LOAD: UN 1098 ALLYL ALCOHOL, 6.1 (3), PG I, (C/D)”.
5.4.1.1.6.2.3 When empty means of containment, uncleaned, which contain the residue of dangerous goods of classes
other than Class 7, are returned to the consignor, the transport documents prepared for the full-capacity
carriage of these goods may also be used. In such cases, the indication of the quantity is to be eliminated
(by effacing it, striking it out or any other means) and replaced by the words “EMPTY, UNCLEANED
RETURN”.
5.4.1.1.6.3 (a) If empty tanks, battery- vehicles and MEGCs, uncleaned, are carried to the nearest place where
cleaning or repair can be carried out in accordance with the provisions of 4.3.2.4.3, the
following additional entry shall be made in the transport document: “Carriage in accordance
with 4.3.2.4.3”.
(b) If empty vehicles and containers, uncleaned, are carried to the nearest place where cleaning or
repair can be carried out in accordance with the provisions of 7.5.8.1, the following additional
entry shall be made in the transport document: “Carriage in accordance with 7.5.8.1”.
5.4.1.1.6.4 For the carriage of fixed tanks (tank vehicles), demountable tanks, battery-vehicles, tank-containers and
MEGCs under the conditions of 4.3.2.4.4, the following entry shall be included in the transport
document: “Carriage in accordance with 4.3.2.4.4”.
5.4.1.1.7 Special provisions for carriage in a transport chain including maritime or air carriage
For carriage in accordance with 1.1.4.2.1, a statement shall be included in the transport document, as
follows: “Carriage in accordance with 1.1.4.2.1”.
5.4.1.1.8 and 5.4.1.1.9 (Reserved)
5.4.1.1.10 (Deleted)
– 260 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 261 –
5.4.1.1.11 Special provisions for the carriage of IBCs, tanks, battery-vehicles, portable tanks and MEGCs after
the date of expiry of the last periodic test or inspection
For carriage in accordance with 4.1.2.2 (b), 4.3.2.3.7 (b), 6.7.2.19.6.1 (b), 6.7.3.15.6.1 (b) or 6.7.4.14.6.1
(b), a statement to this effect shall be included in the transport document, as follows:
“CARRIAGE IN ACCORDANCE WITH 4.1.2.2 (b)”,
“CARRIAGE IN ACCORDANCE WITH 4.3.2.3.7 (b)”,
“CARRIAGE IN ACCORDANCE WITH 6.7.2.19.6.1 (b)”,
“CARRIAGE IN ACCORDANCE WITH 6.7.3.15.6.1 (b)”; or
“CARRIAGE IN ACCORDANCE WITH 6.7.4.14.6.1 (b)” as appropriate.
5.4.1.1.12 (Reserved)
5.4.1.1.13 Special provisions for carriage in multi-compartment tank-vehicles or transport units with more than
one tank
When by derogation from 5.3.2.1.2 a multi-compartment tank-vehicle or a transport unit with more than
one tank is marked in accordance with 5.3.2.1.3, the substances contained in each tank or in each
compartment of a tank shall be specified in the transport document.
5.4.1.1.14 Special provisions for the carriage of substances carried under elevated temperature
If the proper shipping name of a substance which is carried or offered for carriage in a liquid state at a
temperature equal to or exceeding 100 °C, or in a solid state at a temperature equal to or exceeding
240 °C, does not convey the elevated temperature condition (for example, by using the term
“MOLTEN” or “ELEVATED TEMPERATURE” as part of the proper shipping name), the word
“HOT” shall immediately precede the proper shipping name.
5.4.1.1.15 Special provisions for the carriage of stabilized and temperature controled substances
Unless already part of the proper shipping name the word “STABILIZED” shall be added to the proper
shipping name if stabilization is used and the words “TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED” shall be
added to the proper shipping name if stabilization is by temperature control or a combination of chemical
stabilization and temperature control (see 3.1.2.6).
If the words “TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED” are part of the proper shipping name (see also
3.1.2.6), the control and emergency temperatures (see 7.1.7) shall be indicated in the transport
document, as follows:
“Control temperature: ….°C Emergency temperature: …. °C”
5.4.1.1.16 (Deleted)
5.4.1.1.17 Special provisions for the carriage of solids in bulk containers conforming to 6.11.4
When solid substances are carried in bulk containers conforming to 6.11.4, the following statement shall
be shown on the transport document (see NOTE at the beginning of 6.11.4):
“Bulk container BK(x)1 approved by the competent authority of…”
5.4.1.1.18 Special provisions for carriage of environmentally hazardous substances (aquatic environment)
When a substance belonging to one of classes 1 to 9 meets the classification criteria of 2.2.9.1.10, the
transport document shall bear the additional inscription “ENVIRONMENTALLY HAZARDOUS” or
“MARINE POLLUTANT/ENVIRONMENTALLY HAZARDOUS”. This additional requirement
does not apply to UN Nos. 3077 and 3082 or for the exceptions listed in 5.2.1.8.1.
1 (x) shall be replaced with “1” or “2” as appropriate.
– 261 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 262 –
The inscription “MARINE POLLUTANT” (according to 5.4.1.4.3 of the IMDG Code) is acceptable
for carriage in a transport chain including maritime carriage.
5.4.1.1.19 Special provisions for carriage of packagings, discarded, empty, uncleaned (UN 3509)
For packagings, discarded, empty, uncleaned, the proper shipping name specified in 5.4.1.1.1 (b) shall
be complemented with the words “(WITH RESIDUES OF […])” followed by the class(es) and
subsidiary hazard(s) corresponding to the residues, in the class numbering order. Moreover, 5.4.1.1.1
(f) does not apply.
Example: Packagings, discarded, empty, uncleaned having contained goods of Class 4.1 packed
together with packagings, discarded, empty, uncleaned having contained goods of Class 3 with a Class
6.1 subsidiary hazard should be referred to in the transport document as:
“UN 3509 PACKAGINGS, DISCARDED, EMPTY, UNCLEANED (WITH RESIDUES OF 3, 4.1,
6.1), 9”.
5.4.1.1.20 Special provisions for the carriage of substances classified in accordance with 2.1.2.8
For carriage in accordance with 2.1.2.8, a statement shall be included in the transport document, as
follows “Classified in accordance with 2.1.2.8”.
5.4.1.1.21 Additional information in the case of the application of special provisions
Where, in accordance with a special provision in Chapter 3.3, additional information is necessary, this
additional information shall be included in the transport document.
5.4.1.1.22 (Reserved)
5.4.1.1.23 Special provisions for the carriage of substances carried in molten state
When a substance, which is solid in accordance with the definition in 1.2.1, is offered for carriage in
the molten state, the qualifying word “MOLTEN” shall be added as part of the proper shipping name,
unless it is already part of the proper shipping name (see 3.1.2.5).
5.4.1.1.24 Special provisions for refillable pressure receptacles authorized by the United States of America
Department of Transportation
For carriage in accordance with 1.1.4.7, a statement shall be included in the transport document, as
follows:
“CARRIAGE IN ACCORDANCE WITH 1.1.4.7.1” or
“CARRIAGE IN ACCORDANCE WITH 1.1.4.7.2”, as appropriate.
5.4.1.2 Additional or special information required for certain classes
5.4.1.2.1 Special provisions for Class 1
(a) The transport document shall indicate, in addition to the requirements in 5.4.1.1.1 (f):
– the total net mass, in kg, of explosive contents2 for each substance or article bearing a
different UN number;
– the total net mass, in kg, of explosive contents2 for all substances and articles covered by
the transport document;
(b) For mixed packing of two different goods, the description of the goods in the transport document
shall include the UN numbers and names printed in capitals in Columns (1) and (2) of Table A
of Chapter 3.2 of both substances or articles. If more than two different goods are contained in
the same package in conformity with the mixed packing provisions given in 4.1.10 special
provisions MP1, MP2 and MP20 to MP24, the transport document shall indicate under the
2 For articles, “explosive contents” means the explosive substance contained in the article.
– 262 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 263 –
description of the goods the UN numbers of all the substances and articles contained in the
package, in the form, “Goods of UN Nos…”;
(c) For the carriage of substances and articles assigned to an n.o.s. entry or the entry “0190
SAMPLES, EXPLOSIVE” or packed conforming to packing instruction P101 of 4.1.4.1, a copy
of the competent authority approval with the conditions of carriage shall be attached to the
transport document. It shall be drafted in an official language of the forwarding country and also,
if that language is not English, French or German, in English, French or German unless
agreements, if any, concluded between the countries concerned in the transport operation provide
otherwise;
(d) If packages containing substances and articles of compatibility groups B and D are loaded
together in the same vehicle in accordance with the requirements of 7.5.2.2, a copy of the
competent authority approval of the protective compartment or containment system in
accordance with 7.5.2.2, note a under the table, shall be attached to the transport document. It
shall be drafted in an official language of the forwarding country and also, if that language is not
English, French or German, in English, French or German unless agreements, if any, concluded
between the countries concerned in the transport operation provide otherwise;
(e) When explosive substances or articles are carried in packagings conforming to packing
instruction P101, the transport document shall bear the inscription “Packaging approved by the
competent authority of …” (see 4.1.4.1, packing instruction P101);
(f) (Reserved)
(g) When fireworks of UN Nos. 0333, 0334, 0335, 0336 and 0337 are carried, the transport
document shall bear the inscription:
“Classification of fireworks by the competent authority of XX with the firework reference
XX/YYZZZZ”.
The classification approval certificate need not be carried with the consignment, but shall be
made available by the consignor to the carrier or the competent authorities for control purposes.
The classification approval certificate or a copy of it shall be in an official language of the
forwarding country, and also, if that language is not German, English or French, in German,
English or French.
NOTE 1: The commercial or technical name of the goods may be entered additionally to the proper
shipping name in the transport document.
NOTE 2: The classification reference(s) shall consist of the ADR Contracting Party in which the
classification code according to special provision 645 of 3.3.1 was approved, indicated by the
distinguishing sign used on vehicles in international road traffic (XX)3, the competent authority
identification (YY) and a unique serial reference (ZZZZ). Examples of such classification references
are:
GB/HSE123456
D/BAM1234.
5.4.1.2.2 Additional provisions for Class 2
(a) For the carriage of mixtures (see 2.2.2.1.1) in tanks (demountable tanks, fixed tanks, portable
tanks, tank-containers or elements of battery-vehicles or of MEGCs), the composition of the
mixture as a percentage of the volume or as a percentage of the mass shall be given. Constituents
below 1 % need not be indicated (see also 3.1.2.8.1.2). The composition of the mixture need not
be given when the technical names authorized by special provisions 581, 582 or 583 are used to
supplement the proper shipping name;
3 Distinguishing sign of the State of registration used on motor vehicles and trailers in international road traffic,
e.g. in accordance with the Geneva Convention on Road Traffic of 1949 or the Vienna Convention on Road Traffic of
1968.
– 263 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 264 –
(b) For the carriage of cylinders, tubes, pressure drums, cryogenic receptacles and bundles of
cylinders under the conditions of 4.1.6.10, the following entry shall be included in the transport
document: “Carriage in accordance with 4.1.6.10”.
(c) (Reserved)
(d) In the case of tank-containers or portable tanks carrying refrigerated liquefied gases the
consignor shall enter in the transport document the date at which the actual holding time ends,
in the following format:
“End of holding time: …………… (DD/MM/YYYY)”.
(e) For carriage of UN No. 1012, the transport document shall contain the name of the specific gas
carried (see special provision 398 of Chapter 3.3) in brackets after the proper shipping name.
5.4.1.2.3 Additional provisions for self-reactive substances and polymerizing substances of Class 4.1 and organic
peroxides of Class 5.2
5.4.1.2.3.1 For self-reactive substances or polymerizing substances of Class 4.1 and for organic peroxides of Class
5.2 that require temperature control during carriage (for self-reactive substances see 2.2.41.1.17; for
polymerizing substance see 2.2.41.1.21; for organic peroxides, see 2.2.52.1.15), the control and
emergency temperatures shall be indicated in the transport document, as follows:
“Control temperature: … °C Emergency temperature: … °C”.
5.4.1.2.3.2 When for certain self-reactive substances of Class 4.1 and certain organic peroxides of Class 5.2 the
competent authority has permitted the label conforming to model No.1 to be dispensed with for a
specific packaging (see 5.2.2.1.9), a statement to this effect shall be included in the transport document,
as follows:
“The label conforming to model No. 1 is not required”.
5.4.1.2.3.3 When organic peroxides and self-reactive substances are carried under conditions where approval is
required (for organic peroxides see 2.2.52.1.8, 4.1.7.2.2 and special provision TA2 of 6.8.4; for
self-reactive substances see 2.2.41.1.13 and 4.1.7.2.2, a statement to his effect shall be included in the
transport document, e.g. “Carriage in accordance with 2.2.52.1.8”.
A copy of the competent authority approval with the conditions of carriage shall be attached to the
transport document. It shall be drafted in an official language of the forwarding country and also, if that
language is not English, French or German, in English, French or German unless agreements, if any,
concluded between the countries concerned in the transport operation provide otherwise.
5.4.1.2.3.4 When a sample of an organic peroxide (see 2.2.52.1.9) or a self-reactive substance (see 2.2.41.1.15) is
carried, a statement to this effect shall be included in the transport document, e.g. “Carriage in
accordance with 2.2.52.1.9”.
5.4.1.2.3.5 When self-reactive substances type G (see Manual of Tests and Criteria, Part II, paragraph 20.4.2 (g))
are carried, the following statement may be given in the transport document: “Not a self-reactive
substance of Class 4.1”.
When organic peroxides type G (see Manual of Tests and Criteria, Part II, paragraph 20.4.3 (g)) are
carried, the following statement may be given in the transport document: “Not a substance of Class
5.2”.
5.4.1.2.4 Additional provisions for Class 6.2
In addition to the information concerning the consignee (see 5.4.1.1.1 (h)), the name and telephone
number of a responsible person shall be indicated.
– 264 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 265 –
5.4.1.2.5 Additional provisions for Class 7
5.4.1.2.5.1 The following information shall be inserted in the transport document for each consignment of Class 7
material, as applicable, in the order given and immediately after the information required under 5.4.1.1.1
(a) to (c) and (k):
(a) The name or symbol of each radionuclide or, for mixtures of radionuclides, an appropriate
general description or a list of the most restrictive nuclides;
(b) A description of the physical and chemical form of the material, or a notation that the material
is special form radioactive material or low dispersible radioactive material. A generic chemical
description is acceptable for chemical form. For radioactive material with a subsidiary hazard,
see sub-paragraph (c) of special provision 172 of Chapter 3.3;
(c) The maximum activity of the radioactive contents during carriage expressed in becquerels (Bq)
with an appropriate SI prefix symbol (see 1.2.2.1). For fissile material, the mass of fissile
material (or mass of each fissile nuclide for mixtures when appropriate) in grams (g), or
appropriate multiples thereof, may be used in place of activity;
(d) The category of the package, overpack or container, as assigned per 5.1.5.3.4, i.e. I-WHITE,
II-YELLOW, III-YELLOW;
(e) The TI as determined per 5.1.5.3.1 and 5.1.5.3.2 (except for category I-WHITE);
(f) For fissile material:
(i) Shipped under one exception of 2.2.7.2.3.5 (a) to (f), reference to that paragraph;
(ii) Shipped under 2.2.7.2.3.5 (c) to (e), the total mass of fissile nuclides;
(iii) Contained in a package for which one of 6.4.11.2 (a) to (c) or 6.4.11.3 is applied, reference
to that paragraph;
(iv) The criticality safety index, where applicable;
(g) The identification mark for each competent authority certificate of approval (special form
radioactive material, low dispersible radioactive material, fissile material excepted under
2.2.7.2.3.5 (f), special arrangement, package design, or shipment) applicable to the consignment;
(h) For consignments of more than one package, the information required in 5.4.1.1.1 and in (a) to
(g) above shall be given for each package. For packages in an overpack, container, or vehicle, a
detailed statement of the contents of each package within the overpack, container, or vehicle and,
where appropriate, of each overpack, container, or vehicle shall be included. If packages are to
be removed from the overpack, container, or vehicle at a point of intermediate unloading,
appropriate transport documents shall be made available;
(i) Where a consignment is required to be shipped under exclusive use, the statement
“EXCLUSIVE USE SHIPMENT”; and
(j) For LSA-II and LSA-III substances, SCO-I, SCO-II and SCO-III, the total activity of the
consignment as a multiple of A 2. For radioactive material for which the A2 value is unlimited,
the multiple of A 2 shall be zero.
5.4.1.2.5.2 The consignor shall provide in the transport documents a statement regarding actions, if any, that are
required to be taken by the carrier. The statement shall be in the languages deemed necessary by the
carrier or the authorities concerned, and shall include at least the following information:
(a) Supplementary requirements for loading, stowage, carriage, handling and unloading of the
package, overpack or container including any special stowage provisions for the safe dissipation
of heat (see special provision CV33 (3.2) of 7.5.11), or a statement that no such requirements are
necessary;
(b) Restrictions on the mode of carriage or vehicle and any necessary routeing instructions;
(c) Emergency arrangements appropriate to the consignment.
– 265 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 266 –
5.4.1.2.5.3 In all cases of international carriage of packages requiring competent authority approval of design or
shipment, for which different approval types apply in the different countries concerned by the shipment,
the UN number and proper shipping name required in 5.4.1.1.1 shall be in accordance with the certificate
of the country of origin of design.
5.4.1.2.5.4 The applicable competent authority certificates need not necessarily accompany the consignment. The
consignor shall make them available to the carrier(s) before loading and unloading.
5.4.1.3 (Reserved)
5.4.1.4 Format and language
5.4.1.4.1 The document containing the information in 5.4.1.1 and 5.4.1.2 may be that already required by other
regulations in force for carriage by another mode of carriage. In case of multiple consignees, the name
and address of the consignees and the quantities delivered enabling the nature and quantities carried to
be evaluated at any time, may be entered in other documents which are to be used or in any other
documents made mandatory according to other specific regulations and which shall be on board the
vehicle.
The particulars to be entered in the document shall be drafted in an official language of the forwarding
country, and also, if that language is not English, French, or German, in English, French or German,
unless international road carriage tariffs, if any, or agreements concluded between the countries
concerned in the transport operation, provide otherwise.
5.4.1.4.2 If by reason of the size of the load, a consignment cannot be loaded in its entirety on a single transport
unit, at least as many separate documents, or copies of the single document, shall be made out as
transport units loaded. Furthermore, in all cases, separate transport documents shall be made out for
consignments or parts of consignments which may not be loaded together on the same vehicle by reason
of the prohibitions set forth in 7.5.2.
The information relative to the hazards of the goods to be carried (as indicated in 5.4.1.1) may be
incorporated in, or combined with, an existing transport or cargo handling document. The layout of the
information in the document (or the order of transmission of the corresponding data by electronic data
processing (EDP) or electronic data interchange (EDI) techniques) shall be as provided in 5.4.1.1.1.
When an existing transport document or cargo handling document cannot be used for the purposes of
dangerous goods documentation for multimodal transport, the use of documents corresponding to the
example shown in 5.4.5 is considered advisable4.
5.4.1.5 Non-dangerous goods
When goods mentioned by name in Table A of Chapter 3.2, are not subject to ADR because they are
considered as non-dangerous according to Part 2, the consignor may enter in the transport document a
statement to that effect, e.g.: “Not goods of Class …”
NOTE: This provision may be used in particular when the consignor considers that, due to the
chemical nature of the goods (e.g. solutions and mixtures) carried or to the fact that such goods are
deemed dangerous for other regulatory purposes the consignment might be subject to control during
the journey.
4 If used, the relevant recommendations of the UNECE United Nations Centre for Trade Facilitation and Electronic
Business (UN/CEFACT) may be consulted, in particular Recommendation No. 1 (United Nations Layout Key for Trade
Documents) (ECE/TRADE/137, edition 81.3), UN Layout Key for Trade Documents – Guidelines for Applications
(ECE/TRADE/270, edition 2002), Recommendation No. 11 (Documentary Aspects of the International Transport of
Dangerous Goods) (ECE/TRADE/204, edition 96.1 – currently under revision) and Recommendation No. 22 (Layout Key
for Standard Consignment Instructions) (ECE/TRADE/168, edition 1989). Refer also to the UN/CEFACT Summary of
Trade Facilitation Recommendations (ECE/TRADE/346, edition 2006) and the United Nations Trade Data Elements
Directory (UNTDED) (ECE/TRADE/362, edition 2005).
– 266 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 267 –
5.4.2 Container/vehicle packing certificate
If the carriage of dangerous goods in a container precedes a voyage by sea, a “container/vehicle packing
certificate” conforming to section 5.4.2 of the IMDG Code5, 6 shall be provided to the maritime carrier
by those responsible for packing the container.
5 Guidelines for use in practice and in training for loading goods in transport units have also been drawn up by the
International Maritime Organization (IMO), the International Labour Organization (ILO) and the United Nations
Economic Commission for Europe (UNECE) and have been published by IMO (“IMO/ILO/UNECE Code of Practice for
Packing of Cargo Transport Units (CTU Code)”).
6 Section 5.4.2 of the IMDG Code (Amendment 40-20) requires the following:
“5.4.2 Container/vehicle packing certificate
5.4.2.1 When dangerous goods are packed or loaded into any container or vehicle, those responsible for
packing the container or vehicle shall provide a “container/vehicle packing certificate” specifying the
container/vehicle identification number(s) and certifying that the operation has been carried out in accordance
with the following conditions:
.1 The container/vehicle was clean, dry and apparently fit to receive the goods;
.2 Packages which need to be segregated in accordance with applicable segregation requirements have not
been packed together onto or in the container/vehicle [unless approved by the competent authority
concerned in accordance with 7.3.4.1 (of the IMDG Code)];
.3 All packages have been externally inspected for damage, and only sound packages have been loaded;
.4 Drums have been stowed in an upright position, unless otherwise authorized by the competent authority,
and all goods have been properly loaded and, where necessary, adequately braced with securing material
to suit the mode(s) of transport for the intended journey;
.5 Goods loaded in bulk have been evenly distributed within the container/vehicle;
.6 For consignments including goods of class 1 other than division 1.4, the container/vehicle is structurally
serviceable in accordance with 7.1.2 (of the IMDG Code);
.7 The container/vehicle and packages are properly marked, labelled and placarded, as appropriate;
.8 When substances presenting a risk of asphyxiation are used for cooling or conditioning purposes (such as
dry ice (UN 1845) or nitrogen, refrigerated liquid (UN 1977) or argon, refrigerated liquid (UN 1951)), the
container/vehicle is externally marked in accordance with 5.5.3.6 (of the IMDG Code); and
.9 A dangerous goods transport document, as indicated in 5.4.1 (of the IMDG Code), has been received for
each dangerous goods consignment loaded in the container/vehicle.
NOTE: The container/vehicle packing certificate is not required for portable tanks.
5.4.2.2 The information required in the dangerous goods transport document and the container/vehicle packing
certificate may be incorporated into a single document; if not, these documents shall be attached. If the information
is incorporated into a single document, the document shall include a signed declaration such as “It is declared
that the packing of the goods into the container/vehicle has been carried out in accordance with the applicable
provisions”. This declaration shall be dated and the person signing this declaration shall be identified on the
document. Facsimile signatures are acceptable where applicable laws and regulations recognize the legal validity
of facsimile signatures.
5.4.2.3 If the container/vehicle packing certificate is presented to the carrier by means of EDP or EDI
transmission techniques, the signature(s) may be electronic signature(s) or may be replaced by the name(s) (in
capitals) of the person authorized to sign.
5.4.2.4 When the container/vehicle packing certificate is given to a carrier by EDP or EDI techniques and
subsequently the dangerous goods are transferred to a carrier that requires a paper container/vehicle packing
certificate, the carrier shall ensure that the paper document indicates “Original received electronically” and the
name of the signatory shall be shown in capital letters.
– 267 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 268 –
The functions of the transport document required under 5.4.1 and of the “container/vehicle packing
certificate” as provided above may be incorporated into a single document (see for example 5.4.5). If
these functions are incorporated into a single document, the inclusion in the transport document of a
statement that the loading of the container or vehicle has been carried out in accordance with the
applicable modal regulations together with the identification of the person responsible for the
“container/vehicle packing certificate” shall be sufficient.
If the carriage of dangerous goods in a vehicle precedes a voyage by sea, a “container/vehicle packing
certificate” conforming to section 5.4.2 of the IMDG Code5, 6 may also be provided with the transport
document.
5.4.3 Instructions in writing
5.4.3.1 As an aid during an accident emergency situation that may occur or arise during carriage, instructions
in writing in the form specified in 5.4.3.4 shall be carried in the vehicle crew’s cab and shall be readily
available.
5.4.3.2 These instructions shall be provided by the carrier to the vehicle crew in language(s) that each member
can read and understand before the commencement of the journey. The carrier shall ensure that each
member of the vehicle crew concerned understands and is capable of carrying out the instructions
properly.
5.4.3.3 Before the start of the journey, the members of the vehicle crew shall inform themselves of the
dangerous goods loaded and consult the instructions in writing for details on actions to be taken in the
event of an accident or emergency.
5.4.3.4 The instructions in writing shall correspond to the following four page model as regards its form and
contents.
– 268 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 269 –
INSTRUCTIONS IN WRITING ACCORDING TO ADR
Actions in the event of an accident or emergency
In the event of an accident or emergency that may occur or arise during carriage, the members of the vehicle crew shall
take the following actions where safe and practicable to do so:
– Apply the braking system, stop the engine and isolate the battery by activating the master switch where
available;
– Avoid sources of ignition, in particular, do not smoke, use electronic cigarettes or similar devices or switch
on any electrical equipment;
– Inform the appropriate emergency services, giving as much information about the incident or accident and
substances involved as possible;
– Put on the warning vest and place the self-standing warning signs as appropriate;
– Keep the transport documents readily available for responders on arrival;
– Do not walk into or touch spilled substances and avoid inhalation of fumes, smoke, dusts and vapours by
staying up wind;
– Where appropriate and safe to do so, use the fire extinguishers to put out small/initial fires in tyres, brakes
and engine compartments;
– Fires in load compartments shall not be tackled by members of the vehicle crew;
– Where appropriate and safe to do so, use on-board equipment to prevent leakages into the aquatic environment
or the sewage system and to contain spillages;
– Move away from the vicinity of the accident or emergency, advise other persons to move away and follow
the advice of the emergency services;
– Remove any contaminated clothing and used contaminated protective equipment and dispose of it safely.
– 269 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
Additional guidance to members of the vehicle crew on the hazard characteristics of
dangerous goods by class and on actions subject to prevailing circumstances
Danger labels and placards Hazard characteristics Additional guidance
(1) (2) (3)
Explosive substances and articles May have a range of properties and effects such as
mass detonation; projection of fragments; intense
fire/heat flux; formation of bright light, loud noise
or smoke.
Sensitive to shocks and/or impacts and/or heat.
Take cover but stay away from windows.
1 1.5 1.6
Explosive substances and articles
Slight risk of explosion and fire. Take cover.
1.4
Flammable gases Risk of fire.
Risk of explosion.
May be under pressure.
Risk of asphyxiation.
May cause burns and/or frostbite.
Containments may explode when heated.
Take cover.
Keep out of low areas.
2.1
Non-flammable, non-toxic gases Risk of asphyxiation.
May be under pressure.
May cause frostbite.
Containments may explode when heated.
Take cover.
Keep out of low areas.
2.2
Toxic gases Risk of intoxication.
May be under pressure.
May cause burns and/or frostbite.
Containments may explode when heated.
Use emergency escape mask.
Take cover.
Keep out of low areas.
2.3
Flammable liquids Risk of fire.
Risk of explosion.
Containments may explode when heated.
Take cover.
Keep out of low areas.
3
Flammable solids, self-reactive
substances, polymerizing substances
and solid desensitized explosives
Risk of fire. Flammable or combustible, may be
ignited by heat, sparks or flames.
May contain self-reactive substances that are
liable to exothermic decomposition in the case of
heat supply, contact with other substances (such as
acids, heavy-metal compounds or amines), friction
or shock. This may result in the evolution of
harmful and flammable gases or vapours or self-
ignition.
Containments may explode when heated.
Risk of explosion of desensitized explosives after
loss of desensitizer.
4.1
Substances liable to spontaneous
combustion Risk of fire by spontaneous combustion if
packages are damaged or contents are spilled.
May react vigorously with water
4.2
Substances which, in contact with
water, emit flammable gases
Risk of fire and explosion in contact with water. Spilled substances should be kept dry by
covering the spillages.
4.3
– 270 –
1
2
1
* *
*
2
11
3
2 2
2
3
4
4
44Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
Additional guidance to members of the vehicle crew on the hazard characteristics of
dangerous goods by class and on actions subject to prevailing circumstances
Danger labels and placards Hazard characteristics Additional guidance
(1) (2) (3)
Oxidizing substances
Risk of vigorous reaction, ignition and explosion in
contact with combustible or flammable substances.
Avoid mixing with flammable or combustible
substances (e.g. sawdust).
5.1
Organic peroxides Risk of exothermic decomposition at elevated
temperatures, contact with other substances (such
as acids, heavy-metal compounds or amines),
friction or shock. This may result in the evolution
of harmful and flammable gases or vapours or self-
ignition.
Avoid mixing with flammable or combustible
substances (e.g. sawdust).
5.2
Toxic substances Risk of intoxication by inhalation, skin contact or
ingestion.
Risk to the aquatic environment or the sewerage
system.
Use emergency escape mask.
6.1
Infectious substances Risk of infection.
May cause serious disease in humans or animals.
Risk to the aquatic environment or the sewerage
system.
6.2
Radioactive material
Risk of intake and external radiation. Limit time of exposure.7A 7B
7C 7D
Fissile material
Risk of nuclear chain reaction.
7E
Corrosive substances Risk of burns by corrosion.
May react vigorously with each other, with water
and with other substances.
Spilled substance may evolve corrosive vapours.
Risk to the aquatic environment or the sewerage
system.
8
Miscellaneous dangerous substances
and articles Risk of burns.
Risk of fire.
Risk of explosion.
Risk to the aquatic environment or the sewerage
system.
9 9A
NOTE 1: For dangerous goods with multiple risks and for mixed loads, each applicable entry shall be observed.
NOTE 2: Additional guidance shown in column (3) of the table may be adapted to reflect the classes of dangerous
goods to be carried and their means of transport.
– 271 –
5.2 5.2
6
6
RADIOACTIVE
7
8
9Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
Additional guidance to members of the vehicle crew on the hazard characteristics of
dangerous goods, indicated by marks, and on actions subject to prevailing circumstances
Mark Hazard characteristics Additional guidance
(1) (2) (3)
Environmentally hazardous substances
Risk to the aquatic environment or the
sewerage system
Elevated temperature substances
Risk of burns by heat. Avoid contact with hot parts of the transport unit and
the spilled substance.
Equipment for personal and general protection
to carry out general actions and hazard specific emergency actions
to be carried on board the transport unit in accordance with section 8.1.5 of ADR
The following equipment shall be carried on board the transport unit:
– for each vehicle, a wheel chock of a size suited to the maximum mass of the vehicle and to the
diameter of the wheel;
– two self-standing warning signs;
– eye rinsing liquida; and
for each member of the vehicle crew
– a warning vest;
– portable lighting apparatus;
– a pair of protective gloves; and
– eye protection.
Additional equipment required for certain classes:
– an emergency escape mask for each member of the vehicle crew shall be carried on board the
transport unit for danger label numbers 2.3 or 6.1;
– a shovelb;
– a drain sealb;
– a collecting containerb.
a Not required for danger label numbers 1, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 2.1, 2.2 and 2.3.
b Only required for solids and liquids with danger label numbers 3, 4.1, 4.3, 8 or 9.
– 272 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 273 –
5.4.3.5 Contracting Parties shall provide the UNECE secretariat with the official translation of the instructions
in writing in their national language(s), in accordance with this section. The UNECE secretariat shall
make the national versions of the instructions in writing that it has received available to all Contracting
Parties.
5.4.4 Retention of dangerous goods transport information
5.4.4.1 The consignor and the carrier shall retain a copy of the dangerous goods transport document and
additional information and documentation as specified in ADR, for a minimum period of three months.
5.4.4.2 When the documents are kept electronically or in a computer system, the consignor and the carrier shall
be able to reproduce them in a printed form.
5.4.5 Example of a multimodal dangerous goods form
Example of a form which may be used as a combined dangerous goods declaration and container
packing certificate for multimodal carriage of dangerous goods.
– 273 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
1. Shipper / Consignor /Sender 2. Transport document number
3. 4. Shipper’s reference
Page 1 of Pages
5. Freight Forwarder’s reference
6. Consignee 7. Carrier (to be completed by the carrier)
SHIPPER’S DECLARATION
I hereby declare that the contents of this consignment are fully and accurately described below
by the proper shipping name, and are classified, packaged, marked and labeled /placarded
and are in all respects in proper condition for transport according to the applicable international
and national governmental regulations.
8. This shipment is within the limitations prescribed for: (Delete non-applicable) 9. Additional handling information
PASSENGER AND CARGO AIRCRAFT ONLY
CARGO AIRCRAFT
10. Vessel / flight no. and date 11. Port / place of loading
12. Port / place of discharge 13. Destination
14. Shipping marks * Number and kind of packages; description of goods Gross mass (kg) Net mass Cube (m³)
15. Container identification No./ 16. Seal number (s) 17. Container/vehicle size & type 18. Tare (kg) 19. Total gross mass
vehicle registration No. (including tare) (kg)
CONTAINER/VEHICLE PACKING CERTIFICATE 21.RECEIVING ORGANISATION RECEIPT
I hereby declare that the goods described above have been Received the above number of packages/containers/trailers in apparent good order and condition
packed/loaded into the container/vehicle identified above in unless stated hereon: RECEIVING ORGANISATION REMARKS:
accordance with the applicable provisions **
MUST BE COMPLETED AND SIGNED FOR ALL
CONTAINER/VEHICLE LOADS BY PERSON
RESPONSIBLE FOR PACKING/LOADING
20. Name of company Haulier’s name 22. Name of company (OF SHIPPER PREPARING THIS NOTE)
Name / Status of declarant Vehicle reg. no. Name / Status of declarant
Place and date Signature and date Place and date
Signature of declarant DRIVER’S SIGNATURE Signature of declarant
** See 5.4.2.
* FOR DANGEROUS GOODS: you must specify: UN no., proper shipping name, hazard class, packing group (where assigned)
and any other element of information required under applicable national and international regulations
MULTIMODAL DANGEROUS GOODS FORM BLACK HATCHINGS BLACK HATCHINGS BLACK HATCHINGS BLACK HATCHINGS BLACK HATCHINGS BLACK HATCHINGS BLACK HATCHINGS BLACK HATCHINGS BLACK HATCHINGS BLACK HATCHINGS BLACK HATCHINGS BLACK HATCHINGS BLACKCopyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
MULTIMODAL DANGEROUS GOODS FORM Continuation Sheet
1. Shipper / Consignor /Sender 2. Transport document number
3. 4. Shipper’s reference
Page 1 of Pages
5. Freight Forwarder’s reference
14. Shipping marks * Number and kind of packages; description of goods Gross mass (kg) Net mass Cube (m³)
* FOR DANGEROUS GOODS: you must specify: UN no., proper shipping name, hazard class, packing group (where assigned)
and any other element of information required under applicable national and international regulations
BLACK HATCHINGS BLACK HATCHINGS BLACK HATCHINGS BLACK HATCHINGS BLACK HATCHINGS BLACK HATCHINGS BLACK HATCHINGS BLACK HATCHINGS BLACK HATCHINGS BLACK HATCHINGS BLACK HATCHINGS BLACKCopyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 277 –
CHAPTER 5.5
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
5.5.1 (Deleted)
5.5.2 Special provisions applicable to fumigated cargo transport units (UN 3359)
5.5.2.1 General
5.5.2.1.1 Fumigated cargo transport units (UN 3359) containing no other dangerous goods are not subject to any
provisions of ADR other than those of this section.
5.5.2.1.2 When the fumigated cargo transport unit is loaded with dangerous goods in addition to the fumigant,
any provision of ADR relevant to these goods (including placarding, marking and documentation)
applies in addition to the provisions of this section.
5.5.2.1.3 Only cargo transport units that can be closed in such a way that the escape of gas is reduced to a
minimum shall be used for the carriage of cargo under fumigation.
5.5.2.2 Training
Persons engaged in the handling of fumigated cargo transport units shall be trained commensurate with
their responsibilities.
5.5.2.3 Marking and placarding
5.5.2.3.1 A fumigated cargo transport unit shall be marked with a warning mark, as specified in 5.5.2.3.2, affixed
at each access point in a location where it will be easily seen by persons opening or entering the cargo
transport unit. This mark shall remain on the cargo transport unit until the following provisions are met:
(a) The fumigated cargo transport unit has been ventilated to remove harmful concentrations of
fumigant gas; and
(b) The fumigated goods or materials have been unloaded.
5.5.2.3.2 The fumigation warning mark shall be as shown in Figure 5.5.2.3.2.
Figure 5.5.2.3.2
Fumigation warning mark
The mark shall be a rectangle. The minimum dimensions shall be 400 mm wide × 300 mm high and the
minimum width of the outer line shall be 2 mm. The mark shall be in black print on a white background
– 277 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 278 –
with lettering not less than 25 mm high. Where dimensions are not specified, all features shall be in
approximate proportion to those shown.
5.5.2.3.3 If the fumigated cargo transport unit has been completely ventilated either by opening the doors of the
unit or by mechanical ventilation after fumigation, the date of ventilation shall be marked on the
fumigation warning mark.
5.5.2.3.4 When the fumigated cargo transport unit has been ventilated and unloaded, the fumigation warning
mark shall be removed.
5.5.2.3.5 Placards conforming to model No. 9 (see 5.2.2.2.2) shall not be affixed to a fumigated cargo transport
unit except as required for other Class 9 substances or articles packed therein.
5.5.2.4 Documentation
5.5.2.4.1 Documents associated with the carriage of cargo transport units that have been fumigated and have not
been completely ventilated before carriage shall include the following information:
(a) “UN 3359, fumigated cargo transport unit, 9”, or “UN 3359, fumigated cargo transport unit,
Class 9”;
(b) The date and time of fumigation; and
(c) The type and amount of the fumigant used.
These particulars shall be drafted in an official language of the forwarding country and also, if the
language is not English, French or German, in English, French or German, unless agreements, if any,
concluded between the countries concerned in the transport operation provide otherwise.
5.5.2.4.2 The documents may be in any form, provided they contain the information required in 5.5.2.4.1. This
information shall be easy to identify, legible and durable.
5.5.2.4.3 Instructions for disposal of any residual fumigant including fumigation devices (if used) shall be
provided.
5.5.2.4.4 A document is not required when the fumigated cargo transport unit has been completely ventilated and
the date of ventilation has been marked on the warning mark (see 5.5.2.3.3 and 5.5.2.3.4).
5.5.3 Special provisions applicable to the carriage of dry ice (UN 1845) and to packages and vehicles
and containers containing substances presenting a risk of asphyxiation when used for cooling or
conditioning purposes (such as dry ice (UN 1845) or nitrogen, refrigerated liquid (UN 1977) or
argon, refrigerated liquid (UN 1951) or nitrogen)
NOTE: In the context of this section the term “conditioning” may be used in a broader scope and
includes protection.
5.5.3.1 Scope
5.5.3.1.1 This section is not applicable to substances which may be used for cooling or conditioning purposes
when carried as a consignment of dangerous goods, except for the carriage of dry ice (UN No. 1845).
When they are carried as a consignment, these substances shall be carried under the relevant entry of
Table A of Chapter 3.2 in accordance with the associated conditions of carriage.
For UN No. 1845, the conditions of carriage specified in this section, except 5.5.3.3.1, apply for all
kinds of carriage, as a coolant, conditioner, or as a consignment. For the carriage of UN No. 1845, no
other provisions of ADR apply.
5.5.3.1.2 This section is not applicable to gases in cooling cycles.
5.5.3.1.3 Dangerous goods used for cooling or conditioning tanks or MEGCs during carriage are not subject to
this section.
5.5.3.1.4 Vehicles and containers containing substances used for cooling or conditioning purposes include
vehicles and containers containing substances used for cooling or conditioning purposes inside
– 278 –
*Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 279 –
packages as well as vehicles and containers with unpackaged substances used for cooling or
conditioning purposes.
5.5.3.1.5 Sub-sections 5.5.3.6 and 5.5.3.7 only apply when there is an actual risk of asphyxiation in the vehicle
or container. It is for the participants concerned to assess this risk, taking into consideration the hazards
presented by the substances being used for cooling or conditioning, the amount of substance to be
carried, the duration of the journey, the types of containment to be used and the gas concentration limits
given in the note to 5.5.3.3.3.
5.5.3.2 General
5.5.3.2.1 Vehicles and containers in which dry ice (UN 1845) is carried or containing substances used for cooling
or conditioning purposes (other than fumigation) during carriage are not subject to any provisions of
ADR other than those of this section.
5.5.3.2.2 When dangerous goods are loaded in vehicles or containers containing substances used for cooling or
conditioning purposes any provisions of ADR relevant to these dangerous goods apply in addition to
the provisions of this section.
5.5.3.2.3 (Reserved)
5.5.3.2.4 Persons engaged in the handling or carriage of vehicles and containers in which dry ice (UN 1845) is
carried or containing substances used for cooling or conditioning purposes shall be trained
commensurate with their responsibilities.
5.5.3.3 Packages containing dry ice (UN 1845) or a coolant or conditioner
5.5.3.3.1 Packaged dangerous goods requiring cooling or conditioning assigned to packing instructions P203,
P620, P650, P800, P901 or P904 of 4.1.4.1 shall meet the appropriate requirements of that packing
instruction.
5.5.3.3.2 For packaged dangerous goods requiring cooling or conditioning assigned to other packing instructions,
the packages shall be capable of withstanding very low temperatures and shall not be affected or
significantly weakened by the coolant or conditioner. Packages shall be designed and constructed to
permit the release of gas to prevent a build-up of pressure that could rupture the packaging. The
dangerous goods shall be packed in such a way as to prevent movement after the dissipation of any
coolant or conditioner.
5.5.3.3.3 Packages containing dry ice (UN 1845) or a coolant or conditioner shall be carried in well ventilated
vehicles and containers. Marking according to 5.5.3.6 is not required in this case.
Ventilation is not required, and marking according to 5.5.3.6 is required, if:
– gas exchange between the load compartment and the driver’s cab is prevented; or
– the load compartment is insulated, refrigerated or mechanically refrigerated equipment, for
example as defined in the Agreement on the International Carriage of Perishable Foodstuffs and
on the Special Equipment to be Used for such Carriage (ATP) and separated from the driver’s
cab.
NOTE: In this context “well ventilated” means there is an atmosphere where the carbon dioxide
concentration is below 0.5 % by volume and the oxygen concentration is above 19.5 % by volume.
5.5.3.4 Marking of packages containing dry ice (UN 1845) or a coolant or conditioner
5.5.3.4.1 Packages containing dry ice (UN 1845) as a consignment shall be marked “CARBON DIOXIDE,
SOLID” or “DRY ICE”; packages containing dangerous goods used for cooling or conditioning shall
be marked with the name indicated in Column (2) of Table A of Chapter 3.2 of these dangerous goods
followed by the words “AS COOLANT” or “AS CONDITIONER” as appropriate in an official
language of the country of origin and also, if that language is not English, French or German, in English,
French or German, unless agreements concluded between the countries concerned in the transport
operation provide otherwise.
5.5.3.4.2 The marks shall be durable, legible and placed in such a location and of such a size relative to the
package as to be readily visible.
– 279 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
5.5.3.5 Vehicles and containers containing unpackaged dry ice
5.5.3.5.1 If dry ice in unpackaged form is used, it shall not come into direct contact with the metal structure of a
vehicle or container to avoid embrittlement of the metal. Measures shall be taken to provide adequate
insulation between the dry ice and the vehicle or container by providing a minimum of 30 mm
separation (e.g. by using suitable low heat conducting materials such as timber planks, pallets etc).
5.5.3.5.2 Where dry ice is placed around packages, measures shall be taken to ensure that packages remain in the
original position during carriage after the dry ice has dissipated.
5.5.3.6 Marking of vehicles and containers
5.5.3.6.1 Vehicles and containers containing dry ice (UN 1845) or dangerous goods used for cooling or
conditioning purposes that are not well ventilated shall be marked with a warning mark, as specified in
5.5.3.6.2, affixed at each access point in a location where it will be easily seen by persons opening or
entering the vehicle or container. This mark shall remain on the vehicle or container until the following
provisions are met:
(a) The vehicle or container has been well ventilated to remove harmful concentrations of dry ice
(UN 1845) or coolant or conditioner; and
(b) The dry ice (UN 1845) or cooled or conditioned goods have been unloaded.
As long as the vehicle or container is marked, the necessary precautions have to be taken before entering
it. The necessity of ventilating through the cargo doors or other means (e.g. forced ventilation) has to
be evaluated and included in training of the involved persons.
5.5.3.6.2 The warning mark shall be as shown in Figure 5.5.3.6.2.
Figure 5.5.3.6.2
Asphyxiation warning mark for vehicles and containers
 Insert the name indicated in Column (2) of Table A of Chapter 3.2 or the name of the asphyxiant
gas used as the coolant/conditioner. The lettering shall be in capitals, all be on one line and shall be at
least 25 mm high. If the length of the proper shipping name is too long to fit in the space provided, the
lettering may be reduced to the maximum size possible to fit. For example: “CARBON DIOXIDE,
SOLID”. Additional information such as “AS COOLANT” or “AS CONDITIONER” may be added.
– 280 –
*
Minimum dimension 250 mm
Minimum dimension 150 mmCopyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 281 –
The mark shall be a rectangle. The minimum dimensions shall be 150 mm wide × 250 mm high. The
word “WARNING” shall be in red or white and be at least 25 mm high. Where dimensions are not
specified, all features shall be in approximate proportion to those shown.
The word “WARNING” and the words “AS COOLANT” or “AS CONDITIONER”, as appropriate,
shall be in an official language of the country of origin and also, if that language is not English, French
or German, in English, French or German, unless agreements concluded between the countries
concerned in the transport operation provide otherwise.
5.5.3.7 Documentation
5.5.3.7.1 Documents (such as a bill of lading, cargo manifest or CMR/CIM consignment note) associated with
the carriage of vehicles or containers containing or having contained dry ice (UN 1845) or substances
used for cooling or conditioning purposes and have not been completely ventilated before carriage shall
include the following information:
(a) The UN number preceded by the letters “UN”; and
(b) The name indicated in Column (2) of Table A of Chapter 3.2 followed, where appropriate, by
the words “AS COOLANT” or “AS CONDITIONER” in an official language of the country of
origin and also, if that language is not English, French or German, in English, French or German,
unless agreements, if any, concluded between the countries concerned in the transport operation
provide otherwise.
For example: UN 1845, CARBON DIOXIDE, SOLID, AS COOLANT.
5.5.3.7.2 The transport document may be in any form, provided it contains the information required in
5.5.3.7.1. This information shall be easy to identify, legible and durable.
5.5.4 Dangerous goods contained in equipment in use or intended for use during carriage, attached to
or placed in packages, overpacks, containers or load compartments
5.5.4.1 Dangerous goods (e.g. lithium batteries, fuel cell cartridges) contained in equipment such as data
loggers and cargo tracking devices, attached to or placed in packages, overpacks, containers or load
compartments are not subject to any provisions of ADR other than the following:
(a) the equipment shall be in use or intended for use during carriage;
(b) the contained dangerous goods (e.g. lithium batteries, fuel cell cartridges) shall meet the
applicable construction and test requirements specified in ADR; and
(c) the equipment shall be capable of withstanding the shocks and loadings normally encountered
during carriage.
5.5.4.2 When such equipment containing dangerous goods is carried as a consignment, the relevant entry of
Table A of Chapter 3.2 shall be used and all applicable provisions of ADR shall apply.
– 281 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
PART 6
Requirements for the construction
and testing of packagings,
intermediate bulk containers (IBCs),
large packagings, tanks and bulk containersCopyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 285 –
CHAPTER 6.1
REQUIREMENTS FOR THE CONSTRUCTION
AND TESTING OF PACKAGINGS
6.1.1 General
6.1.1.1 The requirements of this Chapter do not apply to:
(a) Packages containing radioactive material of Class 7, unless otherwise provided (see 4.1.9);
(b) Packages containing infectious substances of Class 6.2, unless otherwise provided (see Note
under the heading of Chapter 6.3 and packing instructions P621 and P622 of 4.1.4.1);
(c) Pressure receptacles containing gases of Class 2;
(d) Packages whose net mass exceeds 400 kg;
(e) Packagings for liquids, other than combination packagings, with a capacity exceeding 450 litres.
6.1.1.2 The requirements for packagings in 6.1.4 are based on packagings currently used. In order to take into
account progress in science and technology, there is no objection to the use of packagings having
specifications different from those in 6.1.4, provided that they are equally effective, acceptable to the
competent authority and able to successfully fulfil the requirements described in 6.1.1.3 and 6.1.5.
Methods of testing other than those described in this Chapter are acceptable, provided they are
equivalent, and are recognized by the competent authority.
6.1.1.3 Every packaging intended to contain liquids shall successfully undergo a suitable leakproofness test.
This test is part of a quality assurance programme as stipulated in 6.1.1.4 which shows the capability of
meeting the appropriate test level indicated in 6.1.5.4.3:
(a) Before it is first used for carriage;
(b) After remanufacturing or reconditioning, before it is re-used for carriage;
For this test, packagings need not have their own closures fitted.
The inner receptacle of composite packagings may be tested without the outer packaging provided the
test results are not affected.
This test is not necessary for:
– Inner packagings of combination packagings;
– Inner receptacles of composite packagings (glass, porcelain or stoneware), marked with the
symbol “RID/ADR” according to 6.1.3.1 (a) (ii);
– Light gauge metal packagings, marked with the symbol “RID/ADR” according to 6.1.3.1 (a) (ii).
6.1.1.4 Packagings shall be manufactured, reconditioned and tested under a quality assurance programme which
satisfies the competent authority in order to ensure that each packaging meets the requirements of this
Chapter.
NOTE: ISO 16106:2020 “Transport packages for dangerous goods – Dangerous goods packagings,
intermediate bulk containers (IBCs) and large packagings – Guidelines for the application of ISO 9001”
provides acceptable guidance on procedures which may be followed.
6.1.1.5 Manufacturers and subsequent distributors of packagings shall provide information regarding
procedures to be followed and a description of the types and dimensions of closures (including required
gaskets) and any other components needed to ensure that packages as presented for carriage are capable
of passing the applicable performance tests of this Chapter.
– 285 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 286 –
6.1.2 Code for designating types of packagings
6.1.2.1 The code consists of:
(a) An Arabic numeral indicating the kind of packaging, e.g. drum, jerrican, etc., followed by;
(b) A capital letter(s) in Latin characters indicating the nature of the material, e.g. steel, wood, etc.,
followed where necessary by;
(c) An Arabic numeral indicating the category of packaging within the kind to which the packaging
belongs.
6.1.2.2 In the case of composite packagings, two capital letters in Latin characters are used in sequence in the
second position of the code. The first indicates the material of the inner receptacle and the second that
of the outer packaging.
6.1.2.3 In the case of combination packagings only the code number for the outer packaging is used.
6.1.2.4 The letters “T”, “V” or “W” may follow the packaging code. The letter “T” signifies a salvage packaging
conforming to the requirements of 6.1.5.1.11. The letter “V” signifies a special packaging conforming
to the requirements of 6.1.5.1.7. The letter “W” signifies that the packaging, although of the same type
indicated by the code, is manufactured to a specification different to that in 6.1.4 and is considered
equivalent under the requirements of 6.1.1.2.
6.1.2.5 The following numerals shall be used for the kinds of packaging:
l. Drum
2. (Reserved)
3. Jerrican
4. Box
5. Bag
6. Composite packaging
7. (Reserved)
0. Light gauge metal packagings
6.1.2.6 The following capital letters shall be used for the types of material:
A. Steel (all types and surface treatments)
B. Aluminium
C. Natural wood
D. Plywood
F. Reconstituted wood
G. Fibreboard
H. Plastics material
L. Textile
M. Paper, multiwall
N. Metal (other than steel or aluminium)
P. Glass, porcelain or stoneware
NOTE: Plastics material is taken to include other polymeric materials such as rubber.
6.1.2.7 The following table indicates the codes to be used for designating types of packagings depending on the
kind of packagings, the material used for their construction and their category; it also refers to the sub-
sections to be consulted for the appropriate requirements:
– 286 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 287 –
Kind Material Category Code Sub-section
1. Drums A. Steel non-removable head 1A1 6.1.4.1
removable head 1A2
B. Aluminium non-removable head 1B1 6.1.4.2
removable head 1B2
D. Plywood 1D 6.1.4.5
G. Fibre 1G 6.1.4.7
H. Plastics non-removable head 1H1 6.1.4.8
removable head 1H2
N. Metal, other than steel or
aluminium
non-removable head 1N1 6.1.4.3
removable head 1N2
2. (Reserved)
3. Jerricans A. Steel non-removable head 3A1 6.1.4.4
removable head 3A2
B. Aluminium non-removable head 3B1 6.1.4.4
removable head 3B2
H. Plastics non-removable head 3H1 6.1.4.8
removable head 3H2
4. Boxes A. Steel 4A 6.1.4.14
B. Aluminium 4B 6.1.4.14
C. Natural wood ordinary 4C1 6.1.4.9
with sift-proof walls 4C2
D. Plywood 4D 6.1.4.10
F. Reconstituted wood 4F 6.1.4.11
G. Fibreboard 4G 6.1.4.12
H. Plastics expanded 4H1 6.1.4.13
solid 4H2
N. Metal, other than steel or
aluminium
4N 6.1.4.14
5. Bags H. Woven plastics without inner liner or coating 5H1
6.1.4.16sift-proof 5H2
water resistant 5H3
H. Plastics film 5H4 6.1.4.17
L. Textile without inner liner or coating 5L1
6.1.4.15sift-proof 5L2
water resistant 5L3
M. Paper multiwall 5M1 6.1.4.18
multiwall, water resistant 5M2
– 287 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 288 –
Kind Material Category Code Sub-section
6. Composite
packagings
H. Plastics receptacle with outer steel drum 6HA1
6.1.4.19
with outer steel crate or box 6HA2
with outer aluminium drum 6HB1
with outer aluminium crate or box 6HB2
with outer wooden box 6HC
with outer plywood drum 6HD1
with outer plywood box 6HD2
with outer fibre drum 6HG1
with outer fibreboard box 6HG2
with outer plastics drum 6HH1
with outer solid plastics box 6HH2
P. Glass, porcelain or
stoneware receptacle
with outer steel drum 6PA1
6.1.4.20
with outer steel crate or box 6PA2
with outer aluminium drum 6PB1
with outer aluminium crate or box 6PB2
with outer wooden box 6PC
with outer plywood drum 6PD1
with outer wickerwork hamper 6PD2
with outer fibre drum 6PG1
with outer fibreboard box 6PG2
with outer expanded plastics
packaging
6PH1
with outer solid plastics
packaging
6PH2
7. (Reserved)
0. Light gauge metal
packagings
A. Steel non-removable head 0A1 6.1.4.22
removable head 0A2
6.1.3 Marking
NOTE 1: The marks indicate that the packaging which bears them correspond to a successfully tested
design type and that it complies with the requirements of this Chapter which are related to the
manufacture, but not to the use, of the packaging. In itself, therefore, the mark does not necessarily
confirm that the packaging may be used for any substance: generally the type of packaging (e.g. steel
drum), its maximum capacity and/or mass, and any special requirements are specified for each
substance in Table A of Chapter 3.2.
NOTE 2: The marks are intended to be of assistance to packaging manufacturers, reconditioners,
packaging users, carriers and regulatory authorities. In relation to the use of a new packaging, the
original marks are a means for its manufacturer(s) to identify the type and to indicate those performance
test regulations that have been met.
NOTE 3: The marks do not always provide full details of the test levels, etc., and these may need to
be taken further into account, e.g. by reference to a test certificate, to test reports or to a register of
successfully tested packagings. For example, a packaging having an X or Y mark may be used for
substances to which a packing group having a lesser degree of danger has been assigned with the
relevant maximum permissible value of the relative density1 determined by taking into account the factor
1.5 or 2.25 indicated in the packaging test requirements in 6.1.5 as appropriate, i.e. packing group I
packaging tested for products of relative density 1.2 could be used as a packing group II packaging for
products of relative density 1.8 or a packing group III packaging for products of relative density 2.7,
provided of course that all the performance criteria can still be met with the higher relative density
product.
1 Relative density (d) is considered to be synonymous with Specific Gravity (SG) and is used throughout this text.
– 288 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 289 –
6.1.3.1 Each packaging intended for use according to the ADR shall bear marks which are durable, legible and
placed in a location and of such a size relative to the packaging as to be readily visible. For packages
with a gross mass of more than 30 kg, the marks or a duplicate thereof shall appear on the top or on a
side of the packaging. Letters, numerals and symbols shall be at least 12 mm high, except for packagings
of 30 l capacity or less or of 30 kg maximum net mass, when they shall be at least 6 mm in height and
except for packagings of 5 l capacity or less or of 5 kg maximum net mass when they shall be of an
appropriate size.
The marks shall show:
(a) (i) The United Nations packaging symbol .
This symbol shall not be used for any purpose other than certifying that a packaging, a
flexible bulk container, a portable tank or a MEGC complies with the relevant
requirements in Chapter 6.1, 6.2, 6.3, 6.5, 6.6, 6.7 or 6.11. This symbol shall not be used
for packagings which comply with the simplified conditions of 6.1.1.3, 6.1.5.3.1 (e),
6.1.5.3.5 (c), 6.1.5.4, 6.1.5.5.1 and 6.1.5.6 (see also (ii) below). For embossed metal
packagings, the capital letters “UN” may be applied instead of the symbol; or
(ii) The symbol “RID/ADR” for composite packagings (glass, porcelain or stoneware) and
light gauge metal packagings conforming to simplified conditions (see 6.1.1.3, 6.1.5.3.1
(e), 6.1.5.3.5 (c), 6.1.5.4, 6.1.5.5.1 and 6.1.5.6);
NOTE: Packagings bearing this symbol are approved for rail, road and inland
waterways transport operations which are subject to the provisions of RID, ADR and
ADN respectively. They are not necessarily accepted for carriage by other modes of
transport or for transport operations by road, rail or inland waterways which are
governed by other regulations.
(b) The code designating the type of packaging according to 6.1.2;
(c) A code in two parts:
(i) a letter designating the packing group(s) for which the design type has been successfully
tested:
X for packing groups I, II and III;
Y for packing groups II and III;
Z for packing group III only;
(ii) the relative density, rounded off to the first decimal, for which the design type has been
tested for packagings without inner packagings intended to contain liquids; this may be
omitted when the relative density does not exceed 1.2. For packagings intended to contain
solids or inner packagings, the maximum gross mass in kilograms.
For light-gauge metal packagings, marked with the symbol “RID/ADR” according to 6.1.3.1 (a)
(ii) intended to contain liquids having a viscosity at 23 °C exceeding 200 mm²/s, the maximum
gross mass in kg;
(d) Either the letter “S” denoting that the packaging is intended for the carriage of solids or inner
packagings or, for packagings (other than combination packagings) intended to contain liquids,
the hydraulic test pressure which the packaging was shown to withstand in kPa rounded down
to the nearest 10 kPa.
For light-gauge metal packagings, marked with the symbol “RID/ADR, according to 6.1.3.1(a)
(ii) intended to contain liquids having a viscosity at 23 °C exceeding 200 mm²/s, the letter “S”;
– 289 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 290 –
(e) The last two digits of the year during which the packaging was manufactured. Packagings of
types 1H and 3H shall also be appropriately marked with the month of manufacture; this may be
marked on the packaging in a different place from the remainder of the marks. An appropriate
method is:
* The last two digits of the year of manufacture may be displayed at that place. In such a
case and when the clock is placed adjacent to the UN design type mark, the indication of the
year in the mark may be waived. However, when the clock is not placed adjacent to the UN
design type mark, the two digits of the year in the mark and in the clock shall be identical.
NOTE: Other methods that provide the minimum required information in a durable, visible and
legible form are also acceptable.
(f) The State authorizing the allocation of the mark, indicated by the distinguishing sign used on
vehicles in international road traffic2;
(g) The name of the manufacturer or other identification of the packaging specified by the competent
authority.
6.1.3.2 In addition to the durable marks prescribed in 6.1.3.1, every new metal drum of a capacity greater than
100 litres shall bear the marks described in 6.1.3.1 (a) to (e) on the bottom, with an indication of the
nominal thickness of at least the metal used in the body (in mm, to 0.1 mm), in permanent form (e.g.
embossed). When the nominal thickness of either head of a metal drum is thinner than that of the body,
the nominal thickness of the top head, body, and bottom head shall be marked on the bottom in
permanent form (e.g. embossed), for example “1.0-1.2-1.0” or “0.9-1.0-1.0”. Nominal thickness of metal
shall be determined according to the appropriate ISO standard, for example ISO 3574:1999 for steel.
The marks indicated in 6.1.3.1 (f) and (g) shall not be applied in a permanent form except as provided
in 6.1.3.5.
6.1.3.3 Every packaging other than those referred to in 6.1.3.2 liable to undergo a reconditioning process shall
bear the marks indicated in 6.1.3.1 (a) to (e) in a permanent form. Marks are permanent if they are able
to withstand the reconditioning process (e.g. embossed). For packagings other than metal drums of a
capacity greater than 100 litres, these permanent marks may replace the corresponding durable marks
prescribed in 6.1.3.1.
6.1.3.4 For remanufactured metal drums, if there is no change to the packaging type and no replacement or
removal of integral structural components, the required marks need not be permanent. Every other
remanufactured metal drum shall bear the marks in 6.1.3.1 (a) to (e) in a permanent form
(e.g. embossed) on the top head or side.
6.1.3.5 Metal drums made from materials (e.g. stainless steel) designed to be reused repeatedly may bear the
marks indicated in 6.1.3.1 (f) and (g) in a permanent form (e.g. embossed).
6.1.3.6 The marks in accordance with 6.1.3.1 are valid for only one design type or series of design types.
Different surface treatments may fall within the same design type.
2 Distinguishing sign of the State of registration used on motor vehicles and trailers in international road traffic,
e.g. in accordance with the Geneva Convention on Road Traffic of 1949 or the Vienna Convention on Road Traffic of
1968.
– 290 –
12
6
39
1
2
4
5
8
10
11
7
*Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 291 –
A “series of design types” means packagings of the same structural design, wall thickness, material and
cross-section, which differ only in their lesser design heights from the design type approved.
The closures of receptacles shall be identifiable as those referred to in the test report.
6.1.3.7 Marks shall be applied in the sequence of the sub-paragraphs in 6.1.3.1; each mark required in these
sub-paragraphs and when appropriate sub-paragraphs (h) to (j) of 6.1.3.8 shall be clearly separated, e.g.
by a slash or space, so as to be easily identifiable. For examples, see 6.1.3.11.
Any additional marks authorized by a competent authority shall still enable the other marks required in
6.1.3.1 to be correctly identified.
6.1.3.8 After reconditioning a packaging, the reconditioner shall apply to it a durable marking showing, in
sequence, durable marks showing:
(h) The State in which the reconditioning was carried out, indicated by the distinguishing sign used
on vehicles in international road traffic2;
(i) The name of the reconditioner or other identification of the packaging specified by the competent
authority;
(j) The year of reconditioning; the letter “R”; and, for every packaging successfully passing the
leakproofness test in 6.1.1.3, the additional letter “L”.
6.1.3.9 When, after reconditioning, the marks required by 6.1.3.1 (a) to (d) no longer appear on the top head or
the side of a metal drum, the reconditioner also shall apply them in a durable form followed by
6.1.3.8 (h), (i) and (j). These marks shall not identify a greater performance capability than that for
which the original design type had been tested and marked.
6.1.3.10 Packagings manufactured with recycled plastics material as defined in 1.2.1 shall be marked “REC”.
This mark shall be placed near the marks prescribed in 6.1.3.1.
6.1.3.11 Examples for marking NEW packagings
4G/Y145/S/02
NL/VL823
as in 6.1.3.1 (a) (i), (b), (c), (d) and (e) as in
6.1.3.1 (f) and (g) For a new fibreboard box
1A1/Y1.4/150/98
NL/VL824
as in 6.1.3.1 (a) (i), (b), (c), (d) and (e)
as in 6.1.3.1 (f) and (g)
For a new steel drum to
contain liquids
1A2/Y150/S/01
NL/VL825
as in 6.1.3.1 (a) (i), (b), (c), (d) and (e)
as in 6.1.3.1 (f) and (g)
For a new steel drum to
contain solids, or inner
packagings
4HW/Y136/S/98
NL/VL826
as in 6.1.3.1 (a) (i), (b), (c), (d) and (e)
as in 6.1.3.1 (f) and (g)
For a new plastics box of
equivalent specification
1A2/Y/100/01
USA/MM5
as in 6.1.3.1 (a) (i), (b), (c), (d) and (e)
as in 6.1.3.1 (f) and (g)
For a remanufactured steel
drum to contain liquids
RID/ADR/0A1/Y100/89
NL/VL123
as in 6.1.3.1 (a) (ii), (b), (c), (d) and (e)
as in 6.1.3.1 (f) and (g)
For a new light gauge metal
packaging, non-removable
head
RID/ADR/0A2/Y20/S/04
NL/VL124
as in 6.1.3.1 (a) (ii), (b), (c), (d) and (e)
as in 6.1.3.1 (f) and (g)
For a new light gauge metal
packaging, removable head,
intended to contain solids, or
liquids with a viscosity at
23 °C exceeding 200 mm²/s.
2 Distinguishing sign of the State of registration used on motor vehicles and trailers in international road traffic,
e.g. in accordance with the Geneva Convention on Road Traffic of 1949 or the Vienna Convention on Road Traffic of
1968.
– 291 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 292 –
6.1.3.12 Examples for marking RECONDITIONED packagings
1A1/Y1.4/150/97
NL/RB/01 RL
as in 6.1.3.1 (a) (i), (b), (c), (d) and (e)
as in 6.1.3.8 (h), (i) and (j)
1A2/Y150/S/99
USA/RB/00 R
as in 6.1.3.1 (a) (i), (b), (c), (d) and (e)
as in 6.1.3.8 (h), (i) and (j)
6.1.3.13 Example for marking SALVAGE packagings
1A2T/Y300/S/01
USA/abc
as in 6.1.3.1 (a) (i), (b), (c), (d) and (e)
as in 6.1.3.1 (f) and (g)
NOTE: The marking, for which examples are given in 6.1.3.11, 6.1.3.12 and 6.1.3.13 may be applied
in a single line or in multiple lines provided the correct sequence is respected.
6.1.3.14 Where a packaging conforms to one or more than one tested packaging design type, including one or
more than one tested IBC or large packaging design type, the packaging may bear more than one mark
to indicate the relevant performance test requirements that have been met. Where more than one mark
appears on a packaging, the marks shall appear in close proximity to one another and each mark shall
appear in its entirety.
6.1.3.15 Certification
By affixing marks in accordance with 6.1.3.1, it is certified that mass-produced packagings correspond
to the approved design type and that the requirements referred to in the approval have been met.
6.1.4 Requirements for packagings
6.1.4.0 General requirements
Any permeation of the substance contained in the packaging shall not constitute a danger under normal
conditions of carriage.
6.1.4.1 Steel drums
1A1 non-removable head
1A2 removable head
6.1.4.1.1 Body and heads shall be constructed of steel sheet of a suitable type and of adequate thickness in relation
to the capacity of the drum and to its intended use.
NOTE: In the case of carbon steel drums, “suitable” steels are identified in ISO 3573:1999 “Hot rolled
carbon steel sheet of commercial and drawing qualities” and ISO 3574:1999 “Cold-reduced carbon
steel sheet of commercial and drawing qualities”. For carbon steel drums below 100 litres “suitable”
steels in addition to the above standards are also identified in ISO 11949:1995 “Cold-reduced
electrolytic tinplate”, ISO 11950:1995 “Cold-reduced electrolytic chromium/chromium oxide-coated
steel” and ISO 11951:1995 “Cold-reduced blackplate in coil form for the production of tinplate or
electrolytic chromium/chromium oxide-coated steel”.
6.1.4.1.2 Body seams shall be welded on drums intended to contain more than 40 litres of liquid. Body seams
shall be mechanically seamed or welded on drums intended to contain solids or 40 litres or less of
liquids.
6.1.4.1.3 Chimes shall be mechanically seamed or welded. Separate reinforcing rings may be applied.
6.1.4.1.4 The body of a drum of a capacity greater than 60 litres shall, in general, have at least two expanded
rolling hoops or, alternatively, at least two separate rolling hoops. If there are separate rolling hoops
they shall be fitted tightly on the body and so secured that they cannot shift. Rolling hoops shall not be
spot welded.
– 292 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 293 –
6.1.4.1.5 Openings for filling, emptying and venting in the bodies or heads of non-removable head (1A1) drums
shall not exceed 7 cm in diameter. Drums with larger openings are considered to be of the removable
head type (1A2). Closures for openings in the bodies and heads of drums shall be so designed and
applied that they will remain secure and leakproof under normal conditions of carriage. Closure flanges
may be mechanically seamed or welded in place. Gaskets or other sealing elements shall be used with
closures, unless the closure is inherently leakproof.
6.1.4.1.6 Closure devices for removable head (1A2) drums shall be so designed and applied that they will remain
secure and drums will remain leakproof under normal conditions of carriage. Gaskets or other sealing
elements shall be used with all removable heads.
6.1.4.1.7 If materials used for body, heads, closures and fittings are not in themselves compatible with the
contents to be carried, suitable internal protective coatings or treatments shall be applied. These coatings
or treatments shall retain their protective properties under normal conditions of carriage.
6.1.4.1.8 Maximum capacity of drum: 450 litres.
6.1.4.1.9 Maximum net mass: 400 kg.
6.1.4.2 Aluminium drums
1B1 non-removable head
1B2 removable head
6.1.4.2.1 Body and heads shall be constructed of aluminium at least 99 % pure or of an aluminium base alloy.
Material shall be of a suitable type and of adequate thickness in relation to the capacity of the drum and
to its intended use.
6.1.4.2.2 All seams shall be welded. Chime seams, if any, shall be reinforced by the application of separate
reinforcing rings.
6.1.4.2.3 The body of a drum of a capacity greater than 60 litres shall, in general, have at least two expanded
rolling hoops or, alternatively, at least two separate rolling hoops. If there are separate rolling hoops
they shall be fitted tightly on the body and so secured that they cannot shift. Rolling hoops shall not be
spot welded.
6.1.4.2.4 Openings for filling, emptying and venting in the bodies or heads of non-removable head (1B1) drums
shall not exceed 7 cm in diameter. Drums with larger openings are considered to be of the removable
head type (1B2). Closures for openings in the bodies and heads of drums shall be so designed and
applied that they will remain secure and leakproof under normal conditions of carriage. Closure flanges
shall be welded in place so that the weld provides a leakproof seam. Gaskets or other sealing elements
shall be used with closures, unless the closure is inherently leakproof.
6.1.4.2.5 Closure devices for removable head (1B2) drums shall be so designed and applied that they will remain
secure and drums will remain leakproof under normal conditions of carriage. Gaskets or other sealing
elements shall be used with all removable heads.
6.1.4.2.6 If materials used for body, heads, closures and fittings are not in themselves compatible with the
contents to be carried, suitable internal protective coatings or treatments shall be applied. These coatings
or treatments shall retain their protective properties under normal conditions of carriage.
6.1.4.2.7 Maximum capacity of drum: 450 litres.
6.1.4.2.8 Maximum net mass: 400 kg.
6.1.4.3 Drums of metal other than aluminium or steel
1N1 non-removable head
1N2 removable head
6.1.4.3.1 The body and heads shall be constructed of a metal or of a metal alloy other than steel or aluminium.
Material shall be of a suitable type and of adequate thickness in relation to the capacity of the drum and
to its intended use.
– 293 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 294 –
6.1.4.3.2 Chime seams, if any, shall be reinforced by the application of separate reinforcing rings. All seams, if
any, shall be joined (welded, solded, etc.) in accordance with the technical state of the art for the used
metal or metal alloy.
6.1.4.3.3 The body of a drum of a capacity greater than 60 litres shall, in general, have at least two expanded
rolling hoops or, alternatively, at least two separate rolling hoops. If there are separate rolling hoops
they shall be fitted tightly on the body and so secured that they cannot shift. Rolling hoops shall not be
spot welded.
6.1.4.3.4 Openings for filling, emptying and venting in the bodies or heads of non-removable head (1N1) drums
shall not exceed 7 cm in diameter. Drums with larger openings are considered to be of the removable
head type (1N2). Closures for openings in the bodies and heads of drums shall be so designed and
applied that they will remain secure and leakproof under normal conditions of carriage. Closure flanges
shall be joined in place (welded, solded, etc.) in accordance with the technical state of the art for the
used metal or metal alloy so that the seam join is leakproof. Gaskets or other sealing elements shall be
used with closures, unless the closure is inherently leakproof.
6.1.4.3.5 Closure devices for removable head (1N2) drums shall be so designed and applied that they will remain
secure and drums will remain leakproof under normal conditions of carriage. Gaskets or other sealing
elements shall be used with all removable heads.
6.1.4.3.6 If materials used for body, heads, closures and fittings are not in themselves compatible with the
contents to be carried, suitable internal protective coatings or treatments shall be applied. These coatings
or treatments shall retain their protective properties under normal conditions of carriage.
6.1.4.3.7 Maximum capacity of drum: 450 litres.
6.1.4.3.8 Maximum net mass: 400 kg.
6.1.4.4 Steel or aluminium jerricans
3A1 steel, non-removable head
3A2 steel, removable head
3B1 aluminium, non-removable head
3B2 aluminium, removable head
6.1.4.4.1 Body and heads shall be constructed of steel sheet, of aluminium at least 99 % pure or of an aluminium
base alloy. Material shall be of a suitable type and of adequate thickness in relation to the capacity of
the jerrican and to its intended use.
6.1.4.4.2 Chimes of steel jerricans shall be mechanically seamed or welded. Body seams of steel jerricans
intended to contain more than 40 litres of liquid shall be welded. Body seams of steel jerricans intended
to contain 40 litres or less shall be mechanically seamed or welded. For aluminium jerricans, all seams
shall be welded. Chime seams, if any, shall be reinforced by the application of a separate reinforcing
ring.
6.1.4.4.3 Openings in non-removable head jerricans (3A1 and 3B1) shall not exceed 7 cm in diameter. Jerricans
with larger openings are considered to be of the removable head type (3A2 and 3B2). Closures shall be
so designed that they will remain secure and leakproof under normal conditions of carriage. Gaskets or
other sealing elements shall be used with closures, unless the closure is inherently leakproof.
6.1.4.4.4 If materials used for body, heads, closures and fittings are not in themselves compatible with the
contents to be carried, suitable internal protective coatings or treatments shall be applied. These coatings
or treatments shall retain their protective properties under normal conditions of carriage.
6.1.4.4.5 Maximum capacity of jerrican: 60 litres.
6.1.4.4.6 Maximum net mass: 120 kg.
– 294 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 295 –
6.1.4.5 Plywood drums
1D
6.1.4.5.1 The wood used shall be well seasoned, commercially dry and free from any defect likely to lessen the
effectiveness of the drum for the purpose intended. If a material other than plywood is used for the
manufacture of the heads, it shall be of a quality equivalent to the plywood.
6.1.4.5.2 At least two-ply plywood shall be used for the body and at least three-ply plywood for the heads; the
plies shall be firmly glued together by a water resistant adhesive with their grain crosswise.
6.1.4.5.3 The body and heads of the drum and their joins shall be of a design appropriate to the capacity of the
drum and to its intended use.
6.1.4.5.4 In order to prevent sifting of the contents, lids shall be lined with kraft paper or some other equivalent
material which shall be securely fastened to the lid and extend to the outside along its full circumference.
6.1.4.5.5 Maximum capacity of drum: 250 litres.
6.1.4.5.6 Maximum net mass: 400 kg.
6.1.4.6 (Deleted)
6.1.4.7 Fibre drums
1G
6.1.4.7.1 The body of the drum shall consist of multiple plies of heavy paper or fibreboard (without corrugations)
firmly glued or laminated together and may include one or more protective layers of bitumen, waxed
kraft paper, metal foil, plastics material, etc.
6.1.4.7.2 Heads shall be of natural wood, fibreboard, metal, plywood, plastics or other suitable material and may
include one or more protective layers of bitumen, waxed kraft paper, metal foil, plastics material, etc.
6.1.4.7.3 The body and heads of the drum and their joins shall be of a design appropriate to the capacity of the
drum and to its intended use.
6.1.4.7.4 The assembled packaging shall be sufficiently water resistant so as not to delaminate under normal
conditions of carriage.
6.1.4.7.5 Maximum capacity of drum: 450 litres.
6.1.4.7.6 Maximum net mass: 400 kg.
6.1.4.8 Plastics drums and jerricans
1H1 drums, non-removable head
1H2 drums, removable head
3H1 jerricans, non-removable head
3H2 jerricans, removable head
6.1.4.8.1 The packaging shall be manufactured from suitable plastics material and be of adequate strength in
relation to its capacity and intended use. Except for recycled plastics material as defined in 1.2.1, no
used material other than production residues or regrind from the same manufacturing process may be
used. The packaging shall be adequately resistant to ageing and to degradation caused either by the
substance contained or by ultra-violet radiation. Any permeation of the substance contained in the
package, or recycled plastics material used to produce new packaging, shall not constitute a danger
under normal conditions of carriage.
6.1.4.8.2 If protection against ultra-violet radiation is required, it shall be provided by the addition of carbon
black or other suitable pigments or inhibitors. These additives shall be compatible with the contents and
remain effective throughout the life of the packaging. Where use is made of carbon black, pigments or
inhibitors other than those used in the manufacture of the tested design type, retesting may be waived if
the carbon black content does not exceed 2 % by mass or if the pigment content does not exceed 3 %
by mass; the content of inhibitors of ultra-violet radiation is not limited.
– 295 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 296 –
6.1.4.8.3 Additives serving purposes other than protection against ultra-violet radiation may be included in the
composition of the plastics material provided that they do not adversely affect the chemical and physical
properties of the material of the packaging. In such circumstances, retesting may be waived.
6.1.4.8.4 The wall thickness at every point of the packaging shall be appropriate to its capacity and intended use,
taking into account the stresses to which each point is liable to be exposed.
6.1.4.8.5 Openings for filling, emptying and venting in the bodies or heads of non-removable head drums (1H1)
and jerricans (3H1) shall not exceed 7 cm in diameter. Drums and jerricans with larger openings are
considered to be of the removable head type (1H2 and 3H2). Closures for openings in the bodies or
heads of drums and jerricans shall be so designed and applied that they will remain secure and leakproof
under normal conditions of carriage. Gaskets or other sealing elements shall be used with closures unless
the closure is inherently leakproof.
6.1.4.8.6 Closure devices for removable head drums and jerricans (1H2 and 3H2) shall be so designed and applied
that they will remain secure and leakproof under normal conditions of carriage. Gaskets shall be used
with all removable heads unless the drum or jerrican design is such that, where the removable head is
properly secured, the drum or jerrican is inherently leakproof.
6.1.4.8.7 The maximum permissible permeability for flammable liquids shall be 0.008 g/l.h at 23 °C
(see 6.1.5.7).
6.1.4.8.8 (Deleted)
6.1.4.8.9 Maximum capacity of drums and jerricans: 1H1, 1H2: 450 litres
3H1, 3H2: 60 litres.
6.1.4.8.10 Maximum net mass: 1H1, 1H2: 400 kg
3H1, 3H2: 120 kg.
6.1.4.9 Boxes of natural wood
4C1 ordinary
4C2 with sift-proof walls
6.1.4.9.1 The wood used shall be well seasoned, commercially dry and free from defects that would materially
lessen the strength of any part of the box. The strength of the material used and the method of
construction shall be appropriate to the capacity and intended use of the box. The tops and bottoms may
be made of water resistant reconstituted wood such as hardboard, particle board or other suitable type.
6.1.4.9.2 Fastenings shall be resistant to vibration experienced under normal conditions of carriage. End grain
nailing shall be avoided whenever practicable. Joins which are likely to be highly stressed shall be made
using clenched or annular ring nails or equivalent fastenings.
6.1.4.9.3 Box 4C2: each part shall consist of one piece or be equivalent thereto. Parts are considered equivalent
to one piece when one of the following methods of glued assembly is used: Lindermann joint, tongue
and groove joint, ship lap or rabbet joint or butt joint with at least two corrugated metal fasteners at each
joint.
6.1.4.9.4 Maximum net mass: 400 kg.
6.1.4.10 Plywood boxes
4D
6.1.4.10.1 Plywood used shall be at least 3-ply. It shall be made from well seasoned rotary cut, sliced or sawn
veneer, commercially dry and free from defects that would materially lessen the strength of the box.
The strength of the material used and the method of construction shall be appropriate to the capacity
and intended use of the box. All adjacent plies shall be glued with water resistant adhesive. Other
suitable materials may be used together with plywood in the construction of boxes. Boxes shall be firmly
nailed or secured to corner posts or ends or be assembled by equally suitable devices.
6.1.4.10.2 Maximum net mass: 400 kg.
– 296 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 297 –
6.1.4.11 Reconstituted wood boxes
4F
6.1.4.11.1 The walls of boxes shall be made of water resistant reconstituted wood such as hardboard, particle board
or other suitable type. The strength of the material used and the method of construction shall be
appropriate to the capacity of the boxes and to their intended use.
6.1.4.11.2 Other parts of the boxes may be made of other suitable material.
6.1.4.11.3 Boxes shall be securely assembled by means of suitable devices.
6.1.4.11.4 Maximum net mass: 400 kg.
6.1.4.12 Fibreboard boxes
4G
6.1.4.12.1 Strong and good quality solid or double-faced corrugated fibreboard (single or multiwall) shall be used,
appropriate to the capacity of the box and to its intended use. The water resistance of the outer surface
shall be such that the increase in mass, as determined in a test carried out over a period of 30 minutes
by the Cobb method of determining water absorption, is not greater than 155 g/m² – see ISO 535:l991.
It shall have proper bending qualities. Fibreboard shall be cut, creased without scoring, and slotted so
as to permit assembly without cracking, surface breaks or undue bending. The fluting of corrugated
fibreboard shall be firmly glued to the facings.
6.1.4.12.2 The ends of boxes may have a wooden frame or be entirely of wood or other suitable material.
Reinforcements of wooden battens or other suitable material may be used.
6.1.4.12.3 Manufacturing joins in the body of boxes shall be taped, lapped and glued, or lapped and stitched with
metal staples. Lapped joins shall have an appropriate overlap.
6.1.4.12.4 Where closing is effected by gluing or taping, a water resistant adhesive shall be used.
6.1.4.12.5 Boxes shall be designed so as to provide a good fit to the contents.
6.1.4.12.6 Maximum net mass: 400 kg.
6.1.4.13 Plastics boxes
4H1 expanded plastics boxes
4H2 solid plastics boxes
6.1.4.13.1 The box shall be manufactured from suitable plastics material and be of adequate strength in relation to
its capacity and intended use. Except for recycled plastics material as defined in 1.2.1, no used material
other than production residues or regrind from the same manufacturing process may be used. The box
shall be adequately resistant to ageing and to degradation caused either by the substance contained or
by ultra-violet radiation.
6.1.4.13.2 An expanded plastics box shall comprise two parts made of a moulded expanded plastics material, a
bottom section containing cavities for the inner packagings and a top section covering and interlocking
with the bottom section. The top and bottom sections shall be designed so that the inner packagings fit
snugly. The closure cap for any inner packaging shall not be in contact with the inside of the top section
of this box.
6.1.4.13.3 For dispatch, an expanded plastics box shall be closed with a self-adhesive tape having sufficient tensile
strength to prevent the box from opening. The adhesive tape shall be weather resistant and its adhesive
compatible with the expanded plastics material of the box. Other closing devices at least equally
effective may be used.
6.1.4.13.4 For solid plastics boxes, protection against ultra-violet radiation, if required, shall be provided by the
addition of carbon black or other suitable pigments or inhibitors. These additives shall be compatible
with the contents and remain effective throughout the life of the box. Where use is made of carbon
black, pigments or inhibitors other than those used in the manufacture of the tested design type, retesting
– 297 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 298 –
may be waived if the carbon black content does not exceed 2 % by mass or if the pigment content does
not exceed 3 % by mass; the content of inhibitors of ultra-violet radiation is not limited.
6.1.4.13.5 Additives serving purposes other than protection against ultra-violet radiation may be included in the
composition of the plastics material provided that they do not adversely affect the chemical or physical
properties of the material of the box. In such circumstances, retesting may be waived.
6.1.4.13.6 Solid plastics boxes shall have closure devices made of a suitable material of adequate strength and so
designed as to prevent the box from unintentional opening.
6.1.4.13.7 (Deleted)
6.1.4.13.8 Maximum net mass 4H1: 60 kg
4H2: 400 kg.
6.1.4.14 Steel, aluminium or other metal boxes
4A steel boxes
4B aluminium boxes
4N metal, other than steel or aluminium, boxes
6.1.4.14.1 The strength of the metal and the construction of the box shall be appropriate to the capacity of the box
and to its intended use.
6.1.4.14.2 Boxes shall be lined with fibreboard or felt packing pieces or shall have an inner liner or coating of
suitable material, as required. If a double seamed metal liner is used, steps shall be taken to prevent the
ingress of substances, particularly explosives, into the recesses of the seams.
6.1.4.14.3 Closures may be of any suitable type; they shall remain secured under normal conditions of carriage.
6.1.4.14.4 Maximum net mass: 400 kg.
6.1.4.15 Textile bags
5L1 without inner liner or coating
5L2 sift-proof
5L3 water resistant
6.1.4.15.1 The textiles used shall be of good quality. The strength of the fabric and the construction of the bag
shall be appropriate to the capacity of the bag and to its intended use.
6.1.4.15.2 Bags, sift-proof, 5L2: the bag shall be made sift-proof, for example by the use of:
(a) paper bonded to the inner surface of the bag by a water resistant adhesive such as bitumen; or
(b) plastics film bonded to the inner surface of the bag; or
(c) one or more inner liners made of paper or plastics material.
6.1.4.15.3 Bags, water resistant, 5L3: to prevent the entry of moisture the bag shall be made waterproof, for
example by the use of:
(a) separate inner liners of water resistant paper (e.g. waxed kraft paper, tarred paper or
plastics-coated kraft paper); or
(b) plastics film bonded to the inner surface of the bag; or
(c) one or more inner liners made of plastics material.
6.1.4.15.4 Maximum net mass: 50 kg.
6.1.4.16 Woven plastics bags
5H1 without inner liner or coating
5H2 sift-proof
5H3 water resistant
– 298 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 299 –
6.1.4.16.1 Bags shall be made from stretched tapes or monofilaments of a suitable plastics material. The strength
of the material used and the construction of the bag shall be appropriate to the capacity of the bag and
to its intended use.
6.1.4.16.2 If the fabric is woven flat, the bags shall be made by sewing or some other method ensuring closure of
the bottom and one side. If the fabric is tubular, the bag shall be closed by sewing, weaving or some
other equally strong method of closure.
6.1.4.16.3 Bags, sift-proof, 5H2: the bag shall be made sift-proof, for example by means of:
(a) paper or a plastics film bonded to the inner surface of the bag; or
(b) one or more separate inner liners made of paper or plastics material.
6.1.4.16.4 Bags, water resistant, 5H3: to prevent the entry of moisture, the bag shall be made waterproof, for
example by means of:
(a) separate inner liners of water resistant paper (e.g. waxed kraft paper, double-tarred kraft paper
or plastics-coated kraft paper); or
(b) plastics film bonded to the inner or outer surface of the bag; or
(c) one or more inner plastics liners.
6.1.4.16.5 Maximum net mass: 50 kg.
6.1.4.17 Plastics film bags
5H4
6.1.4.17.1 Bags shall be made of a suitable plastics material. The strength of the material used and the construction
of the bag shall be appropriate to the capacity of the bag and to its intended use. Joins and closures shall
withstand pressures and impacts liable to occur under normal conditions of carriage.
6.1.4.17.2 Maximum net mass: 50 kg.
6.1.4.18 Paper bags
5M1 multiwall
5M2 multiwall, water resistant
6.1.4.18.1 Bags shall be made of a suitable kraft paper or of an equivalent paper with at least three plies, the middle
ply of which may be net-cloth and adhesive bonding to the outer paper plies. The strength of the paper
and the construction of the bags shall be appropriate to the capacity of the bag and to its intended use.
Joins and closures shall be sift-proof.
6.1.4.18.2 Bags 5M2: to prevent the entry of moisture, a bag of four plies or more shall be made waterproof by the
use of either a water resistant ply as one of the two outermost plies or a water resistant barrier made of
a suitable protective material between the two outermost plies; a bag of three plies shall be made
waterproof by the use of a water resistant ply as the outermost ply. Where there is a danger of the
substance contained reacting with moisture or where it is packed damp, a waterproof ply or barrier, such
as double-tarred kraft paper, plastics-coated kraft paper, plastics film bonded to the inner surface of the
bag, or one or more inner plastics liners, shall also be placed next to the substance. Joins and closures
shall be waterproof.
6.1.4.18.3 Maximum net mass: 50 kg.
– 299 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 300 –
6.1.4.19 Composite packagings (plastics material)
6HA1 plastics receptacle with outer steel drum
6HA2 plastics receptacle with outer steel crate or box
6HB1 plastics receptacle with outer aluminium drum
6HB2 plastics receptacle with outer aluminium crate or box
6HC plastics receptacle with outer wooden box
6HD1 plastics receptacle with outer plywood drum
6HD2 plastics receptacle with outer plywood box
6HG1 plastics receptacle with outer fibre drum
6HG2 plastics receptacle with outer fibreboard box
6HH1 plastics receptacle with outer plastics drum
6HH2 plastics receptacle with outer solid plastics box
6.1.4.19.1 Inner receptacle
6.1.4.19.1.1 The requirements of 6.1.4.8.1 and 6.1.4.8.4 to 6.1.4.8.7 apply to plastics inner receptacles.
6.1.4.19.1.2 The plastics inner receptacle shall fit snugly inside the outer packaging, which shall be free of any
projection that might abrade the plastics material.
6.1.4.19.1.3 Maximum capacity of inner receptacle:
6HA1, 6HB1, 6HD1, 6HG1, 6HH1: 250 litres
6HA2, 6HB2, 6HC, 6HD2, 6HG2, 6HH2: 60 litres.
6.1.4.19.1.4 Maximum net mass:
6HA1, 6HB1, 6HD1, 6HG1, 6HH1: 400 kg
6HA2, 6HB2, 6HC, 6HD2, 6HG2, 6HH2: 75 kg.
6.1.4.19.2 Outer packaging
6.1.4.19.2.1 Plastics receptacle with outer steel or aluminium drum 6HA1 or 6HB1; the relevant requirements of
6.1.4.1 or 6.1.4.2, as appropriate, apply to the construction of the outer packaging.
6.1.4.19.2.2 Plastics receptacle with outer steel or aluminium crate or box 6HA2 or 6HB2; the relevant requirements
of 6.1.4.14 apply to the construction of the outer packaging.
6.1.4.19.2.3 Plastics receptacle with outer wooden box 6HC; the relevant requirements of 6.1.4.9 apply to the
construction of the outer packaging.
6.1.4.19.2.4 Plastics receptacle with outer plywood drum 6HD1; the relevant requirements of 6.1.4.5 apply to the
construction of the outer packaging.
6.1.4.19.2.5 Plastics receptacle with outer plywood box 6HD2; the relevant requirements of 6.1.4.10 apply to the
construction of the outer packaging.
6.1.4.19.2.6 Plastics receptacle with outer fibre drum 6HG1; the requirements of 6.1.4.7.1 to 6.1.4.7.4 apply to the
construction of the outer packaging.
6.1.4.19.2.7 Plastics receptacle with outer fibreboard box 6HG2; the relevant requirements of 6.1.4.12 apply to the
construction of the outer packaging.
6.1.4.19.2.8 Plastics receptacle with outer plastics drum 6HH1; the requirements of 6.1.4.8.1 to 6.1.4.8.6 apply to
the construction of the outer packaging.
6.1.4.19.2.9 Plastics receptacles with outer solid plastics box (including corrugated plastics material) 6HH2; the
requirements of 6.1.4.13.1 and 6.1.4.13.4 to 6.1.4.13.6 apply to the construction of the outer packaging.
6.1.4.20 Composite packagings (glass, porcelain or stoneware)
6PA1 receptacle with outer steel drum
6PA2 receptacle with outer steel crate or box
6PB1 receptacle with outer aluminium drum
– 300 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 301 –
6PB2 receptacle with outer aluminium crate or box
6PC receptacle with outer wooden box
6PD1 receptacle with outer plywood drum
6PD2 receptacle with outer wickerwork hamper
6PG1 receptacle with outer fibre drum
6PG2 receptacle with outer fibreboard box
6PH1 receptacle with outer expanded plastics packaging
6PH2 receptacle with outer solid plastics packaging
6.1.4.20.1 Inner receptacle
6.1.4.20.1.1 Receptacles shall be of a suitable form (cylindrical or pear-shaped) and be made of good quality material
free from any defect that could impair their strength. The walls shall be sufficiently thick at every point
and free from internal stresses.
6.1.4.20.1.2 Screw-threaded plastics closures, ground glass stoppers or closures at least equally effective shall be
used as closures for receptacles. Any part of the closure likely to come into contact with the contents of
the receptacle shall be resistant to those contents. Care shall be taken to ensure that the closures are so
fitted as to be leakproof and are suitably secured to prevent any loosening during carriage. If vented
closures are necessary, they shall comply with 4.1.1.8.
6.1.4.20.1.3 The receptacle shall be firmly secured in the outer packaging by means of cushioning and/or absorbent
materials.
6.1.4.20.1.4 Maximum capacity of receptacle: 60 litres.
6.1.4.20.1.5 Maximum net mass: 75 kg.
6.1.4.20.2 Outer packaging
6.1.4.20.2.1 Receptacle with outer steel drum 6PA1; the relevant requirements of 6.1.4.1 apply to the construction
of the outer packaging. The removable lid required for this type of packaging may nevertheless be in
the form of a cap.
6.1.4.20.2.2 Receptacle with outer steel crate or box 6PA2; the relevant requirements of 6.1.4.14 apply to the
construction of the outer packaging. For cylindrical receptacles the outer packaging shall, when upright,
rise above the receptacle and its closure. If the crate surrounds a pear-shaped receptacle and is of
matching shape, the outer packaging shall be fitted with a protective cover (cap).
6.1.4.20.2.3 Receptacle with outer aluminium drum 6PB1; the relevant requirements of 6.1.4.2 apply to the
construction of the outer packaging.
6.1.4.20.2.4 Receptacle with outer aluminium crate or box 6PB2; the relevant requirements of 6.1.4.14 apply to the
construction of the outer packaging.
6.1.4.20.2.5 Receptacle with outer wooden box 6PC; the relevant requirements of 6.1.4.9 apply to the construction
of the outer packaging.
6.1.4.20.2.6 Receptacle with outer plywood drum 6PD1; the relevant requirements of 6.1.4.5 apply to the
construction of the outer packaging.
6.1.4.20.2.7 Receptacle with outer wickerwork hamper 6PD2. The wickerwork hamper shall be properly made with
material of good quality. It shall be fitted with a protective cover (cap) so as to prevent damage to the
receptacle.
6.1.4.20.2.8 Receptacle with outer fibre drum 6PG1; the relevant requirements of 6.1.4.7.1 to 6.1.4.7.4 apply to the
construction of the outer packaging.
6.1.4.20.2.9 Receptacle with outer fibreboard box 6PG2; the relevant requirements of 6.1.4.12 apply to the
construction of the outer packaging.
6.1.4.20.2.10 Receptacle with outer expanded plastics or solid plastics packaging (6PH1 or 6PH2); the materials of
both outer packagings shall meet the relevant requirements of 6.1.4.13. Outer solid plastics packaging
shall be manufactured from high density polyethylene or some other comparable plastics material. The
removable lid for this type of packaging may nevertheless be in the form of a cap.
– 301 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 302 –
6.1.4.21 Combination packagings
The relevant requirements of section 6.1.4 for the outer packagings to be used, are applicable.
NOTE: For the inner and outer packagings to be used, see the relevant packing instructions in
Chapter 4.1.
6.1.4.22 Light gauge metal packagings
0A1 non-removable-head
0A2 removable-head
6.1.4.22.1 The sheet metal for the body and ends shall be of suitable steel, and of a gauge appropriate to the
capacity and intended use of the packaging.
6.1.4.22.2 The joints shall be welded, at least double-seamed by welting or produced by a method ensuring a
similar degree of strength and leakproofness.
6.1.4.22.3 Inner coatings of zinc, tin, lacquer, etc. shall be tough and shall adhere to the steel at every point,
including the closures.
6.1.4.22.4 Openings for filling, emptying and venting in the bodies or heads of non-removable head (0A1)
packagings shall not exceed 7 cm in diameter. Packagings with larger openings shall be considered to
be of the removable-head type (0A2).
6.1.4.22.5 The closures of non-removable-head packagings (0A1) shall either be of the screw-threaded type or be
capable of being secured by a screwable device or a device at least equally effective. The closures of
removable-head packagings (0A2) shall be so designed and fitted that they stay firmly closed and the
packagings remain leakproof in normal conditions of carriage.
6.1.4.22.6 Maximum capacity of packagings: 40 litres.
6.1.4.22.7 Maximum net mass: 50 kg.
6.1.5 Test requirements for packagings
6.1.5.1 Performance and frequency of tests
6.1.5.1.1 The design type of each packaging shall be tested as provided in 6.1.5 in accordance with procedures
established by the competent authority allowing the allocation of the mark and shall be approved by this
competent authority.
6.1.5.1.2 Each packaging design type shall successfully pass the tests prescribed in this Chapter before being
used. A packaging design type is defined by the design, size, material and thickness, manner of
construction and packing, but may include various surface treatments. It also includes packagings which
differ from the design type only in their lesser design height.
6.1.5.1.3 Tests shall be repeated on production samples at intervals established by the competent authority. For
such tests on paper or fibreboard packagings, preparation at ambient conditions is considered equivalent
to the requirements of 6.1.5.2.3.
6.1.5.1.4 Tests shall also be repeated after each modification which alters the design, material or manner of
construction of a packaging.
6.1.5.1.5 The competent authority may permit the selective testing of packagings that differ only in minor respects
from a tested type, e.g. smaller sizes of inner packagings or inner packagings of lower net mass; and
packagings such as drums, bags and boxes which are produced with small reductions in external
dimension(s).
6.1.5.1.6 (Reserved)
NOTE: For the conditions for using different inner packagings in an outer packaging and permissible
variations in inner packagings, see 4.1.1.5.1. These conditions do not limit the use of inner packagings
when applying 6.1.5.1.7.
– 302 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 303 –
6.1.5.1.7 Articles or inner packagings of any type for solids or liquids may be assembled and carried without
testing in an outer packaging under the following conditions:
(a) The outer packaging shall have been successfully tested in accordance with 6.1.5.3 with fragile
(e.g. glass) inner packagings containing liquids using the packing group I drop height;
(b) The total combined gross mass of inner packagings shall not exceed one half the gross mass of
inner packagings used for the drop test in (a) above;
(c) The thickness of cushioning material between inner packagings and between inner packagings
and the outside of the packaging shall not be reduced below the corresponding thicknesses in the
originally tested packaging; and if a single inner packaging was used in the original test, the
thicknesses of cushioning between inner packagings shall not be less than the thickness of
cushioning between the outside of the packaging and the inner packaging in the original test. If
either fewer or smaller inner packagings are used (as compared to the inner packagings used in
the drop test), sufficient additional cushioning material shall be used to take up void spaces;
(d) The outer packaging shall have passed successfully the stacking test in 6.1.5.6 while empty. The
total mass of identical packages shall be based on the combined mass of inner packagings used
for the drop test in (a) above;
(e) Inner packagings containing liquids shall be completely surrounded with a sufficient quantity of
absorbent material to absorb the entire liquid contents of the inner packagings;
(f) If the outer packaging is intended to contain inner packagings for liquids and is not leakproof, or
is intended to contain inner packagings for solids and is not siftproof, a means of containing any
liquid or solid contents in the event of leakage shall be provided in the form of a leakproof liner,
plastics bag or other equally efficient means of containment. For packagings containing liquids,
the absorbent material required in (e) above shall be placed inside the means of containing the
liquid contents;
(g) Packagings shall be marked in accordance with 6.1.3 as having been tested to packing group I
performance for combination packagings. The marked gross mass in kilograms shall be the sum
of the mass of the outer packaging plus one half of the mass of the inner packaging(s) as used
for the drop test referred to in (a) above. Such a package mark shall also contain a letter “V” as
described in 6.1.2.4.
6.1.5.1.8 The competent authority may at any time require proof, by tests in accordance with this section, that
serially-produced packagings meet the requirements of the design type tests. For verification purposes
records of such tests shall be maintained.
6.1.5.1.9 If an inner treatment or coating is required for safety reasons, it shall retain its protective properties even
after the tests.
6.1.5.1.10 Provided the validity of the test results is not affected and with the approval of the competent authority,
several tests may be made on one sample.
6.1.5.1.11 Salvage packagings
Salvage packagings (see 1.2.1) shall be tested and marked in accordance with the requirements
applicable to packing group II packagings intended for the carriage of solids or inner packagings, except
as follows:
(a) The test substance used in performing the tests shall be water, and the packagings shall be filled
to not less than 98 % of their maximum capacity. It is permissible to use additives, such as bags
of lead shot, to achieve the requisite total package mass so long as they are placed so that the test
results are not affected. Alternatively, in performing the drop test, the drop height may be varied
in accordance with 6.1.5.3.5 (b);
(b) Packagings shall, in addition, have been successfully subjected to the leakproofness test at
30 kPa, with the results of this test reflected in the test report required by 6.1.5.8; and
(c) Packagings shall be marked with the letter “T” as described in 6.1.2.4.
– 303 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 304 –
6.1.5.2 Preparation of packagings for testing
6.1.5.2.1 Tests shall be carried out on packagings prepared as for carriage including, with respect to combination
packagings, the inner packagings used. Inner or single receptacles or packagings other than bags shall
be filled to not less than 98 % of their maximum capacity for liquids or 95 % for solids. Bags shall be
filled to the maximum mass at which they may be used. For combination packagings where the inner
packaging is designed to carry liquids and solids, separate testing is required for both liquid and solid
contents. The substances or articles to be carried in the packagings may be replaced by other substances
or articles except where this would invalidate the results of the tests. For solids, when another substance
is used it shall have the same physical characteristics (mass, grain size, etc.) as the substance to be
carried. It is permissible to use additives, such as bags of lead shot, to achieve the requisite total package
mass, so long as they are placed so that the test results are not affected.
6.1.5.2.2 In the drop tests for liquids, when another substance is used, it shall be of similar relative density and
viscosity to those of the substance being carried. Water may also be used for the liquid drop test under
the conditions in 6.1.5.3.5.
6.1.5.2.3 Paper or fibreboard packagings shall be conditioned for at least 24 hours in an atmosphere having a
controlled temperature and relative humidity (r.h.). There are three options, one of which shall be
chosen. The preferred atmosphere is 23 ± 2 °C and 50 % ± 2 % r.h. The two other options are 20 ± 2 °C
and 65 % ± 2 % r.h. or 27 ± 2 °C and 65 % ± 2 % r.h.
NOTE: Average values shall fall within these limits. Short-term fluctuations and measurement
limitations may cause individual measurements to vary by up to ± 5 % relative humidity without
significant impairment of test reproducibility.
6.1.5.2.4 (Reserved)
6.1.5.2.5 To check that their chemical compatibility with the liquids is sufficient, plastics drums and jerricans in
accordance with 6.1.4.8 and if necessary composite packagings (plastics material) in accordance
with 6.1.4.19 shall be subjected to storage at ambient temperature for six months, during which time the
test samples shall be kept filled with the goods they are intended to carry.
For the first and last 24 hours of storage, the test samples shall be placed with the closure downwards.
However, packagings fitted with a vent shall be so placed on each occasion for five minutes only. After
this storage the test samples shall undergo the tests prescribed in 6.1.5.3 to 6.1.5.6.
When it is known that the strength properties of the plastics material of the inner receptacles of
composite packagings (plastics material) are not significantly altered by the action of the filling
substance, it shall not be necessary to check that the chemical compatibility is sufficient.
A significant alteration in strength properties means:
(a) distinct embrittlement; or
(b) a considerable decrease in elasticity, unless related to a not less than proportionate increase in
the elongation under load.
Where the behaviour of the plastics material has been established by other means, the above
compatibility test may be dispensed with. Such procedures shall be at least equivalent to the above
compatibility test and be recognized by the competent authority.
NOTE: For plastics drums and jerricans and composite packagings (plastics material) made of
polyethylene, see also 6.1.5.2.6 below.
6.1.5.2.6 For polyethylene drums and jerricans in accordance with 6.1.4.8 and if necessary, polyethylene
composite packagings in accordance with 6.1.4.19, chemical compatibility with filling liquids
assimilated in accordance with 4.1.1.21 may be verified as follows with standard liquids (see 6.1.6).
The standard liquids are representative for the processes of deterioration on polyethylene, as there are
softening through swelling, cracking under stress, molecular degradation and combinations thereof. The
sufficient chemical compatibility of the packagings may be verified by storage of the required test
samples for three weeks at 40 °C with the appropriate standard liquid(s); where this standard liquid is
water, storage in accordance with this procedure is not required. Storage is not required either for test
samples which are used for the stacking test in case of the standard liquids “wetting solution” and “acetic
acid”.
– 304 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 305 –
For the first and last 24 hours of storage, the test samples shall be placed with the closure downwards.
However, packagings fitted with a vent shall be so placed on each occasion for five minutes only. After
this storage, the test samples shall undergo the tests prescribed in 6.1.5.3 to 6.1.5.6.
The compatibility test for tert-Butyl hydroperoxide with more than 40 % peroxide content and
peroxyacetic acids of Class 5.2 shall not be carried out using standard liquids. For these substances,
sufficient chemical compatibility of the test samples shall be verified during a storage period of six
months at ambient temperature with the substances they are intended to carry.
Results of the procedure in accordance with this paragraph from polyethylene packagings can be
approved for an equal design type, the internal surface of which is fluorinated.
6.1.5.2.7 For packagings made of polyethylene, as specified in 6.1.5.2.6, which have passed the test in 6.1.5.2.6,
filling substances other than those assimilated in accordance with 4.1.1.21 may also be approved. Such
approval shall be based on laboratory tests verifying that the effect of such filling substances on the test
specimens is less than that of the appropriate standard liquid(s) taking into account the relevant
processes of deterioration. The same conditions as those set out in 4.1.1.21.2 shall apply with respect to
relative density and vapour pressure.
6.1.5.2.8 Provided that the strength properties of the plastics inner packagings of a combination packaging are
not significantly altered by the action of the filling substance, proof of chemical compatibility is not
necessary. A significant alteration in strength properties means:
(a) Distinct embrittlement;
(b) A considerable decrease in elasticity, unless related to a not less than proportionate increase in
elastic elongation.
6.1.5.3 Drop test 3
6.1.5.3.1 Number of test samples (per design type and manufacturer) and drop orientation
For other than flat drops the centre of gravity shall be vertically over the point of impact.
Where more than one orientation is possible for a given drop test, the orientation most likely to result
in failure of the packaging shall be used.
Packaging No. of test samples Drop orientation
(a) Steel drums
Aluminium drums
Drums of metal other than steel or
aluminium
Steel jerricans
Aluminium jerricans
Plywood drums
Fibre drums
Plastics drums and jerricans
Composite packagings which are
in the shape of a drum
Light gauge metal packagings
Six
(three for each drop)
First drop (using three samples): the
packaging shall strike the target diagonally
on the chime or, if the packaging has no
chime, on a circumferential seam or an edge.
Second drop (using the other three
samples): the packaging shall strike the
target on the weakest part not tested by the
first drop, for example a closure or, for
some cylindrical drums, the welded
longitudinal seam of the drum body
(b) Boxes of natural wood
Plywood boxes
Reconstituted wood boxes
Fibreboard boxes
Plastics boxes
Steel or aluminium boxes
Composite packagings which are in the
shape of a box
Five
(one for each drop)
First drop: flat on the bottom
Second drop: flat on the top
Third drop: flat on the long side
Fourth drop: flat on the short side
Fifth drop: on a corner
3 See ISO Standard 2248.
– 305 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 306 –
Packaging No. of test samples Drop orientation
(c) Bags – single-ply with a side seam Three
(three drops per bag)
First drop: flat on a wide face
Second drop: flat on a narrow face
Third drop: on an end of the bag
(d) Bags – single-ply without a side seam,
or multi-ply
Three
(two drops per bag)
First drop: flat on a wide face
Second drop: on an end of the bag
(e) Composite packagings (glass,
stoneware or porcelain), marked with
the symbol “RID/ADR” according to
6.1.3.1 (a) (ii) and which are in the
shape of a drum or box
Three
(one for each drop)
Diagonally on the bottom chime, or, if there
is no chime, on a circumferential seam or
the bottom edge
6.1.5.3.2 Special preparation of test samples for the drop test
The temperature of the test sample and its contents shall be reduced to –18 °C or lower for the following
packagings:
(a) Plastics drums (see 6.1.4.8);
(b) Plastics jerricans (see 6.1.4.8);
(c) Plastics boxes other than expanded plastics boxes (see 6.1.4.13);
(d) Composite packagings (plastics material) (see 6.1.4.19); and
(e) Combination packagings with plastics inner packagings, other than plastics bags intended to
contain solids or articles.
Where test samples are prepared in this way, the conditioning in 6.1.5.2.3 may be waived. Test liquids
shall be kept in the liquid state by the addition of anti-freeze if necessary.
6.1.5.3.3 Removable head packagings for liquids shall not be dropped until at least 24 hours after filling and
closing to allow for any possible gasket relaxation.
6.1.5.3.4 Target
The target shall be a non-resilient and horizontal surface and shall be:
– Integral and massive enough to be immovable;
– Flat with a surface kept free from local defects capable of influencing the test results;
– Rigid enough to be non-deformable under test conditions and not liable to become damaged by the
tests; and
– Sufficiently large to ensure that the test package falls entirely upon the surface.
6.1.5.3.5 Drop height
For solids and liquids, if the test is performed with the solid or liquid to be carried or with another
substance having essentially the same physical characteristics:
Packing Group I Packing Group II Packing Group III
1.8 m 1.2 m 0.8 m
For liquids in single packagings and for inner packagings of combination packagings, if the test is
performed with water:
NOTE: The term water includes water/antifreeze solutions with a minimum specific gravity of 0.95 for
testing at – 18 °C.
(a) where the substances to be carried have a relative density not exceeding 1.2:
– 306 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 307 –
Packing Group I Packing Group II Packing Group III
1.8 m 1.2 m 0.8 m
(b) where the substances to be carried have a relative density exceeding 1.2, the drop height shall be
calculated on the basis of the relative density (d) of the substance to be carried, rounded up to
the first decimal, as follows:
Packing Group I Packing Group II Packing Group III
d × 1.5 (m) d × 1.0 (m) d × 0.67 (m)
(c) for light-gauge metal packagings, marked with symbol “RID/ADR” according to 6.1.3.1(a) (ii)
intended for the carriage of substances having a viscosity at 23 °C greater than 200 mm²/s
(corresponding to a flow time of 30 seconds with an ISO flow cup having a jet orifice of 6 mm
diameter in accordance with ISO Standard 2431:1993)
(i) if the relative density does not exceed 1.2:
Packing group II Packing group III
0.6 m 0.4 m
(ii) where the substances to be carried have a relative density (d) exceeding 1.2 the drop
height shall be calculated on the basis of the relative density (d) of the substance to be
carried, rounded up to the first decimal place, as follows:
Packing group II Packing group III
d × 0.5 m d × 0.33 m
6.1.5.3.6 Criteria for passing the test
6.1.5.3.6.1 Each packaging containing liquid shall be leakproof when equilibrium has been reached between the
internal and external pressures, however for inner packagings of combination packagings and except
for inner receptacles of composite packagings (glass, porcelain or stoneware), marked with the symbol
“RID/ADR” according to 6.1.3.1 (a) (ii) it is not necessary that the pressures be equalized.
6.1.5.3.6.2 Where a packaging for solids undergoes a drop test and its upper face strikes the target, the test sample
passes the test if the entire contents are retained by an inner packaging or inner receptacle (e.g. a plastics
bag), even if the closure while retaining its containment function, is no longer sift-proof.
6.1.5.3.6.3 The packaging or outer packaging of a composite or combination packaging shall not exhibit any
damage liable to affect safety during carriage. Inner receptacles, inner packagings, or articles shall
remain completely within the outer packaging and there shall be no leakage of the filling substance from
the inner receptacle(s) or inner packaging(s).
6.1.5.3.6.4 Neither the outermost ply of a bag nor an outer packaging may exhibit any damage liable to affect safety
during carriage.
6.1.5.3.6.5 A slight discharge from the closure(s) upon impact is not considered to be a failure of the packaging
provided that no further leakage occurs.
6.1.5.3.6.6 No rupture is permitted in packagings for goods of Class 1 which would permit the spillage of loose
explosive substances or articles from the outer packaging.
6.1.5.4 Leakproofness test
The leakproofness test shall be performed on all design types of packagings intended to contain liquids;
however, this test is not required for
– Inner packagings of combination packagings;
– Inner receptacles of composite packagings (glass, porcelain or stoneware), marked with the
symbol “RID/ADR” according to 6.1.3.1 (a) (ii);
– Light gauge metal packagings, marked with the symbol “RID/ADR” according to 6.1.3.1 (a) (ii)
intended for substances with a viscosity at 23 °C exceeding 200 mm²/s.
– 307 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 308 –
6.1.5.4.1 Number of test samples: three test samples per design type and manufacturer.
6.1.5.4.2 Special preparation of test samples for the test: either vented closures shall be replaced by similar non-
vented closures or the vent shall be sealed.
6.1.5.4.3 Test method and pressure to be applied: the packagings including their closures shall be restrained under
water for 5 minutes while an internal air pressure is applied, the method of restraint shall not affect the
results of the test.
The air pressure (gauge) to be applied shall be:
Packing Group I Packing Group II Packing Group III
Not less than 30 kPa
(0.3 bar)
Not less than 20 kPa
(0.2 bar)
Not less than 20 kPa
(0.2 bar)
Other methods at least equally effective may be used.
6.1.5.4.4 Criterion for passing the test: there shall be no leakage.
6.1.5.5 Internal pressure (hydraulic) test
6.1.5.5.1 Packagings to be tested
The internal pressure (hydraulic) test shall be carried out on all design types of metal, plastics and
composite packagings intended to contain liquids. This test is not required for:
– Inner packagings of combination packagings;
– Inner receptacles of composite packagings (glass, porcelain or stoneware), marked with the
symbol “RID/ADR” according to 6.1.3.1 (a) (ii);
– Light gauge metal packagings, marked with the symbol “RID/ADR” according to 6.1.3.1 (a) (ii)
intended for substances with a viscosity at 23 °C exceeding 200 mm²/s.
6.1.5.5.2 Number of test samples: three test samples per design type and manufacturer.
6.1.5.5.3 Special preparation of packagings for testing: either vented closures shall be replaced by similar
non-vented closures or the vent shall be sealed.
6.1.5.5.4 Test method and pressure to be applied: metal packagings and composite packagings (glass, porcelain
or stoneware), including their closures, shall be subjected to the test pressure for 5 minutes. Plastics
packagings and composite packagings (plastics material) including their closures shall be subjected to
the test pressure for 30 minutes. This pressure is the one to be included in the mark required
by 6.1.3.1 (d). The manner in which the packagings are supported shall not invalidate the test. The test
pressure shall be applied continuously and evenly; it shall be kept constant throughout the test period.
The hydraulic pressure (gauge) applied, as determined by any one of the following methods, shall be:
(a) not less than the total gauge pressure measured in the packaging (i.e. the vapour pressure of the
filling liquid and the partial pressure of the air or other inert gases, minus 100 kPa) at 55 °C,
multiplied by a safety factor of 1.5; this total gauge pressure shall be determined on the basis of
a maximum degree of filling in accordance with 4.1.1.4 and a filling temperature of l5 °C; or
(b) not less than 1.75 times the vapour pressure at 50 °C of the liquid to be carried, minus 100 kPa
but with a minimum test pressure of 100 kPa; or
(c) not less than 1.5 times the vapour pressure at 55 °C of the liquid to be carried, minus 100 kPa
but with a minimum test pressure of 100 kPa.
6.1.5.5.5 In addition, packagings intended to contain liquids of packing group I shall be tested to a minimum test
pressure of 250 kPa (gauge) for a test period of 5 or 30 minutes depending upon the material of
construction of the packaging.
6.1.5.5.6 Criterion for passing the test: no packaging may leak.
– 308 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 309 –
6.1.5.6 Stacking test
All design types of packagings other than bags, and other than non-stackable composite packagings
(glass, porcelain, or stoneware) marked with the symbol “RID/ADR” according to 6.1.3.1 (a) (ii), shall
be subjected to a stacking test.
6.1.5.6.1 Number of test samples: three test samples per design type and manufacturer.
6.1.5.6.2 Test method: the test sample shall be subjected to a force applied to the top surface of the test sample
equivalent to the total weight of identical packages which might be stacked on it during carriage; where
the contents of the test sample are liquids with relative density different from that of the liquid to be
carried, the force shall be calculated in relation to the latter. The minimum height of the stack including
the test sample shall be 3 metres. The duration of the test shall be 24 hours except that plastics drums,
jerricans, and composite packagings 6HH1 and 6HH2 intended for liquids shall be subjected to the
stacking test for a period of 28 days at a temperature of not less than 40 °C.
For the test in accordance with 6.1.5.2.5, the original filling substance shall be used. For the test in
accordance with 6.1.5.2.6, a stacking test shall be carried out with a standard liquid.
6.1.5.6.3 Criteria for passing the test: no test sample shall leak. In composite packagings or combination
packagings, there shall be no leakage of the filling substance from the inner receptacle or inner
packaging. No test sample shall show any deterioration which could adversely affect transport safety or
any distortion liable to reduce its strength or cause instability in stacks of packages. Plastics packagings
shall be cooled to ambient temperature before the assessment.
6.1.5.7 Supplementary permeability test for plastics drums and jerricans in accordance with 6.1.4.8 and for
composite packagings (plastics material) in accordance with 6.1.4.19 intended for the carriage of
liquids having a flash-point
 60 °C, other than 6HA1 packagings
Polyethylene packagings need be subjected to this test only if they are to be approved for the carriage
of benzene, toluene, xylene or mixtures and preparations containing those substances.
6.1.5.7.1 Number of test samples: three packagings per design type and manufacturer.
6.1.5.7.2 Special preparation of the test sample for the test: the test samples are to be pre-stored with the original
filling substance in accordance with 6.1.5.2.5, or, for polyethylene packagings, with the standard liquid
mixture of hydrocarbons (white spirit) in accordance with 6.1.5.2.6.
6.1.5.7.3 Test method: the test samples filled with the substance for which the packaging is to be approved shall
be weighed before and after storage for 28 days at 23 °C and 50 % relative atmospheric humidity. For
polyethylene packagings, the test may be carried out with the standard liquid mixture of hydrocarbons
(white spirit) in place of benzene, toluene or xylene.
6.1.5.7.4 Criterion for passing the test: permeability shall not exceed 0.008 g/l.h.
6.1.5.8 Test Report
6.1.5.8.1 A test report containing at least the following particulars shall be drawn up and shall be available to the
users of the packaging:
1. Name and address of the test facility;
2. Name and address of applicant (where appropriate);
3. A unique test report identification;
4. Date of the test report;
5. Manufacturer of the packaging;
6. Description of the packaging design type (e.g. dimensions, materials, closures, thickness, etc.),
including method of manufacture (e.g. blow moulding) and which may include drawing(s) and/or
photograph(s);
7. Maximum capacity;
– 309 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 310 –
8. Characteristics of test contents, e.g. viscosity and relative density for liquids and particle size for
solids. For plastics packagings subject to the internal pressure test in 6.1.5.5, the temperature of
the water used;
9. Test descriptions and results;
10. The test report shall be signed with the name and status of the signatory.
6.1.5.8.2 The test report shall contain statements that the packaging prepared as for carriage was tested in
accordance with the appropriate requirements of this section and that the use of other packaging methods
or components may render it invalid. A copy of the test report shall be available to the competent
authority.
6.1.6 Standard liquids for verifying the chemical compatibility testing of polyethylene packagings,
including IBCs, in accordance with 6.1.5.2.6 and 6.5.6.3.5, respectively
6.1.6.1 The following standard liquids shall be used for this plastics material.
(a) Wetting Solution for substances causing severe cracking in polyethylene under stress, in
particular for all solutions and preparations containing wetting agents.
An aqueous solution of 1 % of alkyl benzene sulphonate, or an aqueous solution of 5 %
nonylphenol ethoxylate which has been preliminary stored for at least 14 days at a temperature
of 40 °C before being used for the first time for the tests, shall be used. The surface tension of
this solution shall be 31 to 35 mN/m at 23 °C.
The stacking test shall be carried out on the basis of a relative density of not less than 1.20.
A compatibility test with acetic acid is not required if adequate chemical compatibility is proved
with a wetting solution.
For filling substances causing cracking in polyethylene under stress which is resistant to the
wetting solution, adequate chemical compatibility may be proved after preliminary storing for
three weeks at 40 °C in accordance with 6.1.5.2.6, but with the original filling matter;
(b) Acetic acid for substances and preparations causing cracking in polyethylene under stress, in
particular for monocarboxylic acids and monovalent alcohols.
Acetic acid in 98 to 100 % concentration shall be used.
Relative density = 1.05.
The stacking test shall be carried out on the basis of a relative density not less than 1.1.
In the case of filling substances causing polyethylene to swell more than acetic acid and to such
an extent that the polyethylene mass is increased by up to 4 %, adequate chemical compatibility
may be proved after preliminary storing for three weeks at 40 °C, in accordance with 6.1.5.2.6
but with the original filling matter;
(c) Normal butyl acetate/normal butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution for substances and
preparations causing polyethylene to swell to such an extent that the polyethylene mass is
increased by about 4 % and at the same time causing cracking under stress, in particular for
phyto-sanitary products, liquid paints and esters. Normal butyl acetate in 98 to 100 %
concentration shall be used for preliminary storage in accordance with 6.1.5.2.6.
For the stacking test in accordance with 6.1.5.6, a test liquid consisting of a 1 to 10 % aqueous
wetting solution mixed with 2 % normal butyl acetate conforming to (a) above shall be used.
The stacking test shall be carried out on the basis of a relative density not less than 1.0.
In the case of filling substances causing polyethylene to swell more than normal butyl acetate
and to such an extent that the polyethylene mass is increased by up to 7.5 %, adequate chemical
compatibility may be proved after preliminary storing for three weeks at 40 °C, in accordance
with 6.1.5.2.6 but with the original filling matter;
– 310 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 311 –
(d) Mixture of hydrocarbons (white spirit) for substances and preparations causing polyethylene to
swell, in particular for hydrocarbons, esters and ketones.
A mixture of hydrocarbons having a boiling range 160 °C to 220 °C, relative density 0.78-0.80,
flash-point > 50 °C and an aromatic content 16 % to 21 % shall be used.
The stacking test shall be carried out on the basis of a relative density not less than 1.0.
In the case of filling substances causing polyethylene to swell to such an extent that the
polyethylene mass is increased by more than 7.5 %, adequate chemical compatibility may be
proved after preliminary storing for three weeks at 40 °C, in accordance with 6.1.5.2.6 but with
the original filling matter;
(e) Nitric acid for all substances and preparations having an oxidizing effect on polyethylene and
causing molecular degradation identical to or less than 55 % nitric acid.
Nitric acid in a concentration of not less than 55 % shall be used.
The stacking test shall be carried out on the basis of a relative density of not less than 1.4.
In the case of filling substances more strongly oxidizing than 55 % nitric acid or causing
degradation of the molecular mass proceed in accordance with 6.1.5.2.5.
The period of use shall be determined in such cases by observing the degree of damage (e.g. two
years for nitric acid in not less than 55 % concentration);
(f) Water for substances which do not attack polyethylene in any of the cases referred to under
(a) to (e), in particular for inorganic acids and lyes, aqueous saline solutions, polyvalent alcohols
and organic substances in aqueous solution.
The stacking test shall be carried out on the basis of a relative density of not less than 1.2.
A design type test with water is not required if adequate chemical compatibility is proved with
wetting solution or nitric acid.
– 311 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 313 –
CHAPTER 6.2
REQUIREMENTS FOR THE CONSTRUCTION AND TESTING OF PRESSURE
RECEPTACLES, AEROSOL DISPENSERS, SMALL RECEPTACLES CONTAINING GAS
(GAS CARTRIDGES) AND FUEL CELL CARTRIDGES CONTAINING LIQUEFIED
FLAMMABLE GAS
NOTE: Aerosol dispensers, small receptacles containing gas (gas cartridges) and fuel cell cartridges containing
liquefied flammable gas are not subject to the requirements of 6.2.1 to 6.2.5.
6.2.1 General requirements
6.2.1.1 Design and construction
6.2.1.1.1 Pressure receptacles shall be designed, manufactured, tested and equipped in such a way as to withstand
all conditions, including fatigue, to which they will be subjected during normal conditions of carriage
and intended use.
6.2.1.1.2 (Reserved)
6.2.1.1.3 In no case shall the minimum wall thickness be less than that specified in the design and construction
technical standards.
6.2.1.1.4 For welded pressure receptacles, only metals of weldable quality shall be welded.
6.2.1.1.5 The test pressure of pressure receptacle shells and bundles of cylinders shall be in accordance with
packing instruction P200 of 4.1.4.1, or, for a chemical under pressure, with packing instruction P206 of
4.1.4.1. The test pressure for closed cryogenic receptacles shall be in accordance with packing
instruction P203 of 4.1.4.1. The test pressure of a metal hydride storage system shall be in accordance
with packing instruction P205 of 4.1.4.1. The test pressure of a cylinder shell for an adsorbed gas shall
be in accordance with packing instruction P208 of 4.1.4.1.
6.2.1.1.6 Cylinders or cylinder shells assembled in bundles shall be structurally supported and held together as a
unit. Cylinders or cylinder shells shall be secured in a manner that prevents movement in relation to the
structural assembly and movement that would result in the concentration of harmful local stresses.
Manifold assemblies (e.g. manifold, valves, and pressure gauges) shall be designed and constructed
such that they are protected from impact damage and forces normally encountered in carriage.
Manifolds shall have at least the same test pressure as the cylinders. For toxic liquefied gases, each
cylinder shell shall have an isolation valve to ensure that each pressure receptacle can be filled separately
and that no interchange of cylinder contents can occur during carriage.
NOTE: Toxic liquefied gases have the classification codes 2T, 2TF, 2TC, 2TO, 2TFC or 2TOC.
6.2.1.1.7 Contact between dissimilar metals which could result in damage by galvanic action shall be avoided.
6.2.1.1.8 Additional requirements for the construction of closed cryogenic receptacles for refrigerated liquefied
gases
6.2.1.1.8.1 The mechanical properties of the metal used shall be established for each pressure receptacle, including
the impact strength and the bending coefficient.
NOTE: With regard to the impact strength, sub-section 6.8.5.3 gives details of test requirements which
may be used.
6.2.1.1.8.2 The pressure receptacles shall be thermally insulated. The thermal insulation shall be protected against
impact by means of a jacket. If the space between the inner vessel and the jacket is evacuated of air
(vacuum-insulation), the jacket shall be designed to withstand without permanent deformation an
external pressure of at least 100 kPa (1 bar) calculated in accordance with a recognised technical code
or a calculated critical collapsing pressure of not less than 200 kPa (2 bar) gauge pressure. If the jacket
is so closed as to be gas-tight (e.g. in the case of vacuum-insulation), a device shall be provided to
prevent any dangerous pressure from developing in the insulating layer in the event of inadequate gas-
– 313 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 314 –
tightness of the inner vessel or its service equipment. The device shall prevent moisture from penetrating
into the insulation.
6.2.1.1.8.3 Closed cryogenic receptacles intended for the carriage of refrigerated liquefied gases having a boiling
point below –182 °C at atmospheric pressure shall not include materials which may react with oxygen
or oxygen enriched atmospheres in a dangerous manner, when located in parts of the thermal insulation
where there is a risk of contact with oxygen or with oxygen enriched liquid.
6.2.1.1.8.4 Closed cryogenic receptacles shall be designed and constructed with suitable lifting and securing
arrangements.
6.2.1.1.9 Additional requirements for the construction of acetylene cylinders
Cylinder shells for UN 1001 acetylene, dissolved, and UN 3374 acetylene, solvent free, shall be filled
with a porous material, uniformly distributed, of a type that conforms to the requirements and testing
specified by a standard or technical code recognised by the competent authority and which:
(a) Is compatible with the cylinder shell and does not form harmful or dangerous compounds either
with the acetylene or with the solvent in the case of UN 1001; and
(b) Is capable of preventing the spread of decomposition of the acetylene in the porous material.
In the case of UN 1001, the solvent shall be compatible with those parts of the cylinder that are in
contact with it.
6.2.1.2 Materials
6.2.1.2.1 Construction materials of pressure receptacles which are in direct contact with dangerous goods shall
not be affected or weakened by the dangerous goods intended to be carried and shall not cause a
dangerous effect e.g. catalysing a reaction or reacting with the dangerous goods.
6.2.1.2.2 Pressure receptacles shall be made of the materials specified in the design and construction technical
standards and the applicable packing instruction for the substances intended for carriage in the pressure
receptacle. The materials shall be resistant to brittle fracture and to stress corrosion cracking as indicated
in the design and construction technical standards.
6.2.1.3 Service equipment
6.2.1.3.1 Service equipment subjected to pressure, excluding porous, absorbent or adsorbent material, pressure
relief devices, pressure gauges or indicators, shall be designed and constructed so that the burst pressure
is at least 1.5 times the test pressure of the pressure receptacle.
6.2.1.3.2 Service equipment shall be configured or designed to prevent damage and unintended opening that
could result in the release of the pressure receptacle contents during normal conditions of handling and
carriage. All closures shall be protected in the same manner as is required for valves in 4.1.6.8. Manifold
piping leading to shut-off valves shall be sufficiently flexible to protect the shut-off valves and the
piping from shearing or releasing the pressure receptacle contents.
6.2.1.3.3 Pressure receptacles which are not capable of being handled manually or rolled, shall be fitted with
handling devices (skids, rings, straps) ensuring that they can be safely handled by mechanical means
and so arranged as not to impair the strength of, nor cause undue stresses in, the pressure receptacle.
6.2.1.3.4 Individual pressure receptacles shall be equipped with pressure relief devices as specified in packing
provision P200 (2) or P205 of 4.1.4.1 or in 6.2.1.3.6.4 and 6.2.1.3.6.5. Pressure-relief devices shall be
designed to prevent the entry of foreign matter, the leakage of gas and the development of any dangerous
excess pressure. When fitted, pressure relief devices on manifolded horizontal pressure receptacles
filled with flammable gas shall be arranged to discharge freely to the open air in such a manner as to
prevent any impingement of escaping gas upon the pressure receptacle itself under normal conditions
of carriage.
6.2.1.3.5 Pressure receptacles whose filling is measured by volume shall be provided with a level indicator.
– 314 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 315 –
6.2.1.3.6 Additional requirements for closed cryogenic receptacles
6.2.1.3.6.1 Each filling and discharge opening in a closed cryogenic receptacle used for the carriage of flammable
refrigerated liquefied gases shall be fitted with at least two mutually independent shut-off devices in
series, the first being a stop-valve, the second being a cap or equivalent device.
6.2.1.3.6.2 For sections of piping which can be closed at both ends and where liquid product can be trapped, a
method of automatic pressure-relief shall be provided to prevent excess pressure build-up within the
piping.
6.2.1.3.6.3 Each connection on a closed cryogenic receptacle shall be clearly marked to indicate its function (e.g.
vapour or liquid phase).
6.2.1.3.6.4 Pressure-relief devices
6.2.1.3.6.4.1 Every closed cryogenic receptacle shall be provided with at least one pressure-relief device. The
pressure-relief device shall be of the type that will resist dynamic forces including surge.
6.2.1.3.6.4.2 Closed cryogenic receptacles may, in addition, have a frangible disc in parallel with the spring loaded
device(s) in order to meet the requirements of 6.2.1.3.6.5.
6.2.1.3.6.4.3 Connections to pressure-relief devices shall be of sufficient size to enable the required discharge to pass
unrestricted to the pressure-relief device.
6.2.1.3.6.4.4 All pressure-relief device inlets shall under maximum filling conditions be situated in the vapour space
of the closed cryogenic receptacle and the devices shall be so arranged as to ensure that the escaping
vapour is discharged unrestrictedly.
6.2.1.3.6.5 Capacity and setting of pressure-relief devices
NOTE: In relation to pressure-relief devices of closed cryogenic receptacles, maximum allowable
working pressure (MAWP) means the maximum effective gauge pressure permissible at the top of a
loaded closed cryogenic receptacle in its operating position including the highest effective pressure
during filling and discharge.
6.2.1.3.6.5.1 The pressure-relief device shall open automatically at a pressure not less than the MAWP and be fully
open at a pressure equal to 110 % of the MAWP. It shall, after discharge, close at a pressure not lower
than 10 % below the pressure at which discharge starts and shall remain closed at all lower pressures.
6.2.1.3.6.5.2 Frangible discs shall be set to rupture at a nominal pressure which is the lower of either the test pressure
or 150 % of the MAWP.
6.2.1.3.6.5.3 In the case of the loss of vacuum in a vacuum-insulated closed cryogenic receptacle the combined
capacity of all pressure-relief devices installed shall be sufficient so that the pressure (including
accumulation) inside the closed cryogenic receptacle does not exceed 120 % of the MAWP.
6.2.1.3.6.5.4 The required capacity of the pressure-relief devices shall be calculated in accordance with an established
technical code recognized by the competent authority1.
6.2.1.4 Approval of pressure receptacles
6.2.1.4.1 The conformity of pressure receptacles shall be assessed at time of manufacture as required by the
competent authority. The technical documentation shall include full specifications on design and
construction, and full documentation on the manufacturing and testing.
6.2.1.4.2 Quality assurance systems shall conform to the requirements of the competent authority.
6.2.1.4.3 Pressure receptacle shells and the inner vessels of closed cryogenic receptacles shall be inspected, tested
and approved by an inspection body.
1 See for example CGA Publications S-1.2-2003 “Pressure Relief Device Standards-Part 2-Cargo and Portable
Tanks for Compressed Gases” and S-1.1-2003 “Pressure Relief Device Standards-Part 1-Cylinders for Compressed
Gases”.
– 315 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 316 –
6.2.1.4.4 For refillable cylinders, pressure drums and tubes the conformity assessment of the shell and the
closure(s) may be carried out separately. In these cases, an additional assessment of the final assembly
is not required.
For bundles of cylinders, the cylinder shells and the valve(s) may be assessed separately, but an
additional assessment of the complete assembly is required.
For closed cryogenic receptacles, the inner vessels and the closures may be assessed separately, but an
additional assessment of the complete assembly is required.
For acetylene cylinders, conformity assessment shall comprise either:
(a) One assessment of conformity covering both the cylinder shell and the contained porous
material; or
(b) A separate assessment of conformity for the empty cylinder shell and an additional assessment
of conformity covering the cylinder shell with the contained porous material.
6.2.1.5 Initial inspection and test
6.2.1.5.1 New pressure receptacles, other than closed cryogenic receptacles, metal hydride storage systems and
bundles of cylinders, shall be subjected to testing and inspection during and after manufacture in
accordance with the applicable design standards or recognised technical codes including the following:
On an adequate sample of pressure receptacle shells:
(a) Testing of the mechanical characteristics of the material of construction;
(b) Verification of the minimum wall thickness;
(c) Verification of the homogeneity of the material for each manufacturing batch;
(d) Inspection of the external and internal conditions;
(e) Inspection of the threads used to fit closures;
(f) Verification of the conformance with the design standard;
For all pressure receptacle shells:
(g) A hydraulic pressure test. Pressure receptacles shall meet the acceptance criteria specified in
the design and construction technical standard or technical code;
NOTE: With the agreement of the competent authority, the hydraulic pressure test may be
replaced by a test using a gas, where such an operation does not entail any danger.
(h) Inspection and assessment of manufacturing defects and either repairing them or rendering the
pressure receptacle shells unserviceable. In the case of welded pressure receptacle shells,
particular attention shall be paid to the quality of the welds;
(i) An inspection of the marks on the pressure receptacle shells;
(j) In addition, cylinder shells intended for the carriage of UN No. 1001 acetylene, dissolved, and
UN No. 3374 acetylene, solvent free, shall be inspected to ensure proper installation and
condition of the porous material and, if applicable, the quantity of solvent.
On an adequate sample of closures:
(k) Verification of materials;
(l) Verification of dimensions;
(m) Verification of cleanliness;
(n) Inspection of completed assembly;
– 316 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 317 –
(o) Verification of the presence of marks.
For all closures:
(p) Testing for leakproofness.
6.2.1.5.2 Closed cryogenic receptacles shall be subjected to testing and inspection during and after manufacture
in accordance with the applicable design standards or recognized technical codes including the
following:
On an adequate sample of inner vessels:
(a) Testing of the mechanical characteristics of the material of construction;
(b) Verification of the minimum wall thickness;
(c) Inspection of the external and internal conditions;
(d) Verification of the conformance with the design standard or technical code;
(e) Inspection of welds by radiographic, ultrasonic or other suitable non-destructive test method
according to the applicable design and construction standard or technical code.
For all inner vessels:
(f) A hydraulic pressure test. The inner vessel shall meet the acceptance criteria specified in the
design and construction technical standard or technical code;
NOTE: With the agreement of the competent authority, the hydraulic pressure test may be
replaced by a test using a gas, where such an operation does not entail any danger.
(g) Inspection and assessment of manufacturing defects and either repairing them or rendering the
inner vessel unserviceable;
(h) An inspection of the marks.
On an adequate sample of closures:
(i) Verification of materials;
(j) Verification of dimensions;
(k) Verification of cleanliness;
(l) Inspection of completed assembly;
(m) Verification of the presence of marks.
For all closures:
(n) Testing for leakproofness.
On an adequate sample of completed closed cryogenic receptacles:
(o) Testing the satisfactory operation of service equipment;
(p) Verification of the conformance with the design standard or technical code.
For all completed closed cryogenic receptacles:
(q) Testing for leakproofness.
6.2.1.5.3 For metal hydride storage systems, it shall be verified that the inspections and tests specified in 6.2.1.5.1
(a), (b), (c), (d), (e) if applicable, (f), (g), (h) and (i) have been performed on an adequate sample of the
pressure receptacle shells used in the metal hydride storage system. In addition, on an adequate sample
of metal hydride storage systems, the inspections and tests specified in 6.2.1.5.1 (c) and (f) shall be
– 317 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 318 –
performed, as well as 6.2.1.5.1 (e), if applicable, and inspection of the external conditions of the metal
hydride storage system.
Additionally, all metal hydride storage systems shall undergo the initial inspections and tests specified
in 6.2.1.5.1 (h) and (i), as well as a leakproofness test and a test of the satisfactory operation of the
service equipment.
6.2.1.5.4 For bundles of cylinders the cylinder shells and closures shall be subjected to initial inspection and tests
specified in 6.2.1.5.1. An adequate sample of frames shall be proof load tested to two times the
maximum gross weight of the bundles of cylinders.
Additionally, all manifolds of bundle of cylinders shall undergo a hydraulic pressure test and all the
completed bundles of cylinders shall undergo a leakproofness test.
NOTE: With the agreement of the competent authority, the hydraulic pressure test may be replaced by
a test using a gas, where such an operation does not entail any danger.
6.2.1.6 Periodic inspection and test
6.2.1.6.1 Refillable pressure receptacles, other than cryogenic receptacles, shall be subjected to periodic
inspections and tests by a body authorised by the competent authority, in accordance with the following:
(a) Check of the external conditions of the pressure receptacle and verification of the equipment and
the external marks;
(b) Check of the internal conditions of the pressure receptacle (e.g. internal inspection, verification
of minimum wall thickness);
(c) Checking of the threads either:
(i) if there is evidence of corrosion; or
(ii) if the closures or other service equipment are removed;
(d) A hydraulic pressure test of the pressure receptacle shell and, if necessary, verification of the
characteristics of the material by suitable tests;
(e) Check of service equipment, if to be reintroduced into service. This check may be carried out
separately from the inspection of the pressure receptacle shell; and
(f) A leakproofness test of bundles of cylinders after reassembly.
NOTE 1: With the agreement of the competent authority, the hydraulic pressure test may be replaced
by a test using a gas, where such an operation does not entail any danger.
NOTE 2: For seamless steel cylinder shells and tube shells the check of 6.2.1.6.1 (b) and hydraulic
pressure test of 6.2.1.6.1 (d) may be replaced by a procedure conforming to ISO 16148:2016 “Gas
cylinders – Refillable seamless steel gas cylinders and tubes – Acoustic emission examination (AT) and
follow-up ultrasonic examination (UT) for periodic inspection and testing”.
NOTE 3: The check of internal conditions of 6.2.1.6.1 (b) and the hydraulic pressure test of 6.2.1.6.1
(d) may be replaced by ultrasonic examination carried out in accordance with ISO 18119:2018 for
seamless steel and seamless aluminium alloy cylinder shells.
NOTE 4: For bundles of cylinders the hydraulic test specified in (d) above shall be carried out on the
cylinder shells and on the manifolds.
NOTE 5: For the periodic inspection and test frequencies, see packing instruction P200 of 4.1.4.1 or,
for a chemical under pressure, packing instruction P206 of 4.1.4.1.
– 318 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 319 –
6.2.1.6.2 Cylinders intended for the carriage of UN No. 1001 acetylene, dissolved and UN No. 3374 acetylene,
solvent free, shall be examined only as specified in 6.2.1.6.1 (a), (c) and (e). In addition the condition
of the porous material (e.g. cracks, top clearance, loosening, settlement) shall be examined.
6.2.1.6.3 Pressure relief valves for closed cryogenic receptacles shall be subject to periodic inspections and tests.
6.2.1.7 Requirements for manufacturers
6.2.1.7.1 The manufacturer shall be technically able and shall possess all resources required for the satisfactory
manufacture of pressure receptacles; this relates in particular to qualified personnel:
(a) To supervise the entire manufacturing process;
(b) To carry out joining of materials; and
(c) To carry out the relevant tests.
6.2.1.7.2 A proficiency test of the manufacturers of pressure receptacle shells and the inner vessels of closed
cryogenic receptacle shall in all instances be carried out by an inspection body approved by the
competent authority of the country of approval. Proficiency testing of manufacturers of closures shall
be carried out if the competent authority requires it. This test shall be carried out either during design
type approval or during production inspection and certification.
6.2.1.8 Requirements for inspection bodies
6.2.1.8.1 Inspection bodies shall be independent from manufacturing enterprises and competent to perform the
tests, inspections and approvals required.
6.2.2 Requirements for UN pressure receptacles
In addition to the general requirements of section 6.2.1, UN pressure receptacles shall comply with the
requirements of this section, including the standards, as applicable. Manufacture of new pressure
receptacles or service equipment according to any particular standard in 6.2.2.1 and 6.2.2.3 is not
permitted after the date shown in the right hand column of the tables.
NOTE 1: UN pressure receptacles constructed according to standards applicable at the date of
manufacture may continue in use subject to the periodic inspection provisions of ADR.
NOTE 2: When EN ISO versions of the following ISO standards are available, they may be used to
fulfil the requirements of 6.2.2.1, 6.2.2.2, 6.2.2.3 and 6.2.2.4.
6.2.2.1 Design, construction and initial inspection and test
6.2.2.1.1 The following standards apply for the design, construction, and initial inspection and test of refillable
UN cylinder shells, except that inspection requirements related to the conformity assessment system
and approval shall be in accordance with 6.2.2.5:
Reference Title Applicable for
manufacture
ISO 9809-1:1999 Gas cylinders – Refillable seamless steel gas cylinders
– Design, construction and testing – Part 1: Quenched
and tempered steel cylinders with tensile strength less
than 1 100 MPa
NOTE: The note concerning the F factor in section
7.3 of this standard shall not be applied for UN
cylinders.
Until 31
December 2018
ISO 9809-1:2010 Gas cylinders — Refillable seamless steel gas cylinders
— Design, construction and testing — Part 1: Quenched
and tempered steel cylinders with tensile strength less
than 1 100 MPa
Until 31
December 2026
ISO 9809-1:2019 Gas cylinders — Design, construction and testing of
refillable seamless steel gas cylinders and tubes — Part
1: Quenched and tempered steel cylinders and tubes
with tensile strength less than 1 100 MPa
Until further
notice
– 319 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 320 –
Reference Title Applicable for
manufacture
ISO 9809-2:2000 Gas cylinders – Refillable seamless steel gas cylinders
– Design, construction and testing – Part 2: Quenched
and tempered steel cylinders with tensile strength
greater than or equal to 1 100 MPa
Until 31
December 2018
ISO 9809-2:2010 Gas cylinders – Refillable seamless steel gas cylinders
– Design, construction and testing – Part 2: Quenched
and tempered steel cylinders with tensile strength
greater than or equal to 1 100 MPa
Until 31
December 2026
ISO 9809-2:2019 Gas cylinders – Design, construction and testing of
refillable seamless steel gas cylinders and tubes – Part
2: Quenched and tempered steel cylinders and tubes
with tensile strength greater than or equal to 1 100 MPa
Until further
notice
ISO 9809-3:2000 Gas cylinders – Refillable seamless steel gas cylinders
– Design, construction and testing – Part 3: Normalized
steel cylinders
Until 31
December 2018
ISO 9809-3:2010 Gas cylinders — Refillable seamless steel gas cylinders
— Design, construction and testing — Part 3:
Normalized steel cylinders
Until 31
December 2026
ISO 9809-3:2019 Gas cylinders — Design, construction and testing of
refillable seamless steel gas cylinders and tubes — Part
3: Normalized steel cylinders and tubes
Until further
notice
ISO 9809-4:2014 Gas cylinders – Refillable seamless steel gas cylinders
– Design, construction and testing – Part 4: Stainless
steel cylinders with an Rm value of less than 1 100
MPa
Until further
notice
ISO 7866:1999 Gas cylinders – Refillable seamless aluminium alloy
gas cylinders – Design, construction and testing
NOTE: The note concerning the F factor in section
7.2 of this standard shall not be applied for UN
cylinders. Aluminium alloy 6351A – T6 or equivalent
shall not be authorised.
Until 31
December 2020
ISO 7866: 2012 +
Cor 1:2014
Gas cylinders – Refillable seamless aluminium alloy
gas cylinders – Design, construction and testing
NOTE: Aluminium alloy 6351A or equivalent shall
not be used.
Until further
notice
ISO 4706:2008 Gas cylinders – Refillable welded steel cylinders – Test
pressure 60 bar and below
Until further
notice
ISO 18172-1:2007 Gas cylinders – Refillable welded stainless steel
cylinders – Part 1: Test pressure 6 MPa and below
Until further
notice
ISO 20703:2006 Gas cylinders – Refillable welded aluminium-alloy
cylinders – Design, construction and testing
Until further
notice
ISO 11119-1:2002 Gas cylinders of composite construction –
Specification and test methods – Part 1: Hoop wrapped
composite gas cylinders
Until 31
December 2020
ISO 11119-1:2012 Gas cylinders – Refillable composite gas cylinders and
tubes – Design, construction and testing – Part 1: Hoop
wrapped fibre reinforced composite gas cylinders and
tubes up to 450 l
Until further
notice
ISO 11119-2:2002 Gas cylinders of composite construction –
Specification and test methods – Part 2: Fully wrapped
fibre reinforced composite gas cylinders with load-
sharing metal liners
Until 31
December 2020
ISO 11119-2:2012
+ Amd 1:2014
Gas cylinders – Refillable composite gas cylinders and
tubes – Design, construction and testing – Part 2: Fully
wrapped fibre reinforced composite gas cylinders and
tubes up to 450 l with load-sharing metal liners
Until further
notice
– 320 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 321 –
Reference Title Applicable for
manufacture
ISO 11119-3:2002 Gas cylinders of composite construction –
Specification and test methods – Part 3: Fully wrapped
fibre reinforced composite gas cylinders with non-load-
sharing metallic or non-metallic liners
NOTE: This standard shall not be used for linerless
cylinders manufactured from two parts joined together.
Until 31
December 2020
ISO 11119-3:2013 Gas cylinders – Refillable composite gas cylinders and
tubes – Design, construction and testing – Part 3: Fully
wrapped fibre reinforced composite gas cylinders and
tubes up to 450 l with non-load-sharing metallic or
non-metallic liners
NOTE: This standard shall not be used for linerless
cylinders manufactured from two parts joined together.
Until further
notice
ISO 11119-4: 2016 Gas cylinders – Refillable composite gas cylinders –
Design, construction and testing – Part 4: Fully
wrapped fibre reinforced composite gas cylinders up to
150 l with load-sharing welded metallic liners
Until further
notice
NOTE 1: In the above referenced standards composite cylinder shells shall be designed for a design
life of not less than 15 years..
NOTE 2: Composite cylinder shells with a design life longer than 15 years shall not be filled after 15
years from the date of manufacture, unless the design has successfully passed a service life test
programme. The programme shall be part of the initial design type approval and shall specify
inspections and tests to demonstrate that composite cylinder shells manufactured accordingly remain
safe to the end of their design life. The service life test programme and the results shall be approved by
the competent authority of the country of approval that is responsible for the initial approval of the
cylinder design. The service life of a composite cylinder shell shall not be extended beyond its initial
approved design life.
6.2.2.1.2 The following standards apply for the design, construction, and initial inspection and test of UN tube
shells, except that inspection requirements related to the conformity assessment system and approval
shall be in accordance with 6.2.2.5:
Reference Title Applicable for
manufacture
ISO 11120:1999 Gas cylinders – Refillable seamless steel tubes for
compressed gas transport, of water capacity between
150 l and 3 000 l – Design, construction and testing
NOTE: The note concerning the F factor in section
7.1 of this standard shall not be applied for UN tubes.
Until 31
December 2022
ISO 11120:2015 Gas cylinders – Refillable seamless steel tubes of water
capacity between 150 l and 3 000 l – Design,
construction and testing
Until further
notice
ISO 11119-1:2012 Gas cylinders – Refillable composite gas cylinders and
tubes – Design, construction and testing – Part 1: Hoop
wrapped fibre reinforced composite gas cylinders and
tubes up to 450 l
Until further
notice
ISO 11119-2:2012
+ Amd 1:2014
Gas cylinders – Refillable composite gas cylinders and
tubes – Design, construction and testing – Part 2: Fully
wrapped fibre reinforced composite gas cylinders and
tubes up to 450 l with load-sharing metal liners
Until further
notice
ISO 11119-3:2013 Gas cylinders – Refillable composite gas cylinders and
tubes – Design, construction and testing – Part 3: Fully
wrapped fibre reinforced composite gas cylinders and
tubes up to 450 l with non-load-sharing metallic or
non-metallic liners
NOTE: This standard shall not be used for linerless
cylinders manufactured from two parts joined together.
Until further
notice
– 321 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 322 –
Reference Title Applicable for
manufacture
ISO 11515: 2013 Gas cylinders – Refillable composite reinforced tubes
of water capacity between 450 l and 3 000 l – Design,
construction and testing
Until 31
December 2026
ISO 11515:2013 +
Amd 1:2018
Gas cylinders – Refillable composite reinforced tubes
of water capacity between 450 l and 3000 l – Design,
construction and testing
Until further
notice
ISO 9809-1:2019 Gas cylinders — Design, construction and testing of
refillable seamless steel gas cylinders and tubes — Part
1: Quenched and tempered steel cylinders and tubes
with tensile strength less than 1 100 MPa
Until further
notice
ISO 9809-2:2019 Gas cylinders – Design, construction and testing of
refillable seamless steel gas cylinders and tubes – Part
2: Quenched and tempered steel cylinders and tubes
with tensile strength greater than or equal to 1 100 MPa
Until further
notice
ISO 9809-3:2019 Gas cylinders — Design, construction and testing of
refillable seamless steel gas cylinders and tubes — Part
3: Normalized steel cylinders and tubes
Until further
notice
NOTE 1: In the above referenced standards composite tube shells shall be designed for a design life
of not less than 15 years.
NOTE 2: Composite tube shells with a design life longer than 15 years shall not be filled after 15 years
from the date of manufacture, unless the design has successfully passed a service life test programme.
The programme shall be part of the initial design type approval and shall specify inspections and tests
to demonstrate that composite tube shells manufactured accordingly remain safe to the end of their
design life. The service life test programme and the results shall be approved by the competent authority
of the country of approval that is responsible for the initial approval of the tube design. The service life
of a composite tube shell shall not be extended beyond its initial approved design life.
6.2.2.1.3 The following standards apply for the design, construction and initial inspection and test of
UN acetylene cylinders, except that inspection requirements related to the conformity assessment
system and approval shall be in accordance with 6.2.2.5:
For the cylinder shell:
Reference Title Applicable for
manufacture
ISO 9809-1:1999 Gas cylinders – Refillable seamless steel gas cylinders
– Design, construction and testing – Part 1: Quenched
and tempered steel cylinders with tensile strength less
than 1 100 MPa
NOTE: The note concerning the F factor in section
7.3 of this standard shall not be applied for UN
cylinders.
Until 31
December 2018
ISO 9809-1:2010 Gas cylinders – Refillable seamless steel gas cylinders
– Design, construction and testing – Part 1: Quenched
and tempered steel cylinders with tensile strength less
than 1 100 MPa
Until 31
December 2026
ISO 9809-1:2019 Gas cylinders — Design, construction and testing of
refillable seamless steel gas cylinders and tubes — Part
1: Quenched and tempered steel cylinders and tubes
with tensile strength less than 1 100 MPa
Until further
notice
ISO 9809-3:2000 Gas cylinders – Refillable seamless steel gas cylinders
– Design, construction and testing – Part 3: Normalized
steel cylinders
Until 31
December 2018
ISO 9809-3:2010 Gas cylinders – Refillable seamless steel gas cylinders
– Design, construction and testing – Part 3: Normalized
steel cylinders
Until 31
December 2026
ISO 9809-3:2019 Gas cylinders — Design, construction and testing of
refillable seamless steel gas cylinders and tubes — Part
3: Normalized steel cylinders and tubes
Until further
notice
– 322 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 323 –
Reference Title Applicable for
manufacture
ISO 4706:2008 Gas cylinders – Refillable welded steel cylinders – Test
pressure 60 bar and below
Until further
notice
ISO 7866:2012 +
Cor 1:2014
Gas cylinders – Refillable seamless aluminium alloy
gas cylinders – Design, construction and testing
NOTE: Aluminium alloy 6351A or equivalent shall
not be used.
Until further
notice
For the acetylene cylinder including the porous material:
Reference Title Applicable for
manufacture
ISO 3807-1:2000 Cylinders for acetylene – Basic requirements – Part 1:
Cylinders without fusible plugs
Until 31
December 2020
ISO 3807-2:2000 Cylinders for acetylene – Basic requirements – Part 2:
Cylinders with fusible plugs
Until 31
December 2020
ISO 3807:2013 Gas cylinders – Acetylene cylinders – Basic
requirements and type testing
Until further
notice
6.2.2.1.4 The following standard applies for the design, construction, and initial inspection and test of UN closed
cryogenic receptacles, except that inspection requirements related to the conformity assessment system
and approval shall be in accordance with 6.2.2.5:
Reference Title Applicable for
manufacture
ISO 21029-1:2004 Cryogenic vessels – Transportable vacuum insulated
vessels of not more than 1 000 l volume – Part 1:
Design, fabrication, inspection and tests
Until 31
December 2026
ISO 21029-1:2018
+ Amd 1:2019
Cryogenic vessels – Transportable vacuum insulated
vessels of not more than 1 000 litres volume – Part 1:
Design, fabrication, inspection and tests
Until further
notice
6.2.2.1.5 The following standard applies for the design, construction, and initial inspection and test of UN metal
hydride storage systems, except that inspection requirements related to the conformity assessment
system and approval shall be in accordance with 6.2.2.5:
Reference Title Applicable for
manufacture
ISO 16111:2008 Transportable gas storage devices – Hydrogen absorbed
in reversible metal hydride
Until 31 December
2026
ISO 16111:2018 Transportable gas storage devices – Hydrogen absorbed
in reversible metal hydride
Until further notice
6.2.2.1.6 The following standard applies to the design, construction and initial inspection and test of UN bundles
of cylinders. Each cylinder in a UN bundle of cylinders shall be a UN cylinder or UN cylinder shell
complying with the requirements of 6.2.2. The inspection requirements related to the conformity
assessment system and approval for UN bundles of cylinders shall be in accordance with 6.2.2.5.
Reference Title Applicable for
manufacture
ISO 10961:2010 Gas cylinders – Cylinder bundles – Design,
manufacture, testing and inspection
Until 31
December 2026
ISO 10961:2019 Gas cylinders – Cylinder bundles – Design,
manufacture, testing and inspection
Until further
notice
NOTE: Changing one or more cylinders or cylinder shells of the same design type, including the same
test pressure, in an existing UN bundle of cylinders does not require a new conformity assessment of
the existing bundle. Service equipment of the bundle of cylinders can also be replaced without requiring
a new conformity assessment if it complies with the design type approval.
6.2.2.1.7 The following standards apply to the design, construction and initial inspection and test of UN cylinders
for adsorbed gases except that the inspection requirements related to the conformity assessment system
and approval shall be in accordance with 6.2.2.5.
– 323 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 324 –
Reference Title Applicable for
manufacture
ISO 11513:2011 Gas cylinders – Refillable welded steel cylinders
containing materials for sub-atmospheric gas
packaging (excluding acetylene) – Design,
construction, testing, use and periodic inspection
Until 31
December 2026
ISO 11513:2019 Gas cylinders – Refillable welded steel cylinders
containing materials for sub-atmospheric gas
packaging (excluding acetylene) – Design,
construction, testing, use and periodic inspection
Until further
notice
ISO 9809-1:2010 Gas cylinders – Refillable seamless steel gas cylinders
– Design, construction and testing – Part 1: Quenched
and tempered steel cylinders with tensile strength less
than 1 100 MPa
Until 31
December 2026
ISO 9809-1:2019 Gas cylinders — Design, construction and testing of
refillable seamless steel gas cylinders and tubes — Part
1: Quenched and tempered steel cylinders and tubes
with tensile strength less than 1 100 MPa
Until further
notice
6.2.2.1.8 The following standards apply for the design, construction and initial inspection and test of UN pressure
drums, except that inspection requirements related to the conformity assessment system and approval
shall be in accordance with 6.2.2.5:
Reference Title Applicable for
Manufacture
ISO 21172-1:2015 Gas cylinders – Welded steel pressure drums up to
3 000 litres capacity for the transport of gases –
Design and construction – Part 1: Capacities up to
1 000 litres
NOTE: Irrespective of section 6.3.3.4 of this
standard, welded steel gas pressure drums with dished
ends convex to pressure may be used for the carriage
of corrosive substances provided all applicable
requirements of ADR are met.
Until 31 December
2026
ISO 21172-1:2015
+ Amd 1:2018
Gas cylinders – Welded steel pressure drums up to
3 000 litres capacity for the transport of gases –
Design and construction – Part 1: Capacities up to
1 000 litres
Until further notice
ISO 4706:2008 Gas cylinders – Refillable welded steel cylinders –
Test pressure 60 bar and below
Until further notice
ISO 18172-1:2007 Gas cylinders – Refillable welded stainless steel
cylinders – Part 1: Test pressure 6 MPa and below
Until further notice
6.2.2.1.9 The following standards apply to the design, construction and initial inspection and test of non-refillable
UN cylinders except that the inspection requirements related to the conformity assessment system and
approval shall be in accordance with 6.2.2.5.
Reference Title Applicable for
Manufacture
ISO 11118:1999 Gas cylinders – Non-refillable metallic gas cylinders
– Specification and test methods
Until 31 December
2020
ISO 13340:2001 Transportable gas cylinders – Cylinder valves for
non-refillable cylinders – Specification and prototype
testing
Until 31 December
2020
ISO 11118:2015 Gas cylinders – Non-refillable metallic gas cylinders
– Specification and test methods
Until 31 December
2026
ISO 11118:2015
+Amd.1:2019
Gas cylinders – Non-refillable metallic gas cylinders –
Specification and test methods
Until further notice
– 324 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 325 –
6.2.2.2 Materials
In addition to the material requirements specified in the design and construction standards, and any
restrictions specified in the applicable packing instruction for the gas(es) to be carried (e.g. packing
instruction P200 or P205 of 4.1.4.1), the following standards apply to material compatibility:
Reference Title
ISO 11114-1:2012 +
A1:2017
Gas cylinders – Compatibility of cylinder and valve materials with gas
contents – Part 1: Metallic materials
ISO 11114-2:2013 Gas cylinders – Compatibility of cylinder and valve materials with gas
contents – Part 2: Non-metallic materials
6.2.2.3 Closures and their protection
The following standards apply to the design, construction, and initial inspection and test of closures and
their protection:
Reference Title Applicable for
manufacture
ISO 11117:1998 Gas cylinders – Valve protection caps and valve guards
for industrial and medical gas cylinders – Design,
construction and tests
Until 31
December 2014
ISO 11117:2008 +
Cor 1:2009
Gas cylinders − Valve protection caps and valve guards
− Design, construction and tests
Until 31
December 2026
ISO 11117:2019 Gas cylinders – Valve protection caps and guards –
Design, construction and tests
Until further
notice
ISO 10297:1999 Gas cylinders – Refillable gas cylinder valves –
Specification and type testing
Until 31
December 2008
ISO 10297:2006 Gas cylinders – Refillable gas cylinder valves –
Specification and type testing
Until 31
December 2020
ISO 10297:2014 Gas cylinders – Cylinder valves – Specification and
type testing
Until 31
December 2022
ISO 10297:2014 +
A1:2017
Gas cylinders – Cylinder valves – Specification and
type testing
Until further
notice
ISO 13340:2001 Transportable gas cylinders – Cylinder valves for non-
refillable cylinders – Specification and prototype
testing
Until 31
December 2020
ISO 14246:2014 Gas cylinders – Cylinder valves – Manufacturing tests
and examination
Until 31
December 2024
ISO 14246:2014 +
A1:2017
Gas cylinders – Cylinder valves – Manufacturing tests
and examinations
Until further
notice
ISO 17871:2015 Gas cylinders – Quick-release cylinders valves-
Specification and type testing
NOTE: This standard shall not be used for flammable
gases.
Until 31
December 2026
ISO 17871:2020 Gas cylinders – Quick-release cylinder valves –
Specification and type testing.
Until further
notice
ISO 17879:2017 Gas cylinders – Self-closing cylinder valves –
Specification and type testing
NOTE: This standard shall not be applied to self-
closing valves in acetylene cylinders.
Until further
notice
For UN metal hydride storage systems, the requirements specified in the following standard apply to
closures and their protection:
Reference Title Applicable for
manufacture
ISO 16111:2008 Transportable gas storage devices – Hydrogen absorbed
in reversible metal hydride
Until 31 December
2026
ISO 16111:2018 Transportable gas storage devices – Hydrogen absorbed
in reversible metal hydride
Until further notice
– 325 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 326 –
6.2.2.4 Periodic inspection and test
The following standards apply to the periodic inspection and testing of UN cylinders and their closures:
Reference Title Applicable
ISO 6406:2005 Periodic inspection and testing of seamless steel gas
cylinders
Until 31
December 2024
ISO 18119:2018 Gas cylinders – Seamless steel and seamless
aluminium-alloy gas cylinders and tubes – Periodic
inspection and testing
Until further
notice
ISO 10460:2005 Gas cylinders – Welded carbon-steel gas cylinders –
Periodic inspection and testing
NOTE: The repair of welds described in clause 12.1
of this standard shall not be permitted. Repairs
described in clause 12.2 require the approval of the
competent authority which approved the periodic
inspection and test body in accordance with 6.2.2.6.
Until 31
December 2024
ISO 10460:2018 Gas cylinders – Welded aluminium-alloy, carbon and
stainless steel gas cylinders – Periodic inspection and
testing.
Until further
notice
ISO 10461:2005 +
A1:2006
Seamless aluminium-alloy gas cylinders – Periodic
inspection and testing
Until 31
December 2024
ISO 10462:2013 Gas cylinders – Acetylene cylinders – Periodic
inspection and maintenance
Until 31
December 2024
ISO 10462:2013 +
Amd1:2019
Gas cylinders – Acetylene cylinders – Periodic
inspection and maintenance
Until further
notice
ISO 11513:2011 Gas cylinders – Refillable welded steel cylinders
containing materials for sub-atmospheric gas
packaging (excluding acetylene) – Design,
construction, testing, use and periodic inspection
Until 31
December 2024
ISO 11513:2019 Gas cylinders – Refillable welded steel cylinders
containing materials for sub-atmospheric gas
packaging (excluding acetylene) – Design,
construction, testing, use and periodic inspection
Until further
notice
ISO 11623:2015 Gas cylinders – Composite construction – Periodic
inspection and testing
Until further
notice
ISO 22434:2006 Transportable gas cylinders – Inspection and
maintenance of cylinder valves
NOTE: These requirements may be met at times other
than at the periodic inspection and test of UN cylinders
Until further
notice
ISO 20475:2018 Gas cylinders – Cylinder bundles – Periodic inspection
and testing
Until further
notice
ISO 23088:2020 Gas cylinders – Periodic inspection and testing of
welded steel pressure drums — Capacities up to 1 000 l
Until further
notice
The following standard applies to the periodic inspection and testing of UN metal hydride storage
systems:
Reference Title Applicable
ISO 16111:2008 Transportable gas storage devices – Hydrogen
absorbed in reversible metal hydride
Until 31
December 2024
ISO 16111:2018 Transportable gas storage devices – Hydrogen
absorbed in reversible metal hydride
Until further
notice
– 326 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 327 –
6.2.2.5 Conformity assessment system and approval for manufacture of pressure receptacles
6.2.2.5.0 Definitions
For the purposes of this sub-section:
Conformity assessment system means a system for competent authority approval of a manufacturer, by
pressure receptacle design type approval, approval of manufacturer’s quality system and approval of
inspection bodies;
Design type means a pressure receptacle design as specified by a particular pressure receptacle standard;
Verify means confirm by examination or provision of objective evidence that specified requirements
have been fulfilled.
NOTE: In this subsection when separate assessment is used, the term pressure receptacle shall refer
to pressure receptacle, pressure receptacle shell, inner vessel of the closed cryogenic receptacle or
closure, as appropriate.
6.2.2.5.1 The requirements of 6.2.2.5 shall be used for the conformity assessments of pressure receptacles.
Paragraph 6.2.1.4.4 gives details of which parts of pressure receptacles may be conformity assessed
separately. However, the requirements of 6.2.2.5 may be replaced by requirements specified by the
competent authority in the following cases:
(a) Conformity assessment of closures;
(b) Conformity assessment of the complete assembly of bundles of cylinders provided the cylinder
shells have been conformity assessed in accordance with the requirements of 6.2.2.5; and
(c) Conformity assessment of the complete assembly of closed cryogenic receptacles provided the
inner vessel has been conformity assessed in accordance with the requirements of 6.2.2.5.
6.2.2.5.2 General requirements
Competent authority
6.2.2.5.2.1 The competent authority that approves the pressure receptacle shall approve the conformity assessment
system for the purpose of ensuring that pressure receptacles conform to the requirements of ADR. In
instances where the competent authority that approves a pressure receptacle is not the competent
authority in the country of manufacture, the marks of the approval country and the country of
manufacture shall be indicated in the pressure receptacle marks (see 6.2.2.7 and 6.2.2.8).
The competent authority of the country of approval shall supply, upon request, evidence demonstrating
compliance to this conformity assessment system to its counterpart in a country of use.
6.2.2.5.2.2 The competent authority may delegate its functions in this conformity assessment system in whole or
in part.
6.2.2.5.2.3 The competent authority shall ensure that a current list of approved inspection bodies and their identity
marks and approved manufacturers and their identity marks is available.
Inspection body
6.2.2.5.2.4 The inspection body shall be approved by the competent authority for the inspection of pressure
receptacles and shall:
(a) Have a staff with an organizational structure, capable, trained, competent, and skilled, to
satisfactorily perform its technical functions;
(b) Have access to suitable and adequate facilities and equipment;
(c) Operate in an impartial manner and be free from any influence which could prevent it from
doing so;
(d) Ensure commercial confidentiality of the commercial and proprietary activities of the
manufacturer and other bodies;
– 327 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 328 –
(e) Maintain clear demarcation between actual inspection body functions and unrelated functions;
(f) Operate a documented quality system;
(g) Ensure that the tests and inspections specified in the relevant pressure receptacle standard and
ADR are performed; and
(h) Maintain an effective and appropriate report and record system in accordance with 6.2.2.5.6.
6.2.2.5.2.5 The inspection body shall perform design type approval, pressure receptacle production testing and
inspection, and certification to verify conformity with the relevant pressure receptacle standard
(see 6.2.2.5.4 and 6.2.2.5.5).
Manufacturer
6.2.2.5.2.6 The manufacturer shall:
(a) Operate a documented quality system in accordance with 6.2.2.5.3;
(b) Apply for design type approvals in accordance with 6.2.2.5.4;
(c) Select an inspection body from the list of approved inspection bodies maintained by the
competent authority in the country of approval; and
(d) Maintain records in accordance with 6.2.2.5.6.
Testing laboratory
6.2.2.5.2.7 The testing laboratory shall have:
(a) Staff with an organizational structure, sufficient in number, competence, and skill; and
(b) Suitable and adequate facilities and equipment to perform the tests required by the
manufacturing standard to the satisfaction of the inspection body.
6.2.2.5.3 Manufacturer’s quality system
6.2.2.5.3.1 The quality system shall contain all the elements, requirements, and provisions adopted by the
manufacturer. It shall be documented in a systematic and orderly manner in the form of written policies,
procedures and instructions.
The contents shall in particular include adequate descriptions of:
(a) The organizational structure and responsibilities of personnel with regard to design and product
quality;
(b) The design control and design verification techniques, processes, and procedures that will be
used when designing the pressure receptacles;
(c) The relevant pressure receptacle manufacturing, quality control, quality assurance and process
operation instructions that will be used;
(d) Quality records, such as inspection reports, test data and calibration data;
(e) Management reviews to ensure the effective operation of the quality system arising from the
audits in accordance with 6.2.2.5.3.2;
(f) The process describing how customer requirements are met;
(g) The process for control of documents and their revision;
(h) The means for control of non-conforming pressure receptacles, purchased components, in-
process and final materials; and
(i) Training programmes and qualification procedures for relevant personnel.
– 328 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 329 –
6.2.2.5.3.2 Audit of the quality system
The quality system shall be initially assessed to determine whether it meets the requirements in
6.2.2.5.3.1 to the satisfaction of the competent authority.
The manufacturer shall be notified of the results of the audit. The notification shall contain the
conclusions of the audit and any corrective actions required.
Periodic audits shall be carried out, to the satisfaction of the competent authority, to ensure that the
manufacturer maintains and applies the quality system. Reports of the periodic audits shall be provided
to the manufacturer.
6.2.2.5.3.3 Maintenance of the quality system
The manufacturer shall maintain the quality system as approved in order that it remains adequate and
efficient.
The manufacturer shall notify the competent authority that approved the quality system, of any intended
changes. The proposed changes shall be evaluated in order to determine whether the amended quality
system will still satisfy the requirements in 6.2.2.5.3.1.
6.2.2.5.4 Approval process
Initial design type approval
6.2.2.5.4.1 The initial design type approval shall consist of approval of the manufacturer’s quality system and
approval of the pressure receptacle design to be produced. An application for an initial design type
approval shall meet the requirements of 6.2.2.5.4.2 to 6.2.2.5.4.6 and 6.2.2.5.4.9.
6.2.2.5.4.2 A manufacturer desiring to produce pressure receptacles in accordance with a pressure receptacle
standard and ADR shall apply for, obtain, and retain a design type approval certificate issued by the
competent authority in the country of approval for at least one pressure receptacle design type in
accordance with the procedure given in 6.2.2.5.4.9. This certificate shall, on request, be submitted to
the competent authority of the country of use.
6.2.2.5.4.3 An application shall be made for each manufacturing facility and shall include:
(a) The name and registered address of the manufacturer and in addition, if the application is
submitted by an authorised representative, its name and address;
(b) The address of the manufacturing facility (if different from the above);
(c) The name and title of the person(s) responsible for the quality system;
(d) The designation of the pressure receptacle and the relevant pressure receptacle standard;
(e) Details of any refusal of approval of a similar application by any other competent authority;
(f) The identity of the inspection body for design type approval;
(g) Documentation on the manufacturing facility as specified under 6.2.2.5.3.1; and
(h) The technical documentation required for design type approval, which shall enable verification
of the conformity of the pressure receptacles with the requirements of the relevant pressure
receptacle design standard. The technical documentation shall cover the design and method of
manufacture and shall contain, as far as is relevant for assessment, at least the following:
(i) pressure receptacle design standard, design and manufacturing drawings, showing
components and subassemblies, if any;
(ii) descriptions and explanations necessary for the understanding of the drawings and
intended use of the pressure receptacles;
(iii) a list of the standards necessary to fully define the manufacturing process;
(iv) design calculations and material specifications; and
– 329 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 330 –
(v) design type approval test reports, describing the results of examinations and tests
carried out in accordance with 6.2.2.5.4.9.
6.2.2.5.4.4 An initial audit in accordance with 6.2.2.5.3.2 shall be performed to the satisfaction of the competent
authority.
6.2.2.5.4.5 If the manufacturer is denied approval, the competent authority shall provide written detailed reasons
for such denial.
6.2.2.5.4.6 Following approval, changes to the information submitted under 6.2.2.5.4.3 relating to the initial
approval shall be provided to the competent authority.
Subsequent design type approvals
6.2.2.5.4.7 An application for a subsequent design type approval shall meet the requirements of 6.2.2.5.4.8 and
6.2.2.5.4.9, provided a manufacturer is in the possession of an initial design type approval. In such a
case, the manufacturer’s quality system according to 6.2.2.5.3 shall have been approved during the initial
design type approval and shall be applicable for the new design.
6.2.2.5.4.8 The application shall include:
(a) The name and address of the manufacturer and in addition, if the application is submitted by
an authorised representative, its name and address;
(b) Details of any refusal of approval of a similar application by any other competent authority;
(c) Evidence that initial design type approval has been granted; and
(d) The technical documentation, as described in 6.2.2.5.4.3 (h).
Procedure for design type approval
6.2.2.5.4.9 The inspection body shall:
(a) Examine the technical documentation to verify that:
(i) the design is in accordance with the relevant provisions of the standard, and
(ii) the prototype lot has been manufactured in conformity with the technical
documentation and is representative of the design;
(b) Verify that the production inspections have been carried out as required in accordance with
6.2.2.5.5;
(c) As required by the pressure receptacle standard or technical code, carry out or supervise the
tests of pressure receptacles as required for design type approval;
(d) Perform or have performed the examinations and tests specified in the pressure receptacle
standard to determine that:
(i) the standard has been applied and fulfilled, and
(ii) the procedures adopted by the manufacturer meet the requirements of the standard;
and
(e) Ensure that the various type approval examinations and tests are correctly and competently
carried out.
After prototype testing has been carried out with satisfactory results and all applicable requirements of
6.2.2.5.4 have been satisfied, a design type approval certificate shall be issued, which shall include the
name and address of the manufacturer, results and conclusions of the examination, and the necessary
data for identification of the design type. If it was not possible to evaluate exhaustively the compatibility
of the materials of construction with the contents of the pressure receptacle when the certificate was
issued, a statement that compatibility assessment was not completed shall be included in the design type
approval certificate.
– 330 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 331 –
If the manufacturer is denied a design type approval, the competent authority shall provide written
detailed reasons for such denial.
6.2.2.5.4.10 Modifications to approved design types
The manufacturer shall either:
(a) Inform the issuing competent authority of modifications to the approved design type, where
such modifications do not constitute a new design, as specified in the pressure receptacle
standard; or
(b) Request a subsequent design type approval where such modifications constitute a new design
according to the relevant pressure receptacle standard. This additional approval shall be given
in the form of an amendment to the original design type approval certificate.
6.2.2.5.4.11 Upon request, the competent authority shall communicate to any other competent authority, information
concerning design type approval, modifications of approvals and withdrawn approvals.
6.2.2.5.5 Production inspection and certification
General requirements
An inspection body, or its delegate, shall carry out the inspection and certification of each pressure
receptacle. The inspection body selected by the manufacturer for inspection and testing during
production may be different from the inspection body used for the design type approval testing.
Where it can be demonstrated to the satisfaction of the inspection body that the manufacturer has trained
competent inspectors, independent of the manufacturing operations, inspection may be performed by
those inspectors. In such a case, the manufacturer shall maintain training records of the inspectors.
The inspection body shall verify that the inspections by the manufacturer, and tests performed on those
pressure receptacles, fully conform to the standard and the requirements of ADR. Should non-
conformance in conjunction with this inspection and testing be determined, the permission to have
inspection performed by the manufacturer’s inspectors may be withdrawn.
The manufacturer shall, after approval by the inspection body, make a declaration of conformity with
the certified design type. The application of the pressure receptacle certification marks shall be
considered a declaration that the pressure receptacle complies with the applicable pressure receptacle
standards and the requirements of this conformity assessment system and ADR. The inspection body
shall affix or delegate the manufacturer to affix the pressure receptacle certification marks and the
registered mark of the inspection body to each approved pressure receptacle.
A certificate of compliance, signed by the inspection body and the manufacturer, shall be issued before
the pressure receptacles are filled.
6.2.2.5.6 Records
Design type approval and certificate of compliance records shall be retained by the manufacturer and
the inspection body for not less than 20 years.
6.2.2.6 Approval system for periodic inspection and test of pressure receptacles
6.2.2.6.1 Definition
For the purposes of this section:
Approval system means a system for competent authority approval of a body performing periodic
inspection and test of pressure receptacles (hereinafter referred to as “periodic inspection and test
body”), including approval of that body’s quality system.
6.2.2.6.2 General requirements
Competent authority
6.2.2.6.2.1 The competent authority shall establish an approval system for the purpose of ensuring that the periodic
inspection and test of pressure receptacles conform to the requirements of ADR. In instances where the
– 331 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 332 –
competent authority that approves a body performing periodic inspection and test of a pressure
receptacle is not the competent authority of the country approving the manufacture of the pressure
receptacle, the marks of the approval country of periodic inspection and test shall be indicated in the
pressure receptacle marks (see 6.2.2.7).
The competent authority of the country of approval for the periodic inspection and test shall supply,
upon request, evidence demonstrating compliance to this approval system including the records of the
periodic inspection and test to its counterpart in a country of use.
The competent authority of the country of approval may terminate the approval certificate referred to in
6.2.2.6.4.1, upon evidence demonstrating non-compliance with the approval system.
6.2.2.6.2.2 The competent authority may delegate its functions in this approval system, in whole or in part.
6.2.2.6.2.3 The competent authority shall ensure that a current list of approved periodic inspection and test bodies
and their identity marks is available.
Periodic inspection and test body
6.2.2.6.2.4 The periodic inspection and test body shall be approved by the competent authority and shall:
(a) Have a staff with an organizational structure, capable, trained, competent, and skilled, to
satisfactorily perform its technical functions;
(b) Have access to